Questions and answers
Common questions about taxes, accounting, audit and financial reporting in Uzbekistan, answered in plain English. Click a question to open the answer.
TaxOur supplier has tax arrears. The tax authority sent a reconciliation statement to our personal account and wants to collect that debt out of the money we owe the supplier. How much time do we have and what should we do?
You have 10 working days. This is the procedure of Article 121¹: an organization or individual entrepreneur with tax arrears may ask for them to be collected from its debtor. A debtor is a person who owes it money, in this case you (you owe the supplier). The article was introduced by Law No. ZRU-1108 and has applied since 1 January 2026.
Stages of the procedure:
| Stage | Deadline | What happens |
|---|---|---|
| 1. The supplier applies, attaching a reconciliation statement of mutual settlements | — | The statement may also be signed by one party only |
| 2. The tax authority sends you a notice (with copies of the statement and of the documents confirming the debt, to your personal account) | 3 working days | To sign it or to reject it |
| 3. You respond | 10 working days from the day the notice is received | You sign (confirm) the statement or give a reasoned refusal stating that there is no debt |
| 4. If the amount you acknowledge differs from the statement | 10 working days from the day the notice is received | You submit to the tax authority a statement showing the amount you acknowledge |
| 5. The tax authority issues a collection order | 3 working days | To your bank accounts, in an amount not exceeding either the amount of the tax arrears or the amount of the receivable |
The biggest risk is staying silent. If no reasoned refusal is given, or the notice is left unanswered, the receivable is considered acknowledged and consent to collection is considered given. A signed statement, for its part, is a basis for directing collection at you whether or not the creditor (the supplier) has signed. The same procedure applies where the tax authority itself identified your debt (from data it holds or from the results of an audit): the notice is sent to you and to the supplier within 3 working days of the day the debt is identified; you and the supplier have 10 working days from receipt of the notice to confirm it or to give a reasoned refusal.
Cases where collection is not directed at you (the full list under the article, seven items). Here the "debtor" is you: 1. You have given a reasoned refusal of the amount of the debt. 2. The limitation period has expired. 3. A court act on this very amount to be collected from you is with the compulsory enforcement body; or the period for presenting it for enforcement has expired; or enforcement actions have been suspended, terminated or postponed, or are being carried out in instalments. 4. The debtor is not a taxpayer of the Republic of Uzbekistan. 5. The debtor is an individual. 6. The debtor is in liquidation, or insolvency proceedings have been opened against it. 7. The debtor's activity has been terminated or it has been removed from the state register of legal entities.
If you have already paid the supplier, submit documents proving it (the payment order, a bank statement): the tax authority then withdraws the collection order without execution within 3 working days at the latest. A court decision produces the same result. Execution of the collection order, collection, or withdrawal without execution is carried out under the procedure of Article 121.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Tolmas savdo" LLC owes "Bahor metall" LLC 45 million soums. "Bahor metall" has tax arrears of 30 million soums. The collection limit is the smaller of the two amounts: 30 million soums. With other ratios:
| Tax arrears | Receivable | Collection limit |
|---|---|---|
| 30 mln | 45 mln | 30 mln |
| 45 mln | 45 mln | 45 mln |
| 60 mln | 45 mln | 45 mln |
Accounting: when the money is debited from the bank account and you and the supplier acknowledge the debt for that amount as settled, the entry is: Dt 6010 – Ct 5110 (content of the line: settlement of debt to suppliers; NAS No. 21, paragraph 226, line 15). The standard's examples have no ready-made line for the entry on the supplier's side, so it is not given here. Whether your debt under the contract is legally reduced by this amount lies outside this article: confirm it with your contract lawyer.
Practical tip: appoint someone responsible for checking the personal account every day. The response deadline (10 working days) runs from the day the notice is received.
Source: Tax Code, Article 121¹; NAS No. 21, paragraph 226.
See also: Tax arrears · Accounts receivable · Taxpayer's personal account (online cabinet)
AccountingOur bakery workshop sells its products to employees and we withhold the money from their next salary. Which account holds the employee's debt: 4710 or 4790? How are the sale and the withholding recorded?
NAS No. 21 provides four accounts in group 4700 for employee debts, two of which are close to your situation:
| Account | What for (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|
| 4710 Employees' debt for goods sold on credit | Settlements for goods issued to employees on credit (paragraph 200) |
| 4720 Employees' debt for loans granted | Cash loans (paragraph 201) |
| 4730 Employees' debt for compensation of material damage | Shortages, theft, losses from spoilage (paragraph 202) |
| 4790 Other employee debts | Settlements not reflected on 4710–4730 (paragraph 205) |
The official text itself points to two paths: - In the table of examples for income accounts (paragraph 383, line 3), the sale of products to an employee is shown as Dt 4790 – Ct 9010, 9020, 9030 (this line covers sales to an employee, including the sale of special clothing). - Account 4710 is intended for goods sold "on credit"; its withholding entry is separate: Dt 6710 – Ct 4710 (paragraph 290, line 15).
Accordingly: an ordinary sale to an employee goes to 4790; a sale "on credit" paid in instalments on a schedule goes to 4710. The standard does not give a clear boundary between the two cases (for example, how many days of deferral count as "credit"). So write in your accounting policy which one you use and apply it consistently.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Nafis pishiriq" LLC sold employee Sardor a box of pastries: selling price 300,000 soums, cost 210,000 soums. The company is taken as not a VAT payer (if it is a VAT payer, VAT is added to the sale entries; its rules are not the subject of this answer). Sardor's accrued salary for the month is 2,400,000 soums.
| No. | Transaction | Debit | Credit | Amount, soums | Source |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Products sold to the employee | 4790 | 9010 | 300,000 | paragraph 383, line 3 |
| 2 | Cost of products sold written off | 9110 | 2810 | 210,000 | paragraph 390, line 1 |
| 3 | Value of the products withheld from salary | 6710 | 4790 | 300,000 | paragraph 290, line 11 |
At the end of the month the balance on 4790 for Sardor is 0. Profit: 300,000 − 210,000 = 90,000 soums (the difference between sales income and cost). The part of the salary paid to Sardor will be 300,000 soums less than the accrued amount before the withholding.
Two notes: 1. Analytical accounting of settlements with employees is kept per employee (end of paragraph 205). That is, 4790 must have a separate card such as "Sardor", "Madina". 2. How much may be withheld from salary and the legal procedure for it are set by labour legislation; this answer does not cover it, so check with a lawyer.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 200, 205, 290 (lines 11 and 15), 383 (line 3) and 390.
See also: Wages (salary) · Cost (cost of production)
AuditTo assess the allowance for receivables, the auditor took an "accounts receivable ageing" report produced from our software. But the auditor does not trust the report and is checking further. Isn't a report from the software evidence too?
It is evidence, but the auditor cannot accept it as "ready truth". ISA 500 ("Audit Evidence") requires the auditor, when using information produced by the entity, to evaluate whether it is sufficiently reliable for the auditor's purposes. For this, where necessary:
- Audit evidence is obtained about the completeness and accuracy of the information.
- The auditor evaluates whether the information is sufficiently precise and detailed for the auditor's purposes.
The reason is simple: who configured the software report, which date was used as the basis, which documents were not entered — none of this is visible in the report itself. If the report is wrong, a conclusion drawn from it is wrong too.
In practice the auditor usually looks for answers to three questions:
| Question | What the auditor does | In our example |
|---|---|---|
| Is it complete? (did all debts get in) | Compares the report total with the general ledger balance | Report total 598 mln, account 4010 balance 612 mln: the difference of 14 million soums must be explained |
| Is it accurate? (is each line correct) | For selected lines, recalculates from the source document (invoice date, amount) | The "debt age" is recalculated from the dates of 5 invoices |
| Is it detailed enough? | Checks whether the report gives a grouping suited to the purpose | For the allowance, groups by debt age are needed; a single overall total is not enough |
Recalculation example (compiled by the author; report date 31 December 2026, age = days elapsed since the invoice date):
| Invoice | Date | Amount, mln soums | Actual age, days | Group in the software |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| A-101 | 14 June | 48.0 | 200 | 181–365 days |
| A-114 | 2 August | 36.0 | 151 | 91–180 days |
| A-127 | 20 September | 52.5 | 102 | 91–180 days |
| A-133 | 5 November | 30.0 | 56 | 31–90 days |
| A-140 | 12 December | 41.5 | 19 | 0–30 days |
All five invoices match the groups in the software. So, as to accuracy, no discrepancy was found in this sample. But as to completeness, the difference of 14 million soums remained open: it may be either invoices that did not get into the report or other entries in the general ledger (for example, an advance or a correcting entry). Until this difference is explained, the report cannot be considered fully reliable for calculating the allowance.
What you can do: - Reconcile the report with the general ledger yourself before the auditor's request and record the difference. - Show the auditor on which date and with which filters the report was produced (software settings, date of generation). - Allow the auditor to regenerate the file from the software in front of them or with their own access. This increases confidence that the file was not edited afterwards.
This is not disrespect towards you on the auditor's part, but a requirement of the standard. With good controls the auditor may reduce the scope of testing; with weak controls the auditor will increase it.
Source: ISA 500 ("Audit Evidence"): the requirement on using information produced by the entity.
See also: Audit evidence · Accounts receivable
Financial reportingMay we show amounts in the financial statements rounded to thousands of soums rather than in soums? What do we do if, after rounding, the sum of the lines does not match the total?
NAS No. 1 allows this with a limitation. Under paragraph 36, when rounding information to thousands or millions, a degree of precision that does not breach the materiality principle may be used. That is, rounding itself is not an error, but a difference that affects the user's decision must not disappear.
Related rules: - Paragraph 55: the statements must state openly in which currency they are measured and with what degree of precision the numbers are given (for example, in thousands or in millions). That is, the label "in thousands of soums" must be clearly visible in the statements (for example, in the table heading). - Paragraph 35: if material information is combined with other material information in one item, it must be disclosed in the notes to the statements. That is, rounding and aggregation must not hide material data. - Paragraph 32: information is material if its omission or misstatement affects the user's economic decision.
Example (compiled by the author). Assets in the balance sheet of "Zarafshon pishiriq" LLC (in soums):
| Item | In soums | Rounded to thousands of soums |
|---|---|---|
| Fixed assets (carrying amount) | 48,349,600 | 48,350 |
| Inventories | 21,649,600 | 21,650 |
| Accounts receivable | 9,449,600 | 9,450 |
| Cash | 5,010,480 | 5,010 |
| Total (in soums) | 84,459,280 | 84,459 |
If you round the lines separately and add them: 48,350 + 21,650 + 9,450 + 5,010 = 84,460; if you round the total itself — 84,459. The difference is 1 thousand soums. It is not a calculation error but the mathematical result of rounding: three lines were rounded up and one down.
What can be done: 1. If you calculate the total line from the exact amount in soums and round it, the total is correct, but the sum of the visible lines differs by 1. 2. If you round the lines and take the total as their sum, everything inside the table agrees, but the total differs from the exact amount by 1. 3. Whichever way you choose, apply it consistently and add a note to the statements.
The text of NAS No. 1 has no separate rule for this difference. So the three steps above are not from the standard but a practical recommendation: the main thing is that the difference is small, immaterial, and that the degree of precision is stated openly in the heading of the statements.
One more risk: very small lines. For example, if "other assets" are 412 soums, rounding to thousands of soums gives 0. If this is immaterial, it is acceptable (practical recommendation). But if the line is material, do not turn it into zero.
If the form or system to which the statements are submitted requires its own unit of measure, follow that requirement: this answer only explains the general rule of NAS No. 1.
Source: NAS No. 1, paragraphs 32, 35, 36 and 55.
See also: Materiality · Financial statements
FinanceWe want to take a loan of 240 million soums and buy equipment. Can our monthly cash flow cover the loan payment? Banks talk about a "debt service coverage ratio" — what is it?
This ratio is called DSCR (debt service coverage ratio), after its English abbreviation. The idea is simple: how many times the monthly cash flow before loan payments exceeds one monthly loan payment (principal + interest).
DSCR = cash flow before loan payments ÷ loan payment for the same period (principal + interest).
If below 1, the payment is larger than the cash flow; if close to 1, there is no reserve and even a small fluctuation breaks the payment. What threshold a bank will require depends on the contract and the bank; ask the bank itself (it is not given here as a rule).
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical). The "Yangi non" bakery takes a loan of 240 million soums: 36 months, 24% annual nominal rate (2% per month), equal payments (annuity). The monthly payment formula:
payment = amount × i ÷ (1 − (1 + i)^−n), where i = 0.02, n = 36.
Calculation (checked with Python): payment ≈ 9.416 million soums. Over 36 months a total of ≈ 338.97 million soums is paid, that is, interest ≈ 98.97 million soums. In the first month 4.8 million soums of the payment is interest (240 × 0.02), the rest is principal.
Before the loan payment the bakery generates an average of 13.0 million soums of net cash flow per month (including the additional cash from the equipment). Then:
DSCR = 13.0 ÷ 9.416 ≈ 1.38.
After the payment 13.0 − 9.416 ≈ 3.58 million soums per month remains. Now the "what if" questions:
| Scenario | Monthly cash flow, mln | DSCR | Left after the payment, mln |
|---|---|---|---|
| Plan | 13.0 | 1.38 | 3.58 |
| Cash flow falls 10% | 11.7 | 1.24 | 2.28 |
| Cash flow falls 20% | 10.4 | 1.10 | 0.98 |
| Cash flow falls 27.6% | 9.416 | 1.00 | 0 |
So this bakery can cover the payment until cash flow falls by about 27.6%. That is its "safety margin". You need this figure before the bank does: could you pay in a month when revenue is 20% below plan?
A reverse calculation is useful too. If you want a DSCR of at least 1.25 for yourself (this is not a bank requirement but your own personal reserve rule), the largest payment is 13.0 ÷ 1.25 = 10.4 million soums. Such a payment over 36 months at 2% per month corresponds to a loan of ≈ 265 million soums. So 240 million soums fits within the reserve you set yourself.
Note: take not profit but cash flow itself: add back expenses that do not involve cash outflow, such as depreciation, but deduct taxes and other mandatory payments. For a seasonal business, look at the worst month too.
Source: general financial calculation formulas (annuity payment, debt service coverage ratio). The example was compiled by the author.
See also: Annuity repayment · Cash flow
InsuranceOur cafe's property insurance will cover the building and equipment in a fire. But if repairs take three to five months, we need money for rent and salaries in the meantime. Is there a type of insurance that covers this?
Yes, this insurance is called business interruption insurance (loss of profit insurance). Property insurance covers only the building, equipment and goods. The lost profit and the continuing fixed costs for the months when the cafe is closed are covered by a separate policy. This is general insurance practice; the exact terms are written in the insurer's policy and rules.
Remember three things about this insurance:
- It is usually tied to damage to property: property must first have been damaged, that is, an insured event must have occurred. It does not pay simply because "customers did not come" (read the exact condition in the policy).
- What it covers is defined in the policy. Usually lost profit and continuing costs are meant; variable costs (such as raw materials) are not covered because they are saved when operations stop. The insurance concept of "gross profit" may not be the same as an accountant's gross profit: read the definition in the policy.
- The indemnity period is limited. This period (the longest period the insurer pays for) is set in the policy. If the cafe stays closed longer, the remaining months are not covered.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical). Monthly figures of "Bahor cafe":
| Item | Per month, mln soums |
|---|---|
| Revenue | 90 |
| Variable costs (ingredients, packaging) — 60% of revenue | 54 |
| Fixed costs | 28 |
| of which continuing even while closed (rent 12, fixed salaries 10, minimum part of utilities 2) | 24 |
| of which stopping while closed (hourly workers, etc.) | 4 |
| Net profit | 90 − 54 − 28 = 8 |
After the fire the cafe stays closed for 3 months. The actual loss: - revenue is lost: 90 × 3 = 270 million; - variable costs saved: 54 × 3 = 162 million; - fixed costs saved: 4 × 3 = 12 million; - net loss: 270 − 162 − 12 = 96 million soums. In other words, 32 million soums per month: 8 million of profit and 24 million of continuing fixed costs.
If the policy's indemnity period is 3 months, these 96 million soums may be reimbursed (the exact calculation depends on the policy formula). But if rebuilding takes 5 months, the loss of the remaining 2 months, 64 million soums, stays outside the insurance. So do not choose an indemnity period shorter than the real recovery time: take into account the time for permits, repairs and delivery of equipment.
When choosing a policy, ask: how long is the indemnity period; how is gross profit calculated; is it paid even if the property damage is not insured; are losses from a supplier or power supply interruption covered.
Source: general insurance practice (business interruption insurance, indemnity period, the concept of gross profit). The exact terms are written in the policy text. The calculations were compiled and checked by the author.
See also: Insurance policy · Insured event
BankingAnother bank offers a loan at 24% per year, while our current loan is at 28%. Is it worth closing the old one and taking the new one? How do we calculate it?
Comparing rates alone is not enough. Closing the old loan and taking a new one (loan refinancing) also involves a fee and early repayment costs. The right question: in how many months will the savings on the rate cover these costs?
Calculation steps: 1. Calculate the remaining balance of the old loan and the total amount to be paid over the remaining term. 2. Calculate the total amount to be paid on the new loan over the same term. 3. Deduct the one-time costs (loan fee, early repayment charge, valuation, insurance and others) from the difference between the two. 4. One-time costs ÷ savings in the monthly payment = payback period.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical). The old loan of "Korasuv non" LLC: balance 150 million soums, remaining term 12 months, 28% per year, equal payments (annuity). The new bank: 24% per year, 12 months, annuity; loan origination fee — 1.5% of 150 million soums. The old bank charges 1 million soums for early repayment (hypothetical). The calculation, checked with Python:
| Indicator | Old loan | New loan |
|---|---|---|
| Monthly payment | ≈ 14.476 mln | ≈ 14.184 mln |
| Total payments over 12 months | ≈ 173.71 mln | ≈ 170.21 mln |
| Of which interest | ≈ 23.71 mln | ≈ 20.21 mln |
Savings on interest: 173.71 − 170.21 ≈ 3.50 million soums (≈ 0.292 million per month). One-time costs: 150 × 0.015 + 1.0 = 3.25 million soums. Net savings: 3.50 − 3.25 ≈ 0.25 million soums. Payback period: 3.25 ÷ 0.292 ≈ 11.1 months, that is, almost the whole term goes to these costs.
Conclusion: even though a 4 percentage point difference looks large, with a short remaining term the savings are eaten up by the costs. If the remaining term is long or the fee is low, the result is different: for example, with no fee and if the old bank charged no penalty, the savings would be 3.50 million soums. So calculate each offer separately.
Accounting entries (NAS No. 21, paragraph 296): the new loan is received — Dt 5110 – Ct 6810 (line 1 "Receipt of short-term loans and borrowings"); the old loan is repaid (the old loan is also taken as short-term) — Dt 6810 – Ct 5110 (line 4 "Repayment of short-term loans and borrowings"). Under paragraph 291 of NAS No. 21, account 6810 is for short-term loans (up to 12 months); since the new loan term is 12 months, this account was used in the example. A loan with a longer term is kept on the long-term loans account. The accounting for the fee and the early repayment charge depends on the content of the contract and is not covered here.
Note: the simple calculation does not take the time value of money into account. In real life, read in the contract the payment schedules of both banks, the interest calculation method (daily on the balance, year of 360 or 365 days) and additional terms (covenants, collateral). When comparing rates, add up all payments rather than looking only at the "annual percentage".
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 291 and 296 (lines 1 and 4 in paragraph 296); annuity payment formula (general financial calculation). The example was compiled by the author.
See also: Annuity repayment · Interest expense
StatisticsWe asked customers to "rate our service from 1 to 5". The average score came out at 3.55. Is this the right indicator, or should the ratings be summarized differently?
The average score is useful, but not sufficient on its own. The reason is that a rating from 1 to 5 is an ordinal scale: you can say 5 is better than 4 and 4 is better than 3. But there is no guarantee that the "distance" between 4 and 5 equals the distance between 1 and 2. And the mean relies precisely on this "equality of distances".
Moreover, the mean hides the distribution. For the two branches below the same mean of 3.0 comes out:
| Branch | Ratings (20 customers) | Mean | Median | Gave 4–5 | Gave 1–2 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| "A" | all 3 | 3.0 | 3 | 0% | 0% |
| "B" | 10 scores of 5 and 10 scores of 1 | 3.0 | 3 | 50% | 50% |
Both have a mean of 3.0, but reality is entirely different: in branch "A" everyone says "average", in "B" half are very satisfied and half very dissatisfied. In "B" the median also comes out as 3 (the 10th value is 1, the 11th value is 5, the middle is 3), even though no customer actually gave a 3.
Your data (compiled by the author, 20 customers):
| Score | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | Total |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Number of customers | 2 | 3 | 3 | 6 | 6 | 20 |
| Share | 10% | 15% | 15% | 30% | 30% | 100% |
Calculation (checked with Python): mean = (1×2 + 2×3 + 3×3 + 4×6 + 5×6) ÷ 20 = 71 ÷ 20 = 3.55. Median = 4 (the 10th and 11th values are both 4). There are two modes: 4 and 5 (6 times each). Customers who gave 4–5 points: 12, that is, 60%. Those who gave 1–2 points: 5, that is, 25%.
If a report is written like this, it gives the manager more benefit: "60% of customers gave 4 or 5 points, 25% gave 1 or 2 points, median 4, mean 3.55". This is more precise than a single "3.55".
Rules: 1. Always show the distribution of scores (what percentage gave each score). 2. The median, as well as the share of the top two scores (4–5) and the share of the bottom two scores (1–2), are indicators suited to an ordinal scale. 3. Give the mean as a supplementary indicator, especially when comparing over time (last month 3.40, this month 3.55). But do not make it the sole basis when the number of customers is small. 4. Show customers who did not answer or said "cannot say" separately: do not add them to the mean as 0.
Source: general statistical rules (measurement scales, mean, median, mode). The data were compiled by the author.
See also: Median · Mode · Arithmetic mean
EconomicsIf the state levies a tax on sellers for each unit sold, won't the price rise anyway? Who "really" pays the tax: the seller or the buyer?
The tax is borne not by whoever remits it but by whichever of the two sides of the market is less able to adapt to the change. In economics this is called tax incidence. Who transfers the tax to the budget (the seller or the buyer) does not decide the real distribution of the burden.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical market). In the tea market the price is P (thousand soums), the quantity is Q (units): - demand: Qd = 85 − P; - supply: Qs = 10 + 2P.
Equilibrium without tax: 85 − P = 10 + 2P, hence P = 25, Q = 60.
Now sellers are taxed 6 thousand soums per unit. The seller receives 6 thousand less in hand, so the supply curve becomes: Qs = 10 + 2(P − 6) = 2P − 2. New equilibrium: 85 − P = 2P − 2, hence P = 29, Q = 56.
| Indicator | Without tax | With tax |
|---|---|---|
| Price the buyer pays | 25 | 29 (+4) |
| Price the seller receives in hand | 25 | 29 − 6 = 23 (−2) |
| Quantity sold | 60 | 56 |
| Budget revenue | 0 | 6 × 56 = 336 |
The result: - Of the 6 thousand soums of tax, the buyer bore 4 (2/3) and the seller 2 (1/3), even though the seller paid the tax. - If the tax were set to be paid by the buyer, the result would be the same: the buyer pays 29, the seller receives 23. - The market volume fell from 60 to 56. The 4 lost trades would have benefited both buyer and seller. This is the market's net loss (deadweight loss): 1/2 × 6 × 4 = 12 thousand soums in units.
Why did the buyer bear more? Because demand is less elastic than supply. Demand elasticity at the equilibrium point: |Ed| = 1 × 25 ÷ 60 ≈ 0.42, supply elasticity: Es = 2 × 25 ÷ 60 ≈ 0.83. The burden falls more on the side with lower elasticity: buyer's share = Es ÷ (Es + |Ed|) = 0.83 ÷ 1.25 = 2/3, which matches.
Practical conclusion: for a necessity such as tea, where the buyer cannot switch to something else (demand is inelastic), the tax is mostly passed into the price. For easily substitutable goods (the buyer switches to another good) the seller bears more of the burden and sales fall more. This is why, before changing a tax rate, the sensitivity of demand and supply to price is assessed.
This answer is a general model of economic theory, not about specific taxes and rates.
Source: general economic theory (demand and supply, elasticity, tax incidence). The example was compiled by the author, the calculation was checked with Python.
See also: Tax burden · Price elasticity of demand · Market equilibrium
Import and exportWe want to export fresh fruit abroad by truck. What documents should the driver bring to the border checkpoint, and is it mandatory to notify customs in advance?
The Customs Code answers this question in four articles: 17 (notification), 18 and 19 (documents and information to be presented) and 20 (checkpoints and time).
- Advance notification (Article 17, Parts Four and Five). When goods are taken out of the customs territory, the person moving them notifies the customs authority in advance of the intention to export. When and where the goods must be delivered for clearance is determined by the customs authority itself. If the notification is not made by the person moving the goods, this obligation falls on the carrier. When the border is crossed, notification is made by presenting the goods and their accompanying documents to the customs authority at the checkpoint. Customs authorities have no right to refuse to accept these documents (Part Six).
- Documents (Article 19). The carrier must present the customs declaration (or another document allowing release), as well as the documents and information provided for in Article 18, depending on the type of transport. For international road transport, under Article 18 these are:
A) Relating to the motor vehicle: - the vehicle registration certificate under the Vienna Convention (1968); - in cases provided for by international treaties, a permit from the authorized body for a foreign vehicle; - if the cargo is carried under a TIR carnet, a certificate of approval for transport under customs seals and stamps; - when carrying perishable products, a certificate of approval of the vehicle for carrying such products (fresh fruit is usually considered perishable; determine in advance whether your cargo falls into this category and whether the document is needed); - when carrying dangerous goods, the relevant certificate.
B) Relating to the goods: - the consignment note under the Geneva Convention (1956); - if a TIR carnet is used, that carnet; - commercial documents.
C) These documents must show the following information: the name and postal address of the carrier; the place (country) where the goods are taken over and delivered; the names of the country of dispatch and the country of destination; the name and address of the consignor and consignee; the name of the goods under the Harmonized System and a code of at least six digits; for each code, gross weight (kg) and invoice value; the number of packages; container identification numbers.
These documents are presented in the state language or in other languages used in international transport; if in another language, they are translated into the state language where necessary, and the translation must be certified by the carrier (Article 18, Part Two; Article 19 refers to the documents of Article 18, so it is safer to prepare documents in the appropriate language on departure too).
- Place and time (Article 20). Goods are moved across the customs border only at checkpoints, with the vehicle stopped in a specially designated place and during the working hours of the customs authorities. If this requirement is breached, customs authorities forcibly stop the vehicle. The working hours and stopping places must be announced in the established manner (customs authorities must provide publicly available information on this). The vehicle departs from the designated place after the necessary customs procedures are completed.
Example (compiled by the author; codes hypothetical). "Vodiy mevasi" LLC wants to send three kinds of fresh fruit in one truck. According to the consignment note and invoice:
| Goods | Code (hypothetical) | Gross, kg | Invoice value, US dollars |
|---|---|---|---|
| Grapes | 0806.10 | 12,600 | 15,120 |
| Pomegranate | 0810.90 | 6,300 | 12,600 |
| Persimmon | 0810.70 | 4,200 | 10,920 |
| Total | 23,100 | 38,640 |
Check these totals before loading the truck: the total gross weight in the consignment note (23,100 kg) and the invoice total (38,640) must equal the sum of the lines by code. If they differ, at the border the discrepancy in the documents may raise questions and the cargo may be delayed.
Practical checklist: (1) agree in advance the time and place of arrival at customs; (2) check the vehicle certificates and the perishable cargo certificates; (3) compare the data in the consignment note, the invoice and the cargo customs declaration with each other; (4) explain to the driver that arrival must be planned before the end of working hours and that documents must be prepared in the appropriate language.
Other permit documents (depending on the type of goods) are not covered in this answer.
Source: Customs Code, Article 17 (Parts 4–6), Article 18 (Part 1 item 1 and Part 2), Articles 19 and 20. The example was compiled by the author; codes are hypothetical.
See also: Export (customs procedure) · Cargo customs declaration
InsuranceOur employee became pregnant again while on childcare leave. Is she issued a sick leave certificate, how is the benefit calculated, and is there a limit depending on the number of children?
The certificate is issued. Under the third paragraph of clause 29 of Instruction No. 2667, for a repeat pregnancy of a woman on childcare leave (until the child reaches the age of two and three years) or on additional leave without pay, the certificate is issued on general grounds. The 56 and 70 calendar days in the first two paragraphs of this clause are for other cases: for the person caring for the child when the mother dies, and for the person who adopts a newborn child (the guardian).
The benefit is calculated under clause 28 of the Regulation (Resolution No. 796, Appendix 4; as amended by Resolutions No. 239 and No. 440):
| Rule | Content |
|---|---|
| Continuous insurance record | The requirement of subparagraph "v" of clause 7 for a continuous record over the last six months does not apply |
| Which months are taken | The last 12 months for which wages were accrued before the month in which the repeat benefit is assigned |
| Average | Total wages for 12 months : 12 |
| Months in which wages were accrued (a voluntary contribution was paid) during or after the leave are fewer than 3 | Coefficient of 0.5 applied to the average |
| From 3 to 6 such months | Coefficient of 0.75 applied to the average |
| The average comes out lower than the minimum consumer expenditure amount | Raised to that amount |
Mini example (compiled by the author, hypothetical): Zebuniso has not come back from leave and no wages were accrued in the months of leave, so the last 12 months for which wages were accrued are the months before the leave; a total of 60,000,000 soums was accrued in them. 60,000,000 : 12 = 5,000,000 soums; there are no months after the leave with accrued wages (fewer than 3), so the average earnings taken into account are 5,000,000 × 0.5 = 2,500,000 soums (comparing them with the minimum consumer expenditure amount is a separate step). This is not the benefit itself: how it is applied together with the length-of-service coefficient of clause 24 is not clear from these clauses, so clarify this with the fund or the employer.
On the number of children: clauses 7, 17, 23, 24, 25, 28 of the Regulation and clause 29 of the Instruction contain no limit depending on the number of children. We did not review the other clauses of the Regulation and the Instruction in this answer, so check the specific situation against the full text.
See also: Maternity (pregnancy and childbirth) benefit: who receives it, how is the length-of-service coefficient applied, and how is the benefit calculated if an employee becomes pregnant again while on childcare leave? · Insured event · Insurance section
InsuranceHow is the 75, 85 or 100 percent length-of-service coefficient determined for the maternity (pregnancy and childbirth) benefit?
The coefficient is applied to average monthly earnings depending on the number of months of insurance record (Resolution No. 796, Appendix 4, clause 24 of the Regulation):
| Insurance record | Coefficient |
|---|---|
| From 10 to 24 months (the 24th month included) | 75 percent |
| From 25 to 60 months (the 60th month included) | 85 percent |
| 61 months or more | 100 percent |
The table starts at 10 months because the maternity benefit requires an insurance record of at least ten months (clause 7, "b"). In addition, the record must not have been interrupted in the last six months before the month in which the insured event occurred (clause 7, "v"); for a repeat benefit this six-month requirement does not apply (clause 28).
Mini example (compiled by the author, hypothetical; average monthly earnings assumed to be 8,000,000 soums):
| Employee | Insurance record | Coefficient | Average × coefficient, soums |
|---|---|---|---|
| Dildora | 24 months | 75 percent | 6,000,000 |
| Zarnigor | 25 months | 85 percent | 6,800,000 |
| Mohlaroyim | 61 months | 100 percent | 8,000,000 |
The one-month difference between Dildora's and Zarnigor's records raised the coefficient by 10 percentage points. So count the record month by month and check the boundary months (24/25 and 60/61) separately. The benefit is calculated for the period shown in the certificate, also taking into account the requirements of clause 17 of the Regulation (clause 25): Sundays and non-working public holidays under Article 208 of the Labour Code falling within the period are not taken into account when calculating the amount of the payment, and for voluntarily insured persons there is also the upper cap in clause 25.
See also: Maternity (pregnancy and childbirth) benefit: who receives it, how is the length-of-service coefficient applied, and how is the benefit calculated if an employee becomes pregnant again while on childcare leave? · Wages (salary) · Insurance section
Import and exportOur export cargo left the factory at the end of October but crossed the border at the beginning of November. In the books we recorded the revenue in October. In which month do we show this export turnover in the VAT return?
In November. The revenue date in the accounts and the turnover date for VAT follow two different rules, so it is quite natural for them to fall into different months.
The VAT rule (Tax Code, Article 242, Part Ten). If goods are placed under the export customs procedure and taken out of the territory of Uzbekistan, the date of the turnover on sale is:
- The date the customs border is actually crossed, determined in accordance with customs legislation.
- Where periodic and (or) temporary declaration is used — the date of registration of the cargo customs declaration bearing the marks of the customs authority.
The accounting rule (NAS No. 2, paragraph 16). Revenue from the sale of goods is recognised when five conditions are met: a significant part of the risks and rewards has passed to the buyer; the seller has lost management and control over the goods; the amount of revenue can be measured reliably; it is probable that economic benefits will be received; the costs of the transaction can be measured reliably. When the risk passes is decided by the contract.
Example (prepared by the author, amounts and rate are hypothetical). "Qo'qon chinni" LLC sold porcelain tableware worth 30,000 US dollars to Almaty. The contract says the risk passes when the cargo is handed over at the factory to a carrier hired by the buyer. It was cleared with an ordinary (not periodic) CCD.
| Date | Event | Accounts | VAT |
|---|---|---|---|
| 28 October | Cargo handed to the carrier at the factory, CCD registered | Revenue is recognised (NAS No. 2, paragraph 16) | No turnover yet |
| 3 November | Cargo crossed the border | No new entry | Turnover date (Article 242, Part Ten, item 1) |
Journal entries on 28 October (hypothetical rate of 12,700 soums):
| Transaction | Debit | Credit | Amount, soums | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Settlement document to the buyer: 30,000 × 12,700 | 4010 | 9010 | 381,000,000 | paragraph 383, line 1 |
| Cost of products sold | 9110 | 2810 | 290,000,000 | paragraph 390, line 1 |
Result: October's financial result includes a gross profit of 381,000,000 − 290,000,000 = 91,000,000 soums, but this export turnover does not appear in the October VAT return. It is shown in the November return at the zero rate (Article 258, Part Two; Article 260, Part One, item 1). The documents confirming the zero rate are also submitted together with that return (Article 260, last part).
Had the company used periodic declaration, the turnover date would have been not the day of the border crossing but the day the CCD was registered (Article 242, Part Ten, item 2).
Practical tip: when closing the month, keep a small table reconciling "export revenue in 9010" with "0% turnover in the VAT return": shipment, CCD date, border crossing date, month in the accounts, month for VAT. Shipments that straddle a month end explain the difference at once, and no questions arise at a tax audit. Also remember that a foreign-currency receivable is remeasured at the end of every month (NAS No. 22, paragraph 8).
Source: Tax Code, Article 242 (Part Ten), Articles 258 and 260; NAS No. 2, paragraph 16; NAS No. 22, paragraph 8; NAS No. 21, paragraphs 383 and 390.
See also: Export (customs procedure) · Export procedure (code 10): how are the revenue from goods shipped to a foreign buyer and the foreign-currency receivable recorded in the accounts?
Import and exportA customer from Turkmenistan sends us steel sheet; we make shelving units from it, ship them back and receive only a fee for the work. At what VAT rate is this service of ours taxed, and what is recorded in the books?
The answer depends on where the shelving units go. Article 262 of the Tax Code sets two different rates for this kind of processing service.
| Situation | VAT rate | Basis |
|---|---|---|
| The processed product is taken out of the customs territory of Uzbekistan | 0% | Article 262, Part One |
| The processed product is then placed under the release for free circulation (import) procedure | the rate in Part One of Article 258, i.e. 12% | Article 262, Part Two |
The customs side in one sentence: the customer's sheet is brought in under the processing within the customs territory procedure (code 51 in the CCD, Annex 3 to the Instruction) with conditional exemption from duties and taxes (Customs Code, Article 70); if the product is taken out within the set period, no VAT is paid on import (Tax Code, Article 277, Part One, item 4). Below we look only at the VAT on the service fee and its entries.
Example (prepared by the author, amounts, rate and allocation method are hypothetical). VAT payer "Temir usta" LLC made 400 shelving units from the customer's sheet. The work fee is 8,000 US dollars, at a rate of 12,700 soums: 101,600,000 soums. 300 units were shipped to the customer, and the customer cleared 100 units under the import procedure for sale in Uzbekistan. The service fee was allocated in proportion to the number of units.
| Part | Service fee, soums | Rate | VAT, soums |
|---|---|---|---|
| 300 units taken out (75%) | 76,200,000 | 0% | 0 |
| 100 units imported (25%) | 25,400,000 | 12% | 3,048,000 |
| Total | 101,600,000 | 3,048,000 |
Accounting entries. Keeping the customer's sheet on an off-balance sheet account, collecting costs and writing off the cost are covered in detail in a separate article (link below). Here are only the two VAT-related entries:
| Transaction | Debit | Credit | Amount, soums | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Service fee billed to the customer | 4010 | 9030 | 101,600,000 | paragraph 383, line 1 |
| VAT on the imported part | 4010 | 6410 | 3,048,000 | paragraph 275, line 2 |
Total receivable from the customer: 101,600,000 + 3,048,000 = 104,648,000 soums.
Practical tip: write into the contract where the product goes and the customer's obligation to notify you in writing if it imports part of it. Otherwise an invoice issued at 0% will later have to be corrected.
Source: Tax Code, Articles 258, 262 and 277; Customs Code, Article 70; Instruction on the Procedure for Completing the CCD, Annex 3; NAS No. 21, paragraphs 275 and 383.
See also: Processing within the customs territory · Materials accepted for processing · Processing within the customs territory (code 51): if a product is made from a foreign customer's raw material, what is formalised at customs and what is recorded in the books?
Import and exportOur export canned food was carried to Almaty by a road haulage firm from Uzbekistan, and it showed VAT at 0% on its invoice. The firm is local, though — is that right? What should we check?
Yes, a local carrier can also apply 0%. Article 263 of the Tax Code has two items that fit such a trip, and one of them makes a customs mark a condition.
What the law says (Article 263, Part One, item 4): the zero rate applies to services of carriage or transportation of goods exported outside Uzbekistan rendered by carriers that are legal entities of Uzbekistan. This rule applies if the marks of the customs authorities are placed on the transport documents. The same item also covers carriage when products of processing in Uzbekistan are taken out.
International carriage of goods means carriage by air, rail and (or) road transport where the point of departure or destination is outside Uzbekistan (Article 263, Part One, item 1).
Can a forwarder also apply 0%? Yes, the provisions of Article 263 also extend to freight forwarding services rendered under a freight forwarding contract when organising international carriage (Part Two). Their composition (Part Three, in full):
- Acceptance and delivery of cargo.
- Loading, unloading and storage.
- Arranging cargo insurance.
- Customs clearance services for goods and vehicles.
- Searching for cargo after delivery deadlines have expired.
- Services of storing cargo in the forwarder's warehouses.
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are hypothetical). "Sirdaryo konserva" LLC concluded a contract with "Tez yuk" LLC for a Gulistan–Almaty trip worth 18,000,000 soums. After the cargo was accepted, the accountant checked the document folder:
| What is checked | Status |
|---|---|
| Is the carrier a legal entity of Uzbekistan | Yes |
| Are the goods exported goods (procedure 10 in the CCD) | Yes |
| Does the transport document bear a customs authority mark | Yes |
| Conclusion | 0% is lawful, VAT amount 0 soums |
The destination of the Gulistan–Almaty trip is outside Uzbekistan, so it also fits the definition of international carriage in item 1. Still, insist on a document with the customs mark: under item 4 the 0% rate is tied precisely to this mark, and the documents confirming the right to apply the zero rate are submitted together with the tax return (Article 260, last part). For comparison: at the 12% rate the VAT on this service would be 18,000,000 × 12% = 2,160,000 soums.
Journal entry: when the carrier's service for the sale of export products is accepted, Dt 9410 "Selling expenses" – Ct 6010 "Payables to suppliers and contractors", 18,000,000 soums (NAS No. 21, paragraph 257, line 11). Whether this expense is yours depends on the delivery term in the contract.
Practical tip: add to the contract with the carrier a clause to "provide a copy of the transport document with the customs mark after the cargo is delivered", and file the copy in the export shipment folder together with the CCD.
Source: Tax Code, Article 260 (last part), Article 263 (Part One, items 1 and 4; Parts Two and Three); NAS No. 21, paragraph 257.
See also: Output VAT · What do the procedure, transport and delivery terms codes in a cargo customs declaration tell an accountant?
Import and exportA CCD was cleared for an export consignment and the accountant recorded the revenue the same day. Before the cargo reached the border, the buyer withdrew from the contract and the furniture went back to the warehouse. What do we do now in the accounts and for VAT?
There are three questions here: the status of the goods, the wrong entry in the accounts, and VAT.
- Status of the goods. Under Article 29 of the Customs Code, goods placed under the export procedure and actually taken out of the customs territory lose the status of goods of Uzbekistan. Both conditions are needed together: placement under the procedure and actual removal. The furniture did not leave across the border, so it remained goods of Uzbekistan and may be sold on the domestic market. The customs side of the declaration is covered in a separate article (link below); this answer is only about accounting and VAT.
- Accounts. Revenue is recognised when the conditions in paragraph 16 of NAS No. 2 are met, the first being that a significant part of the risks and rewards must have passed to the buyer. The contract in the example says the risk passes at the border, so the entry made on the CCD day was wrong from the start. We correct it with a red storno: the wrong entry is reversed with a minus amount.
- VAT. The date of the export turnover is the date the customs border is actually crossed (Tax Code, Article 242, Part Ten, item 1), and the zero rate applies to the sale of goods taken out under the export customs procedure (Article 260, Part One, item 1). The border was not crossed, so no export turnover arose. If the furniture is later sold in Uzbekistan, this is an ordinary turnover and a VAT-paying company applies the 12% rate (Article 258, Part One).
Example (prepared by the author, amounts and rate are hypothetical). On 20 October "Zomin mebel" LLC cleared kitchen furniture worth 15,000 US dollars with a CCD. The accountant made an entry the same day at a rate of 12,650 soums. On 24 October the buyer withdrew and the cargo came back. In November the furniture was sold to a shop in Tashkent for 170,000,000 soums (excluding VAT).
| Date | Transaction | Debit | Credit | Amount, soums | Basis |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 20 October (error) | Revenue: 15,000 × 12,650 | 4010 | 9010 | 189,750,000 | NAS No. 21, paragraph 383, line 1 |
| 20 October (error) | Cost | 9110 | 2810 | 140,000,000 | NAS No. 21, paragraph 390, line 1 |
| 24 October | Red storno: revenue | 4010 | 9010 | −189,750,000 | correcting the wrong entry |
| 24 October | Red storno: cost | 9110 | 2810 | −140,000,000 | correcting the wrong entry |
| November | Domestic sale | 4010 | 9010 | 170,000,000 | NAS No. 21, paragraph 383, line 1 |
| November | VAT 12%: 170,000,000 × 12% | 4010 | 6410 | 20,400,000 | NAS No. 21, paragraph 275, line 2 |
| November | Cost | 9110 | 2810 | 140,000,000 | NAS No. 21, paragraph 390, line 1 |
After the storno in October, the balance on 4010 and 9010 for this deal is zero and the furniture is again on 2810. Gross profit in November: 170,000,000 − 140,000,000 = 30,000,000 soums; the total receivable from the shop is 190,400,000 soums.
Practical tip: do not tie export revenue automatically to the day the CCD is registered. First find the risk transfer point in the contract, and record the border crossing date separately for VAT.
Source: Customs Code, Article 29; Tax Code, Article 242 (Part Ten), Articles 258 and 260; NAS No. 2, paragraph 16; NAS No. 21, paragraphs 275, 383 and 390.
See also: Red storno · How do you correct a wrong journal entry: red storno, reversing entry or additional entry? · If a buyer makes a claim about exported goods or the goods do not arrive: how are a discount, compensation and the exchange difference recorded in the accounts?
Import and exportWe have prepared a consignment of cable for export, but the buyer wants to collect it in parts. May we keep the consignment in a customs warehouse, is any tax payable in that case, and what changes in the books?
The Tax Code directly provides for this route: no tax is paid when goods are taken out under the export customs procedure, and this rule also applies when the goods are placed under the customs warehouse procedure for the purpose of subsequent export (Article 277, Part Two, item 1).
The main rules under the Customs Code:
| Issue | Rule | Basis |
|---|---|---|
| Essence of the procedure | Goods brought into the customs territory and intended for removal from the customs territory are stored under customs control without payment of duties and taxes and without application of economic policy measures | Article 90 |
| Which goods are not allowed | Goods prohibited from import; goods of Uzbekistan prohibited from export; goods whose transit is prohibited; medicines and food products whose shelf life on the day of the declaration for placement is shorter than the period declared in accordance with Article 94 | Article 91 |
| If the goods are transferred to another person while in the warehouse | The customs authority is notified in writing in advance, and the transferee submits its own declaration; the storage period is neither suspended nor extended | Article 96 |
| Leaving the warehouse | Within three working days from the day of placement under another procedure | Article 98, Part Two |
Note: placing export goods under this procedure is expressly mentioned in Article 277 of the Tax Code (Part Two, item 1). Article 91 of the Customs Code allows any goods to be placed and, as regards goods of Uzbekistan, excludes only "goods of Uzbekistan prohibited from export". Even so, confirm in advance with the customs warehouse owner and the customs authority that the specific consignment can be placed.
What may be done in the warehouse (Article 95, Part One, full list; with notice to the customs authority):
- Operations needed to keep the goods intact in an unchanged state.
- Inspection, examination and measurement of the goods.
- Moving within the warehouse (if the condition, packaging and means of identification do not change).
- Taking samples and specimens for examination and identification in accordance with Article 211.
- Operations needed to prepare for sale and carriage; the code lists them as follows: "splitting into lots, forming shipments, sorting, packing, repacking, marking (except for excise stamps), performing other similar operations, including simple assembly operations".
- Other operations to improve quality, except mixing, processing of the goods or working on them.
These operations are not allowed if they lead to loss of the goods or a change in their properties (Article 95, Part Two). In the CCD, the customs warehouse procedure (code 74) is shown first, and the export procedure (code 10) on each shipment (Annex 3 to the Instruction).
Accounts. Since the owner has not changed, there is no sale entry: the cable stays on account 2810 "Finished goods in the warehouse". Analytical records on this account are also kept by storage location (NAS No. 21, paragraph 140), so it is enough to open a separate analytical sub-account "in the customs warehouse".
Example (prepared by the author, tariff and amounts are hypothetical). "Olmaliq kabel" LLC kept 40 drums of cable in a customs warehouse for 30 days; the tariff is 15,000 soums per drum per day (excluding VAT):
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Storage fee | 40 × 15,000 × 30 | 18,000,000 soums |
| Journal entry | Dt 9410 – Ct 6010 | NAS No. 21, paragraph 257, line 11 |
For VAT, the export turnover arises on the day each shipment crosses the border (Tax Code, Article 242, Part Ten). In the accounts, however, revenue and cost are recorded according to the risk transfer point in the contract (NAS No. 2, paragraph 16), so these two dates may differ.
Practical tip: keep the list of shipments in the form "drum number — CCD number — border crossing date". Then the "in the customs warehouse" balance on 2810 is quickly reconciled each month with the actual balance in the customs warehouse.
Source: Tax Code, Articles 242 and 277; Customs Code, Articles 90, 91, 95, 96 and 98; Instruction on the Procedure for Completing the CCD, Annex 3; NAS No. 2, paragraph 16; NAS No. 21, paragraphs 140 and 257.
See also: Customs warehouse · Export (customs procedure)
TaxOur bookkeeping is run by an outside firm (outsourcing). Can they file returns with the tax authority and give explanations on our behalf? What document is needed for this?
They can. A taxpayer is entitled to participate in tax relations through a legal or authorised representative (Tax Code, Article 24, Part One). The representative's powers must be confirmed by a document (Part Two).
| Type of representative | Who | Basis of authority |
|---|---|---|
| Legal representative (legal entity) | A person who acts on behalf of the legal entity under the law or its founding documents, usually the director | Law, charter (Part Three) |
| Authorised representative (for a legal entity) | A tax advisers' organisation or another person | Contract or power of attorney (Parts Six and Seven) |
| Authorised representative (for an individual) | The person granted the authority | Notarised power of attorney (Part Eight) |
Who cannot be a representative: officials of the tax, finance, customs and other state bodies (Part Nine).
One more important rule: the actions or inaction of the legal representative — the director — in tax relations are deemed the actions of the legal entity itself (Part Five). In other words, a return signed and filed by the director is the company's own return.
Example (prepared by the author). "Bog'ishamol non" LLC concluded a bookkeeping services contract with the firm "Hisob-Pro". A separate section was added to the contract: which tax returns the firm files, which requests of the tax authority it answers, and when the authority expires. This section serves as the document confirming the authority; if he wishes, the director may also issue a separate power of attorney.
Practical tip: since the relationship with the representative is based on a contract, write into the contract in advance at whose expense the consequences of an erroneous return (late payment interest, fines) are covered.
Source: Tax Code, Article 24.
See also: Taxpayer's representative · Power of attorney
TaxWe want to supply a large batch to a new buyer on deferred payment. Can we find out whether it has tax arrears and which tax regime it operates under, or is this a tax secret?
Neither piece of information you are asking about is a tax secret. Under Article 29 of the Tax Code, information about a taxpayer obtained by the competent bodies constitutes a tax secret, except for the following (Part One, full list):
- Information that is accessible to everyone, including information made accessible with the owner's consent.
- The taxpayer identification number (TIN).
- Violations of tax legislation and the liability measures for them.
- The tax regime applied and registration as a VAT payer.
- The amounts of taxes paid and of tax arrears.
- The participants of the legal entity.
- The average headcount of employees.
- The amounts of income and expenses according to the financial statements.
Information not on the list is a tax secret, and state bodies, their officials, and engaged specialists and experts may not disclose it except in cases provided for by law (Part Two). The use or transfer to others of a trade secret that became known to an official of a state body in the course of performing his duties is also deemed disclosure of a tax secret (Part Three).
Example (prepared by the author). "Chust pichoq" LLC wants to supply goods worth 120 million soums to a new wholesale buyer with a 90-day deferral. Before the contract it asked the buyer for three things: the TIN, the amount of tax arrears and the amount of income in the latest annual financial statements. All three are on the list of exceptions in Article 29, so this request breaches no one's secret. If the buyer has large tax arrears, collection may be directed at its bank account (Tax Code, Articles 120 and 121) — this signals to you a risk of payment delay.
Tip: request the information from the buyer in writing and keep the reply together with the contract documents.
Source: Tax Code, Articles 29, 120 and 121.
See also: Tax secrecy · Tax arrears
TaxWe are liquidating our LLC. What happens if the money from selling the property is not enough to fully cover the tax arrears? We also had an overpayment of one tax — will it be lost?
Article 91 of the Tax Code governs exactly this situation.
Who pays and from what money: - The liquidator performs the tax obligation of the legal entity being liquidated from its cash, including the money received from selling its property (Part One). - If the money is insufficient, the unpaid arrears may be paid off by the participants in the amount and manner established by law (Part Two). - The order in which tax arrears are paid among settlements with other creditors is determined by civil legislation (Part Three).
What happens to the overpayment: - The tax authority offsets it against arrears on other taxes (Part Four). - If there are arrears on several taxes, the amount is distributed in proportion to the arrears or by decision of the liquidator (Part Five). - If there are no arrears at all, the overpayment is refunded no later than fifteen days from the day the application is filed. If no application is filed, after the taxpayer is removed from the unified register this amount is written off the personal account (Part Six). In other words, if you do not apply, the money really is lost.
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are illustrative). "Qorako'l teri" LLC has: VAT arrears of 18 million and property tax arrears of 6 million soums; an overpayment of profit tax of 4 million soums. The liquidator chose proportional distribution:
| Tax | Arrears | Overpayment offset | Remaining arrears |
|---|---|---|---|
| VAT | 18 million | 4 × 18/24 = 3 million | 15 million |
| Property tax | 6 million | 4 × 6/24 = 1 million | 5 million |
| Total | 24 million | 4 million | 20 million |
The property was sold and 14 million soums came in. Under Part Two, the question of the remaining 6 million soums is resolved with the participants.
Source: Tax Code, Article 91.
See also: Tax arrears · Late payment interest (penalty interest)
TaxWe asked for a deferral of tax payment. The tax authority asked for security, and our director is ready to act personally as surety. What risk does this create for the director?
The risk is serious, so make the decision knowing the conditions. When the deadlines for performing a tax obligation are changed, payment of tax may be secured by a surety (Tax Code, Article 108, Part One).
Main rules of suretyship (Article 108): - The surety undertakes to perform the obligation in full if the taxpayer does not pay the tax and late payment interest on time (Part Two). - Suretyship is formalised by a contract between the tax authority and the surety (Part Three). - If the company does not pay, the surety and the company are jointly and severally liable (Part Four): the tax authority may demand the amount from either of them. - The tax authority sends the surety a demand within five days from the day the deadline for meeting the demand for payment of tax expires (Part Five). If the surety does not pay either, compulsory collection measures are applied to him (Part Six). - A surety who has paid acquires the right to claim from the company the amount paid, interest on it and the losses incurred (Part Seven). - The surety may be a legal entity or an individual, and several sureties for one obligation are also allowed (Parts Eight and Nine).
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are illustrative). "Kattaqo'rg'on yog'" LLC was granted a deferral on 40 million soums of tax, and director Akmal Sobirov became surety. The deadline passed, the firm did not pay, and late payment interest reached 1.2 million soums. After the demand deadline expired, within five days Akmal received a demand for 41.2 million soums. If he pays, he can then claim this amount with interest from the firm — but since the firm has no money, this right may turn out to be worthless in practice.
An alternative is a bank guarantee (Article 109). Five requirements apply to the guarantee (Part Three, full list): 1. It must be irrevocable and non-transferable. 2. It must not contain any instruction for the tax authority to submit to the guarantor documents not provided for in Article 109. 3. Its term, unless the Code provides otherwise, must expire no earlier than six months after the day the deadline for paying the tax secured by the guarantee passes. 4. The guarantee amount must ensure full performance of the obligation to pay the tax and late payment interest. 5. It must provide that, if the bank does not meet the demand on time, the tax authority applies measures to collect the secured amount from the bank.
Here the risk is borne by the bank, not the director.
Source: Tax Code, Articles 108 and 109.
See also: Bank guarantee · Late payment interest (penalty interest)
TaxA demand came from the tax authority: our buyer is being audited, and they are asking for the contract and waybills with it. We are not the ones being audited — are we obliged to provide them?
You are. The official conducting the audit is entitled to demand from a counterparty documents relating to the activity of the taxpayer being audited (Tax Code, Article 147, Part One).
How the demand reaches you (Article 147): 1. The auditing tax authority sends an order to the tax authority where you are registered. It states for which tax control measure the documents are needed and, if a specific transaction is requested, information allowing it to be identified (Part Three). 2. Your tax authority sends you a demand within three days from the day the order is received and attaches a copy of the order to it (Parts Four and Five). 3. Within five days from the day the demand is received you submit the documents or report that you do not have them. If you cannot make it, you may ask for an extension by petition (Part Six).
How the documents are submitted: in person or through a representative, by registered mail, or electronically via telecommunication networks or the personal account; on paper — as copies certified by you, and notarisation of them may not be required (under Part Seven of Article 147, the rules of Parts Three to Five and Eleven of Article 146 apply).
Can you refuse? The Code provides a right to refuse in one case: if the demand does not comply with the rules of Article 147 (last part). An example of such a case: no copy of the order is attached to the demand.
Checklist (prepared by the author):
| Check | Why |
|---|---|
| Is a copy of the order attached | Requirement of Part Five |
| Is it clearly stated which transaction is requested | Requirement of Part Three |
| Is the date of receipt recorded | The five days are counted from this day |
| Are the copies certified by the company | Article 146, Part Four |
Example (prepared by the author). "Yangiyer g'isht" LLC was asked for three waybills from Q3 2026 relating to its buyer "Sirdaryo qurilish". The accountant sent certified copies of the contract, the waybills and the reconciliation statement through the personal account and recorded the date of sending.
Source: Tax Code, Articles 146 and 147.
See also: Field tax audit · Certificate (act)
AccountingOur coffee shop joined a chain under a franchise: for using the brand and recipes we pay the brand owner 4 percent of revenue every month. In which accounts is this payment recorded?
This is a royalty — a payment for using another organisation's asset (brand, recipe, know-how). Under NAS No. 21, an organisation's obligations for royalties are recorded in account 6930 "Royalties payable", which is credited in correspondence with expense accounts (paragraph 300). Analytical accounting is kept for each creditor.
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are illustrative). October revenue of "Shahrisabz kofe" LLC is 150,000,000 soums. Royalty under the contract: 150,000,000 × 4% = 6,000,000 soums.
| Transaction | Dr | Cr | Amount | Basis |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| October royalty accrued | 9690 | 6930 | 6,000,000 | Table to paragraph 309, line 6 |
| Royalty paid through the bank | 6930 | 5110 | 6,000,000 | Table to paragraph 309, line 7 |
9690 is "Other expenses on financial activities". That is why this amount appears in the statement of financial results not in period expenses but in the line "Other expenses on financial activities" (line 210) (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 2).
Royalty unpaid at month-end goes to the balance sheet line "Other payables" (line 760) (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 1).
Practical tip: have the contract state clearly from which revenue (with or without VAT) the royalty is calculated — otherwise a dispute with the brand owner will arise every month. If the royalty recipient is a foreign company, check the tax consequences separately.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 300 and 309; Regulation approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance, Appendices 1 and 2.
See also: Royalty · 6930 Royalties payable
AccountingThe supplier delivered materials 10 days later than the contract deadline. The contract provides for a penalty for each day of delay, and the supplier has acknowledged it. How do we record this and when does it become income?
A penalty is recorded as income only in the amount acknowledged by the supplier or set by the economic court. A claim amount that has only been raised and not acknowledged is not reflected in the accounts (NAS No. 21, paragraph 213, subparagraph "d").
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are illustrative). "Marg'ilon tola" LLC concluded a contract with a supplier for 80,000,000 soums, with an agreed penalty of 0.1 percent of the contract amount for each day of delay. The delay is 10 days:
80,000,000 × 0.1% × 10 = 800,000 soums.
| Transaction | Dr | Cr | Amount | Basis |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Penalty acknowledged by the supplier | 4860 | 9330 | 800,000 | Paragraph 398; table to paragraph 216, line 14; table to paragraph 405, line 3 |
| Penalty received in cash | 5110 | 4860 | 800,000 | Paragraph 214; table to paragraph 226, line 9 |
4860 is "Claims receivable", 9330 is "Fines, penalties and surcharges collected". Under paragraph 398, fines and penalties collected from debtors for breach of business contracts are recorded precisely to the credit of 9330.
Note: paragraph 213 of the standard also mentions linking this amount with 9390 "Other operating income", while paragraph 398 and the tables point to 9330. Record your choice in the accounting policy and apply it consistently. In the statement of financial results both go to the line "Other income from core activities" (line 090) (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 2).
Practical tip: obtain a written document from the supplier acknowledging the penalty (a letter or a reconciliation statement) — this very document is the basis for the entry in 4860.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 213, 214, 216, 226, 398 and 405; Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 2.
See also: Late payment interest (penalty interest) · 4860 Claims receivable
AccountingWe vacated a leased building later than the contract date, and the lessor demanded a forfeit. We objected, and later a court decision obliged us to pay. When and how do we record it?
The liability is recorded when the court decision is issued and in the amount set by the court. Under NAS No. 21, debt for fines, penalties and forfeits for non-compliance with contractual obligations is accrued in the amount acknowledged or recognised by arbitration (the court) (table to paragraph 309, line 14). While the dispute is ongoing, no entry is made on this line.
Which accounts: - 6960 "Claims payable" — claims raised by buyers and other organisations, and our debt for acknowledged (recognised) fines, penalties and forfeits; it is credited in correspondence with expense accounts (paragraph 303). Analytical accounting is kept for each creditor and claim (paragraph 304). - 9430 "Other operating expenses" — fines and penalties are recorded precisely in this account (paragraph 410).
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are illustrative). The lessor demanded a forfeit of 15,000,000 soums from "Denov savdo" LLC. The firm did not agree, and the economic court set 9,000,000 soums.
| Stage | Entry | Basis |
|---|---|---|
| Demand received, dispute began | No entry | Table to paragraph 309, line 14 (only the acknowledged or recognised amount) |
| Court decision entered into force | Dr 9430 Cr 6960 — 9,000,000 | Table to paragraph 309, line 14; table to paragraph 412, line 21 |
Once paid, the debt in 6960 is closed. In the statement of financial results this expense appears in the line "Other operating expenses" (line 070) (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 2).
Practical tip: if the dispute carries over from one reporting period to the next, the accountant and the manager should discuss together whether to describe it in the notes to the annual statements.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 303, 304, 309, 410 and 412; Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 2.
See also: Fine · 6960 Claims payable
AccountingAfter a mudflow, a partner company transferred 50 million soums to our account on a non-repayable basis. It did not require any report or purpose. Is this a loan or income?
Since there is no obligation to repay, it is not a loan. Under NAS No. 21, income received free of charge in the form of cash and cash equivalents is recorded to the credit of account 9380 "Non-repayable financial assistance" in correspondence with cash accounts (paragraph 403).
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are illustrative). While dealing with the aftermath of a mudflow, "Kosonsoy qandolat" LLC received 50,000,000 soums of non-repayable assistance from a partner company.
| Transaction | Dr | Cr | Amount | Basis |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Assistance received in the settlement account | 5110 | 9380 | 50,000,000 | Paragraph 403; table to paragraph 405, line 9 |
9380 is a transit account in group 9300 "Other income from core activities": it is closed at the end of the period and leaves no balance. In the statement of financial results the amount appears in the line "Other income from core activities" (line 090) (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 2).
When this entry does not fit:
| Situation | Why not 9380 |
|---|---|
| The money was given on condition of repayment | This is a loan liability |
| The assistance was given as property, not money | Paragraph 403 covers only cash and cash equivalents |
| The money was given for a specific purpose with a spending report required | These are earmarked funds; their accounting needs separate study |
Practical tip: obtain a letter or agreement from the partner stating that the money is not to be repaid — this is the main document for the entry in 9380. Check the profit tax consequences separately under the Tax Code.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 403 and 405; Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 2.
See also: Non-repayable financial assistance · 9380 Non-repayable financial assistance
AccountingWe send official letters by registered mail, so we bought 300 postage stamps at once. Are they expensed immediately or kept as a balance?
Not expensed immediately. Postage stamps are a cash equivalent and are recorded in account 5610 "Cash equivalents (by type)" at nominal value (NAS No. 21, paragraph 235). On purchase 5610 is debited, and when used it is credited in correspondence with expense accounts (same paragraph). Analytical accounting is kept by type.
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are illustrative). "Qibray nashr" LLC bought 300 stamps with a nominal value of 5,000 soums: 300 × 5,000 = 1,500,000 soums. During the month 120 were used for office correspondence: 120 × 5,000 = 600,000 soums.
| Transaction | Dr | Cr | Amount | Basis |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Stamps bought through the bank | 5610 | 5110 | 1,500,000 | Table to paragraph 236, line 2 |
| Used for office letters | 9420 | 5610 | 600,000 | Paragraph 235 (credit with expense accounts); paragraph 409 (9420 "Administrative expenses" — expenses of managing the organisation) |
At month-end 180 stamps remained: 180 × 5,000 = 900,000 soums. On the balance sheet this amount is shown in the line "Other cash and cash equivalents (5500, 5600, 5700)" (line 360) (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 1).
If the stamps are bought for cash, the entry is Dr 5610 Cr 5010 (table to paragraph 236, line 1). If a shortage is found at stocktaking and charged to the financially responsible person — Dr 4730 Cr 5610 (table to paragraph 206, line 10).
Practical tip: account for stamps in a separate book like cash in the till, and count the balance every month and reconcile it with 5610 — even if the amount is small, uncontrolled stamps quickly "disappear".
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 206, 235, 236 and 409; Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 1.
See also: Cash equivalents · 5610 Cash equivalents (by type)
AuditAt the planning stage the auditor said, "we consider there to be a risk of fraud in revenue recognition". We have never had any fraud — why revenue in particular?
This is not an accusation against you but a starting presumption in the standard. Under ISA 240, the auditor proceeds from the presumption that there are risks of material misstatement due to fraud in revenue recognition, and evaluates which types of revenue, transactions or assertions give rise to such risks. This presumption does not depend on whether fraud has been found at the company.
Why revenue in particular? Pressure to overstate or understate revenue — to meet a plan, earn a bonus, keep bank covenants or, conversely, to reduce tax — is common at many companies. And revenue is one of the largest items in almost every set of statements.
| Method of misstating revenue | Related assertion |
|---|---|
| Shifting next year's sales into the current year | Cut-off |
| Recording sales that did not happen | Occurrence |
| Not recording part of cash takings | Completeness |
Can the presumption be rebutted? It can, but only with grounds. An example of such grounds: the company has a single simple source of revenue. In that case the auditor documents in the working papers why he concluded that there is no risk of fraud in revenue in this situation. A general sentence is not enough.
If this risk is identified, the auditor plans separate audit procedures for revenue that respond to it.
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are illustrative). "Shofirkon pishiriq" LLC does wholesale and retail trade. Management gets a bonus if annual revenue exceeds 5 billion soums. At year-end revenue was 4.96 billion soums, and on 28–31 December wholesale shipments of 70 million soums were recorded, bringing revenue to 5.03 billion soums. The auditor checked the waybills, buyers' signatures and January returns for these shipments: goods worth 45 million soums had been returned in full on 5 January. Excluding them, revenue is 4.985 billion soums and the bonus condition is not met.
Practical tip: prepare in advance a list of shipments, returns and credited invoices at year-end and at the start of the new year — this is exactly what the auditor uses to test cut-off.
Source: ISA 240; Law "On Auditing Activity" (O'RQ-677), Article 9.
See also: Fraud · Professional skepticism
AuditThe auditor wants to send hundreds of our small customers a letter saying "your debt is this much; reply only if you disagree". If no reply comes, does that mean the debt is confirmed?
No, the absence of a reply is not a confirmation. ISA 505 ("External Confirmations") distinguishes two kinds of request:
| Type of request | When a reply comes | Strength of evidence |
|---|---|---|
| Positive request | The recipient replies in all cases: indicates agreement or writes the correct amount | Stronger |
| Negative request | The recipient replies only if he disagrees | Weaker: no reply may also mean the letter was not read |
That is why the standard allows a negative request to be used as the sole substantive audit procedure only when all four of the following conditions are met together: 1. The risk of material misstatement has been assessed as low and sufficient appropriate evidence has been obtained about the operating effectiveness of the relevant controls. 2. The population consists of a large number of small, homogeneous balances. 3. A very low exception rate is expected. 4. The auditor is not aware of circumstances suggesting that recipients will disregard such requests.
Example (prepared by the author). "Sayxun suv" LLC has 1,200 household customers, each with a debt of 150–400 thousand soums. Settlement controls worked well throughout the year. The auditor sent them negative requests, and sent positive requests to the 5 largest wholesale buyers, because their amounts are large and not homogeneous.
Practical tip: update your database of customer addresses and contact details in advance. A negative request sent to a wrong address proves nothing to the auditor, and he will have to perform additional procedures.
Source: ISA 505 "External Confirmations"; Law "On Auditing Activity" (O'RQ-677), Article 9.
See also: External confirmation · Accounts receivable
AuditThe auditor asked management for a calculation showing that the company can operate for at least another year. We only have a 6-month cash flow forecast. Is that enough?
Usually not. Under ISA 570 ("Going Concern"), when evaluating management's assessment of the entity's ability to continue as a going concern, the auditor also considers the period covered by that assessment. The period must be at least twelve months from the date of the financial statements. If management has assessed a shorter period, the auditor asks it to extend it to at least twelve months.
Example (prepared by the author).
| Indicator | Date |
|---|---|
| Date of the financial statements | 31 December 2026 |
| Day management's forecast ends | 30 June 2027 |
| Day the assessment must cover at least | 31 December 2027 |
The management of "Toshloq mebel" extended the forecast by another 6 months: it prepared a schedule of monthly revenue, salaries, rent and loan payments. It took into account that the loan must be repaid in September 2027, and a cash shortfall appeared in month 9. Management explained in writing that it had started negotiations with the bank on extending the term.
Why does this matter? If there is a material uncertainty related to going concern and it is adequately disclosed in the statements, a separate section appears in the auditor's report; if it is not disclosed, the opinion is modified. The more thorough the assessment, the easier the dialogue with the auditor.
Practical tip: update the 12-month cash flow forecast every December — it is a useful document not only for the auditor but also for the bank and the founders.
Source: ISA 570 "Going Concern"; Law "On Auditing Activity" (O'RQ-677), Article 9.
See also: Going concern · Cash flow
AuditIn the auditor's report, after the opinion there is a short section called "Basis for Opinion". Is it just formal text, or can something useful be learned from it?
This section is not a formality. Under ISA 700, it comes in the report directly after the "Opinion" section and contains four statements:
- That the audit was conducted in accordance with International Standards on Auditing.
- A reference to the section of the report that describes the auditor's responsibilities under those standards.
- That the auditor is independent of the entity in accordance with the relevant ethical requirements and has fulfilled his other responsibilities under these requirements.
- That the auditor believes the evidence obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for the opinion.
What can be learned from it:
| What to look at | What it tells you |
|---|---|
| Section title | If "Basis for Opinion" — the opinion is unmodified; if "Basis for Qualified Opinion", "Basis for Adverse Opinion" or "Basis for Disclaimer of Opinion" — the opinion is modified (ISA 705) |
| Additional paragraphs | If the opinion is modified, this section explains the reason and, if practicable, its effect |
| Independence statement | The auditor formally confirms his independence from the entity |
In Uzbekistan, international standards on auditing are applied as the standards of auditing activity and must be posted on the official website of the authorised body (Law O'RQ-677, Article 9). The texts of ISA 700 and ISA 705 and sample reports are published on the Ministry of Economy and Finance page on gov.uz.
Example (prepared by the author). Dilnoza, a bank credit officer, reading the report on "Arnasoy agro", saw that the section was titled "Basis for Qualified Opinion". This section revealed that depreciation of fixed assets had been under-calculated and that its effect concerned only this item. When reviewing the loan application, Dilnoza separately checked the carrying amount of the equipment offered as collateral.
Source: ISA 700 and ISA 705; Law "On Auditing Activity" (O'RQ-677), Article 9.
See also: Auditor's report · Auditor independence
AuditThe auditor found signs that our storekeeper took goods out without documents and sold them. Whom will the auditor tell: the director or the founders?
ISA 240 ("The Auditor's Responsibilities Relating to Fraud in an Audit of Financial Statements") gives a clear answer to this question.
To whom and when it is reported: - If the auditor identifies fraud or obtains information indicating that fraud may exist, he communicates this on a timely basis to the appropriate level of management — the persons responsible for preventing and detecting fraud. - If the fraud involves management, employees with significant roles in internal control, or others where the fraud resulted in a material misstatement of the statements, the auditor also communicates on a timely basis with those charged with governance (in an LLC — the founders or the supervisory board).
How this case can be classified: the standard distinguishes two types of fraud — fraudulent financial reporting and misappropriation of assets. The storekeeper's actions fall into the second type.
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are illustrative). During the audit of "Uchqo'rg'on tekstil", the auditor saw that over 3 months 240 boxes of yarn had left the warehouse but there were no sales documents (450,000 soums per box, total 240 × 450,000 = 108,000,000 soums). Since the storekeeper was a key person in inventory control, the auditor reported this in writing both to the director and to the founders' meeting.
Key concept: the primary responsibility for preventing and detecting fraud rests with management and those charged with governance; the auditor is responsible for obtaining reasonable assurance that the statements are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
Practical tip: after the auditor's communication, carry out a stocktaking of the warehouse immediately and record the shortage in the accounts in the established manner — it will also come back as a question at the next audit.
Source: ISA 240; Law "On Auditing Activity" (O'RQ-677), Article 9.
See also: Fraud · Internal control
Financial reportingOur small LLC has no chief accountant; the director keeps the books himself. Who signs the annual financial statements and how is the signature block filled in?
The director signs twice. The financial statement forms are signed by the manager and by the person performing the accounting and financial management functions or the chief accountant. If the manager has taken on these functions, he also signs in place of the chief accountant (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, paragraph 4).
The signature block is the same on every form (Appendices 1 and 2 to the Regulation):
| Line | Who fills it in |
|---|---|
| "I confirm the reliability of the information presented in these financial statements:" | Printed text |
| Manager (full name, signature) | Director |
| Chief accountant (full name, signature) | In this case, the director again |
| Date (day/month/year) | Date of signing |
Which forms a small enterprise submits: the annual statements of a micro-firm and a small enterprise consist of the balance sheet and the statement of financial results (paragraph 10). So the signatures are placed on two forms. Annual statements under NAS are submitted no later than 1 March of the year following the reporting year (paragraph 7).
Example (prepared by the author). In the 2026 statements, Rustam Qodirov, director of "Ohangaron kafel" LLC, wrote his full name in both the "Manager" and "Chief accountant" lines on each of the balance sheet and the statement of financial results, signed twice and entered the date.
Practical tip: formalise the director's taking on of the accounting functions with an internal order — you will have a ready answer when asked why the signatures are the same.
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance dated 8 October 2024, paragraphs 4, 7 and 10, Appendices 1 and 2.
See also: Financial statements · Financial statement forms from 2025: balance sheet, financial results, equity and cash flows (Order No. 181)
Financial reportingOur company prepares financial statements under IFRS. Do we also have to submit separate statements under NAS, and what is the deadline?
You do not. Organisations that prepare financial statements in accordance with IFRS prepare them on the basis of the texts of IFRS and their interpretations recognised by Order No. 61 of the Minister of Finance dated 10 November 2022, and do not submit financial statements under NAS (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, paragraph 12).
| Indicator | Under NAS | Under IFRS |
|---|---|---|
| Annual statements deadline | By 1 March of the following year (paragraph 7) | By 1 May of the following year (paragraph 7) |
| Financial position | Balance sheet (Appendix 1) | Statement of financial position (Appendix 5) |
| Results | Statement of financial results (Appendix 2) | Statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income (Appendix 6) |
| Equity | Statement of equity (Appendix 3) | Statement of changes in equity (Appendix 7) |
| Cash | Statement of cash flows (Appendix 4) | Statement of cash flows, indirect method (Appendix 8) |
| Notes | Notes, calculations and explanations | Material accounting policies and other explanatory information |
Source: paragraphs 9 and 11.
An additional option: organisations preparing statements under IFRS may set out in their accounting policy the forms they publish in addition to those established by the Regulation, and the procedure and methods for submitting them (paragraph 14).
Example (prepared by the author). "Navoiy polimer" JSC prepares its 2026 statements under IFRS. It submits Appendices 5–8 and the notes by 1 May 2027; it does not separately submit NAS forms by 1 March.
Practical tip: state clearly in the accounting policy that the company prepares statements under IFRS and from what date it switched — if an inspector asks "where are the NAS forms?", this will be the first document you show.
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181, paragraphs 7, 9, 11, 12 and 14.
See also: IFRS · IFRS financial statement forms: financial position, profit or loss, equity and cash flows (Order No. 181, Appendices 5–8)
Financial reportingI am filling in the balance sheet: 6930 has royalty debt, 6960 a court-imposed fine, 6970 debt to an accountable person, and 6950 the current portion of a loan. Do they all go to the line "Other payables"?
No, 6950 goes to a separate line. In the balance sheet form (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 1):
| Line | Name | Which accounts |
|---|---|---|
| 750 | Current portion of long-term liabilities | 6950 |
| 760 | Other payables | Group 6900 except 6950 |
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are illustrative). At "Nurobod sement" LLC as of 31 December:
| Account | Balance, soums |
|---|---|
| 6930 "Royalties payable" | 2,750,000 |
| 6960 "Claims payable" | 4,300,000 |
| 6970 "Payables to accountable persons" | 650,000 |
| 6950 "Long-term liabilities – current portion" | 36,000,000 |
Line 760: 2,750,000 + 4,300,000 + 650,000 = 7,700,000 soums. Since the balance sheet is prepared in thousands of soums, 7,700 is entered. Line 750 gets 36,000.
A subtle point: both lines are included in "Total current liabilities" (line 600). But the formula for "current payables" (line 601) includes line 760 and not line 750 (601 = 610+630+650+670+680+690+700+710+720+760). That is why line 601 coming out smaller than line 600 is not an error.
If there is overdue debt, it is shown in the line "of which: overdue current payables" (line 602), and the appendix to the balance sheet — the breakdown of overdue receivables and payables — is filled in.
Practical tip: before filling in the balance sheet, print a list of balances for each subaccount in group 6900 — that way you will not forget to separate 6950.
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance, Appendix 1 (balance sheet and its appendix).
See also: Accounts payable · Balance sheet
Financial reportingOur holding company has two subsidiaries, one of which is an insurance company. Do we prepare both the consolidated statements and the insurance company's own statements on the forms in Order No. 181?
Both fall outside the scope of this Regulation.
- Insurance organisation. The Regulation sets the deadlines, composition and content of statements for accounting entities, but budget and insurance organisations, commercial banks and non-bank credit organisations are excluded (introductory part of the Regulation). So the insurance subsidiary's own statements are prepared under a different procedure.
- Consolidated statements. The forms approved by the Regulation do not apply to the preparation of consolidated financial statements (paragraph 1).
To whom the Regulation applies:
| Organisation | Regulation forms |
|---|---|
| The holding's own (separate) statements, under NAS | Applied |
| Non-insurance subsidiary, under NAS | Applied |
| Insurance subsidiary | Not applied |
| The group's consolidated statements | Not applied |
Lines in the holding's own balance sheet related to subsidiaries (Appendix 1):
| Line | Name |
|---|---|
| 050 | Investments in subsidiaries (0620) |
| 240 | Receivables from subsidiaries and associates (4120) |
| 520 | Long-term payables to subsidiaries and associates (7120) |
| 630 | Payables to subsidiaries and associates (6120) |
Example (prepared by the author). "Zomin invest" JSC prepared its separate statements on the Regulation forms and showed its investment in the subsidiaries in line 050. The insurance subsidiary "Zomin sug'urta" prepared its statements under its own separate procedure, and the group's consolidated statements were prepared outside the Regulation forms.
Practical tip: reconcile intra-group balances (4120, 6120) with the subsidiaries every quarter — on consolidation these are exactly what must match each other.
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance, introductory part, paragraph 1, Appendix 1.
See also: Financial statements · Balance sheet
Financial reportingWe are filling in the statement of cash flows. Do we record the corporate profit tax and property tax paid during the year under operating activities?
The statement of cash flows form in the Regulation approved by Order No. 181 (Appendix 4) has a separate "Taxation" section for taxes:
| Line | Name |
|---|---|
| 190 | Corporate profit tax paid |
| 200 | Other taxes paid |
| 210 | Total taxes paid (190 + 200) |
| 220 | Total net cash inflow/outflow from financial and economic activities |
Line 220 is found by subtracting total taxes paid (210) from the results of operating (050), investing (100) and financing (180) activities. NAS No. 9 also requires cash flows arising from taxes on income to be disclosed separately (paragraph 26).
One subtle point: paragraph 11 of NAS No. 9 lists payments of taxes relating to operating activities among payments that may be included in operating cash flows. But the form in the Regulation approved by Order No. 181 has a separate section for taxes, so when filling in the form, enter them in lines 190–200 and do not add them a second time to other operating payments (line 040).
Example (prepared by the author, in thousands of soums, amounts are illustrative). "Asaka avtoservis" LLC:
| Line | Amount |
|---|---|
| 050 Net cash inflow from operating activities | 120,000 |
| 100 Net cash outflow from investing activities | 45,000 |
| 180 Net cash outflow from financing activities | 20,000 |
| 190 Corporate profit tax paid | 14,000 |
| 200 Other taxes paid (property tax) | 3,600 |
| 210 Total taxes paid | 14,000 + 3,600 = 17,600 |
| 220 Total net cash inflow | 120,000 − 45,000 − 20,000 − 17,600 = 37,400 |
Practical tip: list tax payments from the bank statement separately by type of tax — it is easy to fill in lines 190 and 200 from that list.
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181, paragraph 9, Appendix 4; NAS No. 9 "Statement of Cash Flows", paragraphs 11 and 26.
See also: Statement of cash flows · Financial statement forms from 2025: balance sheet, financial results, equity and cash flows (Order No. 181)
Import and exportWe export dried fruit and want to charge VAT at 0 percent. Which documents confirm this, and when do we submit them?
For exports the VAT rate is 0 percent. Under the Tax Code, in the cases provided for in Chapter 36 the rate is set at 0 percent (Article 258, Part Two). The zero rate applies, in particular, when selling goods exported from the territory of Uzbekistan under the export customs procedure (Article 260, Part One, item 1). In the CCD this procedure is shown with code 10 (CCD filling Instruction, Appendix 3).
When they are submitted: documents confirming the right to apply the zero rate are submitted together with the tax return (Article 260, last part).
Which documents (Article 261, Part One, full list): 1. The contract or a copy of it certified in the established manner. 2. The cargo customs declaration that is the basis for taking the goods out of the customs territory of Uzbekistan; and for goods sold to foreign countries on national and foreign electronic trading platforms, the documents that are the basis for taking them out. 3. The goods' accompanying documents bearing the mark of the customs authority at the border crossing point confirming that the vehicle crossed the customs border.
Additional rules (Article 261):
| Situation | Rule |
|---|---|
| The customs authorities provided the tax authorities with electronic information in real time that the goods crossed the border | This information is the basis for confirming the export (Part Two) |
| The export was made through an intermediary (authorised agent) | The principal additionally submits the agency or commission agreement (a copy of it) |
| Other documents depending on the type of activity | The list and the procedure for submitting them are approved by the Cabinet of Ministers (last part) |
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are illustrative). "Chortoq bog'" LLC shipped dried apricots worth 50,000 US dollars to a buyer in Kazakhstan. At month-end the accountant put together the document folder as follows:
| Document | Status |
|---|---|
| Copy of the contract | Certified |
| CCD (procedure code 10) | Available |
| Accompanying documents with the border-crossing mark | Available |
These documents were submitted together with the VAT return, and the export turnover was shown at the 0 percent rate.
Practical tip: open a separate folder for each export shipment and put the contract, the CCD and the accompanying documents into it on the day of shipment — you will not have to search for them at month-end.
Source: Tax Code, Articles 258, 260 and 261; Instruction on the procedure for filling in the cargo customs declaration, Appendix 3.
See also: Export (customs procedure) · VAT
Import and exportThe goods have arrived, but some documents have not yet arrived for reasons beyond our control. Can we file an incomplete declaration, and how much time do we have afterwards?
Under certain conditions you can. If the declarant or customs broker, for reasons beyond their control, does not have all the necessary information, an incomplete cargo customs declaration may be filed, provided the goods can be identified (Customs Code, Article 269, Part One).
In which cases (Article 269, Part Two, with reference to Part Two of Article 22): - "v" — goods for which customs payments were paid on the basis of a provisional customs value; - "d" — goods for which the necessary documents (except documents of a permissive nature) and information have not been submitted; - "ye" — goods cleared under the release for free circulation (import) procedure with permission to defer or pay customs payments in instalments.
Conditions: 1. A written undertaking to submit the missing information and a fully completed declaration is attached to the declaration. The deadline is no more than sixty calendar days from the day the declaration is accepted, unless the law provides for a different period (Part Three). 2. Customs payments are calculated and paid in the same way as when a complete declaration is filed (Part Four). 3. Goods cleared with an incomplete declaration are deemed conditionally released (Article 22, Part Two).
An important restriction: if the missing document is a certificate of conformity or a sanitary and epidemiological conclusion, using, selling or otherwise disposing of the goods is prohibited (Article 22, Part Four).
Example (prepared by the author). "Bekobod plast" LLC received granules, but the supplier's quality passport was delayed. The firm filed an incomplete declaration and wrote an undertaking to submit the passport within 30 days. When the passport arrived, a complete declaration was filed.
Practical tip: put the date from the undertaking into your calendar and ask the supplier to speed up the document by courier — missing the deadline prolongs the problems of the goods' conditional status.
Source: Customs Code, Articles 22 and 269.
See also: Cargo customs declaration · Customs clearance
Import and exportEvery week we bring in the same plastic granules from the same factory under one contract. Can we file one declaration for all of them instead of a separate declaration for each consignment?
You can — there is a periodic cargo customs declaration for this (Customs Code, Article 270).
The goods must be moved regularly by the same person, and the following must be the same for the goods (Article 270, Part One): 1. country of origin; 2. physical characteristics; 3. quality; 4. manufacturer; 5. the ten-digit level of the code under the Commodity Nomenclature of Foreign Economic Activity.
What "regular movement" means (Part Two): moving such goods more than once within sixty calendar days, from the same consignor's address to the same consignee's address, under one contract (agreement, arrangement) and under the same conditions. In this case one declaration is filed for all goods over a certain period.
The limit: this procedure must not lead to a breach of the maximum temporary storage period or of the deadlines for paying customs payments (same part). Goods cleared with a periodic declaration are deemed conditionally released (Article 22, Part Two).
Example (prepared by the author).
| Consignment | Situation | Included in the periodic declaration? |
|---|---|---|
| Consignments 1–7 | One factory, one contract, the same 10-digit code | Yes |
| Consignment 8 | The factory sent granules from another manufacturer | No, separate declaration |
| Consignment 9 | Arrived under another, newly concluded contract | No, separate declaration |
"Chirchiq qadoq" LLC included 7 matching consignments within 60 days in one periodic declaration (release for free circulation, procedure code 40 — CCD filling Instruction, Appendix 3), and filed separate declarations for the two non-matching consignments.
Practical tip: fix the manufacturer and the commodity code firmly in the contract with the supplier — even one substitution breaks the periodic procedure.
Source: Customs Code, Articles 22 and 270; Instruction on the procedure for filling in the cargo customs declaration, Appendix 3.
See also: Cargo customs declaration · Declarant
Import and exportDo we credit the VAT paid when buying raw materials for our export products? The foreign buyer has not yet transferred all the money.
You do, but not in full at once: in proportion to the foreign currency proceeds received. Article 266 of the Tax Code combines several rules here.
- General conditions. To credit input VAT, the conditions in Part One must be met simultaneously. Those directly relevant to exports: the turnover must be subject to tax, including at the zero rate (Part One, item 1), and there must be an extract from a bank document confirming that the foreign buyer has paid for the exported goods (Part One, item 5; except for the cases in Part Three).
- Proportion rule. VAT on purchases used for goods sold for export is credited in proportion to the foreign currency proceeds from the export of goods received in your bank account in Uzbekistan (Part Two).
Exception — disciplined exporters (Part Three): if you have been included in the category of disciplined taxpayers who, over the last year, have ensured timely receipt of foreign currency proceeds and have no overdue receivables under export contracts, VAT is credited regardless of the receipt of proceeds. However, if the proceeds or part of them are not received within one hundred and eighty calendar days from the day the goods were released under the "export" customs procedure, the credited VAT or the relevant part of it is written off in the established manner.
If the export is made through an intermediary, VAT is credited in proportion to the amount of foreign currency proceeds received in the account of the intermediary, the authorised agent or the taxpayer (Part Four).
Example (prepared by the author). "Xonqa tolasi" LLC exported yarn. The buyer transferred part of the contract amount and promised to pay the rest the following month. The firm is not in the disciplined taxpayer category. Input VAT on the raw materials bought for this batch is credited step by step as follows:
| Stage | Input VAT | Basis |
|---|---|---|
| Goods shipped, proceeds not yet received | Not credited: there is no bank extract confirming payment | Part One, item 5; Part Two |
| Part of the proceeds received | Credited in proportion to the proceeds received | Part Two |
| The rest of the proceeds received | The remaining part is also credited in proportion to the proceeds received | Part Two |
| If the firm were in the disciplined category | It would be credited regardless of the receipt of proceeds; if the proceeds were not received within 180 days, the relevant part would be written off | Part Three |
Note: Article 266 of the Tax Code does not give a formula specifying the ratio of which indicators the proportion is calculated by. Therefore clarify the calculation method with your tax authority in advance and record it in your accounting policy.
Practical tip: keep a table for each export contract: amount shipped, proceeds received, date and number of the bank extract, VAT credited. When filling in the VAT return, this table helps check the calculation.
Source: Tax Code, Article 266.
See also: VAT · Agency agreement
Import and exportCustoms took a sample to check the classification of our goods and ordered an expert examination. Will the goods be stuck in the warehouse until the result is ready?
They do not have to be. Even before the result of an expert examination ordered before release is received, the customs authority releases the goods if two conditions are met (Customs Code, Article 271¹, Part One): 1. the customs payments calculated in the cargo customs declaration have been paid; 2. security has been provided for the amount that may have to be paid additionally based on the result of the examination.
Exception: if signs are identified indicating that prohibitions or restrictions may apply to the goods and the declarant does not provide evidence that they have been complied with, the goods are not released (Part Two).
Rules to know about the expert examination:
| Issue | Rule | Basis |
|---|---|---|
| Purpose | To check the correctness of the goods' classification, and to identify goods in processed products and for compliance with intellectual property rights | Article 208 |
| Restriction on sampling | Samples are not taken if this would hinder customs control or change the characteristics of the goods | Article 211 |
| Independence of the expert | The expert is independent of the body that ordered the examination and of the interested parties | Article 212 |
| Maximum period (depending on complexity) | First category — up to three working days; second category — up to five working days; third category — up to ten working days; fourth category — up to twenty working days | Article 215 |
| In case of an offence | In cases of breach of customs legislation, the examination must not exceed thirty days | Article 215 |
Example (prepared by the author, amounts are illustrative). "Jizzax elektro" LLC paid the 18 million soums of customs payments calculated under the declaration. The inspector said that if the goods fell under another code, an additional payment of 7 million soums might arise. The firm provided security for 7 million soums and took the goods to its warehouse the same day. The examination confirmed the code in the declaration, and no additional payment was required.
The methods of security are listed in Article 339 of the Customs Code; agree on a convenient one with your bank in advance.
Source: Customs Code, Articles 208, 211, 212, 215, 271¹ and 339.
See also: Customs clearance · Bank guarantee
FinanceAn acquaintance wants to sell his small bakery. He says: "It leaves 60 million soums of net profit a year, I'll sell it for 300 million soums." Is this price expensive or cheap, and how can I estimate it?
The simplest way to value a small business is to answer two questions: "how much profit does this business make a year, and what minimum annual return do I expect on my own money?" If the profit stays roughly the same from year to year, a rough value is found like this:
Value ≈ stable annual profit ÷ the annual return you expect.
The 300 million soums the seller is asking means a 20% annual return on 60 million of profit (60 ÷ 300). Now ask yourself: how much would you earn if you put this money somewhere else, and how risky is a small bakery? The higher the risk, the higher the return you expect, and so the lower the price you would agree to pay.
But first the profit has to be "cleaned". Very often the owner of a small business works from dawn to dusk himself and pays himself no salary. If you buy it, you will have to hire someone for that work or spend your own time.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The owner of "Tandir nafasi" kneads the dough himself every day. If a baker doing this work has to be paid 2 million soums a month, that is 24 million a year. The real profit, that is, the profit left without the owner's labour: 60 − 24 = 36 million soums.
| Annual return you expect | If profit is taken as 60 million | If profit is taken as 36 million |
|---|---|---|
| 20% | 300 million | 180 million |
| 25% | 240 million | 144 million |
| 30% | 200 million | 120 million |
As you can see, 300 million is justified only when two conditions hold together: the profit really is 60 million, and a 20% annual return is enough for you. If the owner's labour is taken into account, at the same 20% the business is worth 180 million soums.
Before negotiating the price, check:
- Where does the profit figure come from: do the bank statements, cash register data and tax reports match each other?
- Will the tandir oven, the dough mixer and other equipment need replacing in the coming years? If so, deduct that cost from the annual profit too.
- Are the premises rented? For how long is the lease, and in whose name?
- Who are the customers attached to: the bakery or the owner himself?
This method is only a rough estimate: if the profit is growing or fluctuating, discounting the cash flows of future years gives a more accurate result.
See also: Discounting · Net present value (NPV) · Time value of money
FinanceThe plan was to produce 10,000 units a month at a cost of 120 million soums. In fact we produced 12,000 units, and costs came to 132 million. The manager is unhappy: "costs went over by 10%". Is he right?
No, this comparison is wrong. You produced 20% more output, so it is natural for volume-related costs — in this workshop, raw materials and piece-rate wages — to rise. The right question is: "how much should it have cost to produce 12,000 units?" For this a flexible budget is prepared: the plan is recalculated for the actual volume and then compared with the actual costs.
To do this, the planned costs have to be split in two: those that change with volume (how much per unit) and those that stay the same month after month regardless of volume.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The monthly plan of the "Ko'k gumbaz qadoq" workshop:
- raw materials: 6,000 soums per unit;
- piece-rate wages: 2,000 soums per unit;
- fixed costs (rent, management): 40 million soums a month.
For 10,000 units: 60 + 20 + 40 = 120 million soums. For 12,000 units: 72 + 24 + 40 = 136 million soums.
| Item | Original plan (10,000 units) | Flexible plan (12,000 units) | Actual | Variance (actual − flexible) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Raw materials | 60 | 72 | 74 | +2 (overspending) |
| Piece-rate wages | 20 | 24 | 20 | −4 (saved) |
| Fixed costs | 40 | 40 | 38 | −2 (saved) |
| Total, million soums | 120 | 136 | 132 | −4 |
The result is the opposite of what the manager thought: taking volume into account, the workshop saved 4 million soums. But the table also shows one real problem: 2 million extra was spent on raw materials. Now the reason has to be found: did the price go up or did waste increase?
Do not rush to praise the 4 million saving on piece-rate wages either: if wages were not paid at the planned rate, this may be a calculation error or a delayed payment. A large variance is checked even when it is favourable.
Practical tip: keep the monthly budget in Excel with two columns, one for "per unit" rates and one for fixed amounts. Then, as soon as you enter the actual volume, the flexible plan calculates itself.
See also: Budget · Costing (cost calculation) · Cost (cost of production)
FinanceOur workshop makes tables, chairs and shelving units. After overheads are allocated, the shelving units show a loss. If we stop making shelving units, will the company's profit increase?
Do not rush: in most cases such a decision does not increase profit but reduces it. The reason is that this workshop's overheads — rent, salaries of management staff and security — do not disappear when shelving units are stopped. They now fall on the remaining products.
The right question: how much money do the shelving units leave towards overheads after covering their own variable costs (materials, piece-rate wages, packaging)? This amount is called the contribution margin.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Monthly figures of the "Chinor mebel" workshop, million soums. Overheads are 120 million and are allocated in proportion to revenue:
| Product | Revenue | Variable costs | Contribution margin | Allocated overheads | Result in the report |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Tables | 200 | 120 | 80 | 53.33 | +26.67 |
| Chairs | 150 | 90 | 60 | 40.00 | +20.00 |
| Shelving units | 100 | 75 | 25 | 26.67 | −1.67 |
| Total | 450 | 285 | 165 | 120 | +45 |
If shelving units are stopped: the contribution margin is 80 + 60 = 140 million, while overheads remain the same 120 million. Profit falls from 45 to 20 million soums. Even though the shelving units show a "loss", they were in fact contributing 25 million soums every month towards covering overheads.
When stopping shelving units may make sense:
- If part of the overheads exists only because of the shelving units and really disappears when they are stopped. For example, if a separate warehouse for shelving units is rented for 10 million soums, profit becomes 140 − 110 = 30 million. This is still less than the current 45 million, so even in this case keeping the shelving units is more profitable.
- If the freed-up machines and workers' time go to an even more profitable product. For example, if demand for tables is unlimited and extra tables instead of shelving units give more than 25 million soums of contribution margin.
- If the contribution margin of shelving units is negative, that is, they do not even cover their own variable costs.
Allocating overheads is needed for accounting, but for the question "which product do we close?" allocated costs are misleading.
See also: Production overheads · Break-even point · Cost (cost of production)
FinanceWe have 150 million soums for investment and four projects, but the money is not enough for all of them. The net present value of each has been calculated. Which ones do we choose?
When money is limited, the goal is to maximise not the net present value (NPV) of a single project but the total NPV of the selected set of projects. Two methods are used for this, and they sometimes give different answers.
The first method: calculate how much NPV each project gives per 1 soum of investment (NPV ÷ investment) and choose starting from the most efficient. The second method: go through all the combinations that fit.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Oltin vodiy savdo" is looking at four projects; NPV has already been calculated with discounting, million soums:
| Project | Investment | NPV | NPV per 1 soum |
|---|---|---|---|
| A — new shop | 100 | 30 | 0.30 |
| B — refrigerated display cases | 50 | 20 | 0.40 |
| C — online ordering system | 50 | 18 | 0.36 |
| D — delivery vehicle | 60 | 15 | 0.25 |
Under the first method, B (50) is chosen first, then C (50). Neither A (100) nor D (60) fits into the remaining 50 million. Total NPV = 38 million, and 50 million stays idle.
Now let us compare the combinations that fit into 150 million:
| Combination | Investment | Total NPV |
|---|---|---|
| A + B | 150 | 50 |
| A + C | 150 | 48 |
| B + C | 100 | 38 |
| B + D | 110 | 35 |
| C + D | 110 | 33 |
The best choice is A + B: a total NPV of 50 million. Even though A is in third place by "efficiency per 1 soum", it uses the money in full.
Conclusions:
- If projects cannot be split (you cannot open half a shop), ranking by the ratio alone is not enough: go through the combinations. With four or five projects this is easy to do by hand or in Excel.
- Take the leftover money into account too: in B + C the remaining 50 million could be put on deposit, but deposit interest is usually lower than the discount rate, so this money hardly increases NPV.
- If projects depend on each other (for example, the online system is needed only if the new shop is opened), evaluate them as one package rather than separately.
See also: Net present value (NPV) · Internal rate of return (IRR) · Capital investments
Finance55 percent of our revenue comes from one large customer. Working with them is convenient, and they pay well. Even so, the accountant calls this a risk. How do we measure this risk?
The accountant is right: this is customer concentration risk. If one customer leaves, demands a sharp price cut or delays payment, the whole company suddenly finds itself in difficulty. It can be measured with three simple calculations.
- The share of the largest customer and the share of the three largest. This is the quickest indicator.
- The sum of squared shares. You take each customer's share in percent, square it and add them up. The bigger the result, the fewer customers the revenue depends on. If all customers are equal, the result is small; if there is only one customer, it reaches the maximum value — 10,000.
- A "what if they leave?" stress test. This is the most important one.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The annual revenue of "Sarbon qadoq" is 1,000 million soums. Customer shares: 55%, 15%, 10%, 8%, 7%, 5%.
- Largest customer — 55%, three largest — 80%.
- Sum of squares: 3,025 + 225 + 100 + 64 + 49 + 25 = 3,488.
Stress test. The contribution margin is 30 percent of revenue, fixed costs are 200 million soums a year.
| Situation | Revenue | Contribution margin (30%) | Fixed costs | Profit |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Now | 1,000 | 300 | 200 | +100 |
| If the large customer leaves | 450 | 135 | 200 | −65 |
So if one customer leaves, instead of 100 million of profit there is a 65 million loss. Fixed costs do not fall quickly.
Ways to reduce the risk:
- Look for new customers on purpose: for example, plan to reduce the largest customer's share by 5 percentage points every year.
- A long-term contract with the large customer: it should set out volumes, the procedure for price changes and payment terms.
- Monitor their debt separately: set a receivables limit and take action at once if it is exceeded.
- A cash reserve: a reserve covering at least several months of fixed costs gives time to find a new customer if this one leaves.
Banks also look at this when lending: a company whose revenue depends on one customer looks riskier as a borrower.
See also: Diversification · Credit risk · Accounts receivable
InsuranceOur office building is valued on the market at 1.5 billion soums. When insuring the building, should we simply set the sum insured at 1.5 billion soums as well?
Here the market price is not the right yardstick. The key question in building insurance is: "how much money will be needed to rebuild the building after a fire or another event?" The market price also includes other things: the land plot, the location, the surrounding infrastructure. Land does not burn and is not lost in a flood, so insuring its value may be pointless.
How the sum insured is set depends on the contract conditions, so read how the value is determined in the policy. The general logic is as follows.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Ipak yo'li servis" building has an area of 400 m². The estimated cost of constructing a building of this type is 2.2 million soums per m². We add another 10% for removing debris and design work.
- Rebuilding: 400 × 2.2 = 880 million soums.
- Demolition, clean-up, design (10%): 88 million soums.
- Total reinstatement value: 968 million soums.
The rest of the 1.5 billion soum market price is mainly the price of the land and the location.
| Sum insured | Annual premium (hypothetical rate 0.2%) | Risk |
|---|---|---|
| 1,500 million (market price) | 3.0 million | Overpaying for the part that does not burn |
| 968 million (reinstatement value) | 1.936 million | Appropriate sum |
| 400 million (carrying amount on the balance sheet) | 0.8 million | Underinsurance |
Insuring at the market price means about 1.06 million soums of extra premium a year, while in the event of a loss the compensation still does not exceed the actual loss.
There is also the opposite mistake: insuring the building at its carrying amount on the balance sheet. If the policy has a proportional cover condition and the loss amounts to 300 million soums, the compensation will be about 300 × 400 ÷ 968 ≈ 124 million soums. The company covers the rest itself.
Practical tip: determine the reinstatement value with an independent valuer or a construction cost estimator, and review it every year when renewing the policy.
See also: Sum insured · Insurance rate · Carrying amount (net book value)
InsuranceWe insured our warehouse for 400 million soums three years ago and have been renewing the policy every year for the same sum. Is there any risk in this?
Yes, there is a risk that is hard to notice but serious. The prices of building materials, wages and equipment keep rising, while the sum in the policy stays the same. As a result, the warehouse is insured for a smaller percentage year after year. This is especially dangerous if the policy has a proportional cover condition: compensation is reduced even for a partial loss.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The reinstatement value of the "Yashil dala agro" warehouse was 400 million soums three years ago. Suppose construction costs rose by a hypothetical 10% every year:
| Year | Reinstatement value, million soums | Sum in the policy | Insured share |
|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | 400.0 | 400 | 100% |
| 1 | 440.0 | 400 | 90.9% |
| 2 | 484.0 | 400 | 82.6% |
| 3 | 532.4 | 400 | 75.1% |
Now a 100 million soum loss occurs in the third year. If the policy has a proportional cover condition, the compensation is about 100 × 400 ÷ 532.4 ≈ 75.1 million soums. That is, simply because it changed nothing, the company bears nearly 25 million soums of the loss itself.
To avoid this:
- Recalculate the reinstatement value every year before renewing the policy: area × current construction cost, plus clean-up and design costs.
- Ask the insurer whether there is a condition for automatic indexation of the sum or one that allows the sum to rise up to a certain limit during the year. Such conditions differ from insurer to insurer, so read their exact wording in the policy.
- If a major repair or extension of the warehouse is carried out during the year, inform the insurer at once and increase the sum.
- Estimate the difference in premium: raising the sum from 400 to 532 million raises the premium in roughly the same proportion, but this may be much smaller than the risk of losing 25 million soums.
This also applies to equipment and stocks of goods: their prices change too, while the sum insured does not update itself.
See also: Inflation · Sum insured · Insurance policy
InsuranceA water pipe burst in our warehouse and some of the goods got wet. The goods are insured. What should we do now, and in what order?
At such a moment a hasty mistake can make it harder to get compensation. Every policy sets out what to do when an insured event occurs: whom to notify, by what method and within what time. So one of the first steps is to open the policy and read it. The general practical procedure is as follows.
- Stop and reduce the damage. Shut off the water and move the dry goods to a safe place. This is in your own interest too: every item saved reduces the loss.
- Notify the insurer by the method stated in the policy. Even if you have phoned, also send a written notice and keep a copy.
- Record everything. Take photos and videos of the wet goods, the burst pipe and the condition of the warehouse.
- Do not throw away or sell the damaged goods until the insurer's representative has seen them, unless he permits otherwise.
- Draw up a report: what was damaged, how much and in what condition, signed by the members of the committee.
- Carry out a stocktake: compare the balance after the event with the balance in the records. The amount of the loss comes from this comparison.
- Collect the documents: purchase documents for the goods (invoices), warehouse cards, information on who installed or repaired the pipe.
- Identify the party that may be at fault. For example, if a contractor recently replaced the pipe, preserve the right to claim against him: the insurer that paid compensation may later recover from the party at fault under this right.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Bahor tekstil" warehouse held 80 million soums worth of fabric. The storekeeper immediately shut off the water and moved part of the fabric to a dry room; the movers were paid 2 million soums for this. As a result, 50 million soums worth of fabric was saved and the loss came to 30 million soums. Had nothing been done, the loss could have reached the full 80 million. Such costs incurred to reduce the loss may also be covered, but check this in the policy conditions and keep the receipts.
Keep in mind: if the policy has a deductible, compensation is paid for the part above it; the exact amount becomes known after the insurer's calculation.
See also: Insured event · Inventory count (stocktaking) · Subrogation
InsuranceAt the end of the policy there is a section in small print called "exclusions". The agent said "it only lists ordinary things". Do we still need to read it carefully?
Yes, this is exactly one of the most important parts of the policy. The first page of the policy says what is insured, while the exclusions section says in which cases the insurer will not pay. Disputes over compensation often arise from this very section.
When reading the exclusions, it is convenient to group them. The checklist I recommend consists of five questions:
- Which causes are not covered? It matters which event caused the loss: a sudden event and a gradual process may be treated differently in the policy.
- Which property is not covered? Check separately what your policy says about cash, documents and property in open areas.
- In what situations does the policy "fall asleep"? Look for what happens if the building stands empty for a long time or the alarm is switched off.
- What obligations are required of you? If the policy requires an alarm, a fire extinguisher or storing goods above the floor and this is not met, compensation may be reduced or refused.
- Which types of loss are not covered? Even if the property is covered, profit lost because of a business stoppage may not be included in the policy.
Example (prepared by the author). After reading its policy, the "Shirin non" café made the following table. The third column contains questions to be put to the insurer in writing:
| Situation | Where to look in the policy | Question to the insurer |
|---|---|---|
| The fridge broke down from wear and the food inside spoiled | Exclusions of causes, equipment breakdown | Are a breakdown caused by wear and the resulting food loss covered? |
| A thief broke in at night; the alarm was under repair that day | Obligations, protection systems condition | If the alarm is under repair, how should we notify you? |
| After a fire the café stayed closed for a month | Types of loss covered | Is lost revenue covered, or only property? |
| The takings in the cash register were stolen | Property exclusions | Is cash covered, and with what limit? |
Practical tips:
- Rely on the text of the policy, not on the agent's verbal promise. Get important answers in writing.
- If a risk that matters to you falls under an exclusion, ask whether it can be added to the policy with an extra condition and compare the price.
- When comparing offers from several insurers, look not only at the premium but also at the list of exclusions: a cheap policy is often cheap because of more exclusions.
See also: Insurance policy · Insured event · Deductible (franchise)
InsuranceThree companies sent offers to insure our shop, and one is much cheaper than the others. Can we just choose the cheapest one?
Choosing on the annual premium alone can be a mistake. The real price of insurance is the premium plus the part you bear yourself when a loss occurs (deductible, amounts above the limit, exclusions). Besides, the insurer must actually be able to pay, and on time, when a loss occurs.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Nur savdo" shop received three offers. Based on the shop's experience, there is roughly one small incident a year, with a loss of around 6 million soums (a broken display window, a water leak).
| Offer | Annual premium | Unconditional deductible | Expected annual cost |
|---|---|---|---|
| A | 8.0 million | 2 million | 8.0 + 2.0 = 10.0 million |
| B | 6.5 million | 10 million | 6.5 + 6.0 = 12.5 million |
| C | 7.2 million | 3 million | 7.2 + 3.0 = 10.2 million |
Offer B looks the cheapest, but because of the 10 million soum deductible, the usual 6 million soum loss stays entirely with the shop. As a result, B turns out the most expensive. A and C are almost equal, and now they need to be compared on other criteria.
Things to check besides price:
- Scope of cover: which risks are included and which are excluded. A cheap offer may be cheap because of narrow cover.
- Limits: do the limits for the whole policy and for individual types of property (goods, equipment, cash) match your values?
- Financial stability: check the insurer's published financial statements, its capital and that it has a licence to operate.
- Payment practice: ask acquaintances, partners and other entrepreneurs how it paid when a loss occurred: did it pay on time and without unjustified refusals?
- Service: how quickly is the loss assessed, how clearly are the document requirements written, does it have a representative in your region?
Practical tip: put the offers into one table and compare each by "premium + your expected own share". Then choose among the two or three with similar prices on the basis of reliability. Choosing an insurer that cannot pay in order to save a few hundred thousand soums defeats the whole purpose of insurance.
See also: Insurer · Deductible (franchise) · Insurance premium
BankingFor now we pay employees their salaries in cash from the cash desk. The bank has offered a "payroll project": salaries are transferred to each employee's card, and a commission is charged for this. Is it worth it for us?
To decide, you need to count not only the bank commission but also the hidden costs of paying in cash. With cash payments, the money is withdrawn from the bank, transported, kept in the cash desk, counted and handed to each employee against a payroll sheet. Each of these takes time, money and risk.
Bank tariffs and conditions vary, so redo the calculation below with your own bank's tariff.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Oqtepa mebel" has 40 employees, and the monthly payroll (the amount paid out to employees) is 240 million soums.
| Cost | Paying in cash | Transferring to cards |
|---|---|---|
| Bank commission | Cash withdrawal: hypothetically 0.5%, i.e. 1.2 million | Transfer: hypothetically 0.3%, i.e. 0.72 million |
| Cashier's and accountant's time | Bringing the money, counting, paying out against the payroll sheet: hypothetically 1.0 million | Sending the list to the bank: hypothetically 0.2 million |
| Transporting and keeping the money | Transport and security: hypothetically 0.4 million | Not needed |
| Total, per month | 2.6 million | 0.92 million |
Under these conditions, transferring to cards is about 1.7 million soums a month cheaper. In addition, there are benefits that do not fit into the table:
- Risk falls: no large amount of cash is kept in the cash desk, and there is no risk of loss or theft while transporting it.
- Errors fall: disputes over shortfalls when counting cash and over overpaid amounts disappear.
- A trail remains: every payment is visible in the bank statement, which is convenient for internal control and inspections.
- Convenient for employees: the salary arrives on the card on the set day, and there is no need to queue during working hours.
Questions to ask when agreeing with the bank:
- Who bears the commission: the company or the employee? How much do opening a card, annual servicing and cash withdrawals cost for employees?
- Does the commission fall or disappear if the number of employees or turnover exceeds a certain level?
- When does the salary reach the employee's card: the same day or the next day?
- How is the list sent: through the bank's software, or can a file be uploaded from the accounting software?
Cash may be more convenient for some employees. Explain to them in advance how to withdraw money from the card and where they can pay with it.
See also: Bank card · Cash collection · Wages (salary) · Internal control
BankingThe bank has offered a 1-year loan to buy equipment, with a lower interest rate than a long-term loan. The equipment pays for itself in about 2 years and will be in service for 5 years. Can we take the 1-year loan because it is cheaper?
This is a risky choice. There is a simple rule in finance: the term of the debt financing an asset should be close to the period over which the asset generates money. The equipment returns money gradually over several years, while a 1-year loan must be repaid in full within a year. The company has to find the difference elsewhere.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Sharq tikuv" is buying a sewing line for 600 million soums. The line generates net cash inflows of 25 million soums a month, 300 million soums a year. Two options; in both, the principal is repaid in equal instalments (the differentiated method):
| Indicator | 1-year loan, 20% a year | 5-year loan, 24% a year |
|---|---|---|
| Principal, per month | 50 million | 10 million |
| First month's payment (principal + interest) | 60 million | 22 million |
| Total payments in the first year | 665 million | 250.8 million |
| Inflows from the line in the first year | 300 million | 300 million |
| Result for the first year | −365 million | +49.2 million |
| Total interest over the whole term | 65 million | 366 million |
Yes, the amount of interest on the short loan is much smaller. But in the first year the company has to find another 365 million soums on top of the money the line generates. This money is taken from working capital: there may not be enough money for raw material purchases, salaries and taxes.
Companies often try to solve this problem with "at the end of the year we'll take a new loan and close the old one". This is refinancing risk: after a year the bank may refuse a new loan, raise the interest rate or ask for additional collateral. At that moment the company is forced to agree to expensive solutions.
When a short-term loan is appropriate:
- For working capital: if raw materials are bought, turned into products and sold within a few months.
- For a seasonal need: for example, to increase stocks of goods before the season.
- To cover a short gap when revenue is definitely expected.
For an asset that will serve for several years (in this example, the sewing line), compare the loan term with the cash flow from the asset: the monthly payment should not exceed the monthly inflow.
See also: Short-term bank loan · Long-term bank loan · Cash flow · Differentiated repayment
BankingThe bank has offered a 300 million soum credit line in two variants: "revolving" and "non-revolving". What is the difference, and which one suits us?
In both, the money drawn is repaid. The difference is in the limit: whether the repaid amount can be drawn again or not.
- In a non-revolving line, the total amount drawn does not exceed the limit. If you draw 200 million and then repay 150 million, you can now draw only 100 million: the limit is not restored by the amount repaid.
- In a revolving line, the limit applies to the outstanding debt. The money you repay is added back to the limit and can be drawn again.
The exact conditions differ from bank to bank and from contract to contract, so check in the contract how the limit is restored.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). A 300 million soum line was opened for "Gulzor ulgurji":
| Month | Transaction | Outstanding debt | Still available on a non-revolving line | Still available on a revolving line |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| January | 200 million drawn | 200 | 100 | 100 |
| March | 150 million repaid | 50 | 100 | 250 |
| April | Season: 180 million needed | — | Only 100 million can be drawn, 80 million short | 180 million drawn, balance 230 |
On a non-revolving line, in April the company will have to find 80 million soums elsewhere. On a revolving line, money can be drawn and repaid several times during the year.
Which suits when:
- A non-revolving line — for a one-off project: for example, construction or paying for equipment in stages. The money is drawn in stages, but there is no need to draw it again.
- A revolving line — for working capital: for trade or a seasonal business where goods are bought, sold, the money repaid and goods bought again.
Questions to look at in the contract:
- Is there a commission on the unused limit, and how is it calculated?
- Is a separate application and documents needed for each drawdown?
- How is the balance repaid when the line expires?
- In what cases can the bank reduce or suspend the limit?
The more flexible option may be more expensive, so compare the interest and commissions too.
See also: Credit line · Overdraft · Working capital (current assets)
BankingOur main customer has stopped paying. Over the next 3 months we may be unable to make our loan payments on time. When should we talk to the bank, and about what?
As early as possible, before a payment is late. Once arrears begin, the late payment interest provided for in the contract may be charged and your credit history may be damaged, and negotiating with the bank becomes harder. For a client who flags the problem in advance, the bank may offer to restructure the loan, but this is the bank's decision, not its obligation.
Prepare the following for the bank:
- The cause of the problem and how long it will last: correspondence with the customer, the customer's payment obligation.
- A cash flow forecast for the coming months: when and how much money will come in, and how much will go out.
- A specific proposal: which option suits the company and why.
Options that may be discussed with the bank:
- extending the loan term: the monthly payment falls, but total interest rises;
- temporarily paying only interest and deferring the principal;
- aligning the payment schedule with the revenue season;
- selling part of the collateral to reduce the debt.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Ohangaron qurilish" has 240 million soums of debt left, 12 more months, 24% a year, annuity payments:
| Option | Payment in the first months | Payment in later months | Total interest |
|---|---|---|---|
| Current terms: 12 months | 22.69 million | 22.69 million | 32.33 million |
| Extending the term to 24 months | 12.69 million | 12.69 million | 64.54 million |
| 3 months interest only, then 12 months annuity | 4.8 million | 22.69 million | 46.73 million |
For a three-month difficulty, the last option in the table (3 months interest only) is a better fit: in the first months the payment falls to 4.8 million soums, and total interest is much lower than when the term is doubled. Extending the term suits a problem that will last a long time.
Before signing a restructuring agreement, check: do the new interest rate, any extra commission, and the collateral and guarantee conditions change? Also ask whether the option to repay the debt early is kept, in case surplus money appears once the problem is solved.
See also: Annuity repayment · Late payment interest (penalty interest) · Credit history · Non-performing loan
BankingIf we win the tender, 100 million soums is required as security for performance of the contract: we either transfer the money to the customer's account or bring a bank guarantee. Which is cheaper for us?
Both serve the same purpose: the customer makes sure it can cover its losses if you do not perform the contract. But the cost to the company is different.
- Transferring the money. The money is tied up for the whole period of the security. Its cost is the income that could have been earned with this money, or the interest on a loan taken in its place. This is called opportunity cost.
- A bank guarantee. The bank gives the customer a written undertaking: "if our client does not perform, I will pay up to the specified amount". The company pays the bank a commission. The bank may require collateral or the blocking of part of the money for this, which changes the cost.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Mehnat yo'li" LLC has to provide 100 million soums of security for a 6-month contract.
| Option | Calculation | Cost for 6 months |
|---|---|---|
| Transferring spare money (it would earn 18% a year on deposit) | 100 × 18% ÷ 2 | 9.0 million |
| Transferring money from a loan (24% a year) | 100 × 24% ÷ 2 | 12.0 million |
| Bank guarantee (3% a year commission + 0.5 million arrangement) | 100 × 3% ÷ 2 + 0.5 | 2.0 million |
Under these conditions the guarantee is 7–10 million soums cheaper. In addition, working capital is freed up and used to buy raw materials.
Cases where a guarantee may turn out expensive:
- If the bank blocks a large part of the guarantee amount in your account: then the money is tied up anyway, and the commission is paid on top.
- If the guarantee term is short and the commission has a minimum amount.
- If there is no reliable collateral and the bank requires a costly collateral valuation or insurance.
One more difference: if money has been transferred, getting it back depends on the customer's action; a guarantee, however, stops being valid once the term written in it expires (read the exact condition in the text of the guarantee). If you do not perform the contract, the loss falls on you in both cases: the bank that paid under the guarantee will then claim this amount from you.
See also: Bank guarantee · Security for obligations and payments · Opportunity cost
StatisticsWe studied the 10 most successful cafés in our city: most of them have a large hall and an expensive interior. So if we also make a large hall and an expensive interior, will we succeed?
Such a conclusion resembles "survivorship bias". You are only looking at the cafés that did not close. Among those that closed there may also have been many cafés with large halls and expensive interiors, but they are no longer visible. To find the reason for success, the survivors must be compared with those that closed.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Three years ago 50 cafés opened in the city. Today 20 of them are operating and 30 have closed.
| Type of café | Opened | Survived | Closed | Survival share |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Large hall, expensive interior | 35 | 14 | 21 | 40% |
| Small hall, simple interior | 15 | 6 | 9 | 40% |
| Total | 50 | 20 | 30 | 40% |
Among the survivors, those with large halls are 70% (14 out of 20) — this is your observation. But among those that closed they are also exactly 70% (21 out of 30). That is, because there were many cafés with large halls, there are many of them among the survivors too. The probability of survival is the same in both groups — 40%. According to these data, the size of the hall does not predict success.
This mistake is common in business:
- Reading only the biographies of successful entrepreneurs and saying "they get up early, so getting up early makes you rich".
- Surveying only the remaining customers and concluding "everyone is satisfied": the dissatisfied have already left.
- Analysing only the goods currently on sale and saying "goods in this category sell well": the ones that did not sell well have already been removed from the range.
How to protect yourself:
- Always ask: "Who did not make it onto this list?"
- Try to find information about those that closed, left or were removed too: old lists, archives, conversations with former customers.
- Always calculate the share relative to the starting group: not "how many among the survivors" but "how many of those who started survived".
See also: Sample · Population · Correlation
StatisticsLast month we reprimanded the heads of the 3 branches that performed worst against the plan, and this month their results improved. We rewarded the 3 best, and theirs declined. So is a reprimand more effective than a reward?
So far there are no grounds to say so. The statistical phenomenon of "regression to the mean" may have been at work here. Each month's result consists of two parts: the branch's permanent level and random factors, that is, circumstances specific to that month that need not repeat the next month. A branch that shows a very bad result in one month has often simply been unlucky. The next month chance may not be so bad, and the result moves back towards its usual level without any measures at all. With the best result it is the other way round.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The average annual plan fulfilment of six branches is around 100%. Results for two months:
| Branch | October | November | Measures |
|---|---|---|---|
| Chilonzor | 78% | 94% | Reprimand |
| Sergeli | 82% | 97% | Reprimand |
| Yunusobod | 85% | 92% | Reprimand |
| Olmazor | 112% | 103% | Reward |
| Mirobod | 116% | 108% | Reward |
| Shayxontohur | 119% | 101% | Reward |
The average of the "worst three" rose from 81.7% to 94.3%, and that of the "best three" fell from 115.7% to 104%. But the overall average of the six branches barely changed: 98.7% and 99.2%. Every branch simply moved closer to its usual level.
How to check whether the measures really worked:
- Compare the result not with a single month but with the branch's own long-term average.
- Set up a comparison group: apply the measure to some branches with similar results and not to others. If both groups improve equally, the cause is not the measure.
- Observe for several months: if the measure really has an effect, the improvement will be lasting.
This phenomenon occurs elsewhere too: the day after the day with the most rejects is better, and a new advertising campaign looks "effective" because it started after the worst month. Before making a decision, ask: "Would it not have happened anyway, even if we had done nothing?"
See also: Arithmetic mean · Standard deviation · Time series
StatisticsIn our workshop 400 parts are inspected every day, and usually about 3% are rejects. Today there were 20 rejects (5%). Should we call the foreman and stop the machine, or is this an ordinary fluctuation?
This question can be answered with a control chart. The idea is simple: even when a process is stable, the daily reject share fluctuates randomly. Statistics calculates the usual limits of this fluctuation. If a result goes outside the limits or shows a strange pattern, it is suspected that something in the process has changed.
A simple formula for the reject share:
- average share p = 0.03;
- daily sample n = 400;
- standard deviation = √(p × (1 − p) ÷ n) = √(0.03 × 0.97 ÷ 400) ≈ 0.0085, that is, 0.85 percentage points.
In a widely used approach, the control limits are set at a distance of ± 3 standard deviations from the average.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). For the "Temir usta" workshop:
| Limit | Share | Out of 400 parts |
|---|---|---|
| Upper control limit (average + 3σ) | ≈ 5.56% | ≈ 22.2 parts |
| Warning level (average + 2σ) | ≈ 4.71% | ≈ 18.8 parts |
| Average | 3.00% | 12 parts |
| Lower control limit (average − 3σ) | ≈ 0.44% | ≈ 1.8 parts |
Today's 20 rejects are below the upper control limit (22), but above the warning level (19). So there are not enough grounds to stop the machine at once, but attention should be stepped up: watch tomorrow's result and check the work shift, the raw material batch and the condition of the tools.
Another useful sign is the sequence of results. If the process has not changed, the chances of being above or below the average on any day are roughly equal. The probability of being above the average 8 days in a row is 0.5⁸ ≈ 0.4%. If that happens, the process may have deteriorated even if no single result goes outside the limits.
Going below the lower limit is also a signal: if there are very few rejects, it may mean the inspector has become inattentive or a new, better method is working. That should be checked too.
Practical tip: in Excel, plot the daily reject share and the three lines (average, upper and lower limit) on one chart and hang it on the workshop wall. The foremen will see for themselves when to worry.
See also: Standard deviation · Normal distribution · Defective output (rejects)
StatisticsIn a table in our report we listed product shares, and the total came to 101%. In another chart it was 33%, 33%, 33%, a total of 99%. The manager says "the calculation is wrong". Is it really an error?
Usually this is not an error but the result of rounding. Each share is rounded separately, and a small difference appears in each. When they are added up, the total can differ from 100% by one or two percentage points.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The monthly revenue of the "Lola savdo" shop is 250 million soums:
| Group | Revenue, million soums | Exact share | Rounded to a whole number |
|---|---|---|---|
| Food | 101.5 | 40.60% | 41% |
| Household chemicals | 76.4 | 30.56% | 31% |
| Drinks | 72.1 | 28.84% | 29% |
| Total | 250.0 | 100.00% | 101% |
Three equal parts, on the other hand, are 33.33...% each and are rounded to 33%, giving a total of 99%.
The same thing happens with amounts. If three expenses are 1.4 million soums each, the total is 4.2 million. If "million soums" in the table is rounded to whole numbers: 1 + 1 + 1, while the total is 4. The rows add up to 3, but the "Total" row shows 4.
How to deal with this:
- Write a note under the table: "Totals may differ from 100% due to rounding".
- Show one decimal place: 40.6% + 30.6% + 28.8% = 100.0%. Often this alone is enough.
- If the total in a chart must be exactly 100%, use the largest remainder method: round everything down (40 + 30 + 28 = 98), then add the missing 2 percentage points, one each, to the two with the largest fractional parts: drinks (0.84) and food (0.60); the fractional part of household chemicals (0.56) is the smallest. Result: 41%, 30%, 29% — a total of 100%.
- Never calculate the "Total" by adding the rounded rows: calculate it from the exact amount and then round it.
This is especially important in accounting reports: if a report is prepared in thousands of soums, it is advisable to set out in advance in the accounting policy a method of adjusting the difference in one line item, so that the assets and liabilities of the balance sheet do not end up differing by a few units because of rounding.
One sentence is enough to explain it to the manager: "Each figure has been rounded separately; the exact figures add up to 100%."
See also: Interest rate · Histogram · Accounting policy
StatisticsWe installed software that checks cash register receipts. The seller said "it finds 96 percent of suspicious receipts". The software flagged a receipt as suspicious. Does that mean this receipt is an error with 96% probability?
No, it does not. This is one of the most widespread confusions in statistics. "It finds 96 percent of real errors" and "96 percent of flagged receipts are real errors" are completely different things. The second depends on how common erroneous receipts are in general and on how often the software mistakenly flags clean receipts.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Barakali do'kon" has 10,000 receipts a month. About 50 of them are real errors (0.5%). The software finds 96 percent of real errors, but also mistakenly flags 2 percent of clean receipts as suspicious.
| Flagged by the software | Not flagged by the software | Total | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Real error | 48 | 2 | 50 |
| Clean receipt | 199 | 9,751 | 9,950 |
| Total | 247 | 9,753 | 10,000 |
Of the 247 flagged receipts, only 48 are real errors: 48 ÷ 247 ≈ 19.4%. That is, roughly one in five receipts flagged by the software is an error, not 96%.
Why is this so? There are very many clean receipts (9,950), so even a small 2 percent of them gives 199 false signals. That is four times more than the real errors.
Practical conclusions:
- Do not treat a flagged receipt as an error straight away and blame the salesperson. It is merely in the queue for a first check.
- When evaluating software, ask for two indicators: what share of real errors it finds and what share of clean receipts it flags by mistake.
- Estimate in advance how much work the inspecting employee will get: 247 receipts a month have to be checked, 199 of them in vain.
- If the share of erroneous receipts rises (for example, when a new cashier arrives), the share of real errors among flagged receipts rises too. That is, the same software looks "accurate" to different degrees under different conditions.
This logic applies to any automated check: how many real errors there are among flagged transactions depends on how rare errors are in general.
See also: Null hypothesis · Internal control · Audit sampling
EconomicsA new supplier has appeared on the market selling the same flour 3% cheaper. But we keep buying from our old supplier. Is that foolish, or is there an economic explanation?
There is an economic explanation. Apart from the price of the product, the purchasing process itself also involves costs. In economics these are called transaction costs: searching for a new partner, checking their reliability, concluding a contract, quality control and the losses that arise if a promise is not kept. With the old supplier, most of these costs have already been incurred: you know them, and they know you.
So the right comparison is not "price against price" but "price + transaction costs".
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Issiq somsa" bakery buys 80 million soums worth of flour a month. The new supplier is 3% cheaper: a saving of 2.4 million soums a month. But extra costs arise with the new supplier:
| Cost | Hypothetical amount, per month |
|---|---|
| Taking a sample from each batch and checking its quality | 0.6 million |
| The manager's time spent on negotiation and control | 0.3 million |
| Risk of late delivery: probability 5%, loss from one day of downtime 20 million | 0.05 × 20 = 1.0 million |
| Total | 1.9 million |
In this case the new supplier gives a benefit of 2.4 − 1.9 = 0.5 million soums a month. But if the probability that the new supplier fails to deliver is 10%, the risk is 2 million, the total cost becomes 2.9 million, and switching causes a loss.
Practical routes:
- A trial batch: buy part of the monthly requirement from the new supplier. This gathers real information about their reliability and lets you assess the risk.
- Two suppliers: buy the main volume from the reliable partner and part from the new one. This both creates price competition and reduces dependence on a single supplier.
- Talk to the old supplier: tell them there is a cheaper offer on the market and ask them to reconsider the price.
The concept of transaction costs also explains why firms do some work themselves and buy other work from outside: if the hidden cost of buying from the market is very high, doing the work in-house is cheaper.
See also: Opportunity cost · Competition · Supplier
EconomicsIngredients for our café are getting more expensive almost every month, but we do not change the menu prices every month. Other cafés do the same. Why don't prices change straight away along with costs?
Economists call this phenomenon price "stickiness": even when costs or demand change, prices change not immediately but with a delay and in jumps. There are several reasons for this:
- Changing prices itself costs money: printing a new menu, replacing price tags, updating the cash register software, training staff. In economics these are called "menu costs".
- Customers do not like frequent price changes. Each increase may send some customers to a competitor.
- If competitors do not raise prices, the café that raises them first loses customers.
- Some prices are fixed by contract: a corporate order or rent.
But not changing prices at all is also expensive: as ingredients get more expensive, the margin keeps shrinking. So the question is not "do we change them?" but "how often?".
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The monthly revenue of "Kamalak kafe" is 200 million soums. Ingredients make up 40 percent of the price and get 2% more expensive every month. Each month of delay in raising prices adds a loss of 0.8 percentage points of revenue, that is, 200 × 40% × 2% = 1.6 million soums a month. The full cost of one price change (menu, price tags, staff time) is 3 million soums.
If prices are updated every k months, the losses in one cycle are 0 + 1.6 + 3.2 + ... . Average cost per month:
| One update every how many months | Average cost per month (update 3 million) | Including customer dissatisfaction (8 million in total) |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | 3.0 million | 8.0 million |
| 2 | 2.3 million | 4.8 million |
| 3 | 2.6 million | 4.27 million |
| 4 | 3.15 million | 4.4 million |
| 5 | 3.8 million | 4.8 million |
If only the technical cost is counted, updating prices every 2 months is cheapest. If the revenue lost through customer dissatisfaction is added as well (5 million soums each time), the best interval lengthens to 3 months.
Practical conclusions:
- Make changing prices cheaper: an electronic menu or screen, replaceable price tags.
- Do not raise everything at once: start with the dishes whose ingredients have risen most.
- Changing portion size is also a kind of price change, and customers notice it; openness preserves loyalty.
The same stickiness can be seen at the level of the whole economy: when inflation speeds up, prices rise not all at once but at different times in different sectors.
See also: Inflation · Consumer price index · Price elasticity of demand
EconomicsSales in the shops rose by only 10%, but the distributor's orders rose by 90%, and the factory's production plan nearly 4 times. A week later, work at the factory stopped completely. How did this happen?
This is the "bullwhip effect", common in supply chains. Each link in the chain (shop, distributor, factory) sees only the orders of the next link down, not the demand of the end customer. And each one increases its stock "just in case" to match expected future demand. As a result, a small change grows larger as it moves up the chain, just as the tip of a whip makes a large swing from a small movement of the hand.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Each link keeps stock equal to 2 times the last weekly order it saw and places its order accordingly. At the start, weekly demand everywhere is 100 boxes, and stock is 200 boxes. In the first week customer demand rose to 110 boxes and stayed at that level.
| Week | Customer demand | Shop's order | Distributor's order | Factory's production |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 |
| 1 | 110 | 130 | 190 | 370 |
| 2 | 110 | 110 | 70 | 0 |
| 3 | 110 | 110 | 110 | 20 |
| 4 | 110 | 110 | 110 | 110 |
In the first week the shop ordered 130 boxes to bring its stock from 200 to 220. The distributor saw 130, decided "demand is now 130", raised its stock to 260 and placed an order for 190. The factory saw 190 and produced 370 boxes. In the second week the shop's order fell back to 110, while excess stock piled up at the distributor and the factory, and the factory stopped for a week. Yet customer demand had risen by only 10% and remained stable.
Ways to reduce this effect:
- Share end-sales data: if the factory and the distributor see the shops' actual till sales, they will not mistake a wave of orders for genuine demand.
- Plan stock not on a single week's change but on a moving average of several weeks.
- Smaller, regular orders instead of large, infrequent ones.
- Announce promotions and discounts in advance, so that a spike during a promotion is not mistaken for a lasting rise in demand.
The takeaway for a factory or a wholesaler: when you see a sharp rise in orders, first ask — is this end-customer demand or a stock wave in the chain?
See also: Inventories · Demand · Moving average
EconomicsBecause everyone has started saying "prices will rise", customers are buying a lot of building materials in advance. Since demand has risen, we have raised our prices too. Does the expectation of a price rise itself push prices up?
Yes, it can. In economics this is called inflation expectations. When people and companies expect prices to rise:
- Buyers bring purchases forward and stock up, so current demand rises.
- Sellers raise prices in advance so as not to sell cheaply goods that will become more expensive later.
- Employees ask for higher wages to allow for the expected rise in the cost of living, and companies add this cost to prices.
- Contracts are concluded taking the expected price rise into account.
In this way an expectation partly fulfils itself. That is why central banks monitor people's inflation expectations and pay great attention to explaining their policy.
The practical question for a company: is it worth stocking up before an expected price rise? This should be checked with a calculation.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Qurilish bozor" shop is thinking of buying 1,000 bags of cement now, at 60,000 soums each, for a total of 60 million soums. They will be sold within 3 months.
| Indicator | Calculation | Amount |
|---|---|---|
| Amount saved if the price rises by 8% | 60 × 8% | 4.8 million |
| Cost of money: loan, 24% a year, for 3 months | 60 × 24% ÷ 4 | 3.6 million |
| Extra storage space | hypothetical | 0.5 million |
| Risk of spoilage from damp, 1% | 60 × 1% | 0.6 million |
| Total cost | 3.6 + 0.5 + 0.6 | 4.7 million |
If the price really rises by 8%, the gain is only 0.1 million soums. If the price rises by only 4%, the saving is 2.4 million and there is a loss of 2.3 million soums. That is, building up large stocks because "everyone is saying so" often does not bring the expected gain, while the risk stays with the company.
Conclusions:
- Before stocking up, calculate the cost of money (loan interest or forgone deposit income), storage and the risk of spoilage.
- When forecasting price rises, rely not on rumours but on official statistics and contracts with suppliers.
- If customers are buying a lot now, also plan for them buying less in the coming months: demand may have been brought forward rather than increased overall.
See also: Inflation · Monetary policy · Real income
EconomicsIt has become hard to find a good welder in our city, and the salary they ask has risen considerably in a year. Is this temporary, and what can a company do in such conditions?
Supply and demand work in the labour market just as in other markets. Wages are the price of labour. If demand for people in a certain trade rises (more construction, new factories opening) while supply does not increase quickly (learning the trade takes time, craftsmen may leave to work elsewhere), wages go up.
Is it temporary? That depends on how quickly supply responds. Higher wages attract young people to the trade, but it takes years to become a skilled craftsman. That is why a shortage of qualified staff does not disappear quickly. If demand falls (construction slows down), wage growth may stop.
The company's options:
- Raise wages and retain its craftsmen.
- Train young people itself.
- Replace labour with machinery (automation).
- Outsource part of the work to an external organisation.
To choose among them, compare the cost of each in the same units.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Po'lat qurilish" workshop employs 2 welders, each earning 12 million soums a month. A semi-automatic welding machine costs 180 million soums and makes it possible to do the same volume of work with 1 welder.
| Indicator | Calculation | Amount |
|---|---|---|
| Saving on wages, per month | 1 × 12 | 12 million |
| Payback period of the machine (servicing and energy not included) | 180 ÷ 12 | 15 months |
If salaries rise further, the machine pays for itself faster. But if servicing, spare parts and additional electricity for the machine are taken into account, the period becomes longer. Include them in the calculation too.
Other factors to watch:
- Dependence on a single welder increases: if he falls ill or leaves, the workshop stops. So a second employee will need to be trained as well.
- In a tight labour market, it is not only pay that keeps an employee, but also working conditions, timely payment and opportunities to grow. The cost of finding and training a new craftsman is often higher than raising pay a little.
- Rising wages are not only your problem but your competitors' too: it means prices in the sector will also gradually rise, and this can be taken into account in pricing policy.
See also: Wages (salary) · Demand · Supply · Payback period
TaxA "demand for payment of tax arrears" arrived in our personal account. What is this document, how much time do we have, and what happens next if we don't pay?
A demand is the tax authority's official notice to you of the amount of arrears and the obligation to pay it within the set period (Tax Code, Article 116, Part One). It is sent regardless of whether you have been held liable.
What the demand must contain (Article 116): the amount of tax arrears; the late payment interest accrued up to the time it is sent; the amount of the fine; the measures to collect the arrears and secure performance of the tax obligation that will be taken if the demand is not met.
The chain of deadlines:
| Stage | Rule | Basis |
|---|---|---|
| Sending | No later than three working days from the day the arrears are identified (after an audit — from the date the decision enters into force) | Article 117, Part Two |
| Change | If the amount changes, the tax authority sends a clarified demand or withdraws the previous one (except in cases of partial payment) | Article 118 |
| Bank account | Collection is made first from the funds in bank accounts and, if these are insufficient, from other property | Article 120, Part Six; Article 121 |
| Property | If the arrears are not paid within sixty calendar days from the day the demand is received and collection through the bank is insufficient, collection is directed at property | Article 119 |
Note: collection from the bank account does not wait for the sixty-day period to expire. If you have not sent a payment order to pay the tax yourself, the tax authority's collection order is placed on your account no later than three working days after the tax payment deadline expires (Article 121, Part Six). Money on a term deposit is not collected until the deposit term expires (Article 121).
Example (prepared by the author). "Qamar Savdo" LLC received the demand on 15 February 2027. The sixty calendar days are counted from 16 February and end on 16 April. The firm checked the amount, found an error in the late payment interest calculation and sent a written appeal to the tax authority; it paid the principal without waiting, because late payment interest grows every day.
Tip: compare the amount in the demand with your own account 6410 data. If there is a difference, give a written explanation immediately — under Article 118, if the amount changes, a clarified demand must be sent or the previous one withdrawn.
Source: Tax Code, Articles 116, 117, 118, 119, 120 and 121.
See also: Tax arrears · Late payment interest (penalty interest)
TaxWe have tax arrears and no money in the bank account. But one customer has owed us for a long time. Can we ask for the tax to be collected from that customer?
Yes. Article 121¹ of the Tax Code gives a legal entity and an individual entrepreneur exactly this right: to apply to the tax authority asking for the arrears to be collected from their own debtor (Part One).
The procedure step by step:
- The application is accompanied by a reconciliation statement of mutual settlements — signed by both parties or only by you (Part One).
- No later than three working days, the tax authority sends the statement and the documents confirming the debt to the debtor's personal account (Part Two).
- Within ten working days the debtor confirms the statement or refuses with reasons. If the debtor does not respond, the debt is deemed acknowledged and consent to collection deemed given (Part Three).
- No later than three working days, the tax authority places a collection order on the debtor's account: the amount exceeds neither your tax arrears nor the debtor's debt (Part Six).
When this route does not work (Article 121¹, full list): the debtor has refused the debt with reasons; the limitation period has expired; a court act on the debt is under compulsory enforcement, the period for presenting it for enforcement has expired, or enforcement has been suspended, terminated or deferred (spread into instalments); the debtor is not a taxpayer of Uzbekistan; the debtor is an individual; the debtor is in liquidation or insolvency proceedings have been initiated against it; the debtor's activity has been terminated or it has been removed from the state register.
Example (prepared by the author).
| Indicator | Soums |
|---|---|
| Tax arrears of "Nurafshon Mebel" LLC | 18,000,000 |
| Debt of "Bog'bon Qurilish" LLC to "Nurafshon Mebel" | 25,000,000 |
| Collection order amount (the smaller of the two) | 18,000,000 |
"Bog'bon Qurilish" did not respond within ten working days, so the debt was deemed acknowledged. The remaining 7,000,000 soums of its debt to "Nurafshon Mebel" remains outstanding.
Important: directing collection at the debtor does not release you from the obligation to pay the tax until the arrears are fully repaid (the last part of Article 121¹).
Source: Tax Code, Article 121¹.
See also: Accounts receivable · Tax arrears
TaxWe obtained a written explanation from the tax authority on an issue and followed it. During an audit, another inspector said "this interpretation is wrong" and mentioned a fine. Can we be penalised?
Article 215 of the Tax Code protects you in this situation. It lists four circumstances that exclude a person's guilt in committing a tax offence:
| No. | Circumstance | How it is proved |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | A natural disaster or other extraordinary and insurmountable circumstances | Publicly known facts, information in the mass media |
| 2 | An individual was unable to control their actions due to illness | Documents relating to that tax period |
| 3 | A written explanation given by the tax authority or another competent authority within its powers to the taxpayer or to an indefinite group of persons was followed | The document of that authority |
| 4 | A reasoned opinion sent during tax monitoring was followed | The reasoned opinion |
Your case is item 3. If these circumstances exist, the person is not liable (Article 215, Part Three). The explanation is taken into account regardless of the date it was issued, if by its meaning it relates to the period in which the offence occurred.
Two important limitations:
- If the explanation was based on incomplete or inaccurate information you provided, items 3 and 4 do not apply (Part Two). So describe the situation fully and accurately in your request.
- Article 215 releases you from liability. The question of recalculating the tax itself is not governed by this article.
Example (prepared by the author). "Shirin Non" LLC sent the tax authority a request about free lunches for employees, received a written answer and followed it. Two years later an auditor put forward a different interpretation. The firm presented its request letter (which set out all the facts in full) and the tax authority's answer; the question of a fine was closed on the basis of item 3 of Article 215.
Tip: keep written explanations, together with a copy of your request letter, in a separate folder indefinitely.
Source: Tax Code, Article 215.
See also: What is the difference between a desk audit and a field tax audit? · Late payment interest (penalty interest)
TaxHow many years back can the tax authority go to recalculate tax? Is the period for imposing a fine the same?
In the Tax Code these are two different periods, both three years long, but the starting point may differ.
| Limitation period | Period for holding liable | |
|---|---|---|
| What for | Conducting a tax audit, sending a demand based on its results or reviewing the tax payable | Applying liability measures (a fine) for a tax offence |
| Length | Three years | Three years |
| From when | After the end of the tax period for which the tax obligation is determined; if the obligation is linked to a specific event — from the moment that event occurs | From the day the offence was committed; for offences under Articles 223 and 224 (concealment (understatement) of the tax base, non-payment or incomplete payment of tax) — from the day following the end of the tax period |
| Extension, suspension | Extended for the period during which conditions related to the application of the tax rate, the amount of tax payable, a tax relief or deduction, or a change in the payment deadline apply (in the cases specified in Part Two of Article 84); suspended, interrupted and restored in accordance with civil legislation | If active obstruction of the audit becomes an insurmountable obstacle, suspended from the day the statement under Part Three of Article 144 is drawn up |
| Basis | Article 88 | Article 217 |
Example (prepared by the author). "Oqtosh Avto" LLC understated its tax base for one tax period in 2023. The period for holding it liable is counted from the day following the end of that tax period and lasts three years (Article 217, Part Three). The decision to hold it liable must be issued within those three years: if it is issued after the period has expired, the fine is not applied.
Practical conclusion: keep the primary documents underlying the tax calculation for at least the limitation period. If you applied a tax relief, bear in mind that under Part Three of Article 88 this period may be extended.
Source: Tax Code, Article 84 (Part Two), Article 88 (Parts One to Four), Article 144 (Part Three), Article 217.
See also: Late payment interest (penalty interest) · What is the difference between a desk audit and a field tax audit?
TaxWe received an advance payment for goods from a buyer but documented the contract as a "loan agreement". Can the tax authority assess this differently?
It can. Under Article 14 of the Tax Code, transactions are taken into account for tax purposes not by the name of the contract but by their actual economic substance (Part One).
The main rules of Article 14:
| Part | Rule |
|---|---|
| Two | If the documentation does not match the economic substance, the tax authority may change the legal characterisation of the transaction, the taxpayer's status or the nature of its activity |
| Three | A transaction made for appearance only (sham) is not taken into account for tax purposes; if it conceals another transaction, the actual transaction is taken into account |
| Four | If all participants are performing the terms, individual breaches of provisions of non-tax documents are not grounds for refusing to recognise income or expenses |
| Five to Seven | Operations whose sole or predominant purpose is to reduce tax are considered an abuse of right; the tax authority may disregard them and recalculate the tax |
| Eight | Such circumstances are established by the tax authority or, if the taxpayer disagrees, by a court on the tax authority's claim |
Example (prepared by the author). "Ipak Yo'li Tekstil" LLC received 300 million soums from a buyer and recorded it as an "interest-free loan"; two months later it shipped fabric for that amount and closed the "loan" by offset. The correspondence shows that the buyer placed an order and that the price and shipment date were agreed. In substance this is an advance payment for goods, so the tax authority is entitled to treat it as such. The safest course for the firm is to document the money as an advance payment from the start and calculate tax accordingly.
There is another side too: if both parties have fully performed the contract and only one of the non-tax rules was breached, your expense cannot be disallowed for that reason alone (Part Four).
Source: Tax Code, Article 14.
See also: Accounts payable · Accounts receivable
AccountingOur building materials shop used part of the paint bought for resale to renovate our own office and gave part of it to our own colour-mixing workshop. Does this paint stay in account 2910?
No. Goods bought for resale are carried in account 2910 "Goods in the warehouse" at purchase cost (NAS No. 21, paragraph 145). If you use them yourself or process them, they are no longer goods for sale, so they are removed from 2910. The table in paragraph 154 of NAS No. 21 has a separate line for each case.
| Situation | Dt | Ct | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Transfer of goods to materials for own needs | 1010 | 2910 | Paragraph 154, line 8 |
| Issue of materials for administrative needs (office renovation) | 9420 | 1010 | Paragraph 104, line 13 |
| Transfer of goods for processing | 2010 | 2910 | Paragraph 154, line 10 |
| Receipt into the warehouse of products made in the workshop | 2810 | 2010 | Paragraph 141, line 1 |
Note: the table in paragraph 154 has no line that charges goods directly to administrative expenses. The table shows the goods first being transferred to materials and then the materials being used.
Example (prepared by the author). At "Rangin Qurilish Mollari" LLC the purchase cost of one bucket of paint is 120,000 soums. During the month, 15 buckets were used to paint the office and 40 buckets were given to the colour-mixing workshop.
| Transaction | Dt | Ct | Soums |
|---|---|---|---|
| 15 buckets transferred to materials (15 × 120,000) | 1010 | 2910 | 1,800,000 |
| Used for office renovation | 9420 | 1010 | 1,800,000 |
| 40 buckets given to the workshop for processing (40 × 120,000) | 2010 | 2910 | 4,800,000 |
The paint mixed in the workshop is received into the warehouse as finished goods: Dt 2810, Ct 2010. Its amount is the actual cost made up of the 4,800,000 soums of paint and the workshop's other costs attributable to this product, because finished goods in 2810 are carried at actual production cost (paragraph 138).
Why does this matter? If the paint stays in 2910, the stocktake will show a shortage of 15 + 40 = 55 buckets, and the "Goods" line in the balance sheet will be overstated. If you charge the paint given to the workshop to the cost of goods sold, the gross profit from trading will be wrong.
Tip: document every issue from the warehouse with an internal delivery note and state its purpose clearly (own needs or processing) — the account is chosen on the basis of exactly this document.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraph 104 (line 13), paragraph 138, paragraph 141 (line 1), paragraph 145, paragraph 154 (lines 8 and 10).
See also: Goods (in accounting) · 2910 Goods in the warehouse
AccountingOur textile factory used some of the towels it produced in the workshop, gave some to the office and donated some free of charge to a school. Is everything recorded in one account?
No. In all three cases the products leave account 2810 "Finished goods in the warehouse", but the account debited depends on where the products went (NAS No. 21, table in paragraph 141).
| Situation | Dt | Ct | Basis (paragraph 141) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Internal needs of the workshop (general production) | 2510 | 2810 | Line 6 |
| Office (administrative) needs | 9420 | 2810 | Line 6 (9410–9430) |
| Free transfer to another organisation | 9430 | 2810 | Line 16 |
Line 6 lists accounts 2010, 2310, 2510, 2710 and 9410–9430 for internal needs: which one is used depends on which department used the products.
Example (prepared by the author). At "Paxtaoy To'qimachilik" LLC the actual production cost of one towel is 45,000 soums.
| To whom | Quantity | Dt | Ct | Soums |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Dyeing workshop (for wiping equipment) | 30 | 2510 | 2810 | 1,350,000 |
| Office kitchen | 10 | 9420 | 2810 | 450,000 |
| Donation to a school | 50 | 9430 | 2810 | 2,250,000 |
As a result, 1,350,000 soums is allocated to the cost of products together with the workshop's expenses, 450,000 soums becomes an administrative expense and 2,250,000 soums an other operating expense. If you record everything in 9430, the cost of products looks too low and other expenses too high.
Tip: document every issue with an internal requisition and delivery note and state the receiving department clearly — the account is chosen on the basis of exactly this document. The tax consequences of a free transfer are examined separately.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 138 and 141.
See also: Finished goods from receipt into the warehouse until sale: account 2810 and journal entries at actual cost · 2510 General production overhead
AccountingOur ceramics workshop gave vases to a shop to sell under an agency (commission) agreement. The shop will transfer the money after selling them. Do we record the day we handed over the vases as a sale?
No. Products given to an agent for sale are still yours; they are not in the warehouse but remain on your balance sheet. Account 2830 "Finished goods transferred under agency (commission) agreements" exists for this (NAS No. 21, paragraph 140). The sale is recognised when the agent sells the products, and the same entries are made as for 2810.
Example (prepared by the author). "Lola Keramika" LLC gave 200 vases (cost 80,000 soums each) to the "Uy Bezagi" shop. At the end of the month the shop sent a report that 150 of them had been sold at 130,000 soums each. Amounts exclude VAT.
In the books of the principal ("Lola Keramika"):
| Transaction | Dt | Ct | Soums | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 200 vases given to the shop | 2830 | 2810 | 16,000,000 | Paragraph 140 |
| Cost of the 150 vases sold | 9110 | 2830 | 12,000,000 | Paragraph 141, line 11 |
| Sales amount (150 × 130,000) | 4010 | 9010 | 19,500,000 | Paragraph 383, line 1 |
At the end of the month, 50 vases remain in 2830: 16,000,000 − 12,000,000 = 4,000,000 soums.
In the books of the agent ("Uy Bezagi"), the vases are not its property, so they are carried in off-balance sheet account 004 "Goods accepted under agency (commission) agreements" at the price stated in the acceptance and transfer certificate (paragraph 441). The shop's own income is the agency fee: Dt 4010, Ct 9010 (paragraph 383, line 5).
Tip: obtain a sales report from the agent every month and reconcile the balance in 2830 with the actual stock in the shop. Analytical accounting for 2830 is kept by responsible persons, product types (grades, batches) and storage locations (paragraph 140); you can additionally set a separate breakdown for each agent in your accounting policy.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 140, 141, 383 and 441.
See also: Agency agreement · 2830 Finished goods transferred under agency (commission) agreements
AccountingHead office sent goods to our branch in Samarkand and transferred money for its employees' wages. Is this a sale to the branch? Which accounts are used?
It is not a sale. A branch is a separate division of the legal entity, so transactions between them are kept as intra-company settlements. At head office, the branch's debt is recorded in account 4110 "Receivables from separate divisions": it holds settlements for property and tangible assets transferred to the division, payment of wages to the division's employees and other current transactions (NAS No. 21, paragraph 176). Debt in the opposite direction — the organisation's current liabilities to its branches — is recorded in account 6110 "Payables to separate divisions" (paragraph 259).
Example (prepared by the author). "Sarbon Savdo" LLC sent its branch goods worth 60 million soums and transferred 25 million soums for wages. Later the branch returned 40 million soums to head office's account.
In the books of head office:
| Transaction | Dt | Ct | Soums | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Goods transferred to the branch | 4110 | 2910 | 60,000,000 | Paragraph 154, line 15 |
| Money allocated for wages of branch employees | 4110 | 5110 | 25,000,000 | Paragraph 178, line 3 |
| Money received from the branch | 5110 | 4110 | 40,000,000 | Paragraph 178, line 5 |
Balance of 4110 at head office: 60 + 25 − 40 = 45 million soums.
If the branch sends goods to head office, head office records Dt 2910, Ct 6110 (paragraph 154, line 3). If the branch keeps a separate balance sheet, set out the entries in its own books in the accounting policy.
Why not 9020? 9020 "Revenue from sale of goods" is for sales to customers. Goods transferred to a branch do not leave the legal entity; they only move from one place to another within it. If you record this as a sale, revenue will appear twice when the branch sells the goods to a real customer.
In the balance sheet these amounts have separate lines: "Debt of separate divisions (4110)" — line 230, "Debt to separate divisions (6110)" — line 620 (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 1).
Tip: analytical accounting for 4110 is kept for each separate division (NAS No. 21, paragraph 177), and for 6110 also separately for each division (paragraph 260). At the end of the month, check the head office and branch balances with a reconciliation statement.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 154, 176, 177, 178, 259 and 260; Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 1.
See also: Separate division · 4110 Receivables from separate divisions
AccountingWe sold 2 tonnes of yarn left over in our carpet workshop to another company. Do we record the revenue in 9020?
No. 9010 is for sales of finished products and 9020 for sales of goods. But for you the yarn is a raw material (1010 "Raw materials and supplies"), and selling it is not your core activity. Under NAS No. 21, the value of materials disposed of to outside parties is written off to account 9220 "Disposal of other assets" (paragraph 104, line 16). The debit of 9220 records the carrying amount of the asset sold and the credit the sales proceeds, and the difference is closed as a gain or loss (paragraph 393).
Example (prepared by the author). "Gilam Nur" LLC sold yarn with a cost of 18,000,000 soums for 21,000,000 soums (excluding VAT; VAT is not considered in this example).
| Transaction | Dt | Ct | Soums | Basis (NAS No. 21, paragraph 394) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Buyer's debt | 4010 | 9220 | 21,000,000 | Line 21 |
| Cost of yarn sold | 9220 | 1010 | 18,000,000 | Line 23 |
| Gain determined (21 − 18) | 9220 | 9320 | 3,000,000 | Line 27, a |
If the yarn had been sold for 16,000,000 soums, there would have been a loss of 2,000,000 soums: Dt 9430, Ct 9220 (line 27, b).
As a result, 9220 is closed with a zero balance. In the statement of financial results this sale does not increase net revenue; the gain appears within "Other income from core activities" (line 090).
Why does this matter? If you record the yarn in 9020, net revenue and gross profit are artificially inflated and profitability ratios are distorted.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 104 (line 16), 393 and 394; Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 2.
See also: Material has left the warehouse: which account is it charged to for production, the workshop, the office or sale? · 9220 Disposal of other assets
AuditThe auditor wants to meet the director and the founders separately both at the start and at the end of the audit. Is this a formality or a requirement of the standard?
A requirement of the standard. The auditor's communication with those charged with governance (in an LLC, usually the founders or the supervisory board) is governed by ISA 260. The standard treats communication as two-way: the auditor provides information, and they in turn tell the auditor about important matters.
What the auditor must communicate:
| Topic | Content |
|---|---|
| The auditor's responsibilities | The auditor expresses an opinion on the financial statements; the audit does not relieve management of responsibility for the statements |
| Planned scope and timing | When and to what extent the audit will be carried out, and the significant risks identified by the auditor |
| Significant findings | Significant matters identified during the audit that those charged with governance should know about |
| Independence | For companies whose shares are traded on an exchange — a statement on the auditor's independence |
Form: if, in the auditor's judgement, oral communication of significant findings is not adequate, it is made in writing.
Example (prepared by the author). At "Navro'z Agro" LLC, the auditor told the founders at the start that this year the main risks were livestock accounting and a large bank loan. One of the founders mentioned a plan to sell a branch the following year — this was new information for the auditor, who extended the work on subsequent events. At the final meeting, the auditor shared observations on the approach management had used to value inventories.
Benefit: these meetings are the best opportunity to avoid surprises in the report. The founders can ask questions too.
Source: ISA 260 (Revised); Law "On Auditing Activity" (ZRU-677), Article 9.
See also: If the auditor leaves a letter on internal control deficiencies, what should the manager and the accountant do? · Materiality
AuditOur firm is being audited for the first time this year; last year's financial statements were not audited. Is anything written about this in the report?
Yes. Handling the prior-year comparative figures in the financial statements is governed by ISA 710. If last year's statements were not audited, the auditor states in an "Other Matter" paragraph of the report that the prior-year figures are unaudited.
What this paragraph means and what it does not:
| Means | Does not mean |
|---|---|
| It tells the user that last year's figures were not checked | It does not mean the opinion has become qualified or adverse |
| It reminds the user to treat the comparative columns with care | It does not mean the auditor expressed an opinion on last year's statements |
An important point: this paragraph does not release the auditor from checking the opening balances. The current year's statements rely on the opening balances, so the auditor obtains sufficient evidence for them under ISA 510.
Example (prepared by the author). "Tong Logistika" LLC commissioned an audit for the first time at the bank's request. To check the stock of goods at 1 January, the auditor reviewed January sales and purchases, having not attended the count at the start of the year. In the report, an "Other Matter" paragraph stated that the prior-year figures were unaudited.
Practical tip: before the first audit, prepare the stocktake reports at the end of last year and the reconciliation statements with the bank and counterparties — checking the opening balances starts with these.
Source: ISA 710, ISA 510; Law "On Auditing Activity" (ZRU-677), Article 9.
See also: What types of auditor's report are there? · Auditor's report
AuditAn international grant-making organisation asked for an auditor's report on a project report prepared in its own format and under its own rules. Is this different from an ordinary annual audit?
It is different. If a report is prepared on special principles (a special purpose framework) designed for the needs of specific users (here, the grantor), the auditor applies ISA 800. This standard builds on the standards for general purpose reporting (ISA 700) and adds further requirements to them.
The main differences in the report:
| Aspect | Content |
|---|---|
| "Emphasis of Matter" paragraph | Alerts users that the report is prepared on special principles, refers to the note describing those principles and states that the report may not be suitable for another purpose |
| Distribution and use | The auditor may restrict the report to the intended users only |
This paragraph does not qualify the opinion: it only reminds users of the basis on which the report was prepared.
Example (prepared by the author). The "Yashil Vodiy" farm bought irrigation equipment with a grant. The grantor asked only for a report on money received and spent. The auditor wrote in the report that it had been prepared under the rules of the grant agreement and therefore might not be suitable for another purpose. When the farm wanted to show this report to a bank for a loan, the bank asked for a separate report on the annual financial statements.
Tip: when agreeing the terms of the engagement with the auditor, state in writing which principles the report is prepared under and to whom the auditor's report is issued.
Source: ISA 800 (Revised), ISA 700; Law "On Auditing Activity" (ZRU-677), Article 9.
See also: Emphasis of matter · What types of auditor's report are there?
AuditThe bank wants an auditor's report not on the whole set of financial statements but only on our accounts receivable. Can a single item be audited?
Yes. An audit of a single financial statement or of a specific element, account or item of a financial statement is governed by ISA 805. If that element is prepared on special principles, ISA 800 also applies.
Features of such an audit:
| Aspect | Content |
|---|---|
| Scope | The auditor expresses an opinion only on this element but complies with all the requirements of the standards relevant to it |
| Materiality | Determined not for the complete financial statements but for this element specifically |
| Related items | Accounts receivable are linked to revenue, the allowance and cash receipts, and the auditor considers these too to the extent necessary |
| Opinion | If the same firm also audits the complete financial statements, a separate opinion is expressed on the element |
Example (prepared by the author). "Oltin Don" LLC wants to obtain a credit line secured by its receivables. The bank asked for a report on the balance of account 4010 at 31 December. The auditor sent confirmation letters to major customers for 4010, matched January cash receipts against December debts and checked how the allowance for doubtful debts had been calculated. The materiality level was also set on the basis of the 4010 balance itself.
Practical tip: in such an engagement, do not assume it is enough to "just confirm the balance" — the auditor also looks at how the balance was built up. Prepare an ageing schedule of customer debts in advance.
Source: ISA 805 (Revised), ISA 800; Law "On Auditing Activity" (ZRU-677), Article 9.
See also: Accounts receivable · Materiality
AuditOur holding company has two subsidiaries, and one of them is audited by another audit firm. Who is responsible for the report on the consolidated financial statements?
The group auditor. Audits of group financial statements are governed by ISA 600 (Revised). Under it, the group auditor is responsible for the direction, supervision and performance of the group audit and for issuing a report appropriate in the circumstances. The fact that a subsidiary is audited by another auditor (in the standard, a component auditor) does not divide this responsibility.
What this means in practice:
| Who | What they do |
|---|---|
| Group auditor | Assesses risks for the group, gives instructions to the component auditor, is involved in its work and evaluates its results |
| Component auditor | Performs the specified work on the subsidiary and communicates the results to the group auditor |
| Group management | Gives both auditors access to information |
Example (prepared by the author). The subsidiary of the "Bek Invest" holding in Namangan is audited by a local audit firm. The group auditor sent it in writing the materiality level and the risks to focus on, then reviewed the part of its working papers dealing with inventories. Additional information was requested on a significant matter at the subsidiary.
Practical tip: at year end, reconcile intra-group sales and debt balances with the subsidiaries in advance — when eliminating intra-group transactions on consolidation, the group auditor asks for exactly these schedules.
Source: ISA 600 (Revised); Law "On Auditing Activity" (ZRU-677), Article 9.
See also: Auditor's report · Internal control
Financial reportingAt the end of the statement of cash flows there is a separate table on movements of foreign currency. How do we fill it in?
This is the "Information on the movement of cash in foreign currency" section of Appendix 4 (Regulation approved by Order No. 181). It has only one column, "Amount", and amounts, like the whole statement, are given in thousands of soums.
Lines:
| Line | Indicator |
|---|---|
| 250 | Balance at the beginning of the year |
| 260 | Currency received, total (261 + 262 + 263 + 264): 261 — proceeds from sales; 262 — converted; 263 — from financing activities; 264 — other sources |
| 270 | Currency spent, total (271 + 272 + 273): 271 — to suppliers and contractors; 272 — on financing activities; 273 — other purposes |
| 280 | Net exchange differences from revaluation |
| 290 | Balance at the end of the year (250 + 260 − 270 ± 280) |
Example (prepared by the author, thousand soums). "Atlas Eksport" LLC:
| Line | Amount |
|---|---|
| 250 | 120,000 |
| 261 | 900,000 |
| 262 | 150,000 |
| 263 | 0 |
| 264 | 10,000 |
| 260 | 1,060,000 |
| 271 | 980,000 |
| 272 | 50,000 |
| 273 | 20,000 |
| 270 | 1,050,000 |
| 280 | +15,000 |
| 290 | 120,000 + 1,060,000 − 1,050,000 + 15,000 = 145,000 |
Self-check: line 290 must equal the total foreign currency balances at year end. If the currency is held only in a foreign currency bank account, reconcile it with balance sheet line 350 "Cash in foreign currency (5200)"; if there is also currency in the cash desk, add it.
Note: the main part of the statement also has a line for exchange differences — 221 "Net exchange differences from revaluation of cash in foreign currency". Line 280, by contrast, shows only the revaluation within the currency table.
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 4; Appendix 1 (line 350).
See also: Statement of cash flows · Financial statement forms from 2025: balance sheet, financial results, equity and cash flows (Order No. 181)
Financial reportingThe founders allocated 20 million soums of profit to reserve capital and declared dividends of 45 million soums. Which columns of the statement of equity do these go in?
In the statement of equity (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 3), the cells not to be filled in for each line are marked "x". These marks show which column to use.
Columns: 3 — charter capital; 4 — additional capital; 5 — reserve capital; 6 — retained earnings (uncovered loss); 7 — treasury shares; 8 — targeted receipts and other; 9 — total.
| Line | Columns marked "x" | Columns to be filled in |
|---|---|---|
| 050 "Allocations to reserve capital" | 3, 4, 7, 8 | 5, 6, 9 |
| 090 "Dividends accrued" | 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 | 6, 9 |
Example (prepared by the author, thousand soums). "Zarafshon Agro" LLC:
| Line | 5 Reserve | 6 Retained earnings | 9 Total |
|---|---|---|---|
| 050 | +20,000 | −20,000 | 0 |
| 090 | x | −45,000 | −45,000 |
The logic is simple: an allocation to the reserve moves an amount from one part of equity to another, so the total in line 050 does not change. Dividends, however, leave equity and become a debt to the founders, so the total decreases by 45,000 and affects line 120 "Increase (+) or decrease (−) in equity".
Check: columns 5 and 6 of line 110 "Balance at the end of the year" must equal the year-end amounts in balance sheet lines 430 "Reserve capital (8500)" and 450 "Retained earnings (uncovered loss) (8700)".
Note: micro-firms and small enterprises do not submit this statement — their annual financial statements consist of the balance sheet and the statement of financial results (Regulation, paragraph 10).
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181, paragraph 10; Appendices 1 and 3.
See also: Reserve capital · Dividend
Financial reportingIn our shop goods are carried at selling prices, using account 2980 "Trade markup". Do we put the full amount from 2920 in the "Goods" line of the balance sheet?
No. Balance sheet line 180 "Goods" is filled in as group 2900 minus 2980 (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 1). 2980 "Trade markup" is a contra-asset account: it separates the markup not yet earned from the value of goods at selling price, so in the balance sheet the goods are brought back to purchase cost.
Example (prepared by the author). At "Mehr Market" LLC as at 31 December:
| Account | Soums |
|---|---|
| 2910 Goods in the warehouse (at purchase cost) | 54,000,000 |
| 2920 Goods in retail trade (at selling price) | 186,000,000 |
| 2980 Trade markup (credit balance) | 31,000,000 |
| Line 180: 54,000,000 + 186,000,000 − 31,000,000 | 209,000,000 → 209,000 thousand soums |
If you put in the full amount of 2920, goods will be overstated by 31 million soums: the balance sheet will also show the profit on goods not yet sold as an asset.
For the correct amount, the balance of 2980 must be accurate. Under NAS No. 21, account 2980 is credited with the markup amount when goods are received and debited for goods sold or written off for other reasons; the markup attributable to the remaining stock is adjusted on the basis of the stocktake report (paragraph 152). So after the year-end stocktake, recalculate the balance of 2980 and only then fill in the balance sheet.
Note: line 180 is part of line 140 "Inventories, total" (140 = 150 + 160 + 170 + 180).
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 1; NAS No. 21, paragraph 152.
See also: Trade markup · 2980 Trade markup
Financial reportingWe are liquidating our LLC in the middle of the year. For what period and in which forms are the final financial statements prepared?
Under paragraph 5 of the Regulation approved by Order No. 181, an organisation that is liquidated, reorganised or merged into another organisation during the reporting year prepares its final statements for the period from 1 January to the date this process is completed, using the current forms of annual financial statements.
What is done in practice:
| Issue | Rule | Basis (Regulation) |
|---|---|---|
| Period | From 1 January to the time of liquidation | Paragraph 5 |
| Forms | The current forms of annual financial statements; for a micro-firm or small enterprise — the balance sheet and the statement of financial results | Paragraphs 5 and 10 |
| Currency | In soums (thousand soums in the forms) | Paragraph 3, Appendix 1 |
| Signature | The head and the chief accountant (or the person performing the accounting and financial management function) | Paragraph 4 |
| Empty lines | If there is no data, the line is crossed out | Paragraph 13 |
Example (prepared by the author). The liquidation of "Shams Print" LLC (a small enterprise) is being completed on 14 August 2027. The final statements cover the period from 1 January to 14 August 2027 and consist of two forms: the balance sheet and the statement of financial results.
Another subtle point. Paragraph 6 of the Regulation sets out how the first reporting period of newly established organisations is determined, but this procedure does not apply to organisations established on the basis of a liquidated or reorganised organisation or of its separate divisions. For example, the first reporting period of a new company that arose from a reorganisation cannot be determined under the scheme in paragraph 6.
Note: paragraph 5 does not separately specify the deadline for submitting such statements. Determine the deadline from the documents governing the liquidation procedure.
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181, paragraphs 3, 4, 5, 6, 10 and 13.
See also: Financial statement forms from 2025: balance sheet, financial results, equity and cash flows (Order No. 181) · Balance sheet total
Financial reportingWe acquired equipment under a finance lease (leasing); it still belongs to the leasing company. Do we show it on our balance sheet, and in which lines do we record the debt?
You do. Fixed assets received under a finance lease are recorded by the lessee in account 0310 "Fixed assets received under finance lease" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 33). On receipt: Dt 0310, Ct 6950 "Long-term liabilities – current portion" and 7910 "Finance lease payable" (paragraph 34). Depreciation is accumulated in 0299 "Depreciation of fixed assets received under finance lease" (paragraph 28).
Balance sheet lines (Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 1):
| Account | Balance sheet line |
|---|---|
| 0310 | 010 "Initial (replacement) cost (0100, 0300)" |
| 0299 | 011 "Accumulated depreciation (0200)" |
| 7910 | 590 "Other long-term payables (7900)" |
| 6950 | 750 "Current portion of long-term liabilities (6950)" |
Example (prepared by the author). On 1 July, "Olmaliq Metall" LLC leased a machine tool worth 240 million soums. At 31 December, accumulated depreciation is 12 million soums and the remaining lease debt is 210 million soums, of which 60 million soums is payable in the next 12 months.
| Line | Amount, thousand soums |
|---|---|
| 010 (machine tool's share) | 240,000 |
| 011 (machine tool's share) | 12,000 |
| 012 net book value (010 − 011) | 228,000 |
| 590 (210,000 − 60,000) | 150,000 |
| 750 | 60,000 |
Why is it on the balance sheet if the property belongs to the leasing company? NAS No. 21 carries this item among the lessee's assets in group 0300: the company uses the machine tool and pays its price. When the lease ends and ownership passes to you, its value is transferred from 0310 to the relevant account in group 0100, and its depreciation from 0299 to the relevant depreciation account (paragraph 37).
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 28, 33, 34 and 37; Regulation approved by Order No. 181, Appendix 1.
See also: Finance lease · Leasing or a bank loan: which way of acquiring equipment works out cheaper?
Import and exportWe are importing a large batch of raw materials for production. Can customs payments be made later or in instalments rather than all at once?
Yes, but by decision of the customs authority. The Customs Code distinguishes two options: deferral of payment (the payment deadline is extended for an additional period) and payment in instalments (the amount is split into parts within that period) (Article 329, Parts Two and Three).
| Rule | Content | Basis (Article 329) |
|---|---|---|
| General period | At least 14 and at most 60 calendar days from the day the declaration is accepted | Part Four |
| Extended period | 120 calendar days: customs payments on goods imported by manufacturing enterprises for producing output; customs duty on goods imported for their own needs by micro-firms, small enterprises, farms and dehkan farms that are legal entities | Part Five |
| Coverage | One or several types of payment, the whole amount or part of it | Part Six |
| Decision deadline | No more than five working days after the documents are submitted | Part Seven |
| Condition | Payment of customs payments must be secured | Part Nine |
| Option without security | For a participant that has been importing for more than three years and has performed its obligations well but is in a difficult financial position: up to 50 percent of the amount paid over the last three years, for six months | Part Ten |
The application is accompanied by a written undertaking to pay and a document confirming the security (Article 330). There are two grounds for refusal: failure to comply with the requirements of Article 330, or the existence of customs payment arrears at the time of the application (Article 331).
Interest: charged for each day at fifty percent of the Central Bank's refinancing rate. However, no interest is charged for the 14-day period, for authorised economic operators and in the cases set out in Parts Five and Eleven of Article 329 (Article 332).
Example (prepared by the author). "Samo Tekstil" LLC imported raw materials for yarn production. As a manufacturer, it requested the 120-day period and provided a bank guarantee as security; in this case no interest is charged. If the firm applied under Part Ten and had paid 1,200 million soums over the last three years, the amount payable in instalments without security would not exceed 600 million soums.
Note: if an amount under the schedule is not paid on time, customs collects the entire debt from the security (Article 333).
Source: Customs Code, Articles 329–333.
See also: Customs duty · 37 customs payment codes: which go into the cost of goods and which become an expense?
Import and exportTwo years have passed since the goods were released by customs. Now the customs authority wants to check the documents for that import. Does it have the right to do so?
Yes, under certain conditions. Article 201 of the Customs Code provides for customs control after the release of goods, including customs audit.
| Rule | Content | Basis (Article 201) |
|---|---|---|
| Grounds | There must be sufficient and confirmed grounds to suspect a breach of the law | Part One |
| What is checked | The presence of the goods, re-examination by customs, the information in the declaration, and documents and information on foreign trade and subsequent commercial transactions | Part Two |
| Where | At the location of persons directly or indirectly involved in the transaction or holding the documents | Part Two |
| Document | A decision of the head (deputy head) of the customs authority: purpose, duration, composition of the inspection team, period under review | Part Three |
| Repetition | No more than once per contract | Part Four |
| Time limit | Control and additional assessment of customs payments — within three years from the moment the goods ceased to be under customs control | Part Five |
| Customs audit | Documents submitted during clearance are compared with the data in financial and business documents; the procedure is set by the Cabinet of Ministers | Parts Six and Seven |
Example (prepared by the author). "Elektron Uy" LLC imported televisions in March 2025. In February 2027 the customs authority ordered an inspection under this contract: it compared the customs value in the declaration with the firm's receipt amount in 2910, the bank payments and the reconciliation statement with the supplier. The three-year period has not yet expired, and this is the first inspection under the contract — so the demand is lawful.
Practical tip: for each import contract, keep the cargo customs declaration, invoice, transport and insurance documents, payment orders and receipt documents in one folder for at least three years. Check the period under review and the contract in the decision: if there has already been an inspection under this contract, refer to Part Four.
Source: Customs Code, Article 201.
See also: Customs clearance · Customs value
Import and exportFollowing a customs audit we were charged additional customs payments, and we disagree. Where and within what period do we file a complaint?
The right to appeal against decisions of customs authorities and actions (inaction) of officials is set out in Articles 409¹–409⁷ of the Customs Code. There are two routes: a higher customs authority and the court.
| Issue | Rule | Basis |
|---|---|---|
| Deadline | Against a decision based on the results of an inspection or customs audit — no later than thirty days from the moment the person learned or should have learned of the violation of their rights | Article 409², Part Two |
| If missed | If there is a valid reason, the higher authority may restore the deadline on a petition | Article 409², Part Three |
| Form | Written or electronic; signed; if filed by a representative, a document confirming their authority is attached | Article 409³ |
| Consideration | Fifteen calendar days from the date of registration, up to one month if further examination is needed | Article 409⁵, Part Three |
| Who decides | The appeals commission | Article 409⁶ |
| Going to court | From the day the court accepts the application for proceedings until the decision enters into force, enforcement of the appealed part is suspended | Article 409⁷, Part Two |
What the complaint contains (Article 409³, in full): the name of the customs authority; the name and address of the complainant (for an individual — full name and place of residence); the circumstances on which the objections are based; a list of attached documents (if any); your demands; the date.
Decisions of the appeals commission (Article 409⁶): to dismiss the complaint; to amend the decision; to cancel the decision and, if necessary, adopt a new decision; to declare the official's action unlawful and issue a decision on the merits. The decision is sent in writing within three days and is binding on customs authorities.
When a complaint is not considered (Article 409⁴): the deadline has been missed and there is no petition to restore it; it does not meet the requirements of Article 409³; it is withdrawn before a decision is made; it is filed by an unauthorised person; it has already been filed earlier on the same grounds; it is filed within a criminal case or with a court.
Example (prepared by the author). "Bahor Kimyo" LLC was handed a customs audit report on 3 March. The firm filed a complaint on 25 March, attached the transport documents and asked for a hearing (Article 409⁵, Part Two). The commission partially reduced the additionally assessed amount.
Source: Customs Code, Articles 409¹–409⁷.
See also: Customs value · Key concepts of the Customs Code in 8 points: from declarant to customs value
Import and exportThe container is still on its way. To save time, can we file the customs declaration before the goods arrive?
Yes. This is preliminary declaration — declaring goods before they arrive in the customs territory. It is used at the declarant's discretion (Customs Code, Article 262, Part One).
| Rule | Content | Basis |
|---|---|---|
| Documents | If accompanying documents are required, copies certified by the declarant are attached; after the goods arrive, customs compares them with the originals where necessary | Article 262, Part Two |
| Single document | Once the information has been checked and the customs payments paid or security provided, the preliminary declaration becomes the single document for customs operations (except where information or documents are incomplete) | Article 262, Part Three |
| Deadline | If the goods are not presented to the customs authority within thirty calendar days from the day of acceptance, the declaration is deemed not to have been filed | Article 262, Part Four |
| Payments | Customs payments made with a preliminary declaration are transferred to the budget after clearance of a properly completed cargo customs declaration is finalised | Article 328, Part Four |
Example (prepared by the author). "Pamir Plast" LLC filed a preliminary declaration for a container of granules on 5 April 2027 and paid the customs payments. The thirty calendar days are counted from 6 April and end on 5 May. The container was delayed in port and arrived on 12 May. The declaration was deemed not filed, and the firm had to declare the goods again.
Practical tip: file the preliminary declaration after getting the exact arrival date from the carrier, and check copies of the invoice and transport documents in advance — if the declaration lacks required information or the documents are not submitted in full, the "single document" advantage under Part Three of Article 262 does not apply.
Source: Customs Code, Articles 262 and 328.
See also: Cargo customs declaration · Sample cargo customs declaration: how to read the boxes of an import declaration?
Import and exportWe transferred money to the customs account in advance for future imports, but we have stopped importing. Can we get the money back?
Yes. In the Customs Code this money is called "advance funds": an amount the payer transferred in advance, before a declaration is accepted, to the customs authority's personal treasury account for future customs payments (Article 334, Part One).
What it can be used for (Article 334, Part Two, in full): paying customs payments; paying late payment interest and interest; repaying customs payment arrears; securing customs payments. Until the payer gives an instruction, this money is not considered a customs payment; filing a declaration or a relevant application counts as an instruction (Part Three).
Refund procedure (Article 335):
| Stage | Rule | Part |
|---|---|---|
| Claim period | Within three years from the day following the day the funds were last used | One |
| Documents | An application and a reconciliation statement of mutual settlements to the customs authority to which the money was transferred | Two |
| Reconciliation | By the customs authority within no more than fifteen working days | Three |
| Refund | Within three working days from the day following the day the statement is signed by both parties | Four |
| If there are arrears | With your consent the arrears are deducted and the rest is refunded | Five |
| If too late | If no application is filed within three years, the money is transferred to the budget | Six |
Example (prepared by the author). "Sirdaryo Mashina" LLC transferred 80 million soums to customs, of which 52 million soums was used for payments under one declaration. After that declaration, imports stopped. The firm also owed 1.5 million soums in late payment interest. It filed an application and a reconciliation statement, consented to the late payment interest being deducted and got back 80 − 52 − 1.5 = 26.5 million soums.
Important: the three-year period is counted from the day following the day of last use. Keep track of the remaining balance in your books — money forgotten for years will not come back.
Source: Customs Code, Articles 334 and 335.
See also: Customs fee · 37 customs payment codes: which go into the cost of goods and which become an expense?
FinanceWe are putting 100 million soums into a project that will return 35 million soums every year for 4 years. That is 140 million in total, which looks profitable. But a bank loan costs us 18% a year. What annual return does the project actually give?
This question is answered by the internal rate of return (IRR). It is the interest rate at which today's value of the future inflows is exactly equal to the money invested. In other words, IRR is the project's "own interest rate". You compare it with the cost of raising money: if IRR is higher than the loan rate, the project covers the debt and leaves a profit on top.
The fact that 140 million is more than 100 million does not mean anything yet, because 35 million arriving in year 4 is not equal to 35 million today.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Qorasuv quti" LLC spends 100 million soums on a packaging line, and the line generates net cash inflows of 35 million soums every year for 4 years. To find the IRR, we discount the inflows at different rates and look for where the net present value (NPV) falls to zero:
| Discount rate | Today's value of inflows, million | NPV, million |
|---|---|---|
| 10% | 110.95 | +10.95 |
| 14% | 101.98 | +1.98 |
| 15% | 99.92 | −0.08 |
| 18% | 94.15 | −5.85 |
| 20% | 90.61 | −9.39 |
NPV falls to zero between 14% and 15%: IRR ≈ 14.96%. In Excel this can be found with a single IRR function: enter −100, 35, 35, 35, 35 in the cells.
Conclusion: the project "earns" about 15% a year, while the loan costs 18%. If it is financed with a loan, the difference turns into a loss every year; at an 18% rate the NPV is −5.85 million soums. The "140 million in total" figure was misleading.
What can change the decision:
- If the line keeps working after 4 years or is sold at the end, add that inflow to the table as well. For example, if 60 million (25 million from selling the old line) arrives in year 4 instead of 35 million, the IRR rises to about 21.3% and the project beats the 18% loan.
- If there are negative years among the cash flows (a major repair in the middle), there may be more than one IRR. In that case, rely on NPV.
- When choosing between two projects, do not look only at IRR: a small project can have a high rate but little profit in soums. Compare NPV too.
See also: Internal rate of return (IRR) · Net present value (NPV) · Discounting
FinanceIn 3 months we have to pay a foreign supplier 20,000 dollars. If the dollar gets more expensive in the meantime, more soums will go out. How can we protect ourselves?
This is currency (exchange rate) risk. You work in soums, but the obligation is in dollars: if the rate rises, you pay more soums for the same debt. There are essentially three ways to reduce the risk:
- Buy the dollars now. The cost in soums becomes known today. The price: those soums cannot work anywhere else for 3 months (for example, they earn no interest on a deposit).
- Buy in instalments. You buy part of the amount now, part in the middle, and the rest on the payment date. The result will be close to the average rate: neither the best nor the worst.
- Wait and leave the risk open. If the rate falls you win, if it rises you lose.
There are also two "natural" routes: agreeing to set the contract in soums or at a fixed rate, and, if you have dollar revenue (exports), closing the payment with that revenue.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). For "Chorvoq jihoz" LLC, today's rate is hypothetically 12,000 soums. Soums taken out now would have earned 2% on a deposit over 3 months, so the extra cost of buying now is 240 million × 2% = 4.8 million soums. When buying in instalments, one third is bought now, one third after 1.5 months (at the average rate at that time, lost income 1%), and the rest on the payment date.
| Rate in 3 months | Waiting, million soums | Buying now, million soums | Buying in instalments, million soums |
|---|---|---|---|
| 11,500 | 230.0 | 244.8 | ≈ 237.4 |
| 12,000 | 240.0 | 244.8 | ≈ 242.4 |
| 13,000 | 260.0 | 244.8 | ≈ 252.4 |
The table shows the choice: "buying now" costs 244.8 million in every case — certain, but more expensive if the rate falls. The result of "waiting" is spread from 230 to 260 million. "Buying in instalments" narrows the range.
How do you choose? The main question: would an unexpected difference of 30 million soums put the company in a difficult position? If this amount is larger than your monthly profit, do not leave the risk open. When exchanging, also take into account the difference between the bank's selling and buying rates: buying dollars and selling them back several times is an extra cost.
See also: Hedging · Exchange difference · Foreign currency account
FinanceNext year we want to increase sales from 1.2 billion to 1.8 billion soums. We are profitable, but the accountant says "growth will need extra money". How much and why?
The accountant is right. When sales grow, it is not so much cash that grows as "paper" assets: there is more stock in the warehouse and customers owe more. Money is needed to finance them. The credit period given by suppliers covers part of this, and the company has to find the rest itself.
The working capital needed can be estimated through days:
- customer receivables = annual sales : 365 × payment days;
- stock in the warehouse = annual cost of sales : 365 × stock days;
- payables to suppliers = annual cost of sales : 365 × days to pay them;
- funds needed = customer receivables + stock − payables to suppliers.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). At "Bekobod plitka" LLC, cost of sales is 75% of sales, customers pay in 30 days on average, goods stay in the warehouse for 45 days, and suppliers are paid in 20 days. The cash conversion cycle: 30 + 45 − 20 = 55 days.
| Indicator, million soums | Sales 1.2 billion | Sales 1.8 billion |
|---|---|---|
| Customer receivables (30 days) | 98.63 | 147.95 |
| Stock in the warehouse (45 days) | 110.96 | 166.44 |
| Payables to suppliers (20 days) | 49.32 | 73.97 |
| Working capital needed | 160.27 | 240.41 |
Growth needs about 240.41 − 160.27 = 80.14 million soums extra. This money is needed before the sales start or during the growth, while the profit comes later. That is why even fast-growing, profitable companies run short of cash.
Ways to reduce the need:
- Shorten the payment period with customers: with 20 days instead of 30, almost 49 million soums are freed up at 1.8 billion of sales.
- Reduce stock: order slow-moving goods more often but in smaller quantities.
- Ask suppliers for a longer credit period, but check that you are not giving up an early payment discount.
- Arrange financing for the remaining shortfall in advance: rushing to the bank in the middle of growth is usually more expensive.
See also: Working capital (current assets) · Net working capital · Receivables turnover
FinanceWe spend 6 million soums a month on social media advertising and get 40 new customers. Is that expensive or cheap? How do I evaluate it?
Advertising is conveniently evaluated with two figures:
- customer acquisition cost = advertising spend : number of new customers;
- customer lifetime value = the gross profit a customer brings in a month × the average number of months they stay with us.
If lifetime value is greater than acquisition cost, the advertising pays off. Importantly, gross profit is used, not revenue, because the cost of the goods is spent anyway.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Lola gul" shop:
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Acquisition cost | 6,000,000 : 40 | 150,000 soums |
| Customer's monthly purchases | receipt of 80,000 soums × 2 times a month | 160,000 soums |
| Monthly gross profit (margin 30%) | 160,000 × 30% | 48,000 soums |
| A customer stays 8 months on average | 48,000 × 8 | 384,000 soums |
| Ratio | 384,000 : 150,000 | 2.56 |
| How many months the advertising takes to pay back | 150,000 : 48,000 | ≈ 3.1 months |
Every 150 thousand soums of advertising brings 384 thousand soums of gross profit. But this is profit before fixed costs are deducted, so a ratio just above 1 is not enough.
The most sensitive point is "how many months they stay". If customers stay 3 months instead of 8: 48,000 × 3 = 144,000 soums, a ratio of 0.96. The advertising now makes a loss, even though the number of customers is the same. So keeping customers (quality, service, reminder messages) can have a stronger effect than increasing the advertising budget.
Practical tips:
- Ask every new customer "where did you find us?", otherwise you will not know how many of the 40 customers came from the advertising.
- Count advertising channels separately: one may bring a customer for 100 thousand, another for 300 thousand soums.
- Update the calculation every quarter: if the margin or how long customers stay changes, the conclusion changes too.
See also: Selling expenses · Gross profit · Profitability
FinanceHow much money should always sit in the bank account? If there is a lot, it lies idle; if there is too little, we may fail to pay salaries or rent on time.
There is no single correct amount, but you can find it from your own data. The clearest method: take last year's monthly net cash flow (inflows minus outflows) and determine the most money that consecutive bad months "ate up". The reserve should not be less than this amount.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Monthly net cash flow of "Zomin asal" LLC last year, million soums:
| Month | Net flow | Cumulative balance | Fall from the highest point |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +10 | 10 | 0 |
| 2 | +6 | 16 | 0 |
| 3 | −8 | 8 | 8 |
| 4 | −14 | −6 | 22 |
| 5 | −5 | −11 | 27 |
| 6 | +12 | 1 | 15 |
| 7 | +18 | 19 | 0 |
| 8 | −3 | 16 | 3 |
| 9 | −16 | 0 | 19 |
| 10 | −9 | −9 | 28 |
| 11 | +7 | −2 | 21 |
| 12 | +20 | 18 | 1 |
Overall the year closed at +18 million, but from month 7 to month 10 consecutive outflows took the balance from 19 down to −9, that is, by 28 million soums. In months 3–5 the fall also reached 27 million. So if you moved surplus money to a deposit each time and kept only the reserve in the bank account, the reserve would have needed to be at least 28 million soums.
It makes sense to add a safety layer on top of this: next year may turn out worse than last year. It is convenient to measure it by the most unavoidable payments: one month's salaries and rent.
Where to keep the reserve:
- Part of it in the bank account, for day-to-day payments.
- The rest in short-term deposits that can be withdrawn quickly: the money is available when needed and earns a little income.
- Money above the reserve can be placed for a longer term or put into the business itself.
Update the table every year and add new loan repayments and the salaries of new employees in advance.
See also: Cash flow · Liquidity · Cash equivalents
InsuranceA driver from a transport company drove into the wall of our warehouse, damaging the wall and the goods inside. The insurer paid compensation and is now itself claiming money from the transport company. Can we also claim damages from that company?
This situation is called subrogation: once the insurer has paid compensation, the right to recover from the party at fault passes to the insurer up to the amount paid. The logic is simple: you should not get paid twice for one loss (by both the insurer and the party at fault), and the party at fault should not escape liability just because there is insurance.
So for the part covered by the insurer, it is now the insurer, not you, who claims from the transport company. But if the compensation did not fully cover the loss, the claim for the uncovered part usually stays with you.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The loss at the "Bo'ston ulgurji" warehouse (wall and goods) was assessed at 48 million soums. The policy has an unconditional deductible of 3 million soums.
| Who | Amount | Explanation |
|---|---|---|
| The insurer paid "Bo'ston ulgurji" | 45 million | 48 − 3 (deductible) |
| The insurer claims from the transport company | 45 million | up to the amount it paid |
| "Bo'ston ulgurji" may claim from the transport company | 3 million | the uncovered deductible |
| Total loss the transport company is liable for | 48 million | 45 + 3 |
What to watch out for:
- Do not agree with the party at fault that "we forgive you" without telling the insurer, and do not sign a paper waiving the claim. This affects the insurer's ability to recover; the consequences may be set out in the policy and the law, so agree with the insurer first.
- Keep all evidence of the incident, including the photos you took and the damaged parts. They will be needed both by the insurer and for your 3 million claim.
- If the loss exceeds the sum insured, you also go to the party at fault yourself for the uncovered difference.
The exact procedure (how the claim is made, which documents are needed) is written in the policy conditions: read that section before receiving compensation.
See also: Subrogation · Deductible (franchise) · Insurance payout
InsuranceAn agent offered me endowment life insurance: I pay 6 million soums a year for 10 years and get 75 million at the end. Wouldn't I get more if I put that money on deposit?
To compare the two properly, you first need to understand what endowment life insurance consists of. Each year's premium is split into three parts:
- the risk part — the price of the protection paid to the family if the insured person dies during the term;
- the insurer's expenses — the agent's commission, administration;
- the savings part — money that is returned at the end of the term and on which income is credited.
A deposit only has savings, no protection. So the right comparison is not "is 75 million a lot or a little" but the "protection + savings" package versus "separate protection + deposit".
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). 6 million soums is paid at the start of each year, for 10 years.
| Option | Calculation | At the end of 10 years |
|---|---|---|
| Endowment policy | under the contract | 75.0 million |
| Everything on deposit (hypothetically 10% a year, interest added every year) | 6 million × 10 years | ≈ 105.2 million |
| Separate protection policy at 0.5 million a year + 5.5 million on deposit (10%) | 5.5 million × 10 years | ≈ 96.4 million |
The policy's internal return: paying 60 million and getting 75 million after 10 years equals about 4.0% a year. The third row has both protection and more money at the end. In this example the package turned out more expensive.
But the decision is not made on figures alone:
- Discipline. It is easy to withdraw a deposit at any time and spend it. A policy is like compulsory saving; for someone who finds self-control hard, that can be useful.
- Early exit. If the policy is cancelled early, the amount returned may be less than the premiums paid. Ask for the contract's table of surrender values by year and review it.
- Guaranteed and non-guaranteed part. Find out how much of the 75 million is firmly written into the contract and how much is "expected income".
- Inflation. 75 million in 10 years is not today's 75 million: estimate what it will be worth in today's prices.
When talking to the agent, ask for three figures in writing: the annual risk part, the share of expenses and the guaranteed amount. Then you can build the table above with your own figures.
See also: Life insurance · Compound interest · Deposit
InsuranceDepending on the season, the stock in our wholesale warehouse varies from 80 million to 400 million soums. What amount should the policy cover: the highest stock level or the average?
Both approaches have drawbacks:
- if you insure for the highest stock (400 million), for most months of the year there is much less stock in the warehouse, yet the premium is paid for 400 million;
- if you insure for the average, the premium is cheaper, but if a loss happens exactly in the season when stock is high, the sum insured may not be enough.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Month-end stock at the "Sharq mevalari" warehouse, million soums: 80, 90, 120, 180, 260, 340, 400, 380, 260, 160, 120, 100. Average: 2,490 : 12 = 207.5 million. Hypothetical annual rate 0.3%.
| Option | Sum insured | Annual premium | If a 100 million loss occurs in month 7 (stock 400 million) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Highest stock | 400 million | 1.2 million | 100 million in full |
| Average stock | 207.5 million | ≈ 0.62 million | with a proportional cover condition: 100 × 207.5 : 400 ≈ 51.9 million |
The reduction in the second row only happens when the policy contains the condition "if the sum insured is less than the actual value, compensation is reduced proportionally". Find this clause in your contract.
Practical routes:
- Seasonal sum. Some insurers may agree to set different sums insured for different periods of the year: say, a high sum in months 5–8 and a low sum in the other months.
- A policy with regular stock declarations. The high sum (400 million) is taken as a limit, the company reports the actual stock to the insurer every month, and at the end of the year the premium is recalculated on the actual average stock. Ask your insurer whether such a condition exists.
- An additional agreement before the season. The main policy is for the average, and a separate additional agreement is made for the months when stock grows.
Whichever is chosen, keep accurate warehouse stock records every month: when a loss occurs, it is exactly these records that prove how much stock was in the warehouse.
See also: Sum insured · Insurance rate · Inventories
InsuranceWe were offered two policies for our warehouse. The first covers only the listed risks (fire, flooding, theft), with an annual premium of 6 million soums. The second covers "all risks except those excluded in the policy", with a premium of 9 million. Is the more expensive one worth the extra 3 million?
These two policies differ in the logic of cover:
- a "named perils" policy — only the risks written in the list are covered; there is no compensation for an event that is not on the list;
- an "all risks" policy — everything is covered except what is written in the list of exclusions.
Do not let the name mislead you: an "all risks" policy also has exclusions. So the main question when comparing is: how likely are events at your warehouse that are not in the first policy's list but are not excluded in the second, and how much loss would they cause?
Another difference shows up in a dispute. In international insurance practice, under a named perils policy the policyholder must show that the loss arose from a risk on the list, while under an all risks policy it is usually the insurer that must show the loss falls under an exclusion. Ask the insurer in writing how this is handled in your policy.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). At the "Chust do'ppi" wholesale warehouse, three events not on the first policy's list could occur. We assume these events are not in the second policy's list of exclusions. The probabilities are estimated from past years' experience:
| Event | Probability per year | Loss, million soums | Expected loss, million soums |
|---|---|---|---|
| A forklift drops boxes of goods | 30% | 4 | 1.2 |
| A strong wind damages the roof and windows | 10% | 8 | 0.8 |
| Part of the roof collapses under the weight of snow | 2% | 60 | 1.2 |
| Total | 3.2 |
On average, if the first policy is chosen, the company bears about 3.2 million soums of losses a year itself, that is, 6 + 3.2 = 9.2 million in total. The second policy costs 9 million. The difference is small, but the main point is not the average. If we assume the events are independent, the probability that at least one of them happens during the year is 1 − 0.7 × 0.9 × 0.98 ≈ 38%. The worst case is the roof collapse: the probability is small, but can the company cover a 60 million soum loss out of its own pocket? If not, the extra 3 million justifies itself as the price paid for that risk.
Before choosing:
- Read the second policy's list of exclusions in full and compare each item with the real risks at your warehouse.
- Read the definition of each risk in the first policy: which situations "flooding" includes is written in the policy itself.
- Build your own table: depending on the warehouse location, the condition of the roof and the work routine, the probabilities will be different.
- Check that the deductible and the sum insured are the same in both policies, otherwise the premiums cannot be compared directly.
See also: Insurance policy · Insured event · Insurance premium
InsuranceOur building was insured for 600 million soums with an insurer we chose ourselves. When taking out a loan, at the bank's request we insured it again with another insurer for 400 million soums. If there is a fire, will we get full compensation under both policies?
No. The basic principle of property insurance: compensation does not exceed the actual loss. Insurance is for covering a loss, not for getting rich. If one property is insured against the same risk under two separate policies (double insurance), the two insurers together will not pay more than the loss either.
Usually the loss is shared between the insurers in proportion to the sums insured. The exact procedure is written in the policy conditions.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The building of "Oltinsoy un" LLC is worth 600 million soums. It is insured with insurer A for 600 million and with insurer B for 400 million, 1,000 million in total. The fire loss is 150 million soums.
| Insurer | Sum insured | Share | Compensation |
|---|---|---|---|
| A | 600 million | 600 : 1,000 = 60% | 90 million |
| B | 400 million | 400 : 1,000 = 40% | 60 million |
| Total | 1,000 million | 100% | 150 million |
The company receives 150 million, not 250 million. The fact that a building worth 600 million is insured for 1,000 million in total means that part of the premium was paid for nothing.
What to do:
- Notify both insurers in writing about the second policy. Check whether your policies contain a condition requiring notice of other insurance: hiding such information can cause problems with compensation.
- Talk to the bank: often the bank may be satisfied not with a separate policy but with being named as beneficiary under the existing policy. Ask the bank itself which condition it will accept.
- If two policies remain, make sure the total sum is close to the property's value: say, by reducing one from 600 million to 200 million, you can save on the premium.
See also: Insurable interest · Beneficiary · Co-insurance (coassurance)
BankingA large customer will pay us in 60 days. The bank offered factoring: it pays 85% of the invoice amount now and charges a commission and interest. What interest rate on a loan is this equal to?
In factoring, the company hands over to the bank the money due from the customer (the receivable) and gets the money without waiting for the payment date. The cost usually has two parts: a one-off commission on the amount and interest charged on the money the bank has advanced. To compare, you need to add the two together and convert them into an annual rate.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Yangiyo'l kabel" LLC shipped goods worth 200 million soums to a customer, with payment in 60 days. The factoring terms: 85% advance, a commission of 1.5% of the invoice amount, and 24% a year interest on the money advanced.
| Indicator | Calculation | Amount, million soums |
|---|---|---|
| Money received today | 200 × 85% | 170.00 |
| Commission | 200 × 1.5% | 3.00 |
| Interest for 60 days | 170 × 24% × 60 : 365 | 6.71 |
| Total cost of factoring | 3.00 + 6.71 | 9.71 |
| Remainder after the customer pays | 200 × 15% − 9.71 | 20.29 |
| Effective annual cost | 9.71 : 170 × 365 : 60 | ≈ 34.7% |
Although the stated rate is 24%, together with the commission the money costs us almost 34.7% a year. Because the commission is spread over a short period, it rises sharply in annual terms.
Questions for the decision:
- Can this money be found more cheaply another way: a credit line, an overdraft, a discount to the customer for early payment?
- What do we lose by waiting 60 days? If a lack of money means we cannot buy raw materials and fulfil an order, factoring may justify itself even though it is expensive.
- Who is responsible if the customer does not pay? If the bank can demand the money back from you (recourse factoring), the risk stays with you. With non-recourse factoring the risk passes to the bank, and the bank may charge an extra fee for that risk.
Before signing the contract, ask the bank in writing for all charges (commission, interest, additional fees) in one table and do the calculation above with those figures.
See also: Factoring · Accounts receivable · Credit line
BankingAll our payments, card receipts and salaries go through one bank. The accountant suggests opening an account at a second bank as well. Is it worth the extra cost?
Working with one bank is convenient: one client-bank program, one statement, one tariff. But then all the money moves through a single "pipe". If that bank's program fails, or operations on the account are temporarily stopped for some reason, the company cannot make payments and cannot receive incoming money. A second account is a backup route against that risk.
The decision can be made not by feel but by comparing two figures: the annual cost of the second account and the loss from one day when the main bank is not working.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). In the "Shovot gilam" chain of shops, daily card revenue is 25 million soums, and gross profit is 20% of revenue.
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Tariff cost of the second account | 120,000 soums × 12 months | 1.44 million soums |
| Accountant's extra time (reconciling statements) | hypothetical estimate | 1.2 million soums |
| Total annual cost | 1.44 + 1.2 | 2.64 million soums |
| Gross profit lost in one day when card receipts stop | 25 million × 20% | 5 million soums |
| Break-even | 2.64 : 5 | ≈ 0.53 days a year |
If payments through the main bank could stop for more than half a day a year, the second account pays for itself. Add delayed salaries, contractual penalties for late payment to a supplier and lost customer trust, and the backup route becomes even more valuable.
An important condition: a second account does not help just because it has been opened. For the backup to really work:
- Make sure card payments can also be accepted through the second bank, otherwise revenue will be lost anyway when the main bank stops.
- Keep a balance on it that covers at least several days of unavoidable payments.
- Make sure the main suppliers and employees know the second account's details too, or have a procedure ready for changing them quickly.
- Once or twice a year make a test payment from the second account to check that access to the client-bank program and the signature keys work.
Working with two banks has an extra benefit too: it becomes easier to compare loan, tariff and currency exchange terms and ask for a better offer.
See also: Settlement (current) account · Bank card · Liquidity
BankingThe company has 300 million soums of spare cash, but we do not know exactly when it will be needed. If we put it all into a 12-month deposit, the interest is high, but the money is tied up. Is there a middle way?
There is; it is called a deposit "ladder". The money is divided into several equal parts and placed in deposits with different terms. When each part matures, it is placed again in a long-term deposit. As a result, after a year all the money is in the highest-interest deposits, but every few months one part becomes free.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical rates). "Bo'ka sut" LLC divides 300 million soums into four parts of 75 million each. Hypothetical annual rates: 3 months — 14%, 6 months — 16%, 9 months — 17.5%, 12 months — 19%. A part that matures is placed again for 12 months. Interest is calculated by the simple method, in proportion to the term.
| Part | First deposit | Interest on it | Rest of the year at 19% | Total interest in year 1 |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 3 months, 14% | 2.63 million | 75 × 19% × 9 : 12 = 10.69 | 13.31 million |
| 2 | 6 months, 16% | 6.00 million | 75 × 19% × 6 : 12 = 7.13 | 13.13 million |
| 3 | 9 months, 17.5% | 9.84 million | 75 × 19% × 3 : 12 = 3.56 | 13.41 million |
| 4 | 12 months, 19% | 14.25 million | — | 14.25 million |
| Total | ≈ 54.09 million |
If everything is placed for 12 months at once: 300 × 19% = 57 million soums. In the first year the ladder gives about 2.9 million soums less interest. This is the price of flexibility: every 3 months 75 million soums comes into hand without an early withdrawal penalty. From the second year all parts are in 12-month deposits and the difference almost disappears.
What to watch out for:
- Read the early withdrawal conditions in advance: if money is needed urgently, it is cheaper to withdraw the part that matures soonest.
- Match the number of parts and the intervals to your payment calendar: if you know when large payments (taxes, rent, raw materials) are due, choose terms that fall on those dates.
- Rates may change: the rate at the time of reinvestment will be different, so update this calculation each time.
See also: Deposit · Liquidity · Certificate of deposit
BankingThe bank offered two tariffs: a package for 450 thousand soums a month (up to 30 payments free, each additional one 10 thousand soums) or no package — 90 thousand soums a month and 12 thousand soums per payment. Which is cheaper?
This kind of choice is conveniently solved with a "break-even point": at how many payments a month do the two tariffs cost the same?
No-package tariff: 90,000 + 12,000 × number of payments. Package: 450,000 (up to 30).
90,000 + 12,000 × n = 450,000 → n = 30. So with fewer than 30 payments a month the no-package tariff is cheaper, with more than 30 the package is cheaper. But drawing a conclusion from one average month is a mistake, because the number of payments changes from month to month.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The number of payment orders of "Qamashi mebel" LLC over the last 6 months: 18, 25, 34, 41, 22, 29.
| Month | Number of payments | Package, soums | No package, soums |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 18 | 450,000 | 306,000 |
| 2 | 25 | 450,000 | 390,000 |
| 3 | 34 | 490,000 | 498,000 |
| 4 | 41 | 560,000 | 582,000 |
| 5 | 22 | 450,000 | 354,000 |
| 6 | 29 | 450,000 | 438,000 |
| Total | 169 | 2,850,000 | 2,568,000 |
The package was cheaper in only two months, while over 6 months the no-package tariff saved 282 thousand soums. The average number of payments is 169 : 6 ≈ 28, slightly below the break-even point.
Before choosing, check:
- Will the number of payments change in the coming months? New suppliers, moving salaries to cards or a new branch may increase the number of payments.
- Read the full content of both tariffs: services other than payments may also be priced differently. Add every service you need to the comparison.
- Can payments be combined: paying a supplier once a month instead of several times reduces the number of payments.
Charges for bank services are recorded in the accounts on account 9430 "Other operating expenses" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 410), so the amount saved directly reduces period expenses.
See also: Payment order · Settlement (current) account · Other operating expenses
BankingOur loan agreement contains the conditions "the ratio of debt to EBITDA must not exceed 3, and no dividends may be paid without the bank's consent". What are these and how do we monitor them?
Such conditions are called covenants. Even after the loan has been granted, the bank wants to make sure the company's position does not deteriorate: covenants are the tool for that control. They fall into two types:
- financial covenants — measured with a number (the "ratio of debt to EBITDA" in your agreement is such a covenant);
- action covenants — things the company must not do without the bank's consent or must do (your dividend condition is such a covenant).
The full list of covenants that apply to you is only in the loan agreement itself.
What happens if a condition is breached — a demand for early repayment of the loan, a higher interest rate or other measures — is written precisely in the agreement itself. That is why the covenants section must be read carefully both before and after signing.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The total debt of "Parkent shisha" LLC is 900 million soums, and annual EBITDA is 330 million soums.
| Situation | Calculation | Ratio | Condition (not above 3) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Now | 900 : 330 | ≈ 2.73 | met |
| If new debt of 200 million is taken | 1,100 : 330 | ≈ 3.33 | breached |
| If EBITDA falls to 300 million | 900 : 300 | 3.00 | at the limit |
To keep the condition with the new debt, EBITDA must be at least 1,100 : 3 ≈ 366.7 million soums.
Monitoring procedure:
- At the end of each quarter, calculate the covenant ratios exactly as the bank calculates them: what is included in "debt" (leasing, other loans), for what period EBITDA is taken — see the definition in the agreement.
- If a ratio is approaching the limit, talk to the bank before taking new debt or making a large expenditure. Consent requested in advance is much easier than explanations after a condition has been breached.
- Make the list of action covenants a separate reminder for the accounting department and management: the decision on dividends is taken by the founders, and they also need to know about this condition.
See also: EBITDA · Current ratio · Dividend
StatisticsOur online shop gets 8,000 visitors a month, 2,400 put a product in the cart, 600 go to the payment page, and 360 make a purchase. Improving which stage will bring the most profit?
This is called sales funnel analysis. At each stage some people "drop out". The conversion of each stage is the share of those who move on to the next stage:
Conversion = number of people at the next stage : number of people at the previous stage
The overall result equals the product of the conversions of all stages. So an improvement at one stage affects the final result through the whole chain.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). On the "Ipak yo'li kitoblari" website, the average purchase is 250,000 soums.
| Stage | People | Conversion |
|---|---|---|
| Visited the site | 8,000 | — |
| Put in cart | 2,400 | 2,400 : 8,000 = 30% |
| Went to the payment page | 600 | 600 : 2,400 = 25% |
| Made a purchase | 360 | 360 : 600 = 60% |
| Overall | 360 : 8,000 = 4.5% |
Now let us calculate what happens if we improve each stage separately by 5 percentage points:
| Stage improved | New number of purchases | Extra purchases | Extra revenue |
|---|---|---|---|
| Adding to cart 30% → 35% | 420 | +60 | 15.0 million |
| Going to payment 25% → 30% | 432 | +72 | 18.0 million |
| Completing the purchase 60% → 65% | 390 | +30 | 7.5 million |
The biggest effect is at the stage of moving from the cart to payment. The reason: the lower the conversion, the larger the relative growth the same 5 percentage points give (from 25% to 30% is one fifth more). Check what is stopping customers at this stage: does the delivery cost pop up only at the end, is registration compulsory, is the form long?
Practical tips:
- Measure the funnel every month with the same definitions, otherwise the months cannot be compared.
- Split the stages by customer type as well: the conversion of visitors on phones and on computers can differ greatly.
- After making a change, observe for long enough to separate the result from random fluctuations.
See also: Index · Growth rate · Sample
StatisticsWe tested two different ad texts: text A was seen by 1,000 people and 50 clicked; text B was seen by 1,000 people and 65 clicked. Can we say B is better, or is it chance?
This kind of test is called an A/B test. The difference between 5% and 6.5% looks large, but with a few dozen clicks chance can produce such a difference too. To check this, statistics uses a test for the difference between two proportions.
The idea: first we assume that "there is actually no difference" (the null hypothesis) and measure how unexpected the observed difference is under that assumption.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The ad test of the "Chimyon sayohat" firm:
| Step | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Proportion A | 50 : 1,000 | 0.050 |
| Proportion B | 65 : 1,000 | 0.065 |
| Pooled proportion | (50 + 65) : 2,000 | 0.0575 |
| Standard error of the difference | √(0.0575 × 0.9425 × (1 : 1,000 + 1 : 1,000)) | ≈ 0.0104 |
| z statistic | (0.065 − 0.050) : 0.0104 | ≈ 1.44 |
Usually, to call a difference "not chance" at a 95% confidence level, the absolute value of z must be greater than 1.96. 1.44 does not reach this threshold. So for now we cannot say with certainty that "B is better". Nor does this mean "B is worse": there is not enough data.
How many people were needed? To reliably detect a difference of 1.5 percentage points (95% confidence, 80% probability of detecting the difference), each group needs approximately:
(1.96 + 0.84)² × (0.05 × 0.95 + 0.065 × 0.935) : 0.015² ≈ 3,773 people.
If each text is seen by 4,000 people and the proportions stay the same, z ≈ 2.88 and the difference is considered reliable.
Rules for a proper test:
- Show both texts at the same time to a randomly selected audience, otherwise differences between days or weeks will distort the result.
- Calculate the number of people needed before the test and do not stop it on the day the result "looks good".
- Besides clicks, track the next step too: a text that gets many clicks may lead to few purchases.
See also: Null hypothesis · Confidence interval · Sample
StatisticsIn the questionnaires, the age of our gym members is recorded only by group: "15–25 years — 34 people, 25–35 — 58 people", and the following groups in the same way. We do not have each member's exact age. How do I calculate the average age?
If the data is grouped into intervals, the values within each interval are assumed to lie at its midpoint. After that an ordinary weighted average is calculated:
Average ≈ Σ (interval midpoint × number of people) : total people
This is not an exact value but a good estimate. The narrower the intervals, the more accurate the estimate.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). 125 members of the "Baquvvat" gym. The last group was written open-ended in the questionnaire as "over 60"; we took it as equal in width to the previous group, that is, 60–75 years.
| Age interval | People | Interval midpoint | Midpoint × number |
|---|---|---|---|
| 15–25 | 34 | 20 | 680 |
| 25–35 | 58 | 30 | 1,740 |
| 35–45 | 21 | 40 | 840 |
| 45–60 | 9 | 52.5 | 472.5 |
| 60–75 | 3 | 67.5 | 202.5 |
| Total | 125 | 3,935 |
Average ≈ 3,935 : 125 ≈ 31.5 years.
The median (the age below which half of the members are) can also be found from a grouped table. Half of 125 is 62.5. The first group has 34 people, so the median is in the second group (25–35). There we need to count another 62.5 − 34 = 28.5 people:
Median ≈ 25 + 28.5 : 58 × 10 ≈ 29.9 years.
The average (31.5) is greater than the median (29.9) because a few members who are much older pull the average up. When planning advertising and the class timetable, the median better represents the "typical" member. Small groups should be looked at separately: in this example there are 12 people over 45 (9.6%), and you might consider whether they need a separate class time.
Tip: if possible, ask for the exact age (or year of birth) in the questionnaire. You can group the data any way you like later, but exact values cannot be recovered from grouped data.
See also: Weighted average · Median · Histogram
StatisticsBy the 12th of the month we had revenue of 46 million soums, and the monthly plan is 113 million. A simple calculation gives 46 : 12 × 30 = 115 million, so will we meet the plan?
Not so fast. The "average of past days × days in the month" method assumes that every day sells the same. If your sales on weekends are different, the forecast changes noticeably depending on how many such days fell in the past 12 days.
A more accurate method is to give the days a "weight". From the data of your own past months, you find how many times more a weekend day sells compared with an ordinary day, and count the days with that weight.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). At the "Yunusobod pishiriqlari" café, data from past months show that Saturday and Sunday bring in 1.5 times the revenue of an ordinary day. The month has 30 days: 22 working days and 8 weekend days. The past 12 days included 8 working days and 4 weekend days.
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Past "weighted days" | 8 × 1 + 4 × 1.5 | 14 |
| Total for the month | 22 × 1 + 8 × 1.5 | 34 |
| Revenue of one "ordinary day" | 46 : 14 | ≈ 3.29 million |
| Forecast for the month | 3.29 × 34 | ≈ 111.7 million |
| Compared with the plan | 111.7 − 113 | ≈ −1.3 million |
The simple calculation says 115 million, the weighted one 111.7 million. The reason: half of the 8 weekend days have already passed in the first 12 days of the month, and only 4 remain in the other 18 days. So until the end of the month each day will on average bring in less revenue than before.
What to watch out for:
- Update the forecast every week: the closer you get to the end of the month, the more accurate it becomes.
- Take into account not only days of the week but also events specific to the month: mark every day in past months when revenue differed sharply from usual and write down the reason.
- If the forecast says "not enough", it is a signal to act: in the remaining 18 days you need about 1.29 million : 18 ≈ 71 thousand soums of extra revenue a day, which can be planned through a promotion or a new dish.
See also: Time series · Seasonal adjustment · Weighted average
Statistics1,000 lamps arrived from the supplier. We checked 20 at random and all of them worked. Can we say there are almost no faulty lamps in the batch?
Not quite. Finding no faulty lamps in 20 checks does not show that the batch has no faulty ones, only that their share is not very large. This can be checked with probability.
If the share of faulty lamps in the batch is q, the probability that one randomly chosen lamp works is (1 − q). The probability that all 20 work is approximately (1 − q)²⁰. Because the batch is large (1,000 units), this approximation is accurate enough.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The calculation for the "Nurli uy" shop:
| Share of faulty lamps in the batch | Probability that 20 all work | Probability that 59 all work |
|---|---|---|
| 1% | 0.99²⁰ ≈ 82% | 0.99⁵⁹ ≈ 55% |
| 3% | 0.97²⁰ ≈ 54% | 0.97⁵⁹ ≈ 17% |
| 5% | 0.95²⁰ ≈ 36% | 0.95⁵⁹ ≈ 4.8% |
| 10% | 0.90²⁰ ≈ 12% | 0.90⁵⁹ ≈ 0.2% |
Reading the table: even if every twentieth lamp in the batch (5%) is faulty, the probability that all are fine in 20 checks is 36%. That is, you would miss such a "bad" batch in one case out of three.
How many should be checked? If you want to conclude with 95% confidence that "faulty lamps are below 5%", all n lamps must work, with 0.95ⁿ less than 5%:
n > ln(0.05) : ln(0.95) ≈ 58.4, that is, at least 59.
There is also a quick rule of thumb: if not a single faulty item is found in n checks, the 95% upper limit for the share of faulty items is approximately 3 : n. For 20 this is 3 : 20 = 15%. So your result is consistent with the conclusion "up to 15% may be faulty".
Practical tips:
- Take the lamps to be checked at random from different places in the boxes: taking them from the top boxes distorts the result.
- Agree the acceptance procedure with the supplier in the contract in advance: how many are checked and how many faulty ones mean the batch is returned.
- Keep count of lamps returned by customers too: this is the cheapest and most continuous quality control.
See also: Sample · Population · Confidence interval
EconomicsIn our coffee shop we sell coffee and pastries separately. If we sell a "coffee + pastry" set for less than the sum of the separate prices, won't our profit fall?
It may not fall and may even rise. This is called bundling (bundle pricing). The reason lies not in the discount but in the fact that customers value each product differently.
One customer is willing to pay a lot for coffee and little for a pastry, another the other way round. With separate prices, you have to fit each product's price to one group, and the other group does not buy that product. In a bundle, however, the valuations of the two products add up and the difference between customers shrinks: one price suits more people. As economists point out, this effect is strongest when customers' valuations are opposite (one values coffee highly, another the pastry).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Bodom qahva" serves three types of customers a day. The cost of a coffee is 5,000 soums, the cost of a pastry is 4,000 soums. A customer buys if the price is below the amount they are willing to pay.
| Customer group | People per day | Willing to pay for coffee | Willing to pay for a pastry | For both together |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| A (coffee lovers) | 40 | 20,000 | 6,000 | 26,000 |
| B (sweet lovers) | 40 | 9,000 | 15,000 | 24,000 |
| C (coffee only) | 20 | 18,000 | 2,000 | 20,000 |
Daily profit (revenue minus cost) of three pricing policies:
| Option | Who buys what | Daily profit |
|---|---|---|
| Separate only: coffee 17,500, pastry 14,500 | A and C — coffee (60 × 12,500); B — pastry (40 × 10,500) | 750,000 + 420,000 = 1,170,000 soums |
| Bundle only: 23,500 | A and B buy the bundle (80 × 14,500), C buys nothing | 1,160,000 soums |
| Mixed: bundle 22,500, coffee 17,500, pastry 14,500 | A and B — bundle (80 × 13,500); C — coffee (20 × 12,500) | 1,080,000 + 250,000 = 1,330,000 soums |
The mixed option gives 160,000 soums more profit a day than selling separately. The reason: group A previously did not buy pastries and group B did not buy coffee; the bundle encouraged them to buy the second product as well, while group C kept buying coffee separately. The bundle price is well below the sum of the separate prices (32,000), but each bundle is above cost.
Practical tips:
- Bundle products that customers value differently. Bundling products that everyone values the same brings little profit.
- Keep separate sales too: if only the bundle is left, you lose customers who need a single product, like group C.
- Be careful if the cost of each product in the bundle is high: even if someone wants only one and the second goes to waste, the cost is still incurred.
- Track the result in the till data: after the bundle was introduced, did the average receipt amount and daily gross profit change?
See also: Demand · Price elasticity of demand · Cost (cost of production)
EconomicsOur branch manager receives a fixed salary of 8 million soums a month. The branch is not doing badly, but we sense the manager is not making any extra effort. If we link part of the salary to the branch's profit, will it pay off?
In economics this is called the "principal–agent problem". The owner (principal) entrusts the work to another person (the agent), but cannot fully see how much effort that person is making, only the result. If pay does not depend on the result, extra effort gives the manager nothing, while the extra work is their own "cost". That is why pay linked to results is considered the usual solution to this problem.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). It was estimated that the "Qumqo'rg'on savdo" branch, before the manager's salary, brings in 30 million soums of profit a month with normal effort and 40 million if the manager makes extra effort. The new offer: a fixed salary of 5 million + 10% of the branch's profit (before the manager's salary).
| Branch profit, million soums | Current system: manager gets | Left for the owner | New system: manager gets | Left for the owner |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 30 (normal effort) | 8 | 22 | 5 + 3 = 8 | 22 |
| 40 (extra effort) | 8 | 32 | 5 + 4 = 9 | 31 |
| 20 (bad month) | 8 | 12 | 5 + 2 = 7 | 13 |
Under the current system, the manager sees no reason to make extra effort and the branch stays at 30 million: the owner gets 22 million. Under the new system, in a normal month the manager's pay does not change, while extra effort gives the manager 1 million and the owner 9 million more (from 22 to 31). In a bad month the manager also bears part of the risk.
But pay linked to results has its own risks:
- Factors the manager cannot control. If profit falls because of the season, the rent or decisions by head office, the manager is "punished". If this seems unfair, a good manager may leave. So keep the fixed part sufficient to live on.
- Short-term "pretty" profit. Postponing repairs, cutting stock too far or worsening customer service raise profit for a few months and then cause losses. To prevent this, measure the result over a quarter or a year and also add the number of customer complaints and shortages found in stocktakes to the conditions.
- Accuracy of measurement. How "branch profit" is calculated (whether a share of head office costs is included or not) must be agreed in writing in advance, otherwise disputes will arise.
- Formalisation. Agree with a lawyer and an accountant on how to reflect the bonus procedure in the employment contract and internal documents.
Choose the percentage share by calculation too: if it is too small, extra effort is not worth it for the manager; if it is too large, the profit left for the owner shrinks. Build a table like the one above with your own figures for several shares.
See also: Wages (salary) · Profitability · Opportunity cost
EconomicsIf prices fall, that is good for buyers, isn't it? Why do economists consider deflation dangerous?
First the difference needs to be clarified. One product becoming cheaper (for example, phones thanks to new technology) is not deflation. Deflation is a prolonged fall in the general level of prices in the economy. The danger lies precisely in this general and sustained fall.
Three main reasons:
- Postponing purchases. People and companies expecting that "it will be cheaper next month" put off their purchases. Demand falls, companies cut prices again, and this strengthens the waiting.
- The real burden of debt increases. A debt in soums is fixed, while the company's revenue falls together with prices. To repay the same debt, more output has to be sold.
- Wages are hard to cut. If revenue falls but salaries are hard to reduce, the company cuts staff numbers. Unemployment rises and demand falls again.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Qoraqamish mebel" has annual revenue of 500 million soums, a bank debt of 200 million soums and a loan rate of 10% a year. The general price level fell by 5% in a year, the company was also forced to cut its prices by the same amount, and it sold the same volume.
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| New revenue | 500 × 0.95 | 475 million |
| Debt to revenue ratio: before | 200 : 500 | 40.0% |
| Debt to revenue ratio: after | 200 : 475 | ≈ 42.1% |
| Real interest rate | 1.10 : 0.95 − 1 | ≈ 15.8% |
The company took on no new debt, yet the debt burden became heavier. A nominal 10% loan in conditions of falling prices became equal to 15.8% in reality: every soum repaid is now worth more goods.
Practical conclusions for a company:
- If a general fall in prices is expected, be careful about increasing long-term fixed debt in soums.
- Do not hold a lot of stock: the value of goods in the warehouse falls over time.
- If you notice customers postponing purchases, consider competing not on price but with additional services (delivery, warranty).
See also: Deflation · Inflation · Consumer price index
EconomicsWe want to send our five salespeople on a 15 million soum sales course. But what if they leave for another firm after the training? Won't that be money wasted?
In economics, knowledge and skills are called human capital. Money spent on them, like money spent on equipment, brings income in the future, except that this "equipment" sits in the employee and can leave with them. So the risk is sensed correctly, but it can be assessed by calculation.
Economists divide skills into two types:
- general skills — needed in any firm (negotiation, communicating with customers). They raise the employee's market value, and the risk of leaving is high;
- firm-specific skills — related only to your product, software and customers. They are valued little elsewhere, so even if the employee leaves they lose little, but they are also less inclined to leave.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). At the "Sirdaryo maishiy texnika" shop, after the course each salesperson sells an extra 4 million soums a month, the gross margin is 25%, that is, an extra 1 million soums of profit a month from each.
| Situation | Calculation | Extra profit over 12 months |
|---|---|---|
| Everyone stays | 5 × 12 × 1 million | 60 million |
| 2 leave after 6 months | 3 × 12 × 1 + 2 × 6 × 1 | 48 million |
| Course price | 15 million | |
| How many months to recover the cost if everyone stays | 15 : (5 × 1) | 3 months |
Even if two salespeople leave, the extra profit is more than three times the course price. The main risk is if most of them leave in the first 2–3 months.
Ways to reduce the risk:
- Add a firm-specific part to the course: internal training on your product, customer base and sales standards.
- After the course, introduce an incentive system linked to results: those who sell more get more, and there is less reason to leave.
- Run the course in stages: first the two or three longest-serving employees, and the rest once the results are seen.
- Before making any agreement with an employee on reimbursing training costs, check the requirements of labour law with a lawyer.
In the accounts, staff training and retraining costs are recorded on account 9430 "Other operating expenses" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 410). So in the accounts this is a period expense, while in the economic sense it is an investment.
See also: Other operating expenses · Opportunity cost · Gross profit
EconomicsAlmost all the cafés in our city are on one ordering app. We want to launch a new app with a lower commission, but neither cafés nor customers want to switch. Why doesn't even a better offer win?
This is the network effect. The value of some products depends on the number of their users: the usefulness of a phone depends on the number of people you can call, and the usefulness of an ordering app depends on the number of cafés and customers on it. In such a market it is not the "better" product but the one "with more users" that prevails.
In apps the effect is two-sided: if there are many cafés, customers come; if there are many customers, cafés come. A new app has no one, so no one comes. This is the "chicken and egg" problem.
The number of possible connections between users grows much faster than the number of users: among n users there are n × (n − 1) : 2 pairs.
| Users | Possible pairs |
|---|---|
| 2 | 1 |
| 5 | 10 |
| 10 | 45 |
| 100 | 4,950 |
| 1,000 | 499,500 |
That is why the difference between a large and a small network is felt even more than the difference in the number of users.
Example (prepared by the author). The "Mazali yetkaz" app wants to enter a new market. Cutting the commission alone is not enough, because for a café the number of orders matters more than a low commission. The app can choose one of the following strategies:
- Start in a narrow area. Not the whole city but one district or one student campus: in a small area it is easier to reach the "everyone is here" state quickly.
- Subsidise one side. For example, in the first months work commission-free for cafés or make delivery free for customers. The cost goes to one side, and the other side comes by itself.
- A service others do not have. If the app gives cafés not only delivery but also stock accounting, a café has a reason to use it even while the network is small.
- Allow parallel work on both apps. If a café does not have to leave the old app, joining the new one feels safe.
As a consumer, also keep in mind: markets with strong network effects tend to end up with one or two large players, and competition may decline.
See also: Competition · Monopoly · Oligopoly
TaxA tax audit has started at our company. How long can it last, and can the inspectors extend the deadline as much as they like?
No, they cannot: the Tax Code sets clear limits on a tax audit.
| Rule | Content | Basis |
|---|---|---|
| General term | No more than 30 days (except for the extensions under Article 142) | Article 141, Part One |
| Start | The audit begins on the day the order appointing the audit is handed to the taxpayer | Article 141, Part Two |
| Extension | The term may be extended to two months, and in exceptional cases to three months; the grounds and procedure are set by the State Tax Committee | Article 142, Parts One and Two |
| Additional grounds | The head (deputy head) of the tax authority may extend the audit for four more purposes: requesting documents under Article 146; obtaining information from authorities of foreign states under international agreements; carrying out an expert examination; translating documents in a foreign language | Article 142, Part Three |
| Extension because of documents | Only once in respect of each person from whom documents are requested | Article 142, Part Four |
| Formalisation | By order of the head (deputy head) of the tax authority | Article 142, Part Five |
| Upper limit | The total term of a tax audit may not exceed six months | Article 142, Part Six |
| End | On the day the audit report is drawn up (signed) | Article 142, Part Seven |
| Repeat audit | An audit of the same period and the same taxes is not carried out a second time; if new circumstances unknown to the tax authority during the audit are discovered, a repeat audit may be appointed | Article 143 |
Note: the text does not say that "thirty days" means calendar days. Under Part Seven of Article 5 of the Code, such a term is counted in working days.
Example (prepared by the author). A tax audit has started at "Oltin Vodiy Tekstil" LLC. The inspector requested export contracts from the company itself, and on that basis the term was extended once by order of the head. Now he wants to request information from a foreign tax authority under an international agreement and extend the term again. This is a different ground (Article 142, Part Three, item 2), so it is allowed. But the term cannot be extended a second time because of another document request to the company itself, and with all the extensions the audit cannot exceed six months.
Tip: keep a record of the day the audit order reached you and every extension order in a separate folder. Check which ground from Article 142 is stated in the extension order.
Source: Tax Code, Article 5 (Part Seven), Articles 141, 142 and 143.
See also: What is the difference between a desk audit and a field tax audit? · Tax control
TaxDuring a tax audit the inspector asked for 60 contracts and acts at once. How much time do we have, and what do we do if we cannot make it?
Article 146 of the Tax Code regulates this situation step by step.
- Deadline. You are given 5 days from the day you receive the request to submit the documents (Part Seven). Since it does not say calendar days, under Part Seven of Article 5 these are working days.
- If you cannot make it. During the day following the day you received the request, you send a written notice stating why you cannot provide the documents on time and when you will be able to provide them (Part Eight).
- Response. Within two days of receiving the notice, the head (deputy head) of the tax authority issues a separate decision to extend the deadline or to refuse the extension (Part Nine).
- Consequence. A refusal to provide documents is recorded in a protocol. A refusal or failure to provide them within the set deadline is a ground for seizing the documents under the procedure of Article 148 (Part Ten).
How to submit the documents:
| Issue | Rule | Article 146 |
|---|---|---|
| Method | In person or through a representative, by registered mail or electronically, including through the personal account | Part Three |
| On paper | Copies certified by you; unless the legislation provides otherwise, notarisation is not required | Part Four |
| Electronic documents | A paper copy is provided on request; electronic invoices registered in the information system are an exception | Part Five |
| Original | The tax authority may examine the originals if necessary | Part Six |
| Documents provided earlier | Documents provided earlier during a desk or field tax audit, as well as documents provided as certified copies during tax monitoring, are not requested again; exceptions are cases where the original was returned to you or lost at the tax authority due to force majeure | Part Eleven |
Example (prepared by the author). "Shohrux Qurilish" LLC received the request on Monday. Of the 60 documents, 52 are in the office and 8 are in the archive of the branch in Samarkand. On Tuesday the accountant sends a notice: 52 documents will be provided within five working days, and 8 within another three working days after they are brought from the branch. Because the notice was sent on time, the deadline question is resolved by the head's decision. A delay without a notice could have been a ground for seizing the documents.
Note: the term of a tax audit may be extended because documents are requested (Article 142, Part Three, item 1).
Source: Tax Code, Article 5 (Part Seven), Article 142, Article 146.
See also: Field tax audit · Desk tax audit
TaxWe have an accounting policy for bookkeeping. Do we also need an accounting policy for taxes, and what must be written in it?
You do. Under Article 77 of the Tax Code, the taxpayer determines its accounting policy for tax purposes independently and approves it in any form. Part Two provides for amending it through the accounting policy (or a section of it) developed in accordance with accounting legislation. So in practice it is convenient to keep it as a separate section of the accounting policy for bookkeeping.
Under Part One, it must reflect the following (full list):
- The form of the tax registers developed by the taxpayer and the procedure for preparing them (unless the tax legislation provides otherwise).
- The officials responsible for compliance with the accounting policy.
- The procedure for keeping separate records, if the Code imposes such an obligation.
- The chosen methods of including costs in expenses for corporate profit tax and of accounting for VAT.
- The hedging policy: the hedged risks, items and instruments, and the methodology for assessing hedge effectiveness (if there are hedging and other financial risk operations).
- Depreciation rates or methods of calculating depreciation: separately for each group and subgroup of assets.
- How income from Islamic finance activities and from Islamic securities is accounted for separately (this item came into force on 29 June 2026).
When it applies:
| Situation | Rule | Article 77 |
|---|---|---|
| Chosen methods | Applied from 1 January of the year following the year of approval | Part Three |
| Newly established legal entity (including a permanent establishment of a foreign legal entity) | The decision on methods is made within the first reporting period | Part Four |
| Change during the year | Not allowed; only when the tax legislation or the conditions of taxation change, and only in the part affected by that change | Part Five |
Example (prepared by the author). On 20 December 2026, by order, the director of "Ko'k Gumbaz Mebel" LLC changed the depreciation rate for trucks in the tax accounting policy within the limits set by the Code. The new rate applies from 1 January 2027, while December 2026 is calculated at the old rate. Had the director approved the same change in March 2027, with no change in legislation it would have applied only from 1 January 2028.
Source: Tax Code, Article 77.
See also: Accounting policy · VAT
TaxWe merged a neighbouring LLC into our company. Who takes over its unpaid taxes and fines? It also had an overpayment of another tax.
Under Article 92 of the Tax Code, the tax obligations of the absorbed legal entity are fulfilled by the legal entity that absorbed it, that is, by you (Part Seven).
| Rule | Article 92 |
|---|---|
| The obligation passes to the legal successor; it does not matter whether the successor knew about the old firm's tax arrears before the reorganisation was completed | Parts One and Two |
| The successor pays off all the tax arrears, including fines for tax offences committed before the reorganisation | Part Three |
| Reorganisation does not change payment deadlines | Part Five |
| Amounts overpaid by the old firm or overcollected from it (tax, penalty interest, fines) are offset by the tax authority against its tax arrears; the deadline for this is no later than one month after the reorganisation is completed | Part Fourteen |
| If there are no arrears, the overpaid amount is refunded no later than one month from the day the successor files an application | Part Sixteen |
| The same rules apply to fees and to taxes on goods moved across the customs border | Parts Seventeen and Nineteen |
A successor is also defined for other forms: in a merger, the newly formed entity (Part Six); in a division, the new entities (Part Eight; shares according to the separation balance sheet, Part Nine); in a transformation, the new entity (Part Thirteen). In a spin-off, however, succession generally does not arise (Part Eleven).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Chinor Savdo" LLC absorbed "Bog'bon Agro" LLC. "Bog'bon Agro" had arrears of 14 million soums and a fine of 2 million soums on one tax, and an overpayment of 5 million soums on another tax.
| Indicator | Soums |
|---|---|
| Arrears and fine | 14,000,000 + 2,000,000 = 16,000,000 |
| Overpayment offset | − 5,000,000 |
| Balance payable by "Chinor Savdo" | 11,000,000 |
Since payment deadlines do not change, delaying payment until the merger is completed brings no benefit. Before the merger, obtain the old firm's reconciliation statement with the tax authority: both the arrears and the overpayment are visible in it.
Source: Tax Code, Article 92.
See also: Tax arrears · Overpaid tax
TaxOur company carries on two activities with different tax regimes. The office rent and the chief accountant's salary relate to both. How do we split them?
Under Part One of Article 80 of the Tax Code, a taxpayer simultaneously carrying on several activities with different tax regimes must keep separate records of the objects of taxation for each activity. These records are kept on the basis of accounting data, and the income and expenses of each activity are supported by accounting documents (Parts Two and Three).
There are two methods (Part Four):
| Method | How it works | Article 80 |
|---|---|---|
| Proportional | Amounts are allocated according to each activity's share of total revenue; revenue is taken excluding VAT and excise tax | Part Five |
| Direct | Income or an expense is assigned to the activity it relates to; only those that cannot be assigned to one activity are allocated among all activities by the proportional method | Part Six |
The chosen procedure is written into the tax accounting policy: under Article 77, Part One, item 3, the procedure for keeping separate records must be reflected in the accounting policy.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). In a quarter, "Nurafshon Servis" LLC received revenue of 720 million soums from activity A and 480 million soums from activity B (excluding VAT and excise). Raw materials and direct labour costs were assigned directly to each activity according to documents. Common expenses: office rent of 54 million and chief accountant's salary of 36 million soums.
| Indicator | Activity A | Activity B | Total |
|---|---|---|---|
| Revenue, million soums | 720 | 480 | 1,200 |
| Share | 720 / 1,200 = 60% | 480 / 1,200 = 40% | 100% |
| Office rent, million soums | 32.4 | 21.6 | 54 |
| Chief accountant's salary, million soums | 21.6 | 14.4 | 36 |
| Total common expenses, million soums | 54 | 36 | 90 |
Tip: keep the allocation table for each period and link the revenue figures in it to the accounting registers, so that it is documented how the allocation was calculated.
Source: Tax Code, Article 77 (Part One, item 3), Article 80.
See also: Accounting policy · Tax period
AccountingOur installation firm is installing a new production line at the customer's plant. The plant handed the line over to us, and it remains our responsibility until installation is finished. Do we put it on our own balance sheet?
No. The line is the customer's property; you received it only for installation. When another party's property is temporarily with you, paragraph 437 of NAS No. 21 provides for keeping it on an off-balance sheet account using the simple (single-entry) system. There is a separate account for the contractor: 005 "Equipment accepted for installation" (paragraph 442).
Rules of paragraph 442:
| Issue | Rule |
|---|---|
| Who uses it | Contractor organisations that received equipment from the customer for installation |
| Valuation | The value stated by the customer in its documents |
| Analytical accounting | Separately for each object or unit |
Your own installation costs and income are kept on the ordinary accounts:
| Operation | Dr | Cr | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Your own materials used in installation | 2010 | 1010–1090 | table to paragraph 120, line 3 |
| Wages accrued to installers | 2010 | 6710 | table to paragraph 120, line 17 |
| Cost of installation work accepted by the customer written off | 9130 | 2010 | table to paragraph 120, line 28 |
| Installation fee receivable from the customer recognised | 4010 | 9030 | table to paragraph 174, line 1 |
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Ustoz Montaj Servis" LLC is installing a packaging line in the workshop of "Qo'rg'ontepa Sut" LLC. In the customer's handover document, the line is divided into three units.
| Unit | Customer's value, soums | On account 005 |
|---|---|---|
| Packaging machine | 640,000,000 | receipt |
| Conveyor | 280,000,000 | receipt |
| Control cabinet | 80,000,000 | receipt |
| Total | 1,000,000,000 |
For the installation, the firm used cables and fasteners worth 18 million soums from its own warehouse and accrued 42 million soums in wages to the installers: the debit of 2010 accumulated 18,000,000 + 42,000,000 = 60,000,000 soums. When the work is finished and the line is handed over to the customer under an act:
| Entry | Amount, soums |
|---|---|
| Cr 005 (for all three units) | 1,000,000,000 |
| Dr 9130 – Cr 2010 | 60,000,000 |
| Dr 4010 – Cr 9030 (installation fee under the contract) | 90,000,000 |
Gross profit from installation: 90,000,000 − 60,000,000 = 30,000,000 soums. The example is simplified: mandatory payroll contributions and VAT calculations are not included.
Note: the line worth 1 billion soums never goes to 9030 or 4010. The income is only your service, the installation fee. If records are kept by unit, it is clear which unit has been returned when the installation is handed over in stages.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 120, 174, 437 and 442.
See also: Equipment accepted for installation · 005 Equipment accepted for installation
AccountingOur plant has its own repair workshop: it repairs the machines of the main workshops and the office building, and also works on the construction of a new warehouse. Where do we accumulate the workshop's costs and how do we allocate them?
Such a workshop is auxiliary production. Under paragraph 123 of NAS No. 21, the costs of production that is auxiliary to primary production are summarised on account 2310 "Auxiliary production"; the activities listed in paragraph 124 include the repair of fixed assets.
Step 1. Costs are accumulated in the debit of 2310 (table to paragraph 126):
| Cost | Dr | Cr | Line |
|---|---|---|---|
| Materials for repairs | 2310 | 1010–1090 | 3 |
| Wages of workshop staff | 2310 | 6710 | 16 |
| Depreciation of workshop equipment | 2310 | 0211–0299 | 1 |
Step 2. At the end of the month, the actual cost of the workshop's services is transferred from the credit of 2310 to the users. Paragraph 125 lists 2010, 2510, 2810, 9130 and 9420 among the accounts that correspond with the credit of 2310.
| Who used it | Dr | Cr | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Main production workshops | 2010 | 2310 | table to paragraph 120, line 7 |
| Office building (administrative expense) | 9420 | 2310 | paragraph 125 |
| Construction of the new warehouse | 0810 | 2310 | table to paragraph 75, line 5; table to paragraph 126, line 22 |
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). October costs of the repair workshop of "Temir Qanot Mash" LLC: materials 9.6 million, wages 12 million, depreciation 2.4 million — 24 million soums in total. The workshop worked 200 hours. Working hours were taken as the allocation base (this is the author's choice; set the base in your accounting policy). Cost of one hour: 24,000,000 / 200 = 120,000 soums.
| User | Hours | Amount, soums | Journal entry |
|---|---|---|---|
| Main workshops | 150 | 18,000,000 | Dr 2010 – Cr 2310 |
| Office building | 30 | 3,600,000 | Dr 9420 – Cr 2310 |
| Warehouse construction | 20 | 2,400,000 | Dr 0810 – Cr 2310 |
| Total | 200 | 24,000,000 |
If a balance remains on 2310 at the end of the month, it represents the value of work in progress (paragraph 125). Analytical accounting is kept by cost elements, cost items and product types (same paragraph).
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 75, 120, 123, 124, 125 and 126.
See also: Auxiliary production · 2310 Auxiliary production
AccountingOur mill first spins yarn, then weaves fabric from that yarn. We also sell part of the yarn to other companies. On which account do we keep the yarn?
Under paragraph 121 of NAS No. 21, semi-finished products produced by the organisation itself in a full cycle may be recorded on account 2110 "Semi-finished products of own production". The examples given in the paragraph include spun yarn in the textile industry — exactly your case.
Under the same paragraph, the debit of 2110 records the costs of producing semi-finished products in correspondence with 2010; the credit records those transferred for processing in correspondence with 2010, and those sold in correspondence with 9110.
| Operation | Dr | Cr | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Yarn finished in the spinning workshop received into the semi-finished goods warehouse | 2110 | 2010 | table to paragraph 122, line 1 |
| Yarn transferred to the weaving workshop for processing | 2010 | 2110 | table to paragraph 122, line 5; table to paragraph 120, line 6 |
| Cost of yarn sold to another company written off | 9110 | 2110 | table to paragraph 122, line 8 |
| Yarn shortage identified during a stocktake | 5910 | 2110 | table to paragraph 122, line 12 |
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). In October, "Marg'ilon Ipak" LLC spun 10 tonnes of yarn at an actual cost of 42,000 soums per 1 kg.
| Operation | Quantity | Amount, soums | Journal entry |
|---|---|---|---|
| Yarn received into the warehouse | 10,000 kg | 420,000,000 | Dr 2110 – Cr 2010 |
| Transferred to the weaving workshop | 7,000 kg | 294,000,000 | Dr 2010 – Cr 2110 |
| Cost of yarn sold | 3,000 kg | 126,000,000 | Dr 9110 – Cr 2110 |
Under line 1 of the table to paragraph 174, the journal entry for sales revenue is Dr 4010 – Cr the relevant account of the 9010–9030 group. Since the cost is recorded on 9110, it is consistent to show the revenue on the matching account 9010 (author's interpretation; set this in your accounting policy).
In the balance sheet, the balance of 2110 is not shown on a separate line but in the line "Work in progress (2000, 2100, 2300, 2700)" (line 160) (Appendix 1 to the Regulation approved by Order No. 181).
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 120, 121, 122 and 174; Regulation on the Deadlines for Submission, Composition and Content of Financial Statements, approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance dated 8 October 2024, Appendix 1.
See also: Semi-finished goods · 2110 Semi-finished products of own production
AccountingA neighbouring firm asked us to store its furniture in our warehouse for several months, and we charge a storage fee. Do we need to account for this furniture?
Yes, but not on the balance sheet. The furniture does not belong to you, so it is not recorded as an asset on accounts of the 1000 or 2900 groups. Under paragraph 437 of NAS No. 21, valuables that do not belong to the organisation but are temporarily at its disposal are accounted for on off-balance sheet accounts, and records on them are kept using the simple (single-entry) system. The account for your case is 002 "Inventories accepted for safekeeping".
Requirements of paragraph 439:
| Issue | Rule |
|---|---|
| Valuation | The value stated in the acceptance-transfer act or in the invoice |
| Analytical accounting | By each client organisation, type of goods, grade and the warehouse where it is kept |
Do not confuse it with similar off-balance sheet accounts intended for other situations (paragraphs 440–441):
| Account | When it is used |
|---|---|
| 003 Materials accepted for processing | When the customer's raw materials are handed over for processing without payment |
| 004 Goods accepted under agency (commission) agreements | When a commission agent organisation accepts goods under a commission agreement |
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Sharq Mebel" LLC handed over 300 chairs to the warehouse of "Bek Logistik" LLC; in the act, the value of one chair is 320,000 soums. "Bek Logistik" records a receipt on 002: 300 × 320,000 = 96,000,000 soums, with the analytics "Sharq Mebel", chair, warehouse No. 2. A month later the owner took away 120 of them: a disposal on 002 of 120 × 320,000 = 38,400,000 soums, leaving 180 chairs or 57,600,000 soums.
The storage fee, however, is "Bek Logistik"'s own service income: show it on the ordinary balance sheet accounts and do not mix the value of the furniture with income.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 437, 439, 440 and 441.
See also: Inventories accepted for safekeeping · Off-balance sheet accounts
AccountingOur car wash gives customers prepaid numbered coupons. We received 2,000 blank coupon forms from the printing house. How do we control them in the accounts?
If a numbered form is lost, money may be lost with it. That is why NAS No. 21 has a separate off-balance sheet account for such forms: 006 "Strict-accountability forms" (paragraph 443).
Rules of paragraph 443:
| Issue | Rule |
|---|---|
| What for | Tracking the availability and movement of strict-accountability forms that are stored and issued on an accountable basis |
| Which documents are included | The organisation itself sets the list and the procedure for storage and use; the paragraph also mentions coupons and various season tickets |
| Valuation | A conventional value |
| Analytical accounting | By each type of form and place of storage |
Example (prepared by the author). By order, the director of "Toza Mashina" LLC included the coupon forms in the list of strict-accountability forms and set a conventional value of 100 soums per form.
| Movement | Quantity | On account 006, soums |
|---|---|---|
| Receipt from the printing house (No. 0001–2000) | 2,000 | +200,000 |
| Issued to customers during the month (No. 0001–1450) | 1,450 | −145,000 |
| Balance at the end of the month (in the safe) | 550 | 55,000 |
At the end of the month the cashier hands in the remaining forms, counted by number: the safe should contain No. 1451–2000. If any number is missing, it shows up immediately.
Note: on 006 the forms are kept not at purchase price but at a conventional value and by quantity. The money paid to the printing house is reflected as an ordinary expense on balance sheet and transit accounts; the money a customer pays for a coupon is a separate matter related to service income.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 437 and 443.
See also: Strict-reporting forms · 006 Strict-accountability forms
AuditThe auditor wants to write directly to our lawyer to ask about court cases. Do we have to agree to this?
This is the normal procedure. International Standard on Auditing ISA 501 requires the auditor to perform specific procedures on litigation and claims, because claims directly affect liabilities and disclosures in the financial statements. Under Article 9 of the Law "On Auditing Activity" (O'RQ-677), international standards on auditing are the standards of auditing activity in Uzbekistan.
What the auditor does:
| Step | Content |
|---|---|
| Inquiry | Asks management and, if there is one, the company's in-house lawyer about existing and expected claims |
| Review of documents | Reviews minutes of meetings of those charged with governance, correspondence with the external lawyer and the records of legal service expenses |
| Letter to the external lawyer | If there is a risk of material misstatement regarding identified claims, or the work indicates that other material claims may exist, communicates directly with the external lawyer: management prepares the letter, the auditor sends it, and the lawyer is asked to reply directly to the auditor |
| Written representation | Management confirms in writing that all known actual and possible claims have been disclosed to the auditor and properly reflected in the financial statements |
What happens if you do not agree? If management does not allow contact with the lawyer, or the lawyer refuses to respond appropriately, and the auditor cannot obtain sufficient evidence by other means, the auditor modifies the audit opinion in accordance with ISA 705.
Example (prepared by the author). A customer has filed a claim against "Bahor Qurilish" LLC for poor-quality work, but there is nothing about it in the accounts. The auditor noticed a payment to a law firm in the records of legal service expenses and asked management for an explanation. A letter was then sent to the lawyer; based on the reply, the company added a note about the claim to the financial statements.
Tip: warn your lawyer in advance — a quick and precise reply to the auditor's letter is in the company's own interest.
Source: ISA 501 (requirements on litigation and claims), ISA 705; Law "On Auditing Activity" (O'RQ-677), Article 9.
See also: Audit evidence · What types of auditor's report are there?
AuditWe revalued our building and have a valuer's report. But the auditor brought in a separate specialist of their own to check the value. Isn't our report enough?
These are two different specialists, and the standards treat them differently.
| Feature | Management's expert | Auditor's expert |
|---|---|---|
| Who hires | The company (your valuer) | The auditor |
| Standard | ISA 500 (audit evidence) | ISA 620 |
| What the auditor does | Evaluates the expert's competence, capabilities and objectivity, obtains an understanding of the expert's work and checks how suitable the expert's conclusion is as evidence | Evaluates the expert's competence, capabilities and objectivity; agrees with the expert on the scope and objectives of the work, the division of responsibilities and confidentiality (in writing where necessary); evaluates the adequacy of the expert's work |
Why does the auditor bring in an expert of their own? Valuing real estate requires expertise in a field other than accounting and auditing. If this valuation is material to the financial statements and the auditor cannot obtain sufficient evidence alone, ISA 620 allows the auditor to use a specialist in that field. Your valuer was hired by the company, so the auditor approaches the valuer's conclusion critically.
Important point: using an auditor's expert does not reduce the auditor's responsibility; the auditor is solely responsible for the audit opinion. That is why, in an unmodified report, the auditor does not refer to the expert (except where the legislation requires it).
Example (prepared by the author). "Samarqand Savdo Markazi" LLC revalued its building; an independent valuer doubled its value. The auditor's expert reviewed the prices of comparable properties and showed that the valuer had taken an overly optimistic expected rental income. Management asked the valuer to recalculate.
Source: ISA 500, ISA 620; Law "On Auditing Activity" (O'RQ-677), Article 9.
See also: How audit evidence is gathered: 7 procedures (ISA 500) · Audit risk
AuditOur payroll is run by an outside firm (outsourcing). The auditor is also asking about that firm's internal controls. Does this concern us?
Yes. If another organisation processes transactions that are material to your financial statements, from an audit point of view it is a "service organisation", and this situation is governed by ISA 402. Payroll directly affects wage expenses and the balance of 6710.
What the auditor (in the standard, the "user auditor") does:
- Obtains an understanding of the nature of the service: which transactions the outside firm performs, how data is transferred, which of the company's controls check its work.
- If unable to obtain a sufficient understanding from the company itself, uses one or more of the following: obtains the service auditor's report (if available); contacts the service organisation through the company; visits its office and performs procedures; has another auditor perform those procedures.
- If using the service auditor's report, evaluates its adequacy. Such reports come in two types: Type 1 — on the description of controls and their design; Type 2 — in addition, on whether the controls operated effectively throughout the period.
In an unmodified report, the auditor does not refer to the work of the service auditor (except where the legislation requires it); the responsibility remains with the auditor anyway.
Example (prepared by the author). "Navro'z Tikuv" LLC has the payroll for its 140 employees calculated by the outsourcing firm "Hisob Pro". The auditor asked who has access to the "Hisob Pro" software and how timesheet data is sent, then compared the payroll for several months with the timesheets and employment contracts.
Tip: write into the outsourcing contract the service firm's obligation to provide information to the auditor.
Source: ISA 402; Law "On Auditing Activity" (O'RQ-677), Article 9.
See also: Internal control · The system of internal control: 5 components and how the auditor understands it (ISA 315, revised in 2019)
AuditBesides the financial statements, the auditor asked for our licences, tax audit reports and correspondence with regulators. Surely that is not his job?
It is his job. ISA 250 requires the auditor to consider compliance with laws and regulations in terms of their effect on the financial statements. The standard divides laws into two groups, and the auditor's work differs for each:
| Group | Content | What the auditor does |
|---|---|---|
| Laws that directly affect amounts and disclosures in the financial statements | Tax legislation belongs to this group: tax expense and tax liability are reflected directly in the financial statements | Obtains sufficient appropriate evidence of compliance |
| Laws that have no direct effect but are important to the business | Licence conditions and regulatory requirements for the business belong to this group: breaching them may lead to a fine or suspension of operations | Limited procedures: inquires of management, reviews correspondence with licensing and regulatory authorities |
At the same time, the standard sets a clear limit: ensuring compliance with laws is the responsibility of management and those charged with governance; the auditor is not expected to detect all breaches.
If the auditor finds a breach or signs of one, the auditor investigates the situation, discusses it with management, assesses the effect on the financial statements and communicates it to those charged with governance. Where the legislation requires it, the auditor also considers reporting to the competent authorities.
Example (prepared by the author). The fact that one of the pharmacies of "Sog'lom Dori" LLC had not met one of the licence conditions came to light from a regulator's letter after the auditor's inquiry. The auditor discussed with management how a possible fine would affect the financial statements and asked them to consider whether a note on it is needed in the financial statements.
Source: ISA 250; Law "On Auditing Activity" (O'RQ-677), Article 9.
See also: Materiality · Audit evidence
AuditThe auditor's report was signed, and the financial statements were given to the founders and the bank. A month later it turned out there was a material error in them. What happens now?
This situation is covered by ISA 560. After the date of the report, the auditor is not obliged to perform further audit procedures on the financial statements. But if the auditor becomes aware of a fact that, had it been known at the date of the report, might have caused the auditor to change the report, the auditor must act.
If the financial statements have already been issued, the sequence is as follows:
- The auditor discusses the matter with management and, where necessary, with those charged with governance.
- Determines whether the financial statements need amendment; if so, asks how management intends to address the matter.
- If management amends the financial statements, the auditor performs the necessary procedures, reviews the steps taken by management to ensure that everyone who received the previous financial statements is informed, and issues a new report on the amended financial statements. The new report refers, in an "Emphasis of Matter" or "Other Matter" paragraph, to the note explaining why the financial statements were revised.
- If management does not take the necessary steps, the auditor notifies management and those charged with governance that the auditor will seek to prevent future reliance on the previous report, and takes appropriate action.
Example (prepared by the author). After the report was issued, it emerged that the finished goods balance in the warehouse had been counted twice in the financial statements of "Oqsaroy Qandolat" LLC. Management prepared amended financial statements and informed the founders and the bank that had received the previous ones. The auditor checked the amendment and issued a newly dated report referring to the note explaining why the financial statements were revised.
Tip: if you find an error, be the first to contact the auditor — fixing the problem is much cheaper than hiding it.
Source: ISA 560; Law "On Auditing Activity" (O'RQ-677), Article 9.
See also: Events after the reporting period · Emphasis of matter
Financial reportingThis year, to hold our price, we sold products below cost and ended up with a gross loss. Do we put a minus sign in the statement of financial results?
The form itself answers this. The statement of financial results in Appendix 2 to the Regulation approved by Order No. 181 has two columns for each period: "Income (profit)" and "Expenses (losses)". Line 030 "Gross profit (loss) from sales of products (goods, works and services)" is found by subtracting line 020 from line 010, and both columns are open in this line (no "x" is placed in the form). So a gross loss is written not with a minus sign but in the "Expenses (losses)" column.
Other lines of the form where both columns are open: 100 (profit (loss) from core activities), 220 (profit (loss) from general business activities), 230 (extraordinary gains and losses), 240 (profit (loss) before corporate profit tax) and 270 (net profit (loss) for the reporting period). In these, too, a loss is written in the "Expenses (losses)" column.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures, million soums).
| Line | Indicator | Income (profit) | Expenses (losses) |
|---|---|---|---|
| 010 | Net revenue from sales | 480 | x |
| 020 | Cost of products sold | x | 515 |
| 030 | Gross loss: 480 − 515 = −35 | 35 | |
| 040 | Period expenses | x | 60 |
| 090 | Other income from core activities | 12 | x |
| 100 | Loss from core activities: −35 − 60 + 12 = −83 | 83 |
Line 100 is found using the form's formula "030 − 040 + 090"; since 030 is a loss, it is taken as a negative number in the calculation.
If the gross loss recurs, this is not just a reporting matter: review your price and cost structure. If inventories are carried above net realisable value, the question of writing them down also arises (NAS No. 4, paragraph 49).
Source: Regulation on the Deadlines for Submission, Composition and Content of Financial Statements, approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance dated 8 October 2024, Appendix 2 (form of the statement of financial results); NAS No. 4, paragraph 49.
See also: Gross profit · Period expenses
Financial reportingFrom this year we moved the delivery department's costs from administrative expenses to selling expenses. Do we also change the prior-year column in the statements, or leave it as it was?
You change it. Under NAS No. 1, comparative information for the previous period must be presented in the financial statements (paragraph 25). When the classification of items changes, comparative amounts are reclassified to ensure comparability, and at the same time the nature, amount and reason for the reclassification are disclosed (paragraph 26).
If it is impracticable to reclassify the prior-year data (for example, if it was collected differently), the reason for the reclassification and the nature of the adjustments that could have been made to the comparative amounts are disclosed (paragraphs 26, 28 and 29).
One more condition: under paragraphs 38–39, the presentation and classification of items must be retained from period to period; it may be changed because of a significant change in operations, or if the new structure will be retained for a long time or is more appropriate.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures, million soums). Last year "Baraka Non" LLC reported administrative expenses of 140 and selling expenses of 90. Administrative expenses included 25 of delivery department costs.
| Line | Prior year, in the previous statements | Reclassification | Prior year, in the current statements |
|---|---|---|---|
| 050 Selling expenses | 90 | +25 | 115 |
| 060 Administrative expenses | 140 | −25 | 115 |
| 040 Period expenses, total | 230 | 0 | 230 |
The note reads: "From the current year, the delivery department's costs are presented within selling expenses. For comparability, the prior-year amount of 25 million soums was moved from administrative expenses to selling expenses. Reason: the department delivers products to customers."
Note: total period expenses and net profit do not change; only the split between lines changes. This is not the correction of an error, so no adjustment is made to retained earnings.
Source: NAS No. 1, paragraphs 25, 26, 28, 29, 38 and 39; Regulation on the Deadlines for Submission, Composition and Content of Financial Statements, approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance dated 8 October 2024, Appendix 2 (lines 040, 050, 060).
See also: Period expenses · Financial statements
Financial reportingOur company had two lines of business: wholesale trade and a car wash chain. In June we sold the car wash chain entirely. How do we show this in the annual financial statements?
In NAS No. 1 this is called a "discontinued operation". Under paragraph 93, a discontinued operation is the result of selling or transferring to another party a separate, major line of the organisation's business whose assets, net income or loss and activities (including its figures in the financial statements) can be distinguished. The car wash chain was a separate line of business, so your case falls under this.
Where it is shown. Under paragraph 94, the results of a discontinued operation are usually included in income and losses from general business (ordinary) activities. Only if the discontinuance results from events clearly distinct from ordinary activities or not occurring in them may the result be classified as an extraordinary item. A planned sale is generally not such an event (author's interpretation).
What is written in the notes. Under paragraph 95, for each discontinued operation (full list):
- The nature of the discontinued operation.
- The industry to which it belonged and its geographical location.
- The date from which the discontinuance took effect for accounting purposes.
- The method of discontinuance (the standard names sale and transfer to another party).
- Income or losses from the discontinuance and the accounting basis used in measuring them.
- For each period presented, the operation's sales revenue and income or loss from general business activities, with amounts.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Table in the notes of "Yulduz Treyd" LLC:
| Indicator | Current year (January–June) | Prior year |
|---|---|---|
| Sales revenue of the car wash chain, million soums | 180 | 340 |
| Result of the car wash chain from general business activities, million soums | 14 (profit) | 31 (profit) |
| Result from selling the chain: sale price 260 − carrying amount of the assets 215, million soums | 45 (profit) | — |
The text states that the chain consisted of three outlets in Tashkent city, that it is treated as discontinued for accounting purposes from 30 June, and that it was discontinued by sale.
Source: NAS No. 1, paragraphs 93, 94 and 95.
See also: Financial statements · Operating activities
Financial reportingDuring the year we marked down obsolete goods, reducing their value, and reversed one provision. Must we write about these separately in the notes to the financial statements?
Yes. Paragraph 92 of NAS No. 1 lists the significant business transactions that must be disclosed in the notes (full list):
- Writing down inventories to net selling value or fixed assets to replacement value, and also reversing such write-downs.
- Restructuring of activities, and also reversing any provisions for restructuring costs.
- Disposal of long-term investments.
- Discontinuance of operations.
- Litigation.
- Reversal of provisions.
Both of your cases are on the list: the write-down of inventories corresponds to item 1, and the reversal of the provision to item 6.
How should the note be written? The standard does not give a fixed form: explanations, notes and calculations are presented in free form (paragraph 14). The most useful thing for the reader is what happened, what amount, which item it affected and for what reason.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Note of "Gulzor Kosmetika" LLC:
| Transaction | Amount, million soums | Reason | Item affected |
|---|---|---|---|
| Creams nearing their expiry date written down to net selling value | 8.0 | They are being sold at a 40% discount | Inventories |
| Part of the allowance for doubtful debts reversed | 5.0 | The customer paid part of the debt | Receivables from buyers and customers |
A short table and one or two sentences are enough. The main thing is that the reader can find these amounts within the figures of the financial statements.
Source: NAS No. 1, paragraphs 14 and 92.
See also: If the price of goods falls, at what value is the inventory in the warehouse shown in the balance sheet? · Inventories
Financial reportingWe need to move the part of our three-year bank loan due next year into current liabilities. But we have signed an agreement with the bank to repay that part from a new long-term loan. Do we still move it?
NAS No. 1 has a separate rule for this situation.
General rule: a liability to be settled within 12 months of the reporting date is current (paragraph 73). That is why the part of a long-term loan repayable in the next 12 months is normally shown in the balance sheet in line 750 "Current portion of long-term liabilities (6950)" (Appendix 1 to the Regulation approved by Order No. 181).
Exception (paragraph 77): if, under a loan agreement, the organisation provides for refinancing the liabilities on a long-term basis, the current portion of long-term liabilities may be excluded from current liabilities. In that case, the amount of the liabilities and the refinancing terms are disclosed in the notes.
Conditions (paragraph 80, full list). A liability due within 12 months after the reporting date is classified as non-current only when all three conditions are met:
- Its original term is longer than 12 months.
- The organisation plans to settle it on a long-term basis.
- This intention is supported by an agreement to refinance or reschedule payments concluded before the financial statements are approved.
So the basis is a loan agreement; negotiations or a verbal promise are not enough. The amount excluded from current liabilities is disclosed in the notes together with the information supporting it (paragraph 80).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures, million soums). The loan balance of "Qo'qon Tekstil" LLC on 7810 as of 31 December is 600, of which 300 is due next year. In December, that is, before the financial statements were approved, an agreement was signed with the bank: these 300 will be repaid from a new three-year loan. Since the original loan was for three years, all three conditions of paragraph 80 are met.
| Balance sheet line | Without the agreement | Applying paragraphs 77 and 80 |
|---|---|---|
| 570 Long-term bank loans (7810) | 300 | 600 |
| 750 Current portion of long-term liabilities (6950) | 300 | 0 |
| Total debt on the loan | 600 | 600 |
The note states the loan amount and the date and terms of the refinancing agreement. In addition, under paragraph 78, the notes disclose interest rates on long-term liabilities, the terms for settling contractual obligations, the order of repayment, recourse conditions, and the amounts of premiums and discounts.
Why this matters: when current liabilities decrease, liquidity ratios look better. So if such a choice is not openly disclosed in a note, a bank or founder reading the financial statements may draw the wrong conclusion.
Source: NAS No. 1, paragraphs 73, 77, 78 and 80; Regulation on the Deadlines for Submission, Composition and Content of Financial Statements, approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance dated 8 October 2024, Appendix 1 (lines 570 and 750).
See also: 6950 Long-term liabilities – current portion · 7810 Long-term bank loans
Import and exportWe imported equipment with a customs exemption. In two years we want to lease it to another firm. Could there be a problem with customs?
There could. Under Article 22 of the Customs Code, goods whose use and disposal are restricted because an exemption from customs payments was granted are considered conditionally released goods (Part Two, sub-item "a"). The full list of conditionally released goods is given on the page for the term "Release of goods"; here we look only at the rule for exempted goods.
| Rule | Content | Article 22 |
|---|---|---|
| Purpose | Exempted goods are used only for purposes consistent with the conditions on which the exemption was granted | Part Three |
| Three years | If, within three years of conditional release, the goods are used for other purposes, the exemption is cancelled and the obligation to pay customs payments is restored | Part Three |
| Status | Unless the legislation provides otherwise, the goods are considered conditionally released until the obligations under the conditions are fulfilled | Part Five |
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical amount). "Zarafshon Tikuv" LLC imported a sewing line with an exemption; thanks to the exemption, 180 million soums of customs payments were not paid. Let us assume the condition of the exemption is that the line is used in the company's own production. If two years later the firm leases the line to another company, this is a purpose that does not match the exemption condition, and since it happens within the three-year term, the obligation to pay 180 million soums is restored.
Accounting note: record the date the line was imported (the day of conditional release) on the fixed asset card. The three-year term starts from that day: before a decision is made to lease the asset or use it for another purpose, the accountant should check this date.
Tip: before any transaction with exempted goods, read the conditions in the document that granted the exemption. The three-year term comes from Part Three of Article 22, but the exemption document itself may contain additional conditions.
Source: Customs Code, Article 22 (Parts Two, Three and Five).
See also: Release of goods · Import and export section
Import and exportThe cargo has arrived at the customs authority, but the import documents are not ready yet. Where and for how long can the goods stay?
During this time the goods are under the temporary storage customs procedure (code 70 in the CCD). Under Article 83 of the Customs Code, under this procedure goods are stored under customs control without payment of customs payments from the moment they are presented to the designated customs authority until they are released under the chosen procedure.
| Issue | Rule | Article |
|---|---|---|
| Where | In a customs warehouse or in customs control zones | Article 84, Part Three |
| Term | Set by the authorised person, but not more than sixty calendar days (except in the cases under Article 177) | Article 85, Part One |
| Perishable goods | No more than ten calendar days | Article 85, Part Two |
| Document | A short cargo customs declaration; it is submitted by the carrier or another authorised person no later than the working day following the day the goods are presented. If the goods are placed under another procedure within this period, the short CCD is not submitted. The customs authority may not require other documents | Article 86 |
| What may be done | With notice to the customs authority: inspection and measuring; taking samples for testing and identification; operations to keep the goods unchanged, including repairing damaged packaging; moving them within the place of storage | Article 87, Part One |
| Completion | No later than the day the term expires, the goods are declared for another procedure; within three days of being placed under the new procedure they are removed from the place of storage (except when moving to the customs warehouse procedure) | Article 89 |
The money side: the classifier of customs payments (Appendix 13 to the CCD filling Instruction) has two separate fee codes for storage: 40 "Customs fee for storing goods in a customs warehouse owned by the customs authority" and 52 "Customs fee for temporary storage of goods at a border customs post". Determine the amount using the current tariff.
Example (prepared by the author). "Meva Savdo Import" LLC received two shipments: household appliances and freshly picked mandarins. A term of 30 days was declared for preparing the documents for the appliances (within the 60-day limit). If the mandarins are treated as perishable goods, a term longer than 10 days cannot be declared for them, so their documents are prepared first.
Source: Customs Code, Articles 83–89; CCD filling Instruction, Appendix 3 (procedure code 70) and Appendix 13 (fee codes 40 and 52).
See also: Customs warehouse · Customs fee
Import and exportA batch of imported paint froze in transit and became unusable. It has not yet been released by customs. Do we have to pay duty first and then throw it away?
Not necessarily. The Customs Code has a "destruction" procedure (code 76 in the CCD): under Article 121, foreign goods are destroyed or rendered unfit for use under customs control without payment of customs payments.
The main condition (Article 122, Part One): the goods must have completely lost their consumer properties, and their original condition cannot be restored in an economically viable way.
Cases where destruction is not allowed (Article 122, Parts Two and Three, in full):
| By type of goods | By circumstances |
|---|---|
| Cultural property | If destruction harms nature or creates a direct or potential danger to human life and health |
| Endangered species of animals and plants, their parts and derivatives (except where destruction is required to prevent epidemics and epizootics) | If destruction is carried out by consuming the goods for their usual purpose |
| If the customs authority cannot verify that the goods have actually been destroyed | |
| If the opinion of the competent state authority in the field of ecology (whether destruction is possible, by what method and where) has not been entered into the customs information system |
These four restrictions of Part Three do not apply to goods irretrievably lost as a result of an accident or force majeure.
Procedure:
- Documents (Article 123): the CCD, the shipping documents for the goods, a destruction act in the established form.
- For goods damaged as a result of an accident or force majeure, an opinion of the competent authority on these circumstances and their consequences is also needed (Article 125).
- The CCD is submitted and registered before destruction, while clearance takes place after destruction (Article 126).
- Transport and destruction take place under customs control (Article 126); destruction is carried out at the expense of the authorised person (Article 122, Part Five).
- The destruction act is signed by the customs officer, the authorised person and those present; after the goods have actually been destroyed, it must be handed to customs within one working day (Article 126).
- Waste produced is placed under another procedure as if it had been imported in that condition; waste processed to a state unfit for use is not declared (Article 127).
Example (prepared by the author). "Rangli Dunyo" LLC declared 12 tonnes of paint for the destruction procedure. The ecology authority's opinion specified the destruction method and a special landfill. The paint was taken to the landfill under customs control, and the act was handed to customs on the (working) day after destruction. The remaining waste had been rendered unfit for use, so it was not declared.
Source: Customs Code, Articles 121–127; CCD filling Instruction, Appendix 3 (procedure code 76).
See also: Cargo customs declaration · What do the procedure, transport and delivery terms codes in a cargo customs declaration tell an accountant?
Import and exportGoods that arrived from abroad are no longer needed by our customer, and sending them back is expensive. Can we abandon the goods and hand them over to the state?
You can: this is the "abandonment in favour of the state" customs procedure (code 75 in the CCD). Under Article 128 of the Customs Code, the authorised person abandons the goods and transfers them free of charge to state ownership without payment of customs payments.
Conditions (Article 129):
| Condition | Content |
|---|---|
| No cost to the state | The abandonment must not cause the state to incur any expenses |
| Goods that cannot be placed (full list) | Goods whose import into the customs territory is prohibited; goods withdrawn from circulation or restricted in circulation; goods under the control of competent authorities, if their permit is not in the customs information system |
| Delivery costs | The costs of delivering the goods to the place specified by the customs authority are borne by the authorised person |
| No going back | Once placed under the procedure, it cannot be replaced by another |
| Liability | The authorised person is liable to third parties for the lawfulness of the placement |
| What the customs authority does not do | It does not satisfy third parties' property claims to the goods; it does not reimburse the costs of the carrier, warehouse owner and others for transport, storage and cargo handling before placement under the procedure |
Documents (Article 130): the CCD, the act of transfer of the goods, the shipping documents for the goods. On transfer, the act is drawn up in two copies: one stays with the customs authority, the other with you (Article 131). The goods are then handed over to the competent authority for state property management.
Difference from the destruction procedure: there the goods must have completely lost their consumer properties and are destroyed; here the goods become state property.
Example (prepared by the author). "Bog'ishamol Savdo" LLC imported a batch of office chairs, and the customer cancelled the contract. The chairs are in a customs warehouse. The firm itself pays its storage debt to the warehouse owner (the customs authority does not reimburse this cost), takes the chairs at its own expense to the place specified by the customs authority, and receives its copy of the act. There is no going back after this decision, so first work out the options of returning the goods abroad or importing them and selling them on the local market.
Source: Customs Code, Articles 128–131; CCD filling Instruction, Appendix 3 (procedure code 75).
See also: Declarant · Customs procedure
Import and exportThe customs officer did not open the container but only looked at it from outside and checked the seal. Next time he opened the boxes and counted the goods. Are these two different checks?
Yes. In the Customs Code, the first is called a customs examination (Article 193) and the second a customs inspection (Article 195).
| Feature | Customs examination | Customs inspection |
|---|---|---|
| What is done | Transport compartments and packaging are not opened, the object is not taken apart and its integrity is not breached; the exterior, containers and customs identification means are examined | Seals and stamps are broken, packaging, the cargo compartment and the container are opened, and the object is taken apart if necessary |
| Purpose and timing | To confirm the information about the goods and the presence of seals, stamps and other means of identification | Usually carried out after the declaration is accepted, in the presence of the declarant; before acceptance it may be carried out in five cases (below) |
| Your participation | May be carried out in the customs control zone without you, unless you have expressed a wish to be present | If customs requires it, you must be present and assist; in certain cases it is carried out without you in the presence of two attesting witnesses |
| Result | If declared correctly, the shipping documents are processed; if incorrect declaration is found, a customs inspection is carried out | An act in the established form is drawn up and a copy is given to you |
Cases where an inspection is carried out before the declaration is accepted (Article 195, Part Two, in full): identifying the goods for customs purposes; establishing the accuracy of the declared information; checking available information about a breach of customs legislation; selective control under the risk management system; when it is necessary for exercising the declarant's rights under Article 275.
Inspection without you, in the presence of two attesting witnesses (Part Five, in full): if you do not appear even after five working days following the day the goods were presented; where there is a real threat to state security, public order, human life and health, animals and plants, the environment or the preservation of cultural property, and in other urgent cases; when the goods are sent in international postal and courier items; in respect of goods and vehicles left in the territory in breach of the conditions of a procedure requiring their export.
Three more useful rules: live animals and perishable goods are inspected first (Part Three); if part of a consignment of goods under one name is inspected, the result may be applied to the whole consignment, and if you disagree you may demand an additional inspection of the remaining part (Part Six); costs related to the inspection are borne by the authorised person (Part Nine).
Example (prepared by the author). "Chilonzor Elektro" LLC declared 400 boxes of light bulbs under one name. During the inspection, 40 boxes were opened, and 3 of them turned out to contain a different model. So that the result would not be applied to the whole consignment, the firm demanded that the remaining boxes be inspected as well; the costs of this are borne by the firm itself.
Source: Customs Code, Articles 193 and 195.
See also: Cargo customs declaration · Key concepts of the Customs Code in 8 points: from declarant to customs value
FinanceIn three years we want to buy a new oven, which will cost about 240 million soums. How much money do we need to set aside each month to save that amount?
This is a "target savings" problem. If you put in the same amount every month and interest is credited on it, the final sum consists of two parts: the money you put in yourself and the interest earned on that money. The more the interest works, the less you need to set aside each month.
Without interest the calculation is very simple: 240,000,000 : 36 months = 6,666,667 soums a month. With interest, however, each month's payment works for a different length of time: the amount put in during the first month earns interest for 35 months, while the last one earns almost none. This is calculated with a single factor:
Factor = ((1 + monthly rate)^number of months − 1) : monthly rate Monthly amount = target : factor
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Sarbon non" LLC puts money into a savings account at the end of each month; we assume, hypothetically, that interest of 1.5% a month is added to the balance every month.
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Factor | (1.015^36 − 1) : 0.015 | ≈ 47.276 |
| Amount to put in each month | 240,000,000 : 47.276 | ≈ 5,076,575 soums |
| Money we put in ourselves over 36 months | 5,076,575 × 36 | ≈ 182,756,700 soums |
| Amount accumulated from interest | 240,000,000 − 182,756,700 | ≈ 57,243,300 soums |
So with interest, setting aside about 5.08 million soums a month is enough, not 6.67 million.
Practical tips:
- Base the target amount not on today's price but on the expected price three years from now: the price of the oven may also change.
- Keep the savings in a separate account from your everyday working money, otherwise they will "quietly" be spent.
- Update the calculation every year: if the rate changes or a month is missed, recalculate the amount for the remaining months.
See also: Compound interest · Time value of money · Deposit
FinanceThe founders want to take all the profit as dividends, while the director proposes leaving part of it in the business. How much does retained profit affect growth?
Finance has a simple rule of thumb for this: if a company consistently earns the same return on every soum of its equity, its profit grows at roughly this rate:
Growth rate ≈ return on equity × share of profit retained
The logic is this: money paid out as dividends leaves the company, while retained money is added to equity and earns profit again the next year.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The equity of "Yashil vodiy" LLC is 500 million soums, the return on equity is hypothetically 20%, so the annual profit is 100 million soums.
| Option | Dividends | Stays in the business | Equity next year | Profit next year (20%) | Profit growth |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| All to dividends | 100 million | 0 | 500 million | 100 million | 0% |
| 40% dividends, 60% retained | 40 million | 60 million | 560 million | 112 million | 12% |
| All retained | 0 | 100 million | 600 million | 120 million | 20% |
Let us check the second row with the formula: 20% × 0.6 = 12%.
An important condition: this calculation holds only if the retained money can also be put to work at the same return. If the business has no way to invest new money profitably (the market is saturated, no extra equipment is needed), the retained profit sits idle in the bank account and no growth comes of it. In that case it makes more sense to pay the founders more dividends.
Questions for the decision: where will we spend the new money and how much will it return? Is that higher than the alternative income the founders could earn themselves? If the answer is "yes", retaining part of the profit pays off.
See also: Dividend · Retained earnings · Profitability
FinanceIn the monthly budget, flour costs were 50 million soums, but they actually came to 55.9 million. The manager says "the supplier is overcharging". How do I find out how much of the difference is due to price?
The difference between budgeted and actual costs can be split into three parts: the price variance (a kilogram bought dearer or cheaper), the usage variance (more or less than the standard used per product) and the volume variance (more or fewer products made than planned). Each has a different owner: purchasing for price, the workshop for usage, sales for volume.
How to calculate:
- price variance = (actual price − budgeted price) × actual usage;
- usage variance = (actual usage − standard usage for the actual volume) × budgeted price;
- volume variance = (standard usage for the actual volume − budgeted usage) × budgeted price.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The budget of the "Oqtepa pishiriqlari" workshop: 1,000 cakes, 2 kg of flour each, 25,000 soums per 1 kg. Actually: 1,050 cakes were made, 2,150 kg of flour was used, bought at 26,000 soums per 1 kg.
| Indicator | Calculation | Amount, soums |
|---|---|---|
| Budgeted cost | 2,000 kg × 25,000 | 50,000,000 |
| Actual cost | 2,150 kg × 26,000 | 55,900,000 |
| Total variance | 55,900,000 − 50,000,000 | +5,900,000 |
| Price variance | (26,000 − 25,000) × 2,150 | +2,150,000 |
| Usage variance | (2,150 − 1,050 × 2) × 25,000 | +1,250,000 |
| Volume variance | (2,100 − 2,000) × 25,000 | +2,500,000 |
Check: 2,150,000 + 1,250,000 + 2,500,000 = 5,900,000 soums.
Conclusion: the supplier's price explains only 2.15 million soums of the difference. 2.5 million soums is due to making 50 extra cakes, which is not bad, since sales grew too. The real question is the usage variance of 1.25 million soums: the workshop used 2,150 kg of flour instead of the standard 2,100 kg. The cause needs to be found together with the workshop.
Practical tip: build the budget not just as a "total amount" but as "volume × standard × price"; then this analysis takes only a few minutes at the end of the month.
See also: Budget · Cost (cost of production) · Business plan
FinanceBy a simple calculation, the money we spent on equipment pays back in 3 years. But people say "money in later years is worth less than today's". If we take that into account, how much longer does it take?
This is shown by the discounted payback period. In the simple payback period, each year's inflow is treated as equal to today's money. In the discounted method, each year's inflow is first brought to its present value, and then you count how many years it takes for these discounted amounts to cover the investment:
Discounted inflow = inflow of the year : (1 + discount rate)^year number
The discount rate is usually the alternative return on that money: the loan interest rate or the return the founders expect.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Tog'ay sut" LLC bought packaging equipment for 120 million soums. The equipment works for 6 years and brings in 40 million soums of net cash inflow every year. The discount rate is hypothetically 20% a year.
Simple calculation: 120 : 40 = 3 years.
| Year | Inflow, million | Discounted inflow, million | Cumulative balance, million |
|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | −120 | −120.00 | −120.00 |
| 1 | 40 | 40 : 1.2 = 33.33 | −86.67 |
| 2 | 40 | 40 : 1.2² = 27.78 | −58.89 |
| 3 | 40 | 40 : 1.2³ = 23.15 | −35.74 |
| 4 | 40 | 40 : 1.2⁴ = 19.29 | −16.45 |
| 5 | 40 | 40 : 1.2⁵ = 16.08 | −0.38 |
| 6 | 40 | 40 : 1.2⁶ = 13.40 | +13.02 |
At the end of year 5 the balance is still −0.38 million; in year 6 it turns positive: 5 + 0.38 : 13.40 ≈ 5.03 years. In other words, instead of the 3 years of the simple calculation, the money actually comes back in almost 5 years, while the equipment's useful life is 6 years. Very little margin is left.
What to watch for:
- The higher the discount rate, the longer the period. Justify your choice of rate and test the decision at two or three different rates.
- If the discounted payback period exceeds the equipment's useful life, the project does not pay off at this rate.
- The method ignores the years after payback. So for the final decision use it together with net present value: in this example the net present value over 6 years is +13.02 million soums.
See also: Payback period · Discounting · Net present value (NPV)
FinanceWe are looking at a project to open a new branch. Some say "in a good year, 60 million profit", others say "there could be a loss". How do we bring different estimates down to a single number?
Scenario analysis and expected value are used for this. Several possible situations (good, average, bad) are written down, each is given an outcome and a probability, then the outcomes are multiplied by the probabilities and added up:
Expected value = outcome₁ × probability₁ + outcome₂ × probability₂ + outcome₃ × probability₃
The probabilities must add up to 100%.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Gulzor kiyim" LLC plans to spend 80 million soums on a branch. For the first year's result the team agreed on three scenarios.
| Scenario | Annual result | Probability | Result × probability |
|---|---|---|---|
| Good (sales take off quickly) | +60 million | 25% | +15 million |
| Average | +30 million | 50% | +15 million |
| Bad (the location turns out to be poor) | −20 million | 25% | −5 million |
| Total | — | 100% | +25 million |
The expected result is 25 million soums a year. Now it can be compared with an alternative: say expanding the existing shop would almost certainly bring 22 million soums. By expected value the branch is better (25 > 22), but its result ranges from −20 to +60.
So do not look only at the expected value; ask two more questions:
- Can the company survive the worst scenario? How much would a loss of 20 million soums plus an investment of 80 million soums drain the cash?
- What are the probabilities based on? Tie them to the history of similar branches or to market observation; a probability written down "roughly" spoils the whole calculation.
Practical tip: track the scenarios during the year. Whichever scenario the first quarter's result comes closest to, adjust the decision for the rest of the year (for example, on additional spending) accordingly.
See also: Business plan · Net present value (NPV) · Break-even point
InsuranceAlmost all of our firm's major clients work with our lead programmer. If he falls ill or leaves us, we will suffer a big loss. Can such a risk be insured?
Insurance practice has "key person insurance" for this. It is insurance a company takes out on the life or health of the person who matters most to it: the policyholder is the company, the company pays the premium and the payout also goes to the company. Its purpose is not to help the employee's family but to cover the loss the business itself suffers in his absence: the drop in income while a new specialist is found and trained.
Which risks such insurance covers (death, disability) is written separately in each contract. An employee leaving of his own accord, however, is usually not an insured event: that risk is reduced not by insurance but by working conditions and by passing knowledge on to others.
Estimating the sum insured (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Say that at "Bek-soft" LLC the clients brought in by the lead programmer generate 150 million soums of annual profit. If he cannot work, finding a replacement and winning the clients back will take 2 years, and finding and training a new specialist will cost another 30 million soums.
| Part of the loss | Calculation | Amount |
|---|---|---|
| Lost profit | 150 million × 2 years | 300 million soums |
| Finding and training a new employee | — | 30 million soums |
| Estimated loss | 300 + 30 | 330 million soums |
It makes sense to ask for a sum insured close to this estimated loss. A much larger sum means paying excess premium, while a smaller one leaves part of the loss uncovered.
Practical tips:
- Talk openly with the employee and get his written consent: the insurance relies on information about his health.
- Do not rely on insurance alone: have at least two employees work with key clients and document work processes. This reduces the risk itself.
- When you receive an offer, ask in writing which events are covered, which are excluded and when the payout is made.
- Find out in advance with your accountant how the premium is reflected in the accounts and for tax purposes.
See also: Life insurance · Sum insured · Insurance policy
InsuranceOur warehouse is worth 500 million soums, but we are unlikely to lose more than 200 million soums at one time. The agent offered to insure it for 200 million on a "first loss" basis. How is this different from ordinary underinsurance?
If the sum insured is less than the actual value of the property, the payout can be calculated under two different systems. Which one applies is stated in the policy conditions.
- Proportional system. The payout is the part of the loss equal to the ratio of the sum insured to the actual value: payout = loss × sum insured : actual value. In other words, you bear the loss for the uninsured part of the property yourself.
- First loss system. The loss is covered in full up to the sum insured, and no ratio is applied. Anything above the sum insured stays with you.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The warehouse of "Bog'ishamol savdo" is worth 500 million soums, the sum insured is 200 million soums, there is no deductible.
| Loss | Payout under the proportional system | Payout under the first loss system |
|---|---|---|
| 120 million | 120 × 200 : 500 = 48 million | 120 million |
| 260 million | 260 × 200 : 500 = 104 million | 200 million |
As you can see, for partial losses the first loss system covers much more. That is why the insurer sets a different rate for such insurance: it takes into account that the probability of a partial loss is high. It is natural that, for the same sum insured, the premium for a first loss policy differs from that of a proportional policy.
When first loss makes sense:
- the property is large, but only part of it can be damaged at the same time (several separate rooms or buildings, goods kept in different places);
- insuring the full value is expensive and the probability of a total loss is very low.
For the decision: ask the agent in writing for the premium under both systems for the same sum insured, then build a table like the one above using your own most likely loss amounts.
See also: Sum insured · Insurance premium · Insurable interest
InsuranceThe insurer quoted a rate of 0.21% for our shop. How is this figure arrived at? Why is it higher than the claims the insurer expects to pay?
The insurance rate (gross rate) is made up of two parts:
- the net rate — the part that covers the claims the insurer expects to pay. It is calculated from the frequency of events and the average size of the loss;
- the loading — the insurer's operating costs, fees to agents and intermediaries, a reserve for unexpected large losses and profit.
Net rate = probability of an event × average payout : sum insured Gross rate = net rate : (1 − loading share)
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The insurer's statistics for 2,000 similar shops: on average an event occurs in 30 of them a year, the average payout is 40 million soums, the average sum insured of the shops is 400 million soums. The loading share is hypothetically 30%.
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Probability of an event | 30 : 2,000 | 1.5% |
| Expected payout per policy | 1.5% × 40 million | 0.6 million soums |
| Net rate | 0.6 : 400 | 0.15% |
| Gross rate (insurance rate) | 0.15% : (1 − 0.30) | ≈ 0.214% |
| Annual premium for a shop worth 400 million soums | 400,000,000 × 0.214% | ≈ 857,143 soums |
So roughly 70 percent of the rate goes to future payouts and 30 percent to the insurer's costs and profit.
Why your rate differs from the average: the insurer compares your shop with the average shop. A fire alarm, security and new electrical wiring lower the probability of an event, so the net rate may go down too. Conversely, if you had many losses in previous years, the insurer will rate your frequency higher.
Practical tip: when you receive an offer, state your risk-reduction measures in writing and ask how they affect the rate.
See also: Insurance rate · Insurance premium · Sum insured
InsuranceFor a single café the probability of a fire is very small, but if it happens the loss is large. How can an insurance company that insures thousands of cafés carry such a risk itself?
The reason is the law of large numbers and risk pooling. For a single café the outcome is "all or nothing": either the year passes quietly or a big loss occurs. When thousands of similar cafés that do not depend on one another are pooled, the number of events falls within a much narrower range around the average, and the insurer can plan payouts in advance fairly accurately.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The probability of a fire in each café during the year is 1%, and the loss from one fire is 50 million soums. Expected payout per policy: 1% × 50 million = 0.5 million soums.
| Portfolio | Expected number of events | Standard deviation | Relative fluctuation |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 café | 0.01 | ≈ 0.0995 | ≈ 995% |
| 100 cafés | 1 | ≈ 0.995 | ≈ 99.5% |
| 10,000 cafés | 100 | ≈ 9.95 | ≈ 9.95% |
The standard deviation is calculated with the binomial distribution formula: √(n × p × (1 − p)).
What this means:
- In a small portfolio of 100 cafés, the probability of 3 or more fires is about 7.9%. Then payouts exceed 150 million soums when only 50 million soums was expected, so the year's result depends on chance.
- In a portfolio of 10,000 cafés, the number of events lies between 80 and 120 in about 95% of cases (average ± 2 standard deviations). The payout per policy stays within 0.4–0.6 million soums.
That is why it is enough for the insurer to set the rate slightly above each client's expected loss. For the café, the policy turns an uncertain large risk into a certain, small annual expense.
The limitation: the law only works when events are independent of one another. If a single earthquake or flood damages thousands of clients at once, pooling does not help. Insurers share such risks with others through reinsurance.
See also: Risk pooling · Reinsurance · Standard deviation
InsuranceIs insurance alone enough against the risk of fire in our warehouse? Does installing an automatic fire-suppression system pay off?
Insurance is only one way of dealing with risk. The classic risk management framework distinguishes four approaches:
- Avoidance — giving up the risky activity altogether (for example, not storing flammable goods at all).
- Reduction — lowering the probability of an event or the size of the loss (alarms, a suppression system, storing goods in several places).
- Transfer — shifting the loss to someone else (insurance, allocating liability in a contract).
- Retention — bearing small losses at your own expense (deductible, reserve money).
In practice they are used together: reduction measures make insurance cheaper, and insurance covers the remaining large risk.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Qo'qon gilam" warehouse is worth 600 million soums. The annual premium is currently 7.2 million soums. An automatic suppression system costs 16 million soums, lasts 8 years, and annual maintenance is 0.4 million soums. Say the insurer has confirmed in writing that it will cut the premium to 4.2 million soums if the system is installed.
| Annual cost | Without the system | With the system |
|---|---|---|
| Insurance premium | 7.2 million | 4.2 million |
| System cost spread over the years (16 : 8) | — | 2.0 million |
| Maintenance | — | 0.4 million |
| Total | 7.2 million | 6.6 million |
On money alone, the system saves 0.6 million soums a year. But the main benefit does not show in the table: losses that insurance does not cover also fall — days of downtime, lost customers, the deductible amount, time to restock goods.
One more calculation: if the probability of a fire is hypothetically 2% and the average loss is 300 million, the expected annual loss is 2% × 300 = 6 million soums. If the system cuts the probability to 0.5% and the loss to 100 million, the expected loss becomes 0.5% × 100 = 0.5 million soums.
Practical tip: before spending on risk reduction, get the insurer's discount condition in writing and keep the system's documents (installation certificate, maintenance log), because if an event occurs you will need to prove the system was working.
See also: Deductible (franchise) · Insurance premium · Insured event
BankingWe want to repay part of a loan early. The bank offered two options: reduce the monthly payment or shorten the term. Which one saves more interest?
Shortening the term usually saves more. The reason is simple: if the monthly payment stays the same, the principal falls faster each month and the balance on which interest is charged runs out sooner. If the payment is reduced, the remaining debt is stretched over the old term and interest is charged on it for longer.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Chorvoq mebel" LLC took a loan of 360 million soums for 36 months at a hypothetical 2% a month, with annuity repayments: ≈ 14,123,827 soums a month. After 12 months the outstanding balance is ≈ 267,137,012 soums. At that point the company pays an extra 100 million soums and the balance falls to ≈ 167,137,012 soums.
| Option | Monthly payment | Remaining term | Remaining interest |
|---|---|---|---|
| No early repayment | ≈ 14,123,827 | 24 months | ≈ 71,834,835 |
| A. Reduce the payment | ≈ 8,836,717 | 24 months | ≈ 44,944,201 |
| B. Shorten the term | ≈ 14,123,827 (in month 14 ≈ 9,044,427) | 14 months | ≈ 25,517,165 |
Calculation formula: in option A the new payment = 167,137,012 × 0.02 : (1 − 1.02^(−24)). In option B, with the old payment, the debt is closed in 13 full months plus a small payment in month 14.
Savings: ≈ 26.9 million in option A, ≈ 46.3 million soums in option B. The difference is ≈ 19.4 million soums in favour of B.
When option A is still the right choice:
- the company's monthly cash flow is tight and a smaller payment leaves a cash reserve;
- large payments (seasonal purchases, taxes) are expected in the coming months.
Practical tips:
- Read the early repayment terms in the agreement: is there a fee, do you need to give advance notice, from what date is it calculated.
- Get a new repayment schedule for both options from the bank in writing and compare the total interest.
- Think before putting spare money into the loan: if it can earn more in the business than the loan interest rate, there may be no need to rush to repay the loan.
See also: Annuity repayment · Differentiated repayment · Interest expense
BankingThe bank also offered us a third loan option: for 2 years we pay only interest each month and repay the principal in one lump sum at the end. How much more expensive is this than annuity and differentiated repayments?
In such a loan the principal does not decrease over the whole term, so interest is charged on the full amount every month. As a result, total interest is the highest of the three options. Its advantage is that the monthly payment is the smallest and the money keeps working in the company until the end of the term.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Loan of 300 million soums, term 24 months, interest hypothetically 24% a year (2% a month).
| Option | Monthly payment | Total interest |
|---|---|---|
| Principal at the end | 6,000,000 (interest only), plus 300,000,000 in month 24 | 300,000,000 × 2% × 24 = 144,000,000 |
| Annuity | ≈ 15,861,329 every month | ≈ 80,671,900 |
| Differentiated | falls from 18,500,000 to 12,750,000 | 300,000,000 × 2% × 25 : 2 = 75,000,000 |
The annuity payment is calculated with the formula: 300,000,000 × 0.02 : (1 − 1.02^(−24)).
So the first option is about 63.3 million more expensive than the annuity and 69 million soums more expensive than differentiated repayment. This difference is the price of holding on to the principal longer.
When this option pays off:
- what was bought with the loan brings in a large sum at the end of the term (a property that is built and sold, goods sold at the end of the season);
- you can turn over the freed-up money at a return higher than the interest rate.
The main risk is the last month. You need to find 300 million soums on a single day. If the money is not there at that moment, you will have to close the old loan with a new one, and the terms may be worse.
Practical tip: if you choose this option, open a separate savings account from the first month and set money aside for the principal every month. Then the final payment will not come as an unexpected blow.
See also: Annuity repayment · Long-term bank loan · Interest expense
BankingWe need 1.2 billion soums for equipment. The interest rate on a dollar loan is much lower than on a soum loan. Does that mean borrowing in dollars is definitely cheaper?
No, it depends on how much the soum exchange rate changes. You repay a dollar loan in dollars, and if your income is in soums, your debt in soums grows when the soum falls. So the two options should be compared through the "break-even exchange rate": the rate at which the cost of the dollar loan in soums equals the cost of the soum loan.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Term 1 year, interest and principal repaid in one lump sum at the end of the year. Soum loan hypothetically 24% a year, dollar loan hypothetically 10% a year, today's rate hypothetically 1 dollar = 12,000 soums.
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Amount repaid on the soum loan | 1,200,000,000 × 1.24 | 1,488,000,000 soums |
| Dollar loan amount | 1,200,000,000 : 12,000 | 100,000 dollars |
| Amount repaid on the dollar loan | 100,000 × 1.10 | 110,000 dollars |
| Break-even exchange rate | 1,488,000,000 : 110,000 | ≈ 13,527 soums |
Result depending on the year-end exchange rate:
| Year-end exchange rate | Cost of the dollar loan in soums | Compared with the soum loan |
|---|---|---|
| 13,200 (dollar rate up 10%) | 1,452,000,000 | 36 million cheaper |
| 13,527 | ≈ 1,488,000,000 | equal |
| 14,400 (dollar rate up 20%) | 1,584,000,000 | 96 million more expensive |
So under these terms, if the dollar rate rises by more than about 12.7% during the year (that is, the soum loses more than about 11.3% of its value), the dollar loan ends up more expensive.
Who faces less risk with a dollar loan: a company whose income is also in dollars (for example, an exporter). Its revenue rises with the exchange rate and itself offsets the growth of the debt. A company whose income is only in soums bears the currency risk entirely on its own.
One more point: a foreign currency loan is a monetary item in foreign currency (NAS No. 22, paragraph 9), and monetary items are remeasured every month at the Central Bank rate on the last date of the reporting month (paragraph 8), with the exchange difference recognised in the financial result as income or expense from financial activities (paragraph 11). So profit can jump during the year purely because of the exchange rate.
See also: Exchange difference · Devaluation · Currency
BankingWe gave our office manager a corporate bank card linked to the company's account. He used the card to pay for small supplies and taxis. How are these expenses recorded in the accounts?
Purchases made with a corporate card are handled like accountable amounts. Under paragraph 183 of NAS No. 21, account 4230 "Advances for general business expenses" reflects advances issued for buying small tools and supplies for general business needs in cash, "as well as advances issued for purchases using corporate bank cards". Analytical accounting for these advances is kept for each advance issued (paragraph 184).
Procedure: when a card payment appears in the bank statement, the amount moves from the bank account to 4230. Then the employee submits an advance report with receipts, and what was bought is transferred to the relevant account depending on its type.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). During the month, the office manager of "Navro'z dizayn" LLC paid by card for desk lamps of 1,800,000 soums, extension cords of 600,000 soums and taxis for taking documents to the bank of 350,000 soums (the amounts are final; VAT is not considered in the example).
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Card payments per the bank statement | Dt 4230 – Ct 5110 | 2,750,000 | paragraph 185, line 3 |
| Desk lamps and extension cords recorded as tools and household supplies | Dt 1080 – Ct 4230 | 2,400,000 | paragraph 185, line 10 |
| Taxi expenses to administrative expenses | Dt 9420 – Ct 4230 | 350,000 | paragraph 185, line 13 |
Once the advance report is approved, no balance remains in 4230: 2,750,000 − 2,400,000 − 350,000 = 0.
If a payment went through by mistake and the seller refunds the money to the card, the refunded amount is credited to the bank account and 4230 is credited (paragraph 185, line 7).
Practical tips:
- Write internal rules for the cardholder: what may be paid for, the monthly limit, the deadline for handing in receipts.
- Every month, match the card payments in the bank statement against the receipts in the advance report one by one. A payment not backed by a receipt will remain as a balance in 4230 and will stand out immediately.
See also: Bank card · Accountable person · Tools, implements and household supplies
BankingThe loan agreement says the first 6 months are a "grace period" during which no principal is paid. Doesn't that mean the loan is cheaper?
No. A grace period postpones payment but does not make the debt cheaper. Because the principal does not decrease for 6 months, interest during that period is charged on the full amount, and total interest usually rises. What happens to the interest itself during the grace period is written in the agreement: it may be paid every month or added to the debt (capitalised).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Loan of 240 million soums, term 36 months, interest hypothetically 24% a year (2% a month), principal repaid in equal parts (differentiated).
| Option | Interest in the grace period | Interest in the remaining months | Total interest |
|---|---|---|---|
| A. No grace period, 36 months | — | 240,000,000 × 2% × 37 : 2 = 88,800,000 | 88,800,000 |
| B. 6-month grace, interest paid monthly | 240,000,000 × 2% × 6 = 28,800,000 | 240,000,000 × 2% × 31 : 2 = 74,400,000 | 103,200,000 |
| C. 6-month grace, interest added to the debt | ≈ 30,278,981 | ≈ 83,786,484 | ≈ 114,065,465 |
In option C, after 6 months the debt reaches 240,000,000 × 1.02^6 ≈ 270,278,981 soums, and interest is charged on that amount for the next 30 months. The monthly principal payment is 8,000,000 in option B and about 9,009,299 soums in option C.
Conclusion: option B is 14.4 million more expensive than A, and option C 25.3 million soums more expensive.
When a grace period is still the right choice:
- the workshop being built or the line being installed with the loan does not generate income right away;
- a cash shortfall in the first months could lead to late loan payments and penalty interest.
Practical tip: match the grace period to the project's actual start-up date. An unnecessarily long grace period increases total interest, while one that is too short makes the first payments heavy.
See also: Long-term bank loan · Accrued interest · Compound interest
StatisticsMost of our customers are retail, a small share are wholesale and corporate. If more retail customers happen to end up in a survey, won't the result be distorted? How should the sample be designed?
In such cases a stratified sample is used. The population is divided into similar groups — strata — and a separate random sample is drawn from each stratum. The number of people taken from each stratum is made proportional to its share of the population (proportional allocation). Then the ratio of groups in the sample does not depend on chance.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Ohangaron qurilish mollari" shop has 2,000 customers: 1,400 retail, 400 wholesale, 200 corporate. 200 people are surveyed.
| Stratum | Number of customers | Share | Included in the sample | Share satisfied |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Retail | 1,400 | 70% | 140 | 80% |
| Wholesale | 400 | 20% | 40 | 55% |
| Corporate | 200 | 10% | 20 | 40% |
| Total | 2,000 | 100% | 200 | 71% |
Overall satisfaction: (1,400 × 80% + 400 × 55% + 200 × 40%) : 2,000 = 71%.
Now say that in a simple random sample more retail customers happened to be included: 160 retail, 30 wholesale, 10 corporate. Even if satisfaction in each group is the same, the sample result comes out at (160 × 80% + 30 × 55% + 10 × 40%) : 200 = 74.25%, that is, 3.25 percentage points above the true figure. The reason is that the most satisfied group is over-represented in the sample.
An extra benefit of a stratified sample: you can draw a separate conclusion for each group. In this example it is immediately clear that the problem lies specifically with corporate customers.
If you deliberately survey more people from a small group (for example, 60 corporate customers to get a more precise picture), then when calculating the overall result each group is weighted by its actual share of the population, not by its number in the sample.
See also: Sample · Weighted average · Confidence interval
StatisticsWe ran a poll in our Telegram channel: 300 people answered, and 90 percent are satisfied with our service. The manager is happy. Can this result be trusted?
Caution is needed. The 300 respondents represent not all customers but only the part that subscribes to the channel and chose to answer the poll. In statistics this is called selection bias: the sample was not drawn from the population at random but "selected itself" by a certain trait. Such an error cannot be fixed by increasing the sample size: 3,000 answers instead of 300 would be skewed in the same direction.
In this poll, two things push the result upward:
- Mostly loyal customers subscribe to the channel, while dissatisfied ones have often already left.
- Answering the poll is voluntary: usually people with strong opinions answer, while indifferent customers stay silent.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Lazzat oshxonasi" has 1,000 regular customers a month, 600 of whom subscribe to the channel. Say 85% of subscribers are satisfied and 50% of non-subscribers.
| Group | Customers | Share satisfied | Number satisfied |
|---|---|---|---|
| Channel subscribers | 600 | 85% | 510 |
| Non-subscribers | 400 | 50% | 200 |
| All customers | 1,000 | 71% | 710 |
At best, the channel poll will show around 85%, and with self-selection among those willing to answer it can reach the 90% in the question. The true figure across all customers is 71%.
To get a more reliable result:
- Draw the sample from the list of all customers (receipt database, loyalty card), not from channel subscribers.
- Make the sample random: for example, ask every 10th customer a short question at the till, and do not let the staff member choose whom to ask.
- Record the share of non-respondents. If it is large, interpret the result with caution.
The channel poll is not useless either: it shows the opinion of loyal customers well. Just do not announce it as "the opinion of all customers".
See also: Sample · Confidence interval · Arithmetic mean
StatisticsThis month our large branch brought in 20 million soums more revenue and the small one 12 million soums more. For which branch was this month really unusually good, and how do I compare them when their sizes differ?
To compare indicators of different scale, a standardised deviation — the z-score — is convenient. It shows how many standard deviations the result has moved away from that branch's usual level:
z = (this month's result − usual average) : standard deviation
In this way each branch is measured against its own "usual fluctuation". If the distribution is roughly normal, about 95 percent of values lie within the average ± 2 standard deviations. So in practice, if the z-score is about 2 or more (or −2 or less), the result is considered unusual.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Based on data for the last 24 months:
| Branch | Usual monthly revenue | Standard deviation | This month | Difference | Growth | z-score |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Large branch | 240 million | 16 million | 260 million | +20 million | 8.3% | (260 − 240) : 16 = 1.25 |
| Small branch | 80 million | 6 million | 92 million | +12 million | 15% | (92 − 80) : 6 = 2.0 |
In soums the large branch added more, but its revenue normally fluctuates by about ±16 million anyway, so +20 million is within its usual fluctuation. For the small branch, however, +12 million equals two standard deviations: for it this is a genuinely rare result, and its cause is worth investigating.
The z-score works on the negative side too: if in some month z comes out close to −2, this is not chance either but a signal to check.
Note: if seasonality is strong, take the average and standard deviation not for the whole year but for the same month in previous years. Otherwise December will come out "unusual" every year.
See also: Standard deviation · Outlier · Coefficient of variation
StatisticsNew customers come every month, but the total number of customers hardly grows. How do I measure how many customers come back?
Cohort analysis is used for this. A cohort is a group of customers who came for the first time in the same period (for example, January customers). Then you track what percentage of each cohort came back in the following months:
Retention rate = those who came back in a later month : number of customers in the cohort
The total number of customers hides this picture: if newcomers replace those who leave, the total figure does not change and the problem is invisible.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Chiroyli soch" barbershop keeps track of customers by phone number.
| Cohort | New customers | After 1 month | After 2 months | After 3 months |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| January | 200 | 90 (45%) | 70 (35%) | 60 (30%) |
| February | 250 | 125 (50%) | 100 (40%) | — |
How to read the table:
- Compare cohorts of the same "age": after 1 month, 45 percent of January customers and 50 percent of February customers came back. Something may have improved in February (for example, reminder messages started being sent after the first visit).
- Look at the curve within a row: the January cohort goes 45% → 35% → 30%. The decline is slowing, which means a "core" of regular customers of about 30 percent is forming.
- The loss in the first month is the largest: 110 of the 200 did not come back. The biggest opportunity is right here — improving the first-visit experience.
Practical tip: update the cohort table every month by adding one new row and one new column. Raising retention by a few percentage points is often cheaper than attracting new customers.
See also: Index · Growth rate · Sample
StatisticsIn the chart in a presentation, the revenue bars look as if revenue grew fivefold in four months, but the figures show growth of only 4%. Where is the chart misleading?
The most common reason is that the vertical axis does not start at zero. In a bar chart the eye compares the heights of the bars. If the axis starts at, say, 495 million, only the part of each bar above 495 is drawn, and a small difference looks huge.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Monthly revenue: 500, 505, 512, 520 million soums.
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Actual growth | 520 : 500 | 1.04 times (4%) |
| Height of the first bar when the axis starts at 495 | 500 − 495 | 5 units |
| Height of the last bar when the axis starts at 495 | 520 − 495 | 25 units |
| Growth as it appears to the eye | 25 : 5 | 5 times |
Three things to check when you look at a chart:
- Where the vertical axis starts. In a bar chart the axis must start at zero. In a line chart it may start above zero, but the axis labels must be clearly visible.
- Whether the intervals on the horizontal axis are equal. If months are mixed with quarters in places, the growth rate is distorted.
- Whether there are two different vertical axes. If revenue is on the left axis and profit on the right, the axes can be chosen to "bring the lines together" or "push them apart" at will.
The right way: if you want to show a small change, instead of bars plot the change itself (each month's percentage compared with the previous month) or write the exact figures next to the chart. Then the audience will see 4 percent as 4 percent.
This is not just a matter of good manners: a decision made on the basis of a misleading chart (for example, "we are growing fast, let's hire more staff") brings real costs to the company.
See also: Growth rate · Index · Arithmetic mean
EconomicsTwo shops on our street take turns cutting prices to win customers from each other. In the end both make little profit. Why can't they stop?
This situation resembles what economics calls the "prisoner's dilemma". When each shop thinks on its own, cutting prices looks profitable to it, but if both do so, both lose.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The monthly profit (million soums) of "Oybek market" and "Nurli market" depending on their pricing policy:
| Nurli: keeps its price | Nurli: cuts its price | |
|---|---|---|
| Oybek: keeps its price | Oybek 30, Nurli 30 | Oybek 12, Nurli 45 |
| Oybek: cuts its price | Oybek 45, Nurli 12 | Oybek 18, Nurli 18 |
From Oybek's point of view: if Nurli keeps its price, cutting gives 45 (instead of 30); if Nurli cuts, cutting gives 18 (instead of 12). So whatever the rival does, cutting the price is better for Oybek. Nurli reasons in exactly the same way. As a result both get 18 each, whereas by keeping their prices both could have had 30.
Why this trap is hard to escape: neither trusts the other, and each fears that the side that raises its price first will lose customers.
Secretly agreeing on prices with a competitor is not a solution: it restricts competition and harms customers. The honest ways are different:
- Differentiate not on price but on something else: delivery, opening hours, assortment, speed of service.
- A loyalty programme for regular customers: a discount not for everyone, only for those who come back.
- Know your own costs: cutting the price below variable cost brings a loss on every sale; it is better not to enter such a "war" at all.
When the game is played not once but for years, participants often arrive at a stable price on their own: each understands that a price cut will immediately be met with a response.
See also: Competition · Oligopoly · Market equilibrium
EconomicsWe started paying for our couriers' fuel at the company's expense: the number of deliveries stayed the same, but the distance driven suddenly went up. Is there a name for this in economics?
Yes, this is called "moral hazard". When a cost or risk passes to the other party, a person becomes less careful and uses more of the resource, because he no longer pays the consequences himself. The term is often explained with the example of insurance: an insured person may take less care of his property. That is why insurers set a deductible — if part of the loss stays with the policyholder, he is more careful.
The term is not an accusation that the courier is cheating: often a person does not do it consciously but simply stops looking for the shortest route, runs personal errands along the way or leaves the engine idling.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Tezkor yetkazish" service has 10 couriers. When fuel was at their own expense, each drove an average of 1,200 km a month; after it switched to the company's account, 1,500 km. The car uses 8 litres per 100 km, and 1 litre costs 12,000 soums.
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Extra distance | (1,500 − 1,200) × 10 | 3,000 km a month |
| Extra fuel | 3,000 × 8 : 100 | 240 litres |
| Extra cost | 240 × 12,000 | 2,880,000 soums a month |
The solutions economists propose are based on tying part of the cost back to the employee:
- Pay compensation not on actual consumption but by a standard: distance calculated from the order addresses × the consumption standard per 100 km.
- A monthly limit and a requirement to justify anything above it.
- Monitoring: a GPS route sheet and a monthly comparison of the "km per 1 delivery" indicator across couriers.
- Incentives: returning part of the fuel saved against the standard to the courier as a bonus.
Each of these solutions also costs something (monitoring software, time spent on calculations). So they should be weighed against the loss from moral hazard: in this example 2.88 million soums a month.
See also: Deductible (franchise) · Accountable person · Opportunity cost
EconomicsA farmer sold wheat to a mill, the mill sold flour to a baker, and the baker sold bread. If we add up the sales of all three, is that the value created in the country?
No, that would be double (actually triple) counting. The value of the wheat went into the price of the flour, and the value of the flour into the price of the bread. That is why, when gross domestic product is calculated by the production method, it is not sales that are added up but the value added at each stage:
Value added = sales at the stage − value of raw materials and services obtained from other companies
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). For simplicity we assume the farmer bought nothing from others.
| Stage | Sales | Raw materials purchased | Value added |
|---|---|---|---|
| Farmer: wheat | 40 million | 0 | 40 million |
| Mill: flour | 65 million | 40 million | 25 million |
| Baker: bread | 100 million | 65 million | 35 million |
| Total | 205 million | — | 100 million |
Total sales are 205 million, but the final product that reached the consumer is 100 million soums' worth of bread. The sum of the values added (40 + 25 + 35 = 100) is exactly equal to the value of the final product. This is no coincidence: the intermediate purchases in the chain cancel each other out.
Where value added goes: at each stage it is distributed among employees' wages, depreciation of fixed assets, taxes and the owner's profit.
Practical conclusion for a company: large revenue does not mean the business creates a lot of value. A trading firm's revenue may be larger than a manufacturer's, while its value added is small. When assessing profitability it is useful to calculate the indicator "revenue − purchased raw materials and services" separately: it shows how much value the business itself adds.
See also: Gross domestic product (GDP) · Cost (cost of production) · Gross profit
EconomicsOur coffee shop had small and large coffees. We added a medium size to the menu, slightly cheaper than the large one; almost no one buys it, but sales of large coffee have gone up. How does this work?
In behavioural economics this is called the "decoy effect". People often judge a price not in absolute terms but by comparing it with the options next to it. Once a medium size appears that is a little cheaper than the large coffee but much smaller, the large coffee starts to look like "a great deal".
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Kofe burchagi" coffee shop sells 500 cups a day.
| Size | Price | Volume | Price per 1 ml |
|---|---|---|---|
| Small | 15,000 | 250 ml | 60.0 soums |
| Medium (new) | 23,000 | 350 ml | ≈ 65.7 soums |
| Large | 25,000 | 450 ml | ≈ 55.6 soums |
Every millilitre of the medium coffee is the most expensive. In the customer's mind a comparison appears: "if I add just 2,000 soums, I get 100 ml more".
| Indicator | Before the medium size | After adding the medium size |
|---|---|---|
| Sales mix | small 60%, large 40% | small 45%, medium 5%, large 50% |
| Daily revenue | 500 × (0.6 × 15,000 + 0.4 × 25,000) = 9,500,000 | 500 × (0.45 × 15,000 + 0.05 × 23,000 + 0.5 × 25,000) = 10,200,000 |
With prices unchanged, daily revenue rose by 700,000 soums.
Practical conclusions:
- This is not deceiving the customer but making the choice easy to compare. At the same time, all prices and volumes must be clearly stated on the menu, otherwise you will lose customers' trust.
- Measure the result: compare the sales mix before and after the change for at least 2–3 weeks; do not rely on the impression of a single day.
- Calculate profit as well as revenue: the cost of a large coffee is also higher, so check separately how the change in mix has affected profit.
See also: Demand · Price elasticity of demand · Weighted average
EconomicsI put 100 million soums on deposit in a bank, and the bank lent that money to another company. Now there is money both in my account and in that company's account. Did the bank "multiply" the money?
In a sense, yes. In economics this is called the money multiplier. Banks do not keep all deposits in the vault: they keep part as required reserves and lend out the rest. The company that took the loan spends the money, it lands in another company's bank account, and that bank in turn lends part of it out again. In this way, on the basis of the initial deposit, the total amount of deposits in the economy increases several times over.
The theoretical maximum:
Maximum total deposits = initial deposit : required reserve ratio
The required reserve ratio is set by the central bank. The 10% in the example below is a hypothetical figure used only for the calculation.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). We assume a required reserve of 10% and that banks lend out all the remaining money.
| Stage | Deposit received by the bank | Kept in reserve (10%) | Lent out |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 100.0 million | 10.0 million | 90.0 million |
| 2 | 90.0 million | 9.0 million | 81.0 million |
| 3 | 81.0 million | 8.1 million | 72.9 million |
| 4 | 72.9 million | 7.29 million | 65.61 million |
| 5 | 65.61 million | 6.561 million | 59.049 million |
In the first five stages, total deposits reached 409.51 million soums. If the process continued indefinitely, the theoretical limit would be 100 : 0.10 = 1,000 million soums.
In practice the multiplier is much smaller, because:
- people and companies hold part of their money in cash, and it does not return to the bank;
- besides required reserves, banks also voluntarily hold additional reserves;
- the number of people wanting to borrow, or of creditworthy borrowers, is limited.
An important distinction: money increased, but wealth did not increase by itself. Your deposit is the bank's debt to you, and the company's loan is its debt to the bank. Real wealth is created only if the loan is actually used for productive work (equipment is bought and products are made).
See also: Required reserves · Money supply · Central bank
TaxThe tax authority asked us to provide an explanation "within 5 working days". Are these 5 days counted from the day the letter arrived? And what if the last day falls on a day off?
Article 5 of the Tax Code gives clear rules for calculating time limits. For time limits set in days, five of them matter:
| Rule | Content | Basis (Article 5) |
|---|---|---|
| Start | The time limit is counted from the day after the day the event occurred | Part Two |
| Days | Unless the time limit is stated in calendar days, it is counted in working days | Part Seven |
| Falls on a day off | If the last day falls on a day off or a non-working day, the next working day after it is the last day | Part Eight |
| Hour | The action may be performed until midnight (hour 24) on the last day of the time limit | Part Nine |
| By post | If a document or money is handed to a communications organisation before midnight (hour 24) on the last day, the time limit is not considered missed | Part Ten |
So the day the letter arrives is not counted: the first day is the day after it. Because the limit is "5 working days", days off and non-working public holidays in between are not counted.
Example (compiled by the author). On another matter, "Navro'z savdo" LLC must reply "within 10 calendar days"; the letter arrived on 18 February 2027. The first day is 19 February, the tenth is 28 February. 28 February 2027 is a Sunday, so under Part Eight the time limit ends on the next working day, i.e. 1 March (Monday). Here the limit is stated in calendar days, so the days off in between are counted; only the last day is moved.
Tip: when you put a time limit in the calendar, always answer two questions: "from which day is it counted" and "is it calendar days or working days". If working days have been moved because of a holiday, check the officially announced working calendar.
Source: Tax Code, Article 5.
See also: Taxpayer · Tax period
TaxCopies of old invoices and tax reports are taking up space in the archive. After how many years may we destroy them?
The Tax Code deals with this in two places.
- The duty to keep documents. Under paragraph seven of Part One of Article 22, a taxpayer must keep tax reports and other documents needed to calculate and pay taxes intact for three years after the calendar year in which the relevant tax was due (unless the Code provides otherwise). For the tax report itself and the documents attached to it, Part One of Article 84 gives another count: at least three years after the year in which the report was submitted. Keep them until whichever of the two periods ends later.
- The limitation period. Under Part Two of Article 88, the tax authority's right to carry out an audit and demand additional tax generally lasts three years after the end of the tax period.
There is a separate rule for tax agents: they keep the documents on calculating, withholding and remitting tax for the limitation period set in Article 88 (Article 23).
Example (compiled by the author).
| Document | Calculation |
|---|---|
| Documents on a tax whose payment deadline falls in 2026 | kept throughout 2027, 2028 and 2029 |
| Limitation period for a tax whose tax period is March 2026 | three years after 31 March 2026, i.e. until 31 March 2029 (Part Three of Article 5: a time limit in years ends on the corresponding month and day of the last year) |
Note: the limitation period changes in two cases. First: if the legislation has made the application of a tax rate, the amount of tax payable, a tax benefit or deduction, or a change in the payment deadline subject to certain conditions (Part Two of Article 84), the limitation period is extended by the period during which those conditions apply (Part Three of Article 88). Second: the running of the period is suspended, interrupted and restored in accordance with civil legislation (Part Four of Article 88). Supporting documents for such a conditional benefit must be kept for at least three years after the year in which the conditions cease to apply (Part Two of Article 84).
Tip: keep the documents for periods with a tax benefit, an audit or a dispute in a separate folder even after the general period has passed. The retention period for accounting documents may also be set by other legislation, so check that too before destroying anything.
Source: Tax Code, Article 22 (Part One, paragraph seven), Article 23, Article 84 (Parts One and Two), Article 88.
See also: Tax agent · Field tax audit
TaxOn the last day of the tax payment deadline we sent a payment order to the bank in the evening, and the money reached the treasury the next day. Were we late?
If there was enough money in the account, you were not late. Under clause 1 of Part Three of Article 89 of the Tax Code, a taxpayer's obligation to pay tax is considered fulfilled from the moment an order to transfer money from its bank account is submitted to the bank. There is one condition: on the day of payment the account must have a sufficient balance.
The time limit is set by Part Nine of Article 5: an action for which a time limit is set may be performed until midnight (hour 24) on the last day.
But there are also cases in which the payment is not recognised as made (Part Four of Article 89):
| Case | Clause |
|---|---|
| An unexecuted order is withdrawn by the taxpayer or returned by the bank | clause 1 |
| An unexecuted order of a legal entity that has a personal account with the treasury is withdrawn or returned by the treasury | clause 2 |
| Because the bank details were entered incorrectly, the money did not reach the relevant treasury account | clause 3 |
| On the day of the order, other claims to be executed with priority have been made against the account, and the balance is not enough for all of them | clause 4 |
These rules also apply to late payment interest and fines, and to tax agents (Part Five of Article 89).
Example (compiled by the author). "Oqtosh qurilish" LLC had 48 million soums in its account. On the last day, at 21:40, the accountant sent a tax payment order for 36 million soums. There was enough money, so the obligation was fulfilled that same day. Had the accountant got a single digit of the treasury account number wrong, the payment would have been treated as not made under clause 3.
Tip: if you pay on the last day, check the details against a template before sending and make sure there is no file of pending claims against the account.
Source: Tax Code, Article 5 (Part Nine), Article 89 (Parts Three, Four and Five).
See also: Payment order · Late payment interest (penalty interest)
TaxWe shipped goods on 30 November and issued the invoice on 2 December. For VAT, does this turnover belong to November or December?
To November. Under Part One of Article 242 of the Tax Code, the date of turnover for a sale of goods is the date the invoice is presented. But if the goods were shipped earlier, the shipment date is used. In other words, whichever of the two dates comes first is taken. The VAT tax period is generally one month (Article 259).
Article 242 has separate rules for other cases (complete list):
| Transaction | Date of turnover | Article 242 |
|---|---|---|
| Goods are not shipped | The day ownership passes to the buyer | Part Two |
| Real estate | The date of transfer to the buyer under the acceptance certificate | Part Three |
| Services | The date the invoice or another document confirming that the service was rendered is signed | Part Four |
| Electricity and heat, water, gas, utility, communication, financial and insurance services, transport of goods by pipeline and other sales on a permanent (continuous) basis | The last day of the calendar month | Part Six |
| Long-term contracts for construction of facilities and with a long technological cycle (if monthly handover of services is not provided for) | The last day of each calendar month | Part Seven |
| Finance lease (leasing) | The date the property is placed at the lessee's disposal under the acceptance certificate | Part Eight |
| Transfer for own needs | The day of transfer documented by an internal document | Part Nine |
| Export under the export customs procedure | The date the customs border is actually crossed; for periodic or temporary declaration, the date of registration of the cargo customs declaration bearing the customs authority's marks | Part Ten |
In addition, the rule set for services also applies to services that begin in one tax period and end in another (Part Five).
Example (compiled by the author). On 30 November "Bodomzor qandolat" LLC shipped products worth 56 million soums (including VAT). VAT = 56,000,000 × 12 / 112 = 6,000,000 soums. This amount goes into the November report, even though the invoice was issued in December. If the accountant puts it into December, the tax for November will be understated.
Tip: at the end of the month, compare the list of waybills for goods that left the warehouse with the invoices issued that month — shipments with a "late" invoice show up immediately.
Source: Tax Code, Articles 242 and 259; general VAT rate 12%.
See also: Sale (realization) · VAT
TaxA foreign firm that is not registered for tax in Uzbekistan provided a service to us. Who pays its VAT: the firm itself or us?
If Uzbekistan is found to be the place of supply of the service (this is determined under Article 241), you pay the VAT as a tax agent. Under Article 255 of the Tax Code, the tax agent is the buyer of such a service that is a legal entity of Uzbekistan, an individual entrepreneur, or a foreign legal entity operating in Uzbekistan through a permanent establishment (Part Two; Part Four has a separate rule for electronic services). It must calculate, withhold and remit the tax to the budget (Part Six).
Two cases are distinguished:
| Contract price | Tax base and VAT | Article 255 |
|---|---|---|
| The price is set including VAT | The base is the amount of income including VAT; VAT is withheld from the payment | Part One |
| The foreign firm gave the price excluding VAT | The base is the value of the service excluding VAT; the agent calculates the VAT itself and remits it to the budget | Part Seven |
Example (compiled by the author). "Ipak yo'li logistika" LLC received a consulting service worth 120,000,000 soums from a foreign firm, price excluding VAT.
- VAT = 120,000,000 × 12% = 14,400,000 soums. The foreign firm is paid 120,000,000 soums, and the VAT is remitted to the budget separately.
- If the contract had said 120,000,000 soums including VAT: VAT = 120,000,000 × 12 / 112 ≈ 12,857,143 soums, and the remaining 107,142,857 soums would have been transferred to the firm.
The payment document for this VAT paid to the budget gives the right to claim it as input VAT (last part of Article 255, in accordance with the rules of Chapter 37).
Note: this procedure does not apply to the exempt goods and services listed in Articles 243–245.
Source: Tax Code, Article 255; general VAT rate 12%.
AccountingWe transferred an advance from our settlement account to a purchasing employee so that he could buy raw materials. He brought the materials and returned the leftover money to our account. In which account is the advance recorded, and what journal entries are made?
Money issued to an employee on account is recorded in group 4200 "Advances issued to employees". Under paragraph 180 of NAS No. 21, these accounts are debited in correspondence with cash accounts and credited in correspondence with accounts for purchased assets or expenses.
Which sub-account? Buying raw materials is neither a business trip (4220, paragraph 182) nor a purchase of low-value items and supplies for general business needs (4230, paragraph 183). Under paragraph 184, advances not recorded in 4210–4230 are recorded in 4290 "Other advances issued to employees". Analytical records are kept for each advance issued (paragraph 184).
Example (compiled by the author, VAT ignored for simplicity). "Zarafshon mebel" LLC transferred 8,000,000 soums from its settlement account to a purchasing employee. With supporting documents, the employee brought raw materials worth 7,450,000 soums and returned 550,000 soums to the account.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21, paragraph 185) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Advance issued from the bank account | Dt 4290 – Ct 5110 | 8,000,000 | line 3 |
| Raw materials bought by the accountable person received into the warehouse | Dt 1010 – Ct 4290 | 7,450,000 | line 10 |
| Unused balance returned to the account | Dt 5110 – Ct 4290 | 550,000 | line 7 |
Result: 4290 is closed (8,000,000 − 7,450,000 − 550,000 = 0).
Under line 10, assets received through an accountable person are recorded, depending on their type, in accounts of four groups: 0710–0890 (capital investments and equipment to be installed), 1010–1090 (materials), 1110–1120 (animals being raised and fattened), 2910–2990 (goods). If the money is issued from the cash desk, the first entry is Dt 4290 – Ct 5010 (line 4), and if the balance is returned to the cash desk, Dt 5010 – Ct 4290 (line 6).
Note: if the money is transferred in advance not to the employee but to the supplier firm itself, it is not an amount on account but an advance paid to a supplier, recorded in 4310 "Advances paid to suppliers and contractors for inventories" (paragraphs 186, 187).
Tip: before transferring an advance, set out its purpose and amount in an order or application. When the employee returns, the expense report is easy to check against that purpose.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 180, 182–187.
See also: Accountable person · Expense report (advance report)
AccountingA heater a customer bought from us turned out to have a factory defect. Under the warranty we sent him a new one, and we had another customer's heater repaired by a service firm. Where are these costs recorded?
Warranty-related costs are also collected in account 2610 "Production defects (rejects)". Under paragraph 131 of NAS No. 21, its debit collects the costs of detected defective output as well as the costs of warranty repairs. Its credit records amounts that reduce the losses and the net loss written off to production costs.
Example (compiled by the author, VAT ignored for simplicity). "Issiq uy texnika" LLC, for heaters sold in the current year:
- the first customer was sent a new heater from the warehouse, with a cost of 2,400,000 soums, in place of the defective one;
- a service firm repaired the second customer's heater under the warranty for 350,000 soums;
- spare parts worth 400,000 soums at the price of possible use were removed from the defective heater returned by the first customer.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21, paragraph 132) |
|---|---|---|---|
| A new product sent to the customer in place of the defective one | Dt 2610 – Ct 2810 | 2,400,000 | line 5 |
| Service firm's warranty repair service | Dt 2610 – Ct 6010 | 350,000 | line 6 |
| Spare parts left from the defective item recorded at the price of possible use | Dt 1010–1090 – Ct 2610 | 400,000 | line 11 |
| Net loss included in production cost | Dt 2010 – Ct 2610 | 2,350,000 | line 12 |
Calculation: 2,400,000 + 350,000 − 400,000 = 2,350,000 soums. 2610 is closed.
Three more cases (paragraph 132):
- if the loss is charged to the employee at fault who caused material damage: Dt 4730 – Ct 2610 (line 13);
- if the consumer had the defective product repaired himself and we must reimburse the cost: Dt 2610 – Ct 6990 (line 10);
- losses from non-compensable defective output of previous years: Dt 9430 – Ct 2610 (line 14).
The amount recoverable from a supplier that delivered substandard material is also recorded to the credit of 2610 (paragraph 131), but the table in paragraph 132 has no separate line for it, so set the correspondence in the accounting policy.
Tip: keep analytical records by workshop, product type, cost item and cause of the defect (paragraph 131) — at the end of the year you will see which model generates the most warranty costs.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 131–132.
See also: Defective output (rejects) · Primary production
AccountingWe carry out a major overhaul of our equipment at the end of the year. So that the cost does not pile up in a single month, we want to build up a provision a little each month. How is this recorded?
Account 8910 "Provisions for future expenses and payments" is intended for this. Under paragraph 375 of NAS No. 21, the provision is created in the established manner so that expenses are included evenly. When it is accrued, 8910 is credited, and when the actual expenses are incurred, they are written off from its debit. The provision is reviewed from time to time, and always at the end of the year, and adjusted if necessary. Analytical records are kept separately for each type of provision.
Example (compiled by the author). "Tong sut" LLC set a provision for repairs of workshop equipment in its accounting policy: 2,000,000 soums a month. In December its own repair workshop (auxiliary production) carried out repairs worth 20,600,000 soums.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21, paragraph 376) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Provision accrued each month (12 months) | Dt 2510 – Ct 8910 | 24,000,000 | line 1 |
| Cost of repairs done by the auxiliary workshop closed against the provision | Dt 8910 – Ct 2310 | 20,600,000 | line 2 |
| Unused balance taken to income | Dt 8910 – Ct 9390 | 3,400,000 | line 3 |
Calculation: 12 × 2,000,000 = 24,000,000; 24,000,000 − 20,600,000 = 3,400,000 soums.
Result: the repair cost was spread evenly over monthly production cost, and December's cost did not jump suddenly.
On the balance sheet, the balance of 8910 is shown in line 470 ("Provisions for future expenses and payments") (Appendix 1 to the Regulation approved by Order No. 181).
Tip: set the monthly amount based on actual repair costs in previous years and compare it once in the middle of the year — then there will be no large surplus or shortfall at the end.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 375–376.
See also: Provision for future expenses and payments · Auxiliary production
AccountingIn the warehouse we keep materials at a fixed accounting price set in advance, but the supplier's price is different every time. Where and how do we record the difference?
If this procedure is chosen in the accounting policy, NAS No. 21 provides for using two accounts: 1510 "Procurement and acquisition of materials" and 1610 "Material cost variances" (paragraph 102). Materials may be accounted for at accounting prices, and the variance from the actual cost is calculated monthly and recorded in 1610 (paragraphs 88 and 89).
The procedure in brief:
- the supplier's invoice and transport costs are collected in the debit of 1510 (paragraph 114, lines 2 and 6);
- the material is received into the warehouse at the accounting price (paragraph 88; entry — paragraph 114, line 9);
- the difference between the actual cost and the accounting price is transferred to 1610 (paragraph 114, line 11);
- at the end of the month the variance in 1610 is allocated to cost accounts in proportion to the accounting-price value of the materials used (paragraph 115).
Example (compiled by the author, amounts excluding VAT). At "Lola bo'yoq" LLC the accounting price of paint is 50,000 soums per 1 kg. 1,000 kg of paint was received: supplier's invoice 52,000,000 soums, delivery service 1,500,000 soums. During the month 600 kg was issued to production.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Material received from the supplier | Dt 1510 – Ct 6010 | 52,000,000 | paragraph 114, line 2 |
| Delivery service | Dt 1510 – Ct 6990 | 1,500,000 | paragraph 114, line 6 |
| Received into the warehouse at the accounting price (1,000 × 50,000) | Dt 1010 – Ct 1510 | 50,000,000 | paragraph 114, line 9 |
| Actual cost is higher: difference to 1610 | Dt 1610 – Ct 1510 | 3,500,000 | paragraph 114, line 11, "b" |
| Issued to production (600 × 50,000) | Dt 2010 – Ct 1010 | 30,000,000 | paragraph 104, line 12 |
| Share of the variance relating to the part used | Dt 2010 – Ct 1610 | 2,100,000 | paragraph 116, line 3 |
Calculation: actual cost 52,000,000 + 1,500,000 = 53,500,000; variance 53,500,000 − 50,000,000 = 3,500,000. Share: 3,500,000 × 30,000,000 / 50,000,000 = 2,100,000 soums. The 1,400,000 soums remaining in 1610 relates to the 400 kg still in the warehouse.
If the actual cost is lower than the accounting price, the difference is recorded the other way round: Dt 1510 – Ct 1610 (paragraph 114, line 11, "a").
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 88, 89, 102, 104, 114–116.
See also: Accounting price (standard price) · Material cost variance
AccountingAfter the material was received into the warehouse, part of it turned out to be defective. We sent the supplier a claim, and it agreed to refund part of the amount. How is this recorded?
Claims are kept in account 4860 "Claims receivable" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 213). Money received credits this account, and amounts that later turn out not to be receivable are returned to the accounts in which they were recorded earlier (paragraph 214). Analytical records are kept separately for each claim.
Example (compiled by the author, amounts excluding VAT). "Oydin plast" LLC had recorded granules worth 40,000,000 soums in 1010. Later a defect was found in a part worth 6,000,000 soums. The supplier refunded 4,000,000 soums and did not accept 2,000,000 soums.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Claim made for a defect found after receipt | Dt 4860 – Ct 1010 | 6,000,000 | paragraph 104, line 6 |
| Amount of the accepted claim received in the settlement account | Dt 5110 – Ct 4860 | 4,000,000 | paragraph 226, line 9 |
| Part whose payment was refused returned to materials | Dt 1010 – Ct 4860 | 2,000,000 | paragraph 104, line 11 |
Result: 4860 is closed. Value of materials in 1010: 40,000,000 − 6,000,000 + 2,000,000 = 36,000,000 soums. The rejected 2,000,000 soums remained in the cost of materials.
There is one important rule for fines, late payment interest and forfeits: under sub-paragraph "d" of paragraph 213, they are recorded to the debit of 4860 in correspondence with 9390 "Other operating income" in the amount accepted by the payer or set by an economic court. A claim amount not accepted by the payer is not recorded in the accounts.
Tip: send the claim in writing and attach the defect report — if the supplier refuses, you will go to court with these documents.
Source: NAS No. 21, paragraphs 104, 213, 214, 226.
See also: Amount receivable under a claim · Accounts receivable
AuditOur auditor's report has a separate section headed "Material uncertainty related to going concern". Doesn't that mean an adverse opinion has been expressed?
No, in itself it is not an adverse opinion. In Uzbekistan, the International Standards on Auditing are the auditing standards (Law O'RQ-677, Article 9). The going concern issue is governed by ISA 570. Under its logic there are three possible outcomes:
| Situation | Auditor's opinion |
|---|---|
| There is a material uncertainty and it is adequately disclosed in the notes to the statements | The opinion is not modified; a "Material uncertainty related to going concern" section is added to the report, drawing attention to the relevant note |
| There is a material uncertainty, but it is not adequately disclosed | Qualified or adverse opinion (under ISA 705) |
| Preparing the statements on a going concern basis is inappropriate altogether | Adverse opinion |
Example (compiled by the author). A large bank loan of "Shoshtepa tekstil" LLC must be repaid a few months after the reporting date. The bank has not yet said whether it will extend it. Management wrote about this openly in the notes and showed a repayment plan. The auditor did not modify the opinion but used a separate section to direct users to that note. Had management hidden this risk, the opinion would have been qualified or adverse.
Tip: if the auditor mentions that such a section may be included, do not hide the risk. State clearly in the note the reason for the uncertainty and management's plan — that is exactly the condition for the opinion not being modified.
About the new version: the IAASB has adopted ISA 570 (Revised 2024), which applies to audits of periods beginning on or after 15 December 2026. Under it, the auditor gives an explicit conclusion in the report on two matters: whether the use of the going concern basis is appropriate and whether a material uncertainty exists.
Sources: Law O'RQ-677 "On Auditing Activity", Article 9; IAASB, questions and answers on ISA 570 (Revised 2024) (English version): https://incp.org.co/wp-content/uploads/2025/05/Preguntas-frecuentes-NIA-570-Revisada-2024-ingles.pdf; AUASB, going concern decision flowchart: https://www.auasb.gov.au/admin/file/content102/c3/May_20_5.2_flowchart.pdf
See also: Going concern · Auditor's report
AuditWe bought expensive equipment from another firm owned by our founder. For this transaction the auditor is asking for separate documents, agreements and decisions. Why so much attention to this particular transaction?
Because transactions with related parties are governed separately by ISA 550. In such transactions the price may differ from market terms, or management's interests may get mixed in.
The standard gives the auditor the following tasks:
- To understand the entity's related party relationships and transactions, whether or not the applicable financial reporting framework establishes related party requirements (ISA 550, objectives of the auditor).
- To treat identified significant related party transactions outside the entity's normal course of business as giving rise to significant risks (IAASB project page).
- To evaluate whether such transactions have been authorised and approved by management or those charged with governance, as well as the business rationale for the transaction (ACCA overview).
Example (compiled by the author). "Yashil vodiy agro" LLC bought a packaging line for 900 million soums from a firm owned by its founder. The company normally obtains such equipment from leasing companies, so the transaction is unusual. The auditor asked for: the decision of the founders' meeting, price offers from other suppliers, the contract and payment documents. He also checked whether the transaction was disclosed in the notes to the statements.
Tip: maintain a list of related parties throughout the year, and for each large transaction prepare a written answer in advance to the question "why this partner, why this price".
Sources: Law O'RQ-677, Article 9; IAASB, ISA 550 project: https://www.iaasb.org/consultations-projects/related-parties-isa-550; text of ISA 550 (UK version): https://media.frc.org.uk/documents/ISA_UK_550_Updated_September_2025.pdf; ACCA article: https://accaglobal.com/an/en/member/discover/cpd-articles/audit-assurance/related-parties.html
See also: Materiality · Internal control
AuditIn the auditor's report of a company whose shares trade on the stock exchange I saw a "Key audit matters" section, but our LLC's report has no such section. Did the auditor forget something?
No, he did not. Reporting key audit matters is governed by ISA 701. This standard applies above all to audits of complete sets of general purpose financial statements of listed entities (whose shares or debt securities are quoted on a stock exchange). For other entities, the section appears in two cases: if the law requires it or if the auditor decides to include it voluntarily.
Key audit matters are selected from the matters the auditor discussed with those charged with governance. They are the matters that, in the auditor's professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the current period.
Another important limitation: this section is not a substitute for modifying the opinion. If the statements contain a material misstatement, the auditor cannot simply describe it as a "key matter" — he must modify the opinion under ISA 705.
Example (compiled by the author). The report on listed "Qizilqum sement" JSC describes two matters: revenue recognition on long-term contracts and the valuation of obsolete inventories. For each, the auditor wrote why he considered the matter significant and how he tested it. For the small "Sadaf servis" LLC, the report has the standard structure — without such a section.
Sources: Law O'RQ-677, Article 9; IAASB, ISA 701: https://iaasb.org/publications/international-standard-auditing-isa-701-new-communicating-key-audit-matters-independent-auditors; text of ISA 701: https://www.iaasb.org/system/files/publications/files/ISA-701_2.pdf
See also: Key audit matters · Emphasis of matter
AuditBesides the financial statements, our annual report also contains management's narrative about the business. Does the auditor check that too and express an opinion on it?
The auditor reads this text but does not express an opinion on it. ISA 720 (Revised) calls such information "other information": financial or non-financial information included in the annual report, other than the financial statements and the auditor's report.
What the auditor does:
- Reads the other information and considers whether there is a material inconsistency between it and the financial statements or the knowledge obtained in the audit.
- If an inconsistency is found, determines what needs to be corrected: the financial statements or the other information.
- The report includes an "Other information" section. It states that the auditor's opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information. A material inconsistency not corrected by management is described in this section.
Example (compiled by the author). In the statement of financial results of "Charxpalak savdo" LLC, net revenue rose from 800 million soums to 944 million soums: 944 / 800 = 1.18, i.e. 18% growth. The manager's text, however, says "revenue grew by 25%". The auditor flagged this as an inconsistency. If management does not correct the text, this will be stated in the "Other information" section of the report.
Tip: before publication, check every figure in management's text against the lines of the financial statements.
Sources: Law O'RQ-677, Article 9; text of ISA 720 (Revised): https://www.ifac.org/system/files/publications/files/ISA-720-(Revised).pdf; IFAC overview: https://www.ifac.org/system/files/publications/files/ISA-720-(Revised)-At-A-Glance.pdf
See also: Auditor's report · Financial statements
AuditWe have an internal audit department that checks the warehouse and the cash desk throughout the year. Can the external auditor use their work and cut down his own testing?
Partly, yes, but there are conditions. This is governed by ISA 610 (Revised 2013).
- Evaluation first. The external auditor evaluates three features of the internal audit function: its objectivity, competence, and systematic and disciplined approach. If any one of them is lacking, the internal audit work is not used.
- Extent. The more professional judgement the work requires, the higher the risk of material misstatement, and the lower the function's objectivity and competence, the less the external auditor uses its work and the more he does himself.
- Responsibility. The external auditor has sole responsibility for the audit opinion. Using the internal audit work does not reduce that responsibility.
- Testing and documentation. The external auditor evaluates the work he plans to use, performs audit procedures on it himself, and then records his conclusions on that work in the working papers.
Example (compiled by the author). The internal audit of "Mehrigiyo farm" LLC reports to the supervisory board and carries out warehouse counts under a written programme. Having evaluated this work, the external auditor reduced his own counts at low-risk warehouses. The cash desk, being a high-risk area, he tested in full himself.
Tip: keep the internal audit programme, working papers and reports in good order — the more the external auditor can rely on them, the faster the audit goes.
Sources: Law O'RQ-677, Article 9; IAASB, ISA 610 (Revised 2013): https://www.iaasb.org/publications/isa-610-revised-2013-using-work-internal-auditors-0; text of the standard: https://www.ifac.org/system/files/publications/files/ISA-610-%28Revised-2013%29.pdf
See also: Internal audit · Internal control
Financial reportingOur LLC was state-registered on 15 October 2026. Do we submit annual financial statements for 2026, or does the first set of statements cover a different period?
Paragraph 6 of the Regulation approved by Order No. 181 gives a clear answer. The key date is 1 October of the reporting year:
| Time of registration | Period covered by the first financial statements |
|---|---|
| Before 1 October of the reporting year | From the 1st day of the month of registration to 31 December of that year |
| After 1 October of the reporting year | From the date of state registration to 31 December of the following year (31 December included) |
In your case the LLC was registered after 1 October. So the first annual statements cover the period from 15 October 2026 to 31 December 2027.
For comparison (an example compiled by the author): if "Ko'k gumbaz" LLC was registered on 20 March 2026, its first statements cover the period from 1 March to 31 December 2026.
Note: this procedure does not apply to liquidated or reorganised organisations or to organisations created on the basis of their separate divisions (paragraph 6).
Submission deadline: annual statements under NAS are submitted no later than 1 March, and those under IFRS no later than 1 May, of the year following the reporting year (paragraph 7).
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance dated 8 October 2024, paragraphs 6 and 7.
See also: Financial statements · Balance sheet
Financial reportingWe are a small enterprise. Do we also have to fill in the statements of cash flows and of equity in our annual reporting?
No. Under paragraph 10 of the Regulation approved by Order No. 181, the annual financial statements of micro-firms and small enterprises consist of two forms:
- the balance sheet (Appendix 1 to the Regulation);
- the statement of financial results (Appendix 2 to the Regulation).
For comparison, other organisations that report under NAS submit five parts under paragraph 9:
| Part | Micro-firm and small enterprise | Other organisations |
|---|---|---|
| Balance sheet | Yes | Yes |
| Statement of financial results | Yes | Yes |
| Statement of equity | No | Yes |
| Statement of cash flows | No | Yes |
| Notes to the financial statements | No | Yes |
Which category an enterprise belongs to is determined by the legislation on categories of business entities (Presidential Decree PF-21). Before reporting, check your category against that document.
The deadline is not shortened: annual statements under NAS are submitted no later than 1 March of the following year (paragraph 7).
Example (compiled by the author). "Gulobod non" LLC, which is in the small enterprise category, submits only the balance sheet and the statement of financial results for 2026, no later than 1 March 2027. At the same time, it is useful for the manager to keep a cash flow table for internal use, to understand where the money is going.
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance dated 8 October 2024, paragraphs 7, 9 and 10.
See also: Micro-firm · Small enterprise
Financial reportingWe have no data for many lines of the balance sheet form. Should we enter 0 or leave them blank? Do we show amounts in soums?
The Regulation approved by Order No. 181 answers both questions.
- Blank lines. Under paragraph 13, all details, lines and columns of the financial statement forms must be filled in. If a line (column) is not filled in because there is no data, it is crossed out. So leaving it blank is wrong — a line with no data is crossed out.
- Unit of measurement. The balance sheet and statement of financial results forms are prepared in thousand soums (headings of Appendices 1 and 2 to the Regulation). The reporting currency is the soum, and assets and liabilities in foreign currency are translated into soums at the Central Bank rate (paragraph 3).
Example (compiled by the author). "Bek-avto servis" LLC converted its year-end balances into thousand soums:
| Line | Account balance, soums | On the balance sheet, thousand soums |
|---|---|---|
| 330 Cash on hand (5000) | 4,870,000 | 4,870 |
| 340 Cash in the settlement account (5100) | 126,350,000 | 126,350 |
| 350 Cash in foreign currency (5200) | no balance | crossed out |
Signature: the forms are signed by the head and the chief accountant (or the person performing the accounting and financial management function). If the head has taken on this function, he also signs in place of the chief accountant (paragraph 4).
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance dated 8 October 2024, paragraphs 3, 4, 13 and Appendices 1, 2.
See also: Balance sheet · Balance sheet total
Financial reportingAmounts owed by buyers in 4010 are 86.4 million, notes received in 4020 are 3.6 million, and the allowance for doubtful debts in 4910 is 12.5 million soums. How much do we enter in line 220 of the balance sheet? And what if part of the debt is overdue?
Line 220 "Amounts owed by buyers and customers" is filled in as group 4000 less 4900 (Appendix 1 to the Regulation approved by Order No. 181). In other words, the allowance is deducted from the amount of the debt, and the balance sheet shows the net amount.
Calculation (an example compiled by the author, "Durdona tekstil" LLC):
| Indicator | Soums |
|---|---|
| 4010 Receivables from buyers and customers | 86,400,000 |
| 4020 Notes (bills of exchange) received | 3,600,000 |
| 4000 total | 90,000,000 |
| 4910 Allowance for doubtful debts | (12,500,000) |
| Line 220: 90,000,000 − 12,500,000 | 77,500,000 → 77,500 thousand soums |
Overdue debt. On the balance sheet, under "Receivables, total" (line 210), there is line 211 "of which: overdue". If there are overdue receivables or payables, the appendix to the balance sheet — "Breakdown of overdue receivables and payables" — is filled in (note in Appendix 1).
In the appendix, debts are grouped as follows:
- debtors with overdue debts, total;
- overdue debts within the republic, including by name of debtor and intra-departmental debts;
- overdue debts outside the republic, including by name of debtor.
Payables have the same structure.
Continuing the example: if 30,000,000 soums of the 90,000,000 soums is overdue (other debtors have no overdue debts), that amount is shown in line 211 as "of which" and is entered in the appendix with the name of each debtor. Line 211 is not added to the total of line 210. The form does not say separately whether the line 211 amount is shown before or after the allowance, so set the chosen approach in the accounting policy and apply it the same way every year.
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance dated 8 October 2024, Appendix 1 and its appendix.
See also: Allowance for doubtful debts · Accounts receivable
Financial reportingIn the statement of financial results, which lines take you from gross profit to net profit? Could you show this with an example?
In the form in Appendix 2 to the Regulation approved by Order No. 181, the calculation is built like a staircase. The formula for each step is written in the form itself.
Example (compiled by the author, "Samarqand chinni" LLC, in thousand soums; hypothetical figures):
| Line | Indicator | Calculation | Amount |
|---|---|---|---|
| 010 | Net revenue from sales | — | 640,000 |
| 020 | Cost of products sold | — | 452,000 |
| 030 | Gross profit | 010 − 020 | 188,000 |
| 040 | Period expenses | 050 (41,000) + 060 (73,500) + 070 (9,500) | 124,000 |
| 090 | Other income from core activities | — | 6,400 |
| 100 | Profit from core activities | 030 − 040 + 090 | 70,400 |
| 110 | Income from financial activities | 120 dividends (2,000) + 150 exchange differences (1,100) | 3,100 |
| 170 | Expenses on financial activities | 180 interest (18,600) + 200 exchange differences (2,900) | 21,500 |
| 220 | Profit from general business activities | 100 + 110 − 170 | 52,000 |
| 230 | Extraordinary gains and losses | — | crossed out |
| 240 | Profit before corporate profit tax | 220 ± 230 | 52,000 |
| 250 | Corporate profit tax (hypothetical amount) | — | 7,800 |
| 260 | Other taxes and mandatory payments from profit | — | crossed out |
| 270 | Net profit | 240 − 250 − 260 | 44,200 |
Check: 188,000 − 124,000 + 6,400 = 70,400; 70,400 + 3,100 − 21,500 = 52,000; 52,000 − 7,800 = 44,200.
Note: net profit is not even a quarter of gross profit (44,200 / 188,000 ≈ 23.5%). The main "eaters" are administrative expenses (73,500) and loan interest (18,600). The staircase form shows exactly this: at which step profit falls the most.
Checking the total lines: 040 = 050 + 060 + 070; 110 = 120 + 130 + 140 + 150 + 160; 170 = 180 + 190 + 200 + 210. Lines for which the example has no data (130, 140, 160, 190, 210, as well as 230 and 260) add nothing to the calculation and are crossed out under paragraph 13 of the Regulation.
Tip: compare the net profit in line 270 with line 060 of the statement of equity ("Retained profit (loss) of the current year", Appendix 3) — if there is a difference, you should be able to explain why.
Source: Regulation approved by Order No. 181 of the Minister of Economy and Finance dated 8 October 2024, paragraph 13, Appendices 2 and 3.
See also: Final financial result · Period expenses
FinanceWe bought bonds that mature in nine months for less than their face value. When and how does the difference from buying them cheaper become income?
The difference becomes income not all at once but in parts until the bond is redeemed. Under paragraph 241 of NAS No. 21, a short-term bond is recorded in account 5810 "Securities" at its acquisition cost, and the difference between the acquisition cost and the face value is reflected, until redemption, on the debit of 5810 (additional accrual) in correspondence with 9590 "Other income from financial activities". By the redemption date the value in 5810 must equal the face value.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Qorasuv savdo" LLC bought bonds with a total face value of 50,000,000 soums for 47,300,000 soums, with 9 months left until redemption. Difference: 50,000,000 − 47,300,000 = 2,700,000 soums. The accounting policy chooses to spread the difference evenly over the months: 2,700,000 : 9 = 300,000 soums a month (the standard does not set an allocation method; it only requires the final value to equal the face value).
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Bonds bought from the bank account | Dt 5810 – Ct 5110 | 47,300,000 | paragraph 244, line 5 |
| Each month, part of the difference accrued | Dt 5810 – Ct 9590 | 300,000 | paragraph 241 |
| On the redemption date, the face value received in money | Dt 5110 – Ct 5810 | 50,000,000 | paragraph 241 |
Balance of 5810 after 9 months: 47,300,000 + 300,000 × 9 = 50,000,000 soums, so after the redemption entry the account falls to zero.
How much this bond "earns": 2,700,000 : 47,300,000 ≈ 5.71% for nine months; annualised, roughly 5.71% × 12 : 9 ≈ 7.61% (simple calculation, without coupon payments). If the bond also pays a coupon, that is separate interest income.
The reverse case: if a bond is bought above face value, the excess is written off until redemption from the credit of 5810 to 9690 "Other expenses on financial activities" (paragraph 241).
See also: Bond · Face value · Short-term investments
FinanceWe have spare money in our bank account. A partner company is asking to borrow it for 6 months at interest. As the lender, which accounts do we use?
A loan granted to another organisation for up to 12 months is a short-term investment and is kept in account 5830 "Short-term loans granted" (NAS No. 21, paragraphs 240 and 242). If the term is longer than 12 months, the loan is accounted for within long-term investments (0600) (paragraph 53). The loan amount and the interest are not mixed: interest goes through 4830 "Interest receivable" and 9530 "Interest income".
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Yangiyer qurilish" LLC lent a partner 60,000,000 soums. The agreement says: 6 months, simple interest of 18% a year, interest and loan repaid at the end of the term. Monthly interest: 60,000,000 × 18% : 12 = 900,000 soums; for 6 months, 5,400,000 soums.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Loan granted from the bank account | Dt 5830 – Ct 5110 | 60,000,000 | paragraph 242 |
| Interest accrued each month | Dt 4830 – Ct 9530 | 900,000 | paragraph 216, line 5 "a" |
| Interest received at the end of the term | Dt 5110 – Ct 4830 | 5,400,000 | paragraph 216, line 6 |
| Loan repaid | Dt 5110 – Ct 5830 | 60,000,000 | paragraph 226, line 7 |
Accruing interest every month shows each month's income correctly: the books do not get a one-off "jump" of 5,400,000 soums in month 6.
Practical tip: unlike a bank deposit, here there is a risk that the partner will not repay. Before lending, review the partner's latest balance sheet and state the term, the interest and the liability for late payment clearly in the agreement. Overdue interest is kept separately in 4830 (paragraph 210), so a delay is visible at once.
See also: Short-term investments · Interest income · Long-term investments
FinanceOur joint-stock company placed additional shares at a price above their face value. Is the money received above face value a profit?
No, it is not a profit. The amount received above face value on the initial sale of shares is additional capital and is recorded on the credit of account 8410 "Share premium" (NAS No. 21, paragraphs 349 and 350). It does not go to the income accounts 9000–9500, which means it does not appear in the statement of financial results; it sits in the equity section of the balance sheet. The shares themselves are recorded in charter capital only at face value (paragraph 346).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Chinor ip" JSC placed 20,000 additional shares with a face value of 10,000 soums each at 12,500 soums each.
| Indicator | Calculation | Amount |
|---|---|---|
| Face value | 20,000 × 10,000 | 200,000,000 |
| Total proceeds | 20,000 × 12,500 | 250,000,000 |
| Share premium | 20,000 × 2,500 | 50,000,000 |
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Shares at face value to charter capital | Dt 4610 – Ct 8310 | 200,000,000 | paragraph 345; paragraph 198, line 1 |
| Face value portion received in money | Dt 5110 – Ct 4610 | 200,000,000 | paragraph 226, line 11 |
| Portion above face value received | Dt 5110 – Ct 8410 | 50,000,000 | paragraph 226, line 12; paragraph 352, line 1 |
Costs related to issuing and placing the shares are not deducted from 8410: they are recorded separately on the debit of 9630 "Expenses for issuing and placing securities" (paragraph 425).
Why this matters: if the 50,000,000 soums is mistakenly recorded as income, the year's profit is artificially inflated, and the profit the founders think "exists" turns out to be money they contributed themselves.
See also: Share premium · Ordinary share · Expenses for issuing and placing securities
FinanceTwo of us set up an LLC: one contributed his share in money, the other with his own machine. How do we show this in the accounts?
First, charter capital is recorded at the amount in the founding document and sits in 4610 as the founders' debt. Then that debt is closed in whatever form each founder contributes his share (NAS No. 21, paragraphs 197 and 347). If a fixed asset is contributed instead of money, 4610 is credited in correspondence with the account for fixed assets (paragraph 197). About property contributed in kind for shares, paragraph 197 says it "is recorded at the value determined on the basis of the founders' agreement"; in an LLC, however, charter capital is made up of the shares set in the founding documents (paragraph 347), so the value of the machine must match the share amount in the founding document. Analytical accounting for 4610 is kept separately for each founder (paragraph 197).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The charter capital of "Oltinsoy mebel" LLC is 300,000,000 soums. Akmal contributes 180,000,000 soums in money, and Bobur hands over a wood-cutting machine that the founders valued at 120,000,000 soums. Shares: 180 : 300 = 60% and 120 : 300 = 40%.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Charter capital after registration (with analytics for each founder) | Dt 4610 – Ct 8330 | 300,000,000 | paragraph 348, line 1 |
| Akmal's share received in the bank | Dt 5110 – Ct 4610 | 180,000,000 | paragraph 198, line 6 |
| Bobur's machine recorded as a fixed asset | Dt 0130 – Ct 4610 | 120,000,000 | paragraph 198, line 2 |
After that, no balance remains in 4610: both founders have contributed their shares in full. If part of a share has not yet been contributed, that amount stays in 4610 as that founder's debt and is visible on the balance sheet.
Practical tip: make sure the value of the machine agreed by the founders in the handover certificate fully matches the amount in the founding document. Later, the machine's depreciation will be calculated from this initial cost of 120,000,000 soums.
See also: Charter capital · Units and shares · Contribution to increase the charter capital
FinanceThe LLC itself bought out the share of a withdrawing participant and later sold it to a new partner at a higher price. How are these transactions recorded?
Under paragraph 361 of NAS No. 21, limited liability companies record a share in charter capital bought for transfer to other participants or to a third party in the accounts of group 8600 "Treasury shares (repurchased own shares)". Under paragraph 360, 8600 is a contra-liability account to the 8300 accounts that record charter capital (the part of the paragraph about deduction on the balance sheet is written about joint-stock companies). The debt to the withdrawing participant is kept in account 6620 "Payables to withdrawing founders for their shares" (paragraph 283). On resale, the difference above the buy-back price is recorded in 9590 "Other income from financial activities"; if it is sold at a lower price, the difference is recorded in 9690: the table in paragraph 362 gives this for "own shares (units)" (lines 2 and 3).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Sarbon logistika" LLC bought out a withdrawing participant's share for 40,000,000 soums and three months later sold it to a new partner for 46,000,000 soums. Difference: 46,000,000 − 40,000,000 = 6,000,000 soums.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Debt to the withdrawing participant recorded (share bought out) | Dt 8610 – Ct 6620 | 40,000,000 | paragraph 362, line 1; paragraph 285, line 4 |
| Money paid to the participant | Dt 6620 – Ct 5110 | 40,000,000 | paragraph 285, line 5 |
| Buy-back cost received from the new partner | Dt 5110 – Ct 8610 | 40,000,000 | paragraph 362, line 2 |
| Difference above the buy-back cost | Dt 5110 – Ct 9590 | 6,000,000 | paragraph 362, line 2 |
For the three months the share is held by the company, 8610 carries a debit balance of 40,000,000 soums. Because this is a contra-liability balance, equity appears smaller by that amount. Set in the accounting policy on which line of the LLC's balance sheet to show it.
Note: the procedure and deadlines for buying out a share, distributing it or selling it are set by the charter and the law. This answer covers only the accounting entries.
See also: Treasury (repurchased own) shares · Units and shares · Charter capital
InsuranceFour of our vehicles are insured under one policy: three deliver goods to customers and one is driven by the director. The policy shows only the total premium. How do we split the expense?
Even with one policy, the expense is split according to the work each vehicle is used for. Costs related to delivering products to the consumer are recorded in 9410 "Selling expenses" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 407), and management costs in 9420 "Administrative expenses" (paragraph 409). The insurance expense is transferred to the expense accounts through 6510 (paragraph 280, line 2). If the policy did not split the premium by vehicle, you set the allocation base in the accounting policy. The clearest base is the sum insured of each vehicle.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Ko'kcha savdo" LLC bought a policy with an annual premium of 18,000,000 soums. Sums insured: delivery vehicles 120, 120 and 160 mln soums (400 mln in total), the director's car 200 mln soums. 600 mln soums in all.
| Group | Calculation | Annual | Monthly |
|---|---|---|---|
| Delivery (9410) | 18,000,000 × 400 : 600 | 12,000,000 | 1,000,000 |
| Director's car (9420) | 18,000,000 × 200 : 600 | 6,000,000 | 500,000 |
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Policy took effect, annual premium as a prepaid expense | Dt 3190 – Ct 6510 | 18,000,000 | paragraph 161, line 6 |
| Premium paid | Dt 6510 – Ct 5110 | 18,000,000 | paragraph 280, line 3 |
| Delivery portion each month | Dt 9410 – Ct 3190 | 1,000,000 | paragraph 161, line 7 |
| Director's car portion each month | Dt 9420 – Ct 3190 | 500,000 | paragraph 161, line 7 |
If a vehicle is sold or its purpose changes during the year, recalculate the allocation for the remaining months. If there is a vehicle that carries loads inside a workshop, its share goes to general production overhead, i.e. to 2510 (paragraph 130, line 11).
See also: Insurance premium · Selling expenses · Administrative expenses
InsuranceWe took out a voluntary health insurance policy for all our employees, and the premium is paid monthly. Is this whole expense recorded in one account?
No: wherever an employee works, that is the expense account his insurance goes to. Under paragraph 276 of NAS No. 21, debts for insuring employees, including health insurance, are kept in the accounts of group 6500, in 6510 "Insurance payments". Accrued insurance payments are transferred to expense accounts (paragraph 280, line 2).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Bekobod tikuv" LLC has 40 employees; under the policy the annual premium per employee is 1,500,000 soums, 60,000,000 soums in total, paid at 5,000,000 soums a month.
| Unit | Employees | Annual | Monthly | Account and basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Sewing workshop workers | 24 | 36,000,000 | 3,000,000 | 2010 (paragraph 120, line 15) |
| Workshop head and foremen | 4 | 6,000,000 | 500,000 | 2510 (paragraph 130, line 11) |
| Management staff | 8 | 12,000,000 | 1,000,000 | 9420 (paragraph 409) |
| Sales department | 4 | 6,000,000 | 500,000 | 9410 (paragraph 407) |
| Total | 40 | 60,000,000 | 5,000,000 |
Each month: Dt 2010, 2510, 9420, 9410 – Ct 6510, 5,000,000 soums in total. Payment: Dt 6510 – Ct 5110 (paragraph 280, line 3).
Why split it: the workers' insurance of 3,000,000 soums goes into the cost of the sewn products, while the management and sales portions are period expenses and hit the financial result in the same month. If you record everything in 9420, cost will look too low and administrative expenses too high.
Analytical accounting for 6510 is kept for each insurer and each contract (paragraph 279). The tax consequences of such insurance (deductibility of the expense, the employee's income) are checked separately under the Tax Code and are not considered here.
See also: Insurance payments (company's payable) · Production overheads · Period expenses
InsuranceWe insured our office building for three years in one go and paid the premium in full. Does all of it sit in 3190, as with a one-year policy?
For a one-year policy, 3190 "Other prepaid expenses" is correct: advance payment for annual property insurance is shown in group 3100 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 156). But group 3100 is named "Prepaid expenses – current portion", and it collects expenses relating to future periods for the current portion (paragraph 155). So the part relating to the period after 12 months cannot be shown as a current asset.
For the long-term part, the standard has no separate line relating to insurance. Paragraph 83 says that 0990 "Other long-term deferred expenses" is for deferred expenses not shown in other accounts, and paragraph 165 says that 3290 "Other deferred expenses" is for expenses whose recording in 3100 is not provided for. So set in the accounting policy which account to keep the long-term part of a multi-year policy in and how to transfer it to the current portion.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Navro'z konsalt" LLC bought a 36-month policy from 1 January; the premium is 36,000,000 soums, i.e. 36,000,000 : 36 = 1,000,000 soums a month. The first 12 months account for 12,000,000 soums, and the remaining 24 months for 24,000,000 soums.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Part relating to the first 12 months | Dt 3190 – Ct 6510 | 12,000,000 | paragraph 156 "b"; paragraph 161, line 6 |
| Part relating to the remaining 24 months | set in the accounting policy | 24,000,000 | the standard's tables have no line for this case |
| Premium paid | Dt 6510 – Ct 5110 | 36,000,000 | paragraph 280, line 3 |
| To expenses each month | Dt 9420 – Ct 3190 | 1,000,000 | paragraph 161, line 7 |
At the end of year 1, out of the long-term part of 24,000,000 soums, the 12,000,000 soums relating to the next 12 months moves to the current portion, and the remaining 12,000,000 soums stays long-term. If you leave everything in 3190, at the start of year 1 current assets will be overstated by 24,000,000 soums, and the current ratio will make the company look better than it really is.
See also: Prepaid expenses (deferred expenses) · Deferred expenses · Insurance policy
InsuranceWe sold our office building and cancelled its one-year insurance policy early. The insurer returns part of the premium for the remaining months. What do we do in the accounts?
On the cancellation date, 3190 holds the premium for the unused months. It is split into two parts: the amount the insurer returns becomes a receivable, and the part retained under the contract goes to expenses. How the refund is calculated is written in the insurance contract and rules, so read that clause first.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Ohangaron servis" LLC bought a one-year policy for 24,000,000 soums on 1 January and paid the premium. The policy was cancelled on 1 May. Under the contract, 20 percent of the unused part is retained for the insurer's costs (hypothetical condition).
| Indicator | Calculation | Amount |
|---|---|---|
| Expensed over 4 months | 24,000,000 × 4 : 12 | 8,000,000 |
| Unused 8 months (balance of 3190) | 24,000,000 × 8 : 12 | 16,000,000 |
| Retained part | 16,000,000 × 20% | 3,200,000 |
| Refund amount | 16,000,000 − 3,200,000 | 12,800,000 |
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| January–April, each month | Dt 9420 – Ct 3190 | 2,000,000 | paragraph 161, line 7 |
| Retained part to expenses | set in the accounting policy | 3,200,000 | the standard's tables have no line for this case |
| Amount refundable by the insurer | set in the accounting policy | 12,800,000 | the standard's tables have no line for this case |
| Money received back | set in the accounting policy | 12,800,000 | the standard's tables have no line for this case |
NAS No. 21 gives no separate entry for cancelling a policy. Under paragraph 215, account 4890 "Other receivables" records current settlements not shown in the accounts above; set in the accounting policy whether to keep the amount refundable by the insurer in this account and which expense account the retained part goes to. Whichever route is chosen, after cancellation no balance for this policy should remain in 3190.
Conclusion: four months of insurance on the building cost the company 8,000,000 + 3,200,000 = 11,200,000 soums. If the sale of the building is known in advance, take the cancellation terms into account before renewing the policy for a new term.
See also: Insurance policy · Prepaid expenses (deferred expenses) · Accounts receivable
InsuranceOur cafe is insured against fire. Now the agent is offering to insure "liability to third parties" as well. Aren't these the same thing?
No, they protect different things.
| Property insurance | Civil liability insurance | |
|---|---|---|
| What is insured | The cafe's own property: building, kitchen equipment, furniture, stock | The obligation to compensate for damage the cafe causes to others |
| Who receives the compensation | The cafe itself | The injured third party (or the cafe that compensated that party's loss, depending on the contract) |
| Which risk it covers | Damage to the cafe's own property | Damage to a customer, a neighbour or a passer-by |
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). A pipe burst in the kitchen of the "Sitora" cafe, and water flooded the shop on the floor below. The cafe's own kitchen equipment suffered damage of 5,000,000 soums, and the neighbouring shop's goods 7,000,000 soums. If there is only property insurance, under the policy terms the cafe may recover its own 5,000,000-soum loss, but it will pay the neighbour 7,000,000 soums out of its own pocket. If there is also a liability policy, the neighbour's loss is covered within the limit of that policy.
In the accounts both policies are handled in the same way. Paragraph 276 of NAS No. 21 says that both property insurance and civil liability insurance for damage caused to the property interests of third parties are recorded in the accounts of group 6500. The premium is recorded on the credit of 6510, and the expense on the debit of the relevant expense account depending on which activity the insured object serves (paragraph 280, line 2). Analytics for 6510 are kept separately for each contract (paragraph 279), so do not combine the two policies in one line.
Before deciding, ask yourself: "What is the largest loss that could be caused to others through our fault?" If that amount is larger than your monthly profit, give liability insurance serious consideration.
See also: Liability insurance · Insured event · Sum insured
BankingWe repay a loan in equal monthly amounts (an annuity). The bank statement shows a single payment. How do we split it into interest and principal in the accounts?
An annuity payment contains two different things: the interest accrued for the month and the repaid part of the principal. They are recorded in different accounts. Interest is an expense and goes to 9610 "Interest expenses" through 6920 "Accrued interest" (NAS No. 21, paragraphs 299 and 423). The principal part is not an expense; it only reduces the liability in 6810.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Zarbdor non" LLC borrowed 12,000,000 soums for 12 months at 2% a month (24% a year : 12). Annuity payment: 12,000,000 × 0.02 : (1 − 1.02^−12) ≈ 1,134,715 soums.
| Month | Debt balance at start | Interest (balance × 2%) | Principal (payment − interest) | Balance at end |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 12,000,000 | 240,000 | 894,715 | 11,105,285 |
| 2 | 11,105,285 | 222,106 | 912,609 | 10,192,676 |
Entries for the first month:
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Interest for the month accrued | Dt 9610 – Ct 6920 | 240,000 | paragraph 427, line 1 |
| Interest paid | Dt 6920 – Ct 5110 | 240,000 | paragraph 226, line 24 |
| Part of the principal repaid | Dt 6810 – Ct 5110 | 894,715 | paragraph 226, line 22 |
Note: each month the interest falls and the principal part grows, so recalculate the split every month from the balance or get the payment schedule from the bank. If you expense the whole 1,134,715 soums, over 12 months expenses will be overstated by the amount of the principal, i.e. by 12,000,000 soums, and 6810 will stay open.
See also: Annuity repayment · Accrued interest · Short-term bank loan
BankingWe paid a loan instalment 12 days late, and the bank charged penalty interest (penya) under the agreement. Is this penya also recorded in 9610, like loan interest?
No. 9610 is only for interest expenses (NAS No. 21, paragraph 423). Penya, on the other hand, is liability for breaching a contractual obligation: under paragraph 410, fines and penalty interest are recorded in 9430 "Other operating expenses". The debt for recognised penya is kept in 6960 "Claims payable" (paragraph 303).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Mirishkor agro" LLC paid a monthly instalment of 30,000,000 soums 12 days late. The loan agreement sets penalty interest of 0.1 percent of the overdue amount per day (hypothetical condition). Penalty interest: 30,000,000 × 0.1% × 12 = 360,000 soums.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Recognised penalty interest accrued | Dt 9430 – Ct 6960 | 360,000 | paragraph 412, line 21; paragraph 309, line 14 |
| Penalty interest paid from the bank account | set in the accounting policy | 360,000 | the standard's tables have no line for this case |
Why the distinction matters: in the statement of financial results, loan interest appears as an expense of financial activities, while penalty interest appears as an operating expense. If you mix them up, the true cost of the loan looks distorted.
Practical calculation: 360,000 soums relates to 12 days. If finding those 30,000,000 soums for a few days through an overdraft or another source is cheaper, that route is better than paying penya. If you can see in advance that there will not be enough money for the payment, agreeing a new date with the bank beforehand is the simplest way to avoid penya.
See also: Late payment interest (penalty interest) · Other operating expenses · Interest expense
BankingCustomers in our shop pay by bank card. The bank transfers the takings the next day after withholding its fee. How is this recorded?
Money paid through the terminal does not reach the bank account immediately: for a day it is "in transit". Under paragraph 238 of NAS No. 21, cash that has left its place of storage but not yet reached its destination, including money transfers, is recorded in 5710 "Cash (transfers) in transit". The bank's fee is a payment for a banking service and is recorded in 9430 "Other operating expenses" (paragraph 410).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). In one day the "Bodomgul" shop sold goods worth 25,000,000 soums paid by card (VAT is not shown for simplicity). Under the agreement with the bank, the fee is 1.2 percent of the takings (hypothetical condition): 25,000,000 × 1.2% = 300,000 soums. The bank account receives 24,700,000 soums.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Goods sold | Dt 4010 – Ct 9020 | 25,000,000 | paragraph 383, line 1 |
| Card payment transfer in transit | Dt 5710 – Ct 4010 | 25,000,000 | paragraph 239, line 2 |
| Bank fee | Dt 9430 – Ct 6990 | 300,000 | paragraph 412, line 12 |
| Fee withheld from the transfer | set in the accounting policy | 300,000 | the standard's tables have no line for this case |
| Money received in the bank account | Dt 5110 – Ct 5710 | 24,700,000 | paragraph 239, line 7 |
Set in the accounting policy how to close the debt in 6990 and the 300,000-soum balance in 5710 when the fee is withheld. After that, 5710 closes to zero, and income stays at the full 25,000,000 soums. Deducting the fee from the takings and recording 24,700,000 soums in 9020 is a mistake: income is reduced and the bank expense becomes invisible.
For control: at the end of the month, the balance of 5710 should equal only the takings of the last day(s) that have not yet arrived. A larger balance means there is an amount the bank has not transferred or that was recorded incorrectly. In this example, with 25 trading days a month, the fee comes to 7,500,000 soums a month: look at this figure when comparing bank tariffs.
See also: Cash in transit · Bank card · Other operating expenses
BankingWe took a bank loan in dollars. At the end of the month the exchange rate changed, but we have not paid anything yet. Do we need to revalue the loan?
Yes. Loans and borrowings in foreign currency are a monetary item (NAS No. 22, paragraph 9), and monetary items are revalued every month at the Central Bank rate on the last date of the reporting month and on the transaction date (paragraph 8). The exchange difference is recognised as income or expense of financial activities (paragraph 11). Under NAS No. 21, a negative difference is recorded in 9620 "Foreign exchange losses" (paragraph 427, line 3), and a positive difference in 9540 "Foreign exchange gains" (paragraph 421, line 4).
Example (prepared by the author; the rates are hypothetical, not the actual rate). "Samarqand charm" LLC took a loan of 20,000 US dollars.
| Date | Rate (hypothetical) | 6810 in soums | Exchange difference | Journal entry | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Loan received | 12,500 | 250,000,000 | — | Dt 5210 – Ct 6810 | paragraph 296, line 1 |
| End of month 1 | 12,650 | 253,000,000 | loss 3,000,000 | Dt 9620 – Ct 6810 | paragraph 427, line 3 |
| End of month 2 | 12,600 | 252,000,000 | gain 1,000,000 | Dt 6810 – Ct 9540 | paragraph 421, line 4 |
Calculation: 20,000 × (12,650 − 12,500) = 3,000,000 soums; 20,000 × (12,650 − 12,600) = 1,000,000 soums.
An important detail: if the loan dollars are still in the 5210 foreign currency account, that is also a monetary item and is revalued at the same rate. At the end of month 1, 5210 shows a positive difference of 3,000,000 soums, which offsets the 3,000,000-soum loss on the loan. Once the dollars have been converted into soums and spent, however, this "natural hedge" disappears, and a rise in the rate becomes a direct loss.
So before taking a foreign currency loan, work out how much of your income comes in that currency: if you have no export proceeds, the currency risk stays entirely with you.
See also: Exchange difference · Monetary items · Foreign currency account
BankingThe bank quoted loan interest of 20%, but when issuing the loan it withholds 2 percent of the amount as a one-off fee. What percentage does the loan actually cost us?
The fee is added to the cost of the loan, so the real cost is higher than the quoted rate. In the accounts, however, interest and the fee are kept separately.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Farg'ona plast" LLC took a loan of 100,000,000 soums for 12 months. Interest is 20% a year, paid monthly; the principal is repaid in one go at the end of the term. One-off fee: 100,000,000 × 2% = 2,000,000 soums.
| Indicator | Calculation | Amount |
|---|---|---|
| Annual interest | 100,000,000 × 20% | 20,000,000 |
| Fee | 100,000,000 × 2% | 2,000,000 |
| Total cost of the loan | 20,000,000 + 2,000,000 | 22,000,000 |
| Money actually received | 100,000,000 − 2,000,000 | 98,000,000 |
| Approximate real cost | 22,000,000 : 98,000,000 | ≈ 22.4% a year |
(Approximate calculation: the monthly payment of interest is not taken into account.) If another bank offers 21% with no fee, that costs 21,000,000 soums, i.e. less than the offer above, even though its quoted rate is higher.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Loan received in the bank account (after the fee was withheld) | Dt 5110 – Ct 6810 | 98,000,000 | paragraph 296, line 1 |
| One-off loan fee | set in the accounting policy (one of the two routes below) | 2,000,000 | see below |
| Monthly interest | Dt 9610 – Ct 6920 | 1,666,667 | paragraph 427, line 1 |
Monthly interest: 20,000,000 : 12 ≈ 1,666,667 soums. The debt to be repaid is 100,000,000 soums, so the debt in 6810 must be at that amount: besides the 98,000,000 soums received in the bank account, the 2,000,000 soums withheld is also added to the loan debt.
As to where to record the fee, the standards give grounds for two approaches:
| Route | Entry | Basis |
|---|---|---|
| a) As a payment for a banking service | Dt 9430 – Ct 6990 | NAS No. 21, paragraph 410; paragraph 412, line 12 ("Payments for bank and audit services") |
| b) As a borrowing cost | expenses of financial activities (group 9600); set the specific account in the accounting policy | NAS No. 24, paragraph 3 ("interest and other costs" incurred in connection with borrowing) and paragraph 9 (expenses of financial activities) |
Choose one in the accounting policy and apply it consistently to all loans. Because the fee is withheld from the loan amount rather than paid in money, also state clearly in the accounting policy how its credit side reaches 6810.
Tip: when comparing loan offers, ask the bank in writing for a list of all payments (interest, fees, compulsory services) and reduce them, as above, to a single "real cost" figure.
See also: Credit (bank loan) · Interest expense · Other operating expenses
StatisticsOur shop has 10 product groups, and all of them get the same time and attention. How do I sort out which ones bring in the main revenue?
ABC analysis (ranking based on the Pareto principle) is handy for this. The steps are simple:
- Write down the revenue of each product group for the period.
- Sort them from largest to smallest.
- Calculate each group's share of total revenue and the running (cumulative) share.
- Split the groups into three classes by cumulative share.
Boundaries often used in practice: class A — up to roughly 80 percent of the cumulative share, B — the next roughly 15 percent, C — the rest. This is not a strict rule; the business chooses the boundaries itself.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). Annual revenue of the "Nurafshon Household Goods" shop, mln soum:
| Product group | Revenue | Share | Cumulative share | Class |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Washing powder | 48 | 34.3% | 34.3% | A |
| Dishwashing liquid | 30 | 21.4% | 55.7% | A |
| Toilet and tissue paper | 22 | 15.7% | 71.4% | A |
| Soap | 12 | 8.6% | 80.0% | A |
| Shampoo | 10 | 7.1% | 87.1% | B |
| Brooms | 6 | 4.3% | 91.4% | B |
| Buckets | 5 | 3.6% | 95.0% | B |
| Sponges | 4 | 2.9% | 97.9% | C |
| Gloves | 2 | 1.4% | 99.3% | C |
| Candles | 1 | 0.7% | 100.0% | C |
| Total | 140 | 100% |
Result: 4 groups out of 10 (40 percent of the range) bring in 80 percent of revenue. So class A goods must never run out, should stand in a prominent place on the shelves, and their prices should be monitored every week. For class C, stock can be reduced and orders placed less often.
Tip: run ABC analysis not only by revenue but also by gross profit. A product with large revenue but a small markup may fall into class B or C by profit — putting both tables side by side shows more precisely which product needs more attention.
See also: Weighted average · Gross profit · Mode
StatisticsAt our bakery the average selling price of one loaf went up from 5,200 to 7,500 soum. But we only raised the price of patir. Where did the rest of the increase come from?
The average price changes for two reasons: the price of each product changed, and the sales mix (how much of which product was sold) changed. In statistics these are separated with three indices:
- variable-composition index — current average price : base average price;
- fixed-composition index — revenue at current prices and current quantities : revenue at base prices and current quantities (pure price effect);
- structural shift index — average price at base prices and current mix : base average price (pure mix effect).
The first equals the product of the other two.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Tandirchi" bakery sells 1,000 loaves a day.
| Bread type | Last month: price | Last month: units | This month: price | This month: units |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Ordinary bread | 4,000 | 800 | 4,000 | 500 |
| Patir | 10,000 | 200 | 11,000 | 500 |
Calculation:
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Last month's average price | (4,000 × 800 + 10,000 × 200) : 1,000 | 5,200 soum |
| This month's average price | (4,000 × 500 + 11,000 × 500) : 1,000 | 7,500 soum |
| This month's mix at last month's prices | (4,000 × 500 + 10,000 × 500) : 1,000 | 7,000 soum |
| Variable-composition index | 7,500 : 5,200 | 1.442 (+44.2%) |
| Fixed-composition index (price effect) | 7,500 : 7,000 | 1.071 (+7.1%) |
| Structural shift index | 7,000 : 5,200 | 1.346 (+34.6%) |
Check: 1.071 × 1.346 = 1.442.
Conclusion: the price rise lifted the average price by only 7.1 percent; the main growth (34.6 percent) came from customers buying more of the more expensive patir. This is an important distinction: if next month customers go back to ordinary bread, the average price will drop sharply even though prices have not changed, and this could be wrongly read as "prices fell".
Tip: when the "average receipt" or "average price" in the till report changes, check the mix as well before drawing conclusions — otherwise a wrong pricing decision will be made.
See also: Index · Weighted average · Consumer price index
StatisticsCan we show with a single number how unevenly salaries are distributed in our firm? Is comparing "how many times more the top earner gets than the lowest earner" enough?
Comparing the largest and smallest salary looks at only two people and ignores those in between. Two methods are commonly used to show the whole distribution.
- Funds ratio: total salary of the highest-paid group of employees : total salary of an equally sized lowest-paid group. In statistical practice it is often calculated by 10-percent groups (deciles). In a small team a 10-percent group comes down to one person and the ratio turns into a simple "highest : lowest" ratio, so here 20-percent groups (quintiles) are taken — this is called the quintile funds ratio.
- The Lorenz curve and the Gini coefficient. Employees are split into equal groups in ascending order of salary, then the "cumulative share of employees" is compared with the "cumulative share of the payroll fund". The Gini coefficient ranges from 0 to 1: 0 — everyone earns the same; the closer to 1, the stronger the inequality. Formula for grouped data: G = 1 − Σ (Xₖ − Xₖ₋₁) × (Yₖ + Yₖ₋₁), where X is the cumulative share of employees and Y the cumulative share of salary.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Yashil Vodiy" workshop has 10 employees with monthly salaries (mln soum): 3, 3, 4, 4, 5, 5, 6, 6, 8, 16. The total fund is 60 mln soum. Each group has 2 people (20 percent):
| Group | Total salary | Share of fund | Cumulative share of employees (X) | Cumulative share of fund (Y) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Group 1 (lowest) | 6 | 10.0% | 20% | 10.0% |
| Group 2 | 8 | 13.3% | 40% | 23.3% |
| Group 3 | 10 | 16.7% | 60% | 40.0% |
| Group 4 | 12 | 20.0% | 80% | 60.0% |
| Group 5 (highest) | 24 | 40.0% | 100% | 100.0% |
Quintile funds ratio: 24 : 6 = 4. The ratio of the highest to the lowest salary, by contrast, is 16 : 3 ≈ 5.3 — it exaggerates the influence of a single employee (16 mln).
Gini coefficient: G = 1 − 0.2 × [(0.100 + 0) + (0.233 + 0.100) + (0.400 + 0.233) + (0.600 + 0.400) + (1.000 + 0.600)] = 1 − 0.2 × 3.667 ≈ 0.267. If each employee is taken separately, the exact value comes out at 0.28: grouping hides differences within groups and therefore lowers the coefficient slightly.
Practical benefit: if you calculate the coefficient the same way every year, you will clearly see whether changes in the pay system (such as a new bonus scheme) increased or reduced inequality. Be careful when comparing one firm's coefficient with another firm's or a country's figure: if the number of employees and the grouping method differ, the comparison will not be valid.
See also: Wages (salary) · Quartile · Coefficient of variation
StatisticsOut of 200 randomly selected customers, 120 were satisfied with the service, i.e. 60%. How accurate is this figure, and how many people should we ask for a more reliable result?
A share obtained from a sample is always an estimate. Its accuracy can be shown by the margin of error. A simple formula for a confidence level of about 95 percent:
margin of error ≈ 1.96 × √(p × (1 − p) : n),
where p is the share in the sample and n is the sample size. This formula works only if the sample is truly random, and it gives a good result when the sample is small relative to the whole population.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Hilol Optika" has 2,000 customers in its database; of 200 randomly selected people, 120 are satisfied.
| Step | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Share in the sample | 120 : 200 | 0.60 |
| Standard error | √(0.60 × 0.40 : 200) | 0.0346 |
| Margin of error | 1.96 × 0.0346 | ±0.068 (±6.8 percentage points) |
| Confidence interval | 60% − 6.8 … 60% + 6.8 | 53.2% … 66.8% |
So rather than saying "60 percent are satisfied", it is more honest to say "roughly 53 to 67 percent". If next quarter's survey shows 63 percent, that increase is within the margin of error — it is too early to announce it as an "improvement".
Required sample size. If you want the error not to exceed ±5 percentage points, for the most cautious case (p = 0.5): n = 1.96² × 0.5 × 0.5 : 0.05² ≈ 384.2, i.e. 385 people. Since the population is only 2,000 people, the finite population correction is applied: n = 384.16 : (1 + 383.16 : 2,000) ≈ 322.4, i.e. 323 people when rounded up.
Bear in mind: enlarging the sample only reduces random error. If the survey is carried out only among customers who came into the shop themselves, or is sent only to regular customers, the result is skewed to one side, and no formula will correct that.
See also: Sample · Confidence interval · Normal distribution
StatisticsOur October revenue came out 8% lower than last October, and the manager got worried. But the year as a whole seems to be going well. Which indicator should we look at?
Comparing one month with the same month of last year removes seasonality, but it is very sensitive to random factors (holidays, weather, days closed for repairs). So alongside it you should compare cumulative revenue since the start of the year with the same period of last year. The third useful indicator is the series of growth rates of each month against the same month of last year: it shows in advance that growth is slowing.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). Monthly revenue of the "Bahor" cafe, mln soum:
| Month | Last year | This year | Versus the same month last year |
|---|---|---|---|
| January | 80 | 95 | +18.8% |
| February | 78 | 92 | +17.9% |
| March | 90 | 104 | +15.6% |
| April | 95 | 108 | +13.7% |
| May | 100 | 112 | +12.0% |
| June | 105 | 118 | +12.4% |
| July | 110 | 120 | +9.1% |
| August | 102 | 110 | +7.8% |
| September | 90 | 94 | +4.4% |
| October | 100 | 92 | −8.0% |
| January–October total | 950 | 1,045 | +10.0% |
Three conclusions follow:
- Since the start of the year the cafe has earned 10 percent more revenue than last year — the overall picture is not bad.
- The October drop is no accident: the growth rate has been falling every month since July (9.1 → 7.8 → 4.4 → −8.0). In other words, the problem did not arise in one month but built up over several months.
- Looking only at the cumulative indicator, this slowdown would have gone unnoticed; looking only at October, the alarm would have been exaggerated.
Tip: include all three indicators — the current month, year to date and the series of growth rates — in one table in the monthly report. If the slowdown continues for 2–3 months in a row, that is exactly the point from which to start looking for the cause.
See also: Time series · Index · Arithmetic mean
EconomicsWe bought a special mould for a new cake for 12 mln soum, but the cake is selling poorly. Since so much money went into the mould, should we keep making the cake?
No, the money paid for the mould should not affect this decision. In economics such a cost is called a "sunk cost": it has already been incurred and will not come back whichever path you choose. The decision is made only by comparing future revenues and costs.
People often think: "we spent so much money, if we stop now it will be a waste". This thinking leads to mistakes: the money is gone anyway, and now you can only choose the most profitable of the remaining options.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Shirin Lahza" cake workshop bakes a limited number of cakes a month in one oven. The oven's free time can be given to one of two cakes:
| Indicator | New cake (in the special mould) | Ordinary cake |
|---|---|---|
| Monthly sales | 40 units | 70 units |
| Price | 60,000 soum | 50,000 soum |
| Raw materials and wages per unit | 45,000 soum | 30,000 soum |
| Amount left per unit | 15,000 soum | 20,000 soum |
| Amount left per month | 600,000 soum | 1,400,000 soum |
The ordinary cake brings in 800,000 soum more every month. The 12 mln soum spent on the mould is not in the table, because in both cases it has already been paid.
What affects the decision is the mould's future benefit. If it can be sold to another workshop, the proceeds from the sale are a real opportunity: they are taken into account in the decision. Or you can keep using the mould by baking the new cake only to order, for holidays.
In the accounts, however, the mould still stays on the books as an asset and its cost is transferred to expenses in the appropriate manner — that is an accounting matter, while the management decision is made only on the basis of future cash flows.
See also: Opportunity cost · Cost (cost of production) · Period expenses
EconomicsOur gym stands empty during the day. Would it pay to set a cheap price for students for daytime hours only, or is it better to lower the price for everyone?
Selling the same service to different groups of buyers at different prices is called price discrimination (price differentiation) in economics. Cheaper morning showings at cinemas are an everyday example of this idea. For this the seller must be able to set the price itself (have some advantage in the market). After that, it pays off when three conditions are met:
- The groups must differ in price sensitivity: a student has little money and comes more often if the price falls; a working person looks at a convenient time rather than the price.
- It must be possible to separate the groups: a student card and a daytime restriction.
- It must be impossible to resell the cheap service: a daytime pass cannot be used in the evening.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Kuch" gym sells one daytime visit for 50,000 soum and has 20 visits a day. The cost of one extra visit (water, towel laundry, electricity) is 5,000 soum. At a price of 30,000 soum, an extra 30 students will come, and the existing 20 customers will come anyway.
| Option | Calculation | Amount left per day |
|---|---|---|
| 50,000 for everyone | 20 × (50,000 − 5,000) | 900,000 soum |
| 30,000 for everyone | 50 × (30,000 − 5,000) | 1,250,000 soum |
| Two prices: 50,000 and 30,000 for students | 20 × 45,000 + 30 × 25,000 | 1,650,000 soum |
The two-price option is the most profitable: the gym does not lose income from existing customers and fills empty places with students. Lowering the price for everyone means giving the existing 20 customers an unnecessary discount: 20 × 20,000 = 400,000 soum is lost every day.
Risk: if working customers start using the student price by deception (condition 2 is broken), the profit quickly shrinks. So tie the discount to a clear rule — a document and a time window.
See also: Price elasticity of demand · Demand · Competition
EconomicsOur neighbour opened a car wash, dirty water runs onto the pavement in front of our cafe, and we have fewer customers. The more his profit grows, the more our loss grows. What is this called in economics and how is it solved?
This is called an external effect (externality): one business's activity causes harm or benefit to another party, but this is not reflected in the price or in the first business's accounts. Your case is a negative externality: for the car wash the "price" of dirty water is zero, while in reality the cafe is paying for it. There are positive externalities too: a beekeeper's bees next to an orchard increase the orchard's harvest, but the orchard owner does not pay him.
Why does the market not solve this by itself? Because the car wash owner sees only his own costs when making decisions. As a result, the total cost to society is greater than the private cost, and there is "too much" of the harmful activity.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). Because of the dirty water, the "Gulnoz" cafe loses about 1,500,000 soum every month (washing the pavement, fewer customers). Installing a drainage channel at the car wash costs a one-off 4,000,000 soum.
| Option | Total cost over 1 year |
|---|---|
| Nothing is done | 12 × 1,500,000 = 18,000,000 soum (cafe's loss) |
| Drainage is installed | 4,000,000 soum (one-off) |
Drainage is cheaper for both sides: it pays for itself in less than 3 months (4,000,000 : 1,500,000 ≈ 2.7 months). That is why economists propose negotiation first. If the cost is split equally (2,000,000 soum each), the cafe saves 16,000,000 soum a year and the car wash gets rid of the dispute with its neighbour. This idea is known in economics as the Coase theorem: if it is clearly defined who has which right and negotiation is cheap, the parties reach an agreement between themselves and find an efficient solution.
When negotiation is difficult (there are many affected parties or the harm is hard to measure), society relies on rules and legal instruments set by the state. Their specific procedure is set by legislation; only the economic logic is shown here.
Tip: before going into negotiations, write the harm down in figures (extra cleaning costs, comparison of daily revenue with previous months). Numerical evidence turns a negotiation from an emotional argument into a practical agreement.
See also: Market equilibrium · Opportunity cost · Subsidy
EconomicsIn our mahalla we collected voluntary contributions to install street lights, but although everyone wanted them, not even half of the required amount was raised. Why did this happen?
A street light is an example of a public good in economics. It has two features:
- Non-excludable: once the light is on, a neighbour who did not pay also uses the light.
- Non-rival: one person's use does not reduce the light that reaches others.
That is why each family starts thinking: "if others pay, the light will be on even if I don't pay". This is called the "free rider problem". If everyone thinks this way, a project that benefits everyone does not happen.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). There are 40 households on the street. Installing the lights costs 12,000,000 soum. In a survey, each family said it was willing to pay up to 500,000 soum for a lit street.
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Total value of the lights to the mahalla | 40 × 500,000 | 20,000,000 soum |
| Project cost | 12,000,000 soum | |
| Share if split equally | 12,000,000 : 40 | 300,000 soum |
| Net benefit to each family | 500,000 − 300,000 | 200,000 soum |
| Actually collected voluntarily | 15 families × 400,000 | 6,000,000 soum |
The project is clearly beneficial for the mahalla (value 20 mln, cost 12 mln), but voluntary collection raised only 6 mln.
In economics this problem is usually solved in three ways:
- A conditional agreement "it goes ahead only if everyone pays": everyone pledges their share, and the money is used only if a sufficient amount is raised; otherwise it is returned. This removes the worry "if others don't pay, my money will be wasted".
- Taking a joint decision at a meeting, setting an equal share for everyone and keeping the list of those who have paid open.
- Financing through the local or state budget: for this reason many public goods are provided out of taxes.
Tip: before collecting money, announce in writing the exact amount each family pays and what will happen to the money if a sufficient amount is not raised — trust grows and more payments come in.
See also: Subsidy · Market equilibrium · Supply
EconomicsI want to sell a used laptop in very good condition. But buyers offer the same low price for all of them. Why do they ask the price of a faulty item even for a good one?
In economics this is called asymmetric information: the seller knows the condition of the item well, while the buyer does not. Because the buyer cannot tell a good item from a faulty one, they offer the price they would pay for an "average" item. This is explained by economist George Akerlof's famous example of the used car market — the "market for lemons".
In such a market the process develops as follows:
- The buyer offers an average price.
- Owners of good items consider this price too low and leave the market.
- The share of faulty items in the market rises; buyers notice this and lower the price again.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). There are 100 used laptops on the market: 50 working, 50 faulty.
| Value to the buyer | Lowest price the seller will accept | |
|---|---|---|
| Working laptop | 6,000,000 soum | 5,000,000 soum |
| Faulty laptop | 3,000,000 soum | 2,500,000 soum |
If the buyer cannot tell them apart, the price offered is: 0.5 × 6,000,000 + 0.5 × 3,000,000 = 4,500,000 soum. The owner of a working laptop will not sell for less than 5,000,000 soum and leaves the market. Only faulty laptops remain, and now the buyer will give no more than 3,000,000 soum. As a result, the deal in which a working item could have been sold and bought for 5–6 mln soum does not happen at all.
The solution for you is to reduce the information gap, i.e. to prove the item is good:
- get a diagnostic report from an independent repair shop and attach it to the listing;
- show the purchase receipt, warranty card and original box;
- give the buyer time to test it, or promise a short personal guarantee (if a fault appears within a week, you take it back);
- sell on a marketplace with reviews and ratings.
If such a signal gives the buyer confidence, they will start offering not the "average" price but the price of a working item. A one-week guarantee costs you almost nothing (if the item really works), but it can raise the price from 4.5 mln to 5–6 mln soum.
See also: Market equilibrium · Demand · Supply
Import and exportWe are importing a sewing line from abroad. The contract price also includes installation work that the supplier will carry out at our factory. Is the installation amount included in the customs value? And in the cost of the equipment in the accounts?
The answers to these two questions differ.
Customs value. Under Article 305 of the Customs Code, costs of construction, erection, assembly, installation, adjustment of equipment (an industrial plant, a machine), servicing or technical assistance after its import into Uzbekistan, as well as transport costs after the border, are excluded from the transaction price — but only if they are shown separately from the price. Conversely, costs of transport, loading, unloading, reloading and transhipment of the goods up to the place of arrival at the border, as well as the cost of insurance, are added if they are not included in the price (Article 304, Part One, item "a"). The excluded costs are determined on the basis of payment documents (invoices, payment orders, receipts) (Article 305, Part Two).
Accounting. Under paragraph 13 of NAS No. 5, the initial cost of a fixed asset includes the purchase cost and all costs related to the acquisition. Among the costs listed in that paragraph are customs duties and fees, costs of insuring delivery risks, and costs of installing, assembling, adjusting and commissioning the equipment. Conversely, bank services related to paying for the acquisition (bank commission for opening a letter of credit, transferring and converting foreign currency), as well as the costs of preparing and registering the contract, are not included in the initial cost — they are recognised as expenses in the reporting period in which they arise (the same paragraph). So installation is excluded from the customs value but is included in the book cost of the equipment.
Example (compiled by the author; amounts in soum, translated at the Central Bank rate, hypothetical). "Margilan Tekstil" LLC:
| Cost | Amount | In customs value | In initial cost |
|---|---|---|---|
| The equipment itself (separate line in the invoice) | 552,000,000 | included | included |
| Installation (separate line in the invoice, after import) | 48,000,000 | not included (Article 305) | included (paragraph 13) |
| Transport to the border | 36,000,000 | added (Article 304) | included (paragraph 13, cost related to the acquisition) |
| Insurance to the border | 6,000,000 | added (Article 304) | included (paragraph 13) |
| Transport from the border to the factory | 9,600,000 | not included (Article 305) | included (paragraph 13, cost related to the acquisition) |
| Total | 594,000,000 | 651,600,000 + customs duties and fees (and non-recoverable taxes) |
Customs payment rates are not shown here: they depend on the commodity code and other factors. To calculate customs payments, foreign currency is translated at the Central Bank rate on the day the customs declaration is accepted (Article 326), while in the accounts the rate on the date the equipment is accepted for accounting is used (NAS No. 5, paragraph 16; the part paid as an advance — at the rate on the date of the advance). That is why the soum amounts in the two documents may differ.
Journal entries (NAS No. 21, for equipment requiring installation):
| Transaction | Journal entry | Basis |
|---|---|---|
| Equipment received | Debit 0720 — Credit 6010 | paragraph 66, line 1 |
| Equipment handed over for installation | Debit 0810 — Credit 0720 | paragraph 75, line 3 |
| Amount owed for installation work | Debit 0810 — Credit 6010 | paragraph 75, line 8 |
| Equipment put into service | Debit 0130 — Credit 0810 | paragraph 75, line 22 |
Tip: have the amounts for installation, adjustment and transport after the border written on separate lines in the contract and the invoice. If they are "hidden" in the overall price, the condition in Article 305 is not met, and these amounts also remain in the customs value.
See also: Customs value · Equipment for installation · Capital investments · Fixed asset (property, plant and equipment)
Import and exportOne truck brought two different goods: heavy cast-iron cauldrons and light porcelain plates. Transport to the border and insurance are on one invoice. How do we allocate these costs between the goods for customs value?
The last part of Article 304 of the Customs Code sets this out clearly: when a single consignment consisting of goods of different names is delivered, costs incurred for the whole consignment are allocated in proportion to the ratio of the value of each item to the value of the consignment, while transport costs are allocated in proportion to "weight or volume".
Why does this matter? Different goods may be subject to different customs payment rates. Transport should fall more heavily not on the expensive item but on the heavy (or bulky) one: otherwise the customs value of one item is overstated and that of the other understated.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Samarqand Kitchen Equipment" LLC received goods from a Chinese supplier on "Ex Works" terms (EXW, code 01 in Appendix 7 to the Instruction): under these terms transport to the border and insurance are not included in the price, so they are added under Article 304.
| Indicator | Cauldrons | Plates | Total |
|---|---|---|---|
| Invoice value, US dollars | 18,000 | 12,000 | 30,000 |
| Weight, kg | 6,000 | 2,000 | 8,000 |
| Transport to the border (in proportion to weight) | 2,400 × 6/8 = 1,800 | 2,400 × 2/8 = 600 | 2,400 |
| Insurance (in proportion to value) | 300 × 18/30 = 180 | 300 × 12/30 = 120 | 300 |
| Customs value, US dollars | 19,980 | 12,720 | 32,700 |
If transport had also been allocated in proportion to value, the cauldrons would have received 2,400 × 18/30 = 1,440 dollars, i.e. their customs value would have been understated by 360 dollars. That would contradict Article 304.
In the accounts, however, the situation is different. Under paragraph 22 of NAS No. 4, the method of accounting for and allocating transport and procurement costs of inventories is set in the company's accounting policy: they may be included directly in cost or collected separately and then allocated between types of goods. In other words, for customs purposes allocating transport by weight or volume is mandatory (weight was used in this example), while in the accounts the method chosen in the accounting policy applies. If the accounting policy chooses to include transport costs directly in the cost of goods, also write into the accounting policy the basis on which they are split between types of goods: if you choose weight as the basis, customs and accounting figures will be close to each other and easy to explain during an audit.
Tip: check that the consignment note (CMR or another transport document) shows the weight of each item separately — these are exactly the figures on which the allocation is based.
See also: Customs value · Cargo customs declaration · Customs duty
Import and export30 percent of our firm's authorised capital belongs to our supplier in Turkey. Can the customs authority refuse to accept the contract price of goods we received from it as the customs value?
Yes, in such a situation the customs authority examines the transaction price separately. Under Article 307 of the Customs Code, persons meeting at least one of the following criteria are considered related:
- a party to the transaction (an individual) or an official of a party is at the same time an official of the other party;
- the parties are legally recognised business partners;
- a party to the transaction (an individual) is connected with the other party through employment relations;
- one party owns a share (stake) or shares in the charter fund (authorised capital) of the other of at least five percent with voting rights;
- both parties are directly or indirectly controlled by a third person;
- the parties jointly control a third person directly or indirectly;
- one party and (or) its official directly or indirectly controls the other party;
- the parties and (or) their officials are relatives.
You have a 30 percent stake — this falls under criterion 4 (if the stake carries voting rights). In addition, under Article 307, if one of the legally recognised business partners is the sole agent, sole distributor or sole concessionaire of the other, they are also considered related.
What happens? Under Article 306, if the parties are related, the transaction value method is not applied, except where the relationship did not affect the price, and this must be proven by the declarant or the customs broker. Under Article 308:
- the customs authority examines the actual circumstances of the transaction and, if it finds that the relationship did not affect the price, accepts the transaction price;
- otherwise it sends the declarant (customs broker) a written notice asking it to submit evidence that the relationship did not affect the price within no more than thirty calendar days;
- if the declarant can prove that its price is close to the transaction value of identical or similar goods sold to unrelated buyers in Uzbekistan, or to the customs value of such goods determined by the deductive or computed value method, its price is accepted.
If this cannot be proven, the customs value is determined successively by the subsequent methods in Article 302.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Anor Qadoq" LLC buys polymer film from its Turkish founder at 2.10 US dollars per kilogram. The founder sold the same film to two other, unrelated buyers in Uzbekistan at 2.15 and 2.20 dollars. The firm prepared the following file in advance: copies of contracts and invoices with the unrelated buyers (with the founder's consent), a document explaining the price difference (large volume, payment terms), and a price list.
Note: under Article 308, the prices submitted for comparison are adjusted for differences in four criteria: commercial terms; quantity; the costs listed in Article 304; costs the seller incurred in the transaction with the unrelated buyer but did not incur in the transaction with the related person — and the price of the comparison goods is not used in place of the price of the goods being valued. In other words, customs will not automatically substitute 2.15 dollars — the comparison serves only to prove that your price of 2.10 dollars is "close to the market price".
Tip: if you work with a related party, prepare such an evidence file before the first shipment — collecting documents within the 30-day period is much harder.
See also: Customs value · Transfer price · Declarant
Import and exportWe later found out that we had also included transport costs from the border to our warehouse in the customs value and overpaid customs payments. Can we get the money back, and within what period?
Yes. Transport costs after import into the customs territory are not included in the customs value (Customs Code, Article 305), and adding costs not listed in Article 304 to the transaction price is prohibited altogether (Article 304, Part Four), so the payments charged on them are considered overpaid. The refund procedure is set out in Articles 353–357 of the Customs Code:
| Question | In the Code | Basis |
|---|---|---|
| What an overpayment is | a payment exceeding the amount payable under customs legislation | Article 353, Part 1 |
| Refund period | in general, within three years from the time of payment (when most-favoured-nation or free trade treatment is restored — one year; for re-export and re-import — the periods in Articles 35 and 59) | Article 353, Parts 2–4 |
| Time of payment | the date the goods were placed under a regime providing for payment of customs payments | Article 353, Part 5 |
| Cases where no refund is made | the application is filed after the deadline, or the amount does not exceed twenty percent of the base calculation amount | Article 353, Part 7 |
| Basis (your case) | recalculation in connection with an adjustment of the customs value and (or) customs payments | Article 354, Part 1 |
| Where to apply | to the customs authority to whose personal treasury account the excess amount was credited, with supporting documents | Article 355 |
| Decision period | within ten working days from the day after the application and documents are received; if an additional check is needed, extended by no more than another ten working days | Article 356 |
| After the decision | the applicant draws up a reconciliation statement of mutual settlements with the customs authority | Article 356, Part 3 |
| Interest | no interest is paid on the amount refunded, and it is not indexed | Article 357 |
| If there is a debt | with the payer's consent, the debt on customs payments, penalties or interest is paid off from this amount, and the rest is refunded | Article 357 |
Article 357 lists five ways of refunding: (1) the money is transferred to the payer's account indicated in the application; (2) in the case under Part Three of the article (when a debt is paid off) — to the customs authority's personal treasury account; (3) the money is refunded in the currency in which it was paid; (4) the amount is recorded as initial funds; (5) it is applied to secure payment of another obligation to the customs authorities.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Qo'qon Mebel Furnitura" LLC placed goods under the release for free circulation (import) regime on 10 March 2026. 9,000,000 soum for transport from the border to the warehouse was mistakenly included in the customs value, and the payments charged on this amount were overpaid. The firm prepared the following:
- A corrected customs value calculation (with transport after the border excluded).
- The local carrier's contract, invoice and payment order — confirming that the cost was incurred precisely after the border.
- An application with a calculation of the overpaid amount.
The three-year period runs from the time of payment, i.e. from 10 March 2026, the date of placement under the regime, so it ends in March 2029; confirm the last day with the customs authority. But do not delay: since no interest is paid, the longer the money stays with customs, the more the company loses.
For the accounts, the written notice of the decision and the reconciliation statement will be the supporting documents; decide in advance in your accounting policy how to record the refunded amount (depending on whether the goods are still in the warehouse or have been sold).
See also: Customs value · Customs duty · Customs fee
Import and exportWe want to import a new type of product, but we don't know exactly which code of the Commodity Nomenclature of Foreign Economic Activity it falls under. Can we get an official answer from customs before the cargo arrives?
Yes, for this you request a preliminary decision on the classification of goods (Customs Code, Articles 370–374). A preliminary decision is binding on the customs authorities (Article 370). This matters because, under Article 369, if it is found during clearance that goods have been classified incorrectly, the customs authority determines the classification on its own, and its classification decisions are binding.
Procedure (Article 371):
| Stage | In the Code | Deadline |
|---|---|---|
| Request | the full commercial name of the goods, the trade name, the main technical and commercial characteristics and other information allowing the goods to be classified unambiguously; where necessary, a photograph, drawing, technical drawing, passport and other necessary documents; a legal entity's request is signed by its head, stating surname, first name, patronymic and position, and the request states the organisation's location; an individual signs the request personally and states their home address | — |
| Review | from the day the request is received | within twenty days |
| If the information is incomplete | the customs authority notifies the applicant, stating exactly what additional information is needed | within twenty calendar days from the day the application is filed |
| Additional documents | submitted by the applicant; if not submitted on time, the application is left without consideration | within sixty calendar days of the notice |
| Notice of the result | after the decision is made | within three working days |
In disputed and hard-to-resolve cases the customs authority may send samples to the World Customs Organization, in which case the decision is made after a reply is received (Article 371). If refused, you can remove the reason and apply again.
Validity and changes:
- the decision is valid for one year from the day it is made, after which a new request can be filed (Article 372);
- it is amended when the nomenclature changes or an error in the decision is found; it is revoked if the conditions of the decision are not complied with (Article 373);
- a decision made on the basis of incomplete or inaccurate information provided by the applicant is annulled, and the annulment takes effect from the day the decision was made (Article 373) — i.e. it is as if the decision had never existed.
Preliminary decisions are public information: except for trade secrets and other secrets protected by law, they are provided to anyone on written request, a register of them is kept and it is published periodically (Article 374). So before filing a request, check whether the register already has a decision on a similar product. In addition, Appendix 13 to the Instruction on the procedure for filling in the cargo customs declaration lists the "Customs fee for making a preliminary decision" (code 50) as a separate type of payment, i.e. a fee is charged for this service; check its amount with the customs authority before filing the request.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical dates). "Quyosh Nuri" LLC wants to import street lights with solar panels. It filed a request on 2 February 2026. On 12 February customs asked for the technical passport of the light's battery (within 20 calendar days). The firm submitted it on 20 February (within the 60-day period). Once the decision was made, the firm was notified within three working days. The decision is valid for one year, so the firm signed its contract with the supplier for exactly this period and checks at each delivery that the description of the goods matches the description in the decision.
Tip: describe the goods in the request as fully and accurately as possible. A decision obtained on the basis of inaccurate information is annulled, and since the annulment takes effect from the day the decision was made, deliveries carried out in reliance on it also end up as if they had no decision.
See also: Customs clearance · Cargo customs declaration · Customs fee · Declarant
TaxLast year our company's tax calculation showed a loss, and this year we expect a profit. Will last year's loss reduce this year's corporate profit tax, and in what order?
Yes, it will. Under Part Three of Article 333 of the Tax Code, a taxpayer that incurred a loss in the previous tax period (periods) may reduce the profit of the current tax period by the whole amount of that loss or by part of it. The company itself decides how much to use.
This is about the tax loss, not the accounting loss. Under Part One of Article 333, a loss is the excess of deductible expenses over total income, taking into account the adjustments made to income and expenses. So take the amount from the corporate profit tax calculation, not from the statement of financial results.
The other rules of Article 333:
1) The tax base is reduced by a prior-period loss only on the results of the current tax period. For corporate profit tax the tax period is the calendar year and the reporting period is the quarter (Article 338).
2) If losses were incurred in several years, they are carried forward in the order in which they were incurred: the oldest first.
3) Losses on transactions with traded securities and traded financial instruments of forward transactions are also treated as losses from business activity.
4) Losses of a subsidiary that receives bad debts from its parent bank are not carried forward.
5) The current text of the article sets neither a carry-forward period nor a percentage cap on how much of the profit may be reduced (Parts Four and Five were deleted by Law No. O'RQ-741 of 29 December 2021).
Special cases are in Articles 334–336. Article 334: on reorganisation the loss is allocated among the legal successors in proportion to the share of assets transferred under the separation balance sheet; losses that the successor itself took over from a taxpayer that had earlier ceased its activity are not carried over when the successor is reorganised again. Article 335: the loss of a consolidated group is carried forward by the group's responsible participant against the consolidated tax base; a participant that leaves the group cannot carry the loss of the group period forward against its own base. Article 336: losses on certain transactions are covered only by similar income — a loss under trust management is carried forward to the future income of that trust management, a loss of a simple partnership to the partnership's future income, a loss of service units to the future income of those units, a loss on non-traded securities and financial instruments against income from the same kind of transactions, and a loss on the sale of an enterprise as a property complex or of a share in the charter fund against income from the sale of identical assets.
Example (prepared by the author). Assume «Bahor Mebel» LLC pays corporate profit tax as one of the "other taxpayers", i.e. at 15% (Item 12 of Part One of Article 337).
2024: tax loss of 150 million soums. No tax; the loss is carried forward.
2025: tax base (before the loss carry-forward) of 90 million soums. The company uses 90 million soums of the 2024 loss: base 0, tax 0. Remaining loss: 150 − 90 = 60 million soums.
2026: base of 200 million soums. The remaining 60 million soums is deducted: 200 − 60 = 140 million soums, tax 140 × 15% = 21 million soums.
Without the carry-forward, tax for the two years would have been 90 × 15% + 200 × 15% = 13.5 + 30 = 43.5 million soums. With it, 21 million soums. The difference is 22.5 million soums, i.e. 15 percent of the 150 million soum loss.
Practical tip: keep a small table for each year — "loss incurred, amount used, amount remaining". If you have losses from several years, the ordering rule means it is always clear which year's loss is being used.
See also: Corporate profit tax · Tax base · Uncovered loss · Taxes section
TaxOur company pays land tax. Under the Tax Code, which land is not taxed at all, and which land has a reduced rate? I need the complete list.
Land tax on legal entities is governed by Chapter 61 of the Tax Code, and the exemptions by Article 428. In the current version, Part One of Article 428 lists 12 categories of land that are not taxed:
1) Land occupied by culture, education, healthcare and social security facilities. Exception: land occupied by sanatorium and resort facilities located in tourist zones does not qualify.
2) Land occupied by sports and physical fitness and health complexes, training bases and children's health camps.
3) Land occupied by urban electric transport tracks and metro lines, including public transport stops, metro stations and their structures.
4) Land occupied by water supply and sewerage facilities of settlements: trunk water pipelines, water supply networks, sewage collectors and their structures, pumping stations, water intake and treatment facilities, inspection wells and culverts (dukers) on the networks, water towers and similar structures.
5) Land occupied by trunk heating mains, including pumping (booster, pressure-reducing, mixing, drainage) stations, heat metering and control devices of hot water supply, heaters, circulation pumps and similar structures.
6) Land occupied by protective forest plantations. The Code lists 11 types: prohibited forest belts along the banks of water bodies; prohibited forest belts protecting the spawning grounds of valuable commercial fish; anti-erosion forests; protective forest belts along railways and roads; forests in desert and semi-desert zones; urban forests and forest parks; forests around the green zones of cities, settlements and industrial centres; forests in sanitary protection zones of water supply sources; forests in sanitary protection districts of resort areas; especially valuable forests; forests of scientific or historical importance.
7) Land where water-saving (drip, sprinkler, discrete and other) irrigation technologies have been introduced — for five years from the start of the month of introduction, on the basis of an opinion of the authorised body for water use. If within those five years the technology becomes unusable or is dismantled, the exemption is cancelled for the whole tax period and the tax liability is restored.
8) Land newly developed for agricultural purposes — under a project approved by the authorised body, during the development works and for five years after development.
9) Existing irrigated land where land reclamation works are carried out — under an approved project, for five years from the start of the works.
10) Agricultural land and forest fund land of experimental, pilot and teaching-experimental farms of scientific organisations, agricultural and forestry research organisations and educational institutions, used directly for scientific and educational purposes. More precisely, plots occupied by crops and plantations used for scientific experiments, experimental work, breeding of new varieties and other scientific and educational purposes with approved topics are exempt (this paragraph is in a new version from 19 July 2026).
11) Plots in rural areas (other than the centres of cities and districts) occupied by antenna-mast metal structures and the structures mounted on them that form an integral part of them.
12) Plots occupied by free-standing renewable energy installations: with a total capacity of up to 100 kW — for three years from the month of commissioning, and for solar panels installed with an energy storage system of at least 25 percent of the panels' capacity — for ten years; 100 kW and above — for ten years.
Reduced rate (Part Two of Article 428): for plots occupied by newly planted orchards, vineyards and mulberry plantations, tax is paid for five years at a rate reduced by 50 percent, regardless of whether the space between rows is used for agricultural crops. The same part contains a reverse rule: if within 12 months of the day the authorised body found an orchard or vineyard economically inefficient and low-yielding a new orchard (vineyard) has not been planted, the rate is tripled.
When the period starts (Part Three): for seedlings planted in autumn — from 1 January of the following year; for those planted in spring — from 1 January of the current tax period.
General condition (Part Four): the exemptions of Article 428 do not apply to land plots that are not used directly for their intended purpose.
One more warning from Article 429: for a plot occupied by an unfinished construction project (unless legislation provides otherwise), exemptions and reducing coefficients do not apply until construction is completed, and tax is paid at double the rate.
Practical tip: keep the area of each exempt plot, the basis of the exemption (for example, the authorised body's opinion) and the expiry date in one list. Under Article 427, when the right to an exemption arises, the tax base is reduced from that month, and when the right ends it is calculated again from the following month.
See also: Land tax · Tax benefit (tax relief) · Tax rate · Taxes section
TaxI heard that land tax for zone 1 in Tashkent is "319 soums per 1 sq. m". Is that right, and how is land tax calculated for a legal entity in 2026?
No, the unit is wrong. The heading of the table in Part One of Article 429 of the Tax Code reads: "Base tax rate per 1 hectare (million soums)". So 319.0 means 319.0 million soums per 1 hectare. Since 1 hectare is 10,000 sq. m, that is 31,900 soums per 1 sq. m — 100 times more than "319 soums". These rates apply to non-agricultural land, and this version took effect on 1 January 2026.
Base rates for the city of Tashkent (per 1 hectare, million soums; per 1 sq. m in brackets): zone 1 — 319.0 (31,900 soums); zone 2 — 254.2 (25,420 soums); zone 3 — 196.6 (19,660 soums); zone 4 — 130.6 (13,060 soums); zone 5 — 65.9 (6,590 soums).
Other territories have a single base rate each (per 1 hectare, million soums): Republic of Karakalpakstan — 41.2; Andijan region — 51.8; Bukhara — 42.4; Jizzakh — 42.4; Kashkadarya — 42.4; Navoi — 42.4; Namangan — 51.8; Samarkand — 51.8; Surkhandarya — 37.7; Syrdarya — 31.8; Tashkent region — 43.5; Fergana — 43.5; Khorezm — 42.4.
The actual rate is obtained with a coefficient (Part Two of Article 429). The Jokargy Kenes of the Republic of Karakalpakstan and the regional councils apply coefficients from 0.5 to 2.0 to the base rate and set rates by district and city. District and city councils then apply coefficients from 0.7 to 3.0 to those rates — and in the city of Tashkent directly to the base rate — by daha, massif, mahalla and street. District and city councils submit the rates to the tax authorities every year by 10 January, and the tax authorities communicate them to taxpayers within five days (Part Three). So take the rate for a specific plot not from the table, but from the information provided by the tax authority.
Agricultural land: the rate is 0.95 percent of the standard value of agricultural land (Part Four of Article 429). The Jokargy Kenes of the Republic of Karakalpakstan, the regional councils and the Tashkent city council may apply coefficients from 0.5 to 1.2 to this rate.
The 0.48 coefficient (Article 429) applies to land occupied by: power transmission lines, their substations and structures; national communication lines and structures; public railways (with stations, marshalling yards and protective plantations granted to railway enterprises); trunk oil and gas pipelines and their stations; aircraft runways, taxiways, parking areas, radio navigation and lighting equipment of civil aviation airports; land allocated for the construction of facilities included in state development programmes — for the standard construction period; land of facilities mothballed by a Cabinet of Ministers decision — for the mothballing period. The rule applies to land allocated to legal entities in the established manner. For the first four types on the list (power transmission lines, communication lines, railways, trunk oil and gas pipelines), the coefficient is applied to the average rate for the district or city; the tax authority communicates the average rate to taxpayers every year by 5 January.
Two more rules (Article 429): for a plot occupied by an unfinished construction project, tax (unless legislation provides otherwise) is paid at double the rate; if land is used without documents or beyond the area stated in the documents, the rate is set at four times the established rate. Tax is calculated as of 1 January of each tax period (Article 431).
Example (prepared by the author, the coefficient is hypothetical). «Chinor Print» LLC owns a plot of 1,200 sq. m (0.12 hectare) in zone 2 of Tashkent. Suppose the district council has set a coefficient of 1.5 for this mahalla.
Rate: 254.2 × 1.5 = 381.3 million soums per 1 hectare.
Annual tax: 381,300,000 × 0.12 = 45,756,000 soums.
Check via sq. m: 381,300,000 : 10,000 = 38,130 soums; 38,130 × 1,200 = 45,756,000 soums.
If someone reads "sq. m" instead of "hectare" and takes a rate 100 times lower, the tax will also be 100 times lower — and it will come back later as additional tax and late payment interest.
See also: Land tax · Tax rate · Tax base · Taxes section
TaxOur supplier's invoice has been placed in the "high risk level". Can we still claim the input VAT? What does the Tax Code say about this?
First, what is not there: the Tax Code has no term "tax gap", and the criteria for determining the risk level are not written into the Code either. Under Part Eight of Article 266¹, the procedure for determining the risk level of invoices, keeping their register and paying tax on their basis is set by the Cabinet of Ministers. The Code itself contains the following (Article 266¹; Parts Three to Nine took effect on 1 January 2026):
1) If an invoice is placed in the high tax risk level, the buyer may pay that VAT to the budget itself as a tax agent in order to claim it. The tax agent is a legal entity, individual entrepreneur or self-employed person that is itself a VAT payer and receives goods (services) from a VAT payer (Part Three). If the tax is not paid as an agent, the VAT on a high-risk invoice is not credited to the buyer (Part Two of Article 267).
2) In that case the VAT is credited to the buyer in the period in which it was paid to the budget as a tax agent (Part Six). If payment is made for an invoice relating to a period for which the final reporting deadline has not yet arrived, the VAT is credited in the relevant period by the invoice date (Part Seven).
3) If the supplier ends up with a negative VAT difference or an overpayment as a result, it may be offset against future payments or refunded in the manner established by the Code (Part Four).
4) The fact that invoices issued by the supplier are placed in the high risk level does not deprive the supplier of the right to claim VAT on goods (services) it has purchased itself (Part Five).
5) If there is evidence that VAT credited under a low-risk invoice arose from a sham or simulated transaction, the tax authority may cancel or adjust the credit. This does not apply to amounts credited because the buyer paid the tax as an agent under invoices originally placed in the high risk level (Part Nine).
On the certificate (Parts One and Two of the same article): if the VAT payer certificate has been suspended, terminated or cancelled, that payer cannot claim VAT on goods it received, and buyers who received goods from it cannot claim that VAT either. If the certificate is restored, the VAT is credited (adjusted) both for the payer and for its buyers from the date of suspension. The Cabinet of Ministers also sets the procedure for (Part Five of Article 237): issuing the certificate; suspending, restoring, terminating or cancelling it; appealing against a tax authority decision in connection with the certificate not being issued on time or being refused, being suspended, terminated or cancelled, or not being restored on time; and removal from special registration.
Practical tip: before signing a contract with a new supplier, check that its VAT payer certificate is in force. Before deciding whether to pay the tax as an agent under a high-risk invoice, read the current Cabinet of Ministers procedure: the criteria and practical steps are in that document, not in the Code.
See also: VAT · Invoice (tax invoice) · Taxes section
TaxBy decision of the competent authority we were allowed to pay our tax debt in instalments over three years. Does this debt stay in 6410 or does it move to another account?
It is taken out of 6410. NAS No. 21 sets aside two accounts for such a debt. Account 7240 "Long-term deferred liabilities for taxes and levies" reflects long-term debt on tax that, in accordance with the law, may be paid in deferred instalments over several years by decision of the relevant authority (paragraph 325). Account 6240 "Deferred liabilities for taxes and levies" holds the current portion of that debt (paragraph 266).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The tax debt of "Chorbog' mebel" LLC in 6410 is 90,000,000 soums. Under the decision it is paid over three years, 30,000,000 soums each year.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Deferral granted, debt transferred to a long-term liability | Dt 6410 – Ct 7240 | 90,000,000 | paragraph 328, line 7 |
| The portion payable in the next 12 months transferred to the current portion | Dt 7240 – Ct 6240 | 30,000,000 | paragraph 328, line 8 |
Result: the balance sheet shows a current liability of 30,000,000 soums (6240) and a long-term liability of 60,000,000 soums (7240). Each year the next 30,000,000 soums is again transferred from 7240 to 6240.
When a payment is made, the balance of 6240 decreases. The standard's model tables give no separate line for paying from 6240, so set this entry in your accounting policy.
Analytical accounting: 7240 is kept by each type of tax and by repayment term (paragraph 325), 6240 by each type of tax (paragraph 266).
Tip: copy the payment schedule and the other conditions from the text of the decision and reconcile them with the 7240 analytics every quarter — you will see in advance which amount moves to the current portion and when.
See also: Deferred liability for taxes and levies · Tax arrears · Payables to the budget
TaxWe produce excisable goods. Is the excise tax amount on the invoice issued to the buyer also included in revenue in 9010?
No. Under paragraph 378 of NAS No. 21, VAT, excise tax and other payments on the sale of products are reflected in the debit of receivables or cash accounts and "in the credit of the accounts that record payables to the budget (6400)". The revenue account, however, receives the amount "excluding VAT and excise taxes" (paragraph 383, line 1). That is, 9010 holds only the value that stays with the company, while the excise tax is an amount collected from the buyer and passed on to the budget.
Example (prepared by the author; the amounts are hypothetical, and the excise rate and the VAT calculation procedure are not shown here). "Oqsoy ichimliklari" LLC shipped products to a buyer: product value 200,000,000 soums, excise tax 20,000,000 soums, VAT shown separately on the invoice.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Product value (excluding excise tax and VAT) | Dt 4010 – Ct 9010 | 200,000,000 | paragraph 383, line 1 |
| Excise tax charged | Dt 4010 – Ct 6410 | 20,000,000 | paragraph 275, line 2 |
| VAT charged | Dt 4010 – Ct 6410 | amount on the invoice | paragraph 275, line 2 |
| Excise tax paid to the budget | Dt 6410 – Ct 5110 | 20,000,000 | paragraph 275, line 7 |
As a result, net sales revenue in the statement of financial results will be 200,000,000 soums. If the excise tax were also posted to 9010, revenue would be 220,000,000 soums and would look inflated, and indicators such as return on sales would come out wrong.
Analytical accounting for 6410 is kept separately by each type of tax (paragraph 274), so do not mix excise tax and VAT in a single sub-account: at month-end the balance of each must be visible separately.
See also: Excise tax · Indirect tax · Payables to the budget
TaxAt year-end we turned out to have overpaid corporate profit tax. We did not ask for a refund and left it to be offset against future payments. Where does this amount sit in the accounts?
After the final settlement, the overpayment appears as a debit balance in the 6410 analytics for that tax (the 6410 analytics are kept by each type of tax, NAS No. 21, paragraph 274). It can be closed in two ways, and both are shown in a single model line: "Refund of funds from the budget or transfer to future payments" — Dt 5110, 5210, 5530, 4410 – Ct 6410 (paragraph 275, line 3). If the money is refunded, the debit is 5110; if it is left for future payments, the debit is 4410 "Advance payments of taxes and levies to the budget".
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Zarafshon print" LLC:
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) | 6410 (corporate profit tax) balance |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Advance payments during the year | Dt 4410 – Ct 5110 | 48,000,000 | paragraph 191, line 2 | — |
| Annual corporate profit tax charged | Dt 9810 – Ct 6410 | 42,000,000 | paragraph 275, line 6 | credit 42,000,000 |
| Final settlement: advances offset | Dt 6410 – Ct 4410 | 48,000,000 | paragraph 191, line 4 | debit 6,000,000 |
| Excess amount transferred to future payments | Dt 4410 – Ct 6410 | 6,000,000 | paragraph 275, line 3 | 0 |
Now 6,000,000 soums sits as an advance in the corporate profit tax analytics of 4410. Next year, when the tax is charged and the final settlement is made, it is again closed with Dt 6410 – Ct 4410 (paragraph 191, line 4).
Tip: the procedure and deadlines for refunding the amount or offsetting it against another tax are set by the Tax Code. Before making the entry, reconcile settlements with the tax authority and make sure the excess amount is the same on both sides.
See also: Overpaid tax · Advance payment of taxes to the budget · Can tax overpaid to the budget be refunded?
TaxOur accounting profit came out higher than taxable profit, because one item of income moves to the next year for tax purposes. From which amount is corporate profit tax expense calculated?
Paragraph 326 of NAS No. 21 states this clearly: "Corporate profit tax expenses are calculated on the basis of accounting income, while corporate profit tax payable is calculated on the basis of taxable income". Under the same paragraph, the difference between corporate profit tax calculated on accounting income and corporate profit tax payable calculated on taxable income is kept as a temporary difference and is reflected in the credit of account 7250 "Long-term deferred corporate profit tax liabilities on temporary differences". That is, tax that is not paid now but will be paid in the future is recorded as a deferred corporate profit tax liability.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Chorsu servis" LLC provides only shopping complex services, so it applies the rate for profit from services of bazaars and shopping complexes reduced from 20 percent to 15 percent by Decree PF-175. Accounting profit is 200,000,000 soums. Let us assume that 40,000,000 soums of income is taken into account for tax purposes in the next year (which income is taxed when is determined by the Tax Code). Tax base: 160,000,000 soums.
| Indicator | Calculation | Amount |
|---|---|---|
| Current tax payable | 160,000,000 × 15% | 24,000,000 |
| Deferred tax | 40,000,000 × 15% | 6,000,000 |
| Corporate profit tax expense | 200,000,000 × 15% | 30,000,000 |
Journal entries (NAS No. 21):
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis |
|---|---|---|---|
| Current tax charged | Dt 9810 – Ct 6410 | 24,000,000 | paragraph 275, line 6 |
| Deferred tax liability | Dt 9810 – Ct 7250 | 6,000,000 | paragraph 328, line 9 |
| Next year, the long-term portion transferred to the current portion | Dt 7250 – Ct 6250 | 6,000,000 | paragraph 328, line 10 |
There is no separate line in the standard's model tables for the next step: paragraph 267 only says that 6250 is later linked with account 6410 "Payables to the budget" as the tax arises, i.e. the amount moves to the tax payable to the budget. Set the exact journal entry in your accounting policy.
Result: this year's net profit is 200,000,000 − 30,000,000 = 170,000,000 soums. If only the current tax had been recorded, profit would be 176,000,000 soums, and the 6,000,000 soums payable next year would not be visible in the accounts.
See also: Deferred corporate profit tax · Temporary difference · Corporate profit tax expense · If corporate profit tax on services at bazaars and shopping complexes is 15 percent, how much is saved and how should the accounts be split?
TaxOur company was granted a temporary tax benefit. Should the amount left unpaid because of the benefit be shown in the accounts, and where?
It should be shown, but where depends on whether the benefit document requires the released funds to be used for a specific purpose. NAS No. 21 has two routes:
| Type of benefit | Account | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|
| The released funds must be used to fulfil a targeted purpose | 8840 "Tax benefits for targeted use" (on the balance sheet, in the equity section) | paragraph 372 |
| Temporary exemption, targeted use of the funds not envisaged | 013 "Temporary tax and customs benefits (by type)" (off-balance sheet) | paragraph 450 |
Under a targeted benefit, the amount exempted from tax is recorded with Dt 6410 – Ct 8840 (paragraph 374, line 6). When the benefit period ends, the released funds are written off with Dt 8840 – Ct 8530 (paragraph 374, line 7).
Under a non-targeted temporary benefit, the released amount for each type of budget payment is recorded in the debit of 013. Under paragraph 450, this amount is not reflected in the "Statement of Financial Results" and does not affect the financial result. As soon as the benefit period ends, the amount is written off from 013, and the information is then kept for another 5 years.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Yangiyo'l tola" LLC was granted a 12-month benefit; the amount released each month is 3,500,000 soums, and targeted use of the funds is not required.
| Period | 013 debit | 013 balance |
|---|---|---|
| Month 1 | 3,500,000 | 3,500,000 |
| End of month 6 | 3,500,000 | 21,000,000 |
| End of month 12 | 3,500,000 | 42,000,000 |
| Benefit ended | written off | 0 |
Check: 3,500,000 × 12 = 42,000,000 soums. This total shows how much was gained from the benefit and helps to explain it quickly during an audit.
Tip: read the document granting the benefit and find out whether the funds must be used for something specific and whether a separate report is required — and write the account you choose into your accounting policy.
See also: Temporary tax and customs benefits · Tax benefit for targeted use · What is a tax incentive and how is it used?
AccountingWe gave our employee a 3-year loan for home repairs; it is withheld from his salary every month. In which accounts is this loan kept?
Under NAS No. 21, a loan given to employees is kept in two parts: the portion repayable in the next 12 months in account 4720 "Employees' debt for loans granted" (paragraph 201, which also gives a loan for individual housing construction as an example), and the rest in account 0930 "Long-term receivables from employees" (paragraph 79). Analytical accounting for both accounts is kept by each employee.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Bodomzor qandolat" LLC gave an employee a loan of 36,000,000 soums; 1,000,000 soums is withheld from his salary every month (36 months).
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Long-term portion of the loan given | Dt 0930 – Ct 5110 | 24,000,000 | paragraph 84, line 7 |
| Current (first 12 months) portion of the loan given | Dt 4720 – Ct 5110 | 12,000,000 | paragraph 206, line 5 |
| At year-end, the next 12-month portion transferred to the current portion | Dt 4720 – Ct 0930 | 12,000,000 | paragraph 84, line 8 |
When 1,000,000 soums is withheld from the salary each month, the balance of 4720 decreases. The standard's model tables have no separate line for this transaction. Paragraph 201 gives the rule itself in words: for the amount of payments received from indebted employees, 4720 is credited in correspondence with account 5010 "Cash in national currency", 5110 "Settlement account" or 6710 "Payroll settlements with employees", depending on the accepted method of payment. When withheld from salary, it corresponds with 6710. Set the exact journal entry in your accounting policy.
Balances at the end of the first year: in 4720, 12,000,000 − 12,000,000 (withheld over 12 months) + 12,000,000 (transferred from 0930) = 12,000,000 soums; in 0930, 24,000,000 − 12,000,000 = 12,000,000 soums. Total 24,000,000 soums, i.e. 36,000,000 − 12,000,000 (the amount repaid in one year).
Tip: state clearly in the loan agreement the amount, term and procedure for withholding from salary. Whether interest is charged on the loan and what tax consequences this has for the employee — check this separately on the basis of the agreement and the Tax Code.
See also: Accounts receivable · Wages (salary) · What journal entries are made when payroll is calculated?
AccountingWe took a warehouse building under a 5-year operating lease. Will the building appear on our balance sheet? Can we record nothing other than the rent?
The building is not put on the balance sheet, because it does not belong to you. But leaving it completely outside the accounts is not correct either. Under paragraph 437 of NAS No. 21, valuables that do not belong to the organization but that it is temporarily using, including fixed assets received under an operating lease agreement, are kept in off-balance sheet accounts, and accounting in these accounts is kept in a simple system (without a second account). The leased building is kept in account 001 "Fixed assets received under operating lease" at the value stated in the agreement; analytical accounting is kept by each lessor and each item (paragraph 438).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Navbahor ulgurji" LLC leased a building: value in the agreement 600,000,000 soums, rent 8,000,000 soums a month.
| Transaction | Entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Building received | recorded in 001 (single entry) | 600,000,000 | paragraphs 437, 438 |
| Monthly rent accrued | Dt expense account – Ct 6910 | 8,000,000 | paragraph 309, line 1 |
| Rent paid | Dt 6910 – Ct 5110 | 8,000,000 | paragraph 309, line 2 |
| Agreement ended, building returned | removed from 001 (single entry) | 600,000,000 | paragraphs 437, 438 |
Which expense account the rent goes to depends on the purpose for which you use the building. If you pay several months' rent in advance, the portion relating to future months sits in account 3110 "Prepaid operating lease rent" (paragraph 158) and is transferred to expenses every month.
Why 001 is needed: it makes it easy, during an inventory count, to separate which property in the building is yours and which is the lessor's, to know what to return when the agreement ends, and to quickly draw up a list of leased items for the notes to the financial statements.
See also: Operating lease · Off-balance sheet accounts · Accounting section
AccountingWe bought new chairs and calculators for the office and expensed them in full when they were put into use. Do they now disappear from the accounts completely?
No, they must remain under control. Under paragraph 98 of NAS No. 21, account 1080 "Tools, implements and household supplies" records tools, implements and household supplies that form part of current assets. Their cost may be charged to expenses in full when they are put into use, but to ensure their safekeeping, accounting continues in off-balance sheet account 014 "Tools, implements and household supplies in use" by workshop, warehouse and individual user. When an item becomes unusable, it is removed from 014 on the basis of a formal write-off certificate (paragraphs 99 and 451).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Ziyo o'quv markazi" LLC bought 10 chairs at 450,000 soums (4,500,000 soums) and 4 calculators at 150,000 soums (600,000 soums). Total: 5,100,000 soums.
| Transaction | Entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Received from the supplier | Dt 1080 – Ct 6010 | 5,100,000 | paragraph 104, line 1 |
| Put into use for office needs | Dt 9420 – Ct 1080 | 5,100,000 | paragraph 104, line 13 |
| At the same time | recorded in 014 (single entry) | 5,100,000 | paragraphs 98, 451 |
| One chair broke, a certificate was drawn up | removed from 014 (single entry) | 450,000 | paragraphs 99, 451 |
Result: the balance of 014 is 5,100,000 − 450,000 = 4,650,000 soums. This amount does not affect the balance sheet, but it shows how many items are in whose hands.
Which item goes to 1080 and which is a fixed asset is set by the organization in its accounting policy. Practical tip: keep the 014 analytics by room or employee and hand items over against a signature — when an employee leaves, it is immediately clear what he has to return.
See also: Tools, implements and household supplies · Tools, implements and household supplies in use · Off-balance sheet accounts
AccountingWe wrote off a buyer's debt as a loss, thinking it could not be collected. Two years later he paid part of the debt. How do we record this?
NAS No. 21 has a special off-balance sheet account for this situation: 007 "Debts of insolvent debtors written off as losses". Under paragraph 444, a debt written off as a loss because of the debtor's insolvency is monitored in this account for five years from the moment of write-off — if the debtor's financial position changes, it may become possible to collect it. Paragraph 444 gives the rule itself in words: if a debt previously written off as a loss is collected, the cash accounts are debited for the amount received in correspondence with account 9390 "Other operating income", and at the same time 007 is credited for that amount. The standard's model table also has a matching line: "Income from previously written-off receivables" — Dt receivable accounts — Ct 9390 (paragraph 405, line 11). So the amount can be recorded either directly through the cash account (paragraph 444), or by first reinstating the debt in 4010 and then closing it with the cash received, Dt 5110 – Ct 4010 (paragraph 174, line 3); either way the income in 9390 is the same. Set the method you use in your accounting policy.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Ohangaron qurilish materiallari" LLC had not created an allowance and had written off a buyer's debt of 14,000,000 soums as a loss.
| Stage | Entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Debt written off as a loss | Dt 9430 – Ct 4010 | 14,000,000 | paragraph 174, line 6 |
| At the same time | recorded in 007 (off-balance sheet, single entry) | 14,000,000 | paragraph 444 |
| Two years later the debtor paid 9,000,000 soums to the bank account | the cash account increases, the amount is recognized in 9390 as other operating income | 9,000,000 | paragraph 444; paragraph 405, line 11 |
| At the same time | 007 credited (single entry) | 9,000,000 | paragraph 444 |
The remaining 14,000,000 − 9,000,000 = 5,000,000 soums in 007 stays under monitoring until the five-year period ends.
Why the amount becomes income (9390): the debt in 4010 was closed two years ago, and its expense was recognized that year in 9430. The money received now is this year's other operating income. Account 4010 may be used here only as an intermediate step (paragraph 405, line 11) and is closed again with a zero balance once the cash arrives.
If the debt was written off against the allowance for doubtful debts, the first line would be Dt 4910 – Ct 4010 (paragraph 174, line 7). Analytical accounting in 007 is kept by each debtor (paragraph 444).
See also: Written-off debt of an insolvent debtor · Allowance for doubtful debts · Accounts receivable
AccountingOur gym sells annual memberships in advance. Can we record the money for 12 months as revenue in the month it is received?
No. When the money arrives, the service has not yet been provided, so this is revenue of future months. Paragraph 265 of NAS No. 21 says that account 6230 "Other deferred income" records income received as an advance but relating to future periods, and gives rent payments, ticket sales and magazine subscription payments as examples. An annual membership is exactly the same: revenue is recognized in each month in which the service is provided.
Example (prepared by the author; the amounts are hypothetical, taxes are not considered separately). In November "Polvon fitnes" LLC sold 20 annual memberships at 3,600,000 soums: 72,000,000 soums. One month's share: 72,000,000 : 12 = 6,000,000 soums.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Membership money received to the bank account | Dt 5110 – Ct 6230 | 72,000,000 | paragraph 269, line 7 |
| At the end of November one month's share transferred to revenue | Dt 6230 – Ct 9030 | 6,000,000 | paragraph 269, line 8 |
| At the end of December one month's share transferred to revenue | Dt 6230 – Ct 9030 | 6,000,000 | paragraph 269, line 8 |
At year-end: revenue 12,000,000 soums, balance of 6230 72,000,000 − 12,000,000 = 60,000,000 soums. This amount appears on the balance sheet as a current liability: the gym owes its customers another 10 months of service.
The difference from 6310 "Advances received from buyers and customers – current portion": an advance in 6310 is closed against the buyer's debt (4010) when the goods are shipped or the work is handed over (paragraph 272, line 2). With a membership, revenue is recognized month by month in equal shares and goes directly from 6230 to 9030. Write clearly into your accounting policy which type of receipt is kept in which account.
Tip: if the membership term exceeds 12 months, also bear in mind that the long-term portion needs to be shown separately.
See also: Deferred income · Advance received · What journal entries are made when a customer pays in advance?
AuditThe auditor rated our cash operations as "high risk" and our warehouse accounting as "low risk". How does this rating affect the scope of the audit?
It has a very large effect. Audit risk is the probability that the auditor expresses an inappropriate opinion when the statements contain a material misstatement. In audit practice it is assessed by splitting it into three components:
| Component | Meaning | Can the auditor change it |
|---|---|---|
| Inherent risk | The susceptibility of the item itself to error: cash, numerous small transactions, complex calculations | No, only assesses it |
| Control risk | The probability that the company's internal control fails to detect an error in time | No, only assesses it |
| Detection risk | The probability that the auditor's own procedures fail to detect an error | Yes, through the extent and type of procedures |
The logic is simple: the auditor must keep overall audit risk at a low level. If the first two risks are high, he reduces the third, i.e. performs more and more reliable substantive procedures.
Example (prepared by the author). "Guliston savdo" LLC:
| Area | Situation | Inherent risk | Control risk | What the auditor does |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Cash | Hundreds of cash receipts a day; one cashier both receives money and keeps the cash book | High | High | Reconciles the cash book day by day with the receipts and the takings deposited at the bank, counts the cash, examines year-end transactions in detail |
| Warehouse | Receipts entered into the software only with a document; a count every month; the storekeeper and the accountant are different people | Medium | Low (if tests of controls confirm it) | First checks that the controls actually work; if they do, the extent of substantive procedures is smaller |
Note: control risk is assessed as "low" only after tests of controls have shown that it actually works. A procedure on paper is not enough.
Conclusion for the company: segregation of duties and documenting every control can shorten the auditor's work. The application of international standards on auditing in auditing activity is established by Article 9 of the Law "On Auditing Activity" (O'RQ-677).
See also: Audit risk · Tests of controls · Substantive procedures · What stages does an audit go through?
AuditThe auditor first asked for waybills for the sales entries in the ledger, then did the reverse: starting from the waybills for goods leaving the warehouse, he looked for the sales entries. Why is he checking in both directions?
Because each direction answers a different question and finds a different type of error:
| Direction | From where to where | What it checks | What error it finds |
|---|---|---|---|
| From register to document | Entry in 9020 → waybill, invoice, contract | Whether the recorded sale actually happened | Overstatement: a fictitious or double-recorded sale |
| From document to register | Waybill for goods leaving the warehouse → entry in 9020 and 4010 | Whether a sale that happened was recorded (completeness) | Understatement: an unrecorded sale |
Key point: the first direction alone will never find an unrecorded transaction, because it is not in the register at all. To find it, you have to start from a source outside the register — waybills, the warehouse log.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). At "Nurafshon un" LLC the auditor compared several entries in 9020 with their documents — all matched. Then he looked for the waybills from the warehouse issue log among the sales entries and found that one shipment of 8,400,000 soums had not been recorded: the goods had gone to the buyer, but no invoice had been issued.
Correction (NAS No. 21): revenue Dt 4010 – Ct 9020 (paragraph 174, line 1), VAT Dt 4010 – Ct 6410 (paragraph 275, line 2), cost of goods sold Dt 9120 – Ct 2910 (paragraph 154, line 13).
Tip for the company: number waybills consecutively and reconcile warehouse issues with sales entries at the end of every month. A "gap" in the sequence or a waybill not linked to a sale will be visible to you before the auditor sees it.
See also: Audit evidence · Substantive procedures · Why does the auditor send confirmation letters to your debtors?
AuditThe auditor found three errors, each of which is not material on its own. Even so, he said "we will look at them all together". Can small errors add up and affect the opinion?
Yes, they can. The auditor collects the errors found and not corrected in one table and compares their combined effect on the statements with the materiality level. A user of the statements sees not an individual error but the sum of all of them.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). In the audit of "Qorasuv metall" LLC the auditor set materiality at 20,000,000 soums (this is the auditor's professional judgement).
| Error found | Effect on profit | Amount |
|---|---|---|
| A service expense received in December was recorded in January | Profit overstated | 8,000,000 |
| Obsolete goods not written down to net realizable value | Profit overstated | 7,000,000 |
| No allowance created for the debt of a non-paying buyer | Profit overstated | 9,000,000 |
| Total | 24,000,000 |
Each is less than 20,000,000 soums, but the total of 24,000,000 soums exceeds materiality. In addition, all three errors go in the same direction — towards overstating profit — which is also a sign the auditor pays attention to.
Depending on management's decision, the opinion may be as follows:
| Situation | Auditor's opinion |
|---|---|
| The errors were corrected or what remains is well below materiality (for example, if 8,000,000 and 9,000,000 are corrected, 24,000,000 − 17,000,000 = 7,000,000 remains) | Unmodified opinion (ISA 700) |
| The errors were not corrected, they are material in aggregate but do not have a pervasive effect on the statements | Qualified opinion (ISA 705) |
Note: if only the 9,000,000-soum error is corrected, the remaining 15,000,000 soums, although below materiality, is quite close to it. The auditor also takes into account the probability that next to such an amount there may be an undetected error. So the closer the amount is to materiality, the more cautious he is.
Tip: ask the auditor for the schedule of uncorrected misstatements and correct the easy ones before the statements are submitted.
See also: Materiality · Auditor's report · What types of auditor's report are there?
AuditThe auditor asked for a list from the software of journal entries entered manually during the year, especially those entered on days off and on the last days of the year. Does this mean he does not trust us?
No, this is a normal part of an audit. Entries that come in automatically from an invoice or a bank statement are linked to a document. A manually entered journal entry, however, depends on someone's decision and is the most convenient way to artificially alter the statements. The risk of management overriding controls exists in every company, so the auditor examines such entries separately.
The auditor usually looks at the following signs:
| Sign | Why it requires attention |
|---|---|
| Entered on a day off or outside working hours | Outside the normal work process, less control |
| Entered on the last days of the year or after the statements were prepared | Possibility of "adjusting" the result |
| A round amount | May come from an estimate rather than a document |
| A rarely used pair of accounts | Not typical of a normal transaction |
| No description or no supporting document | Its basis cannot be checked |
| Entered by an employee who does not normally enter journal entries | Segregation of authority has been breached |
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). At "Oqqo'rg'on savdo" LLC, on the evening of 31 December, a journal entry Dt 4010 – Ct 9020 for 30,000,000 soums was entered manually with the description "correction", with no supporting document. On 10 January exactly the same amount was reversed. The auditor asks whether there was a shipment behind this entry. If there is no waybill, the year's sales and profit are overstated by 30,000,000 soums, and this must be corrected within the reporting year itself.
Tip for the company: attach a supporting document or an accounting memo to every manually entered journal entry. Let the software show who entered it and who approved it.
See also: Fraud · Journal entry · Internal control · How is internal control built in a small company? 5 simple rules
AuditThe auditor arrived unexpectedly in the morning and said we would count the cash right now. Why doesn't he warn us in advance, and what should we be ready for?
Cash is the asset most easily lost. If a count is announced in advance, any shortage could be temporarily made up from other money. A surprise count shows the real situation in the cash desk.
A count usually goes like this: the cashier counts the money in front of the auditor; the result is compared with the balance in the cash book; it is checked whether all receipt and disbursement orders up to the time of the count have been recorded. If the company has several cash desks, they are counted at the same time — otherwise a shortage could be hidden by moving money from one cash desk to another.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Bahor dorixonasi" LLC:
| Indicator | Amount |
|---|---|
| Opening balance for the day in the cash book | 3,200,000 |
| Receipt orders before the count | 1,450,000 |
| Disbursement orders before the count | 600,000 |
| Should be in the cash desk | 4,050,000 |
| Actually counted | 3,850,000 |
| Difference | −200,000 |
Calculation: 3,200,000 + 1,450,000 − 600,000 = 4,050,000; 4,050,000 − 3,850,000 = 200,000 soums.
The cashier explained the difference as 200,000 soums given to an employee without an order; there is only an IOU in the cash desk. The auditor records this as an internal control deficiency: cash was paid out without a cash disbursement voucher. If the amount is not returned and the cashier is found to be at fault, the shortage is recorded with Dt 4730 – Ct 5010 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 206, line 10).
To be ready: close the cash book every day, document every receipt and disbursement with an order, and do not keep in the cash desk money that does not belong to the company or IOUs that have not been turned into orders.
See also: Cash book · Cash disbursement voucher · Why are cash receipt and cash disbursement orders needed?
Financial reportingIn June we decided to switch our goods from the FIFO method to the weighted average cost method. Can we apply the new method from July?
No. Paragraph 52 of NAS No. 1 ("Presentation of Financial Statements and Accounting Policies") states: "The accounting policy is not changed during the calendar year". A change is allowed in the following cases (paragraph 52, full list):
- when the organization is reorganized (merged, divided, acquired);
- when the owners of the property change;
- when there are changes in legislation or in the regulatory legal acts governing accounting;
- when new methods of accounting are developed;
- when the changes help to present information in the financial statements more reliably.
The change must be justified and formalized in the manner set out in paragraph 51: by order of the head, and the chosen method is applied from 1 January of the year following the year in which the order was issued (except for organizations newly established during the year).
Example (prepared by the author). "Sirdaryo qurilish savdo" LLC:
| Date | What happens |
|---|---|
| 20 June 2026 | Order of the head: weighted average cost method from 2027; reason — more reliable information |
| Until 31 December 2026 | Goods continue to be written off under FIFO as before |
| 1 January 2027 | The new method starts to be applied |
| 2027 annual statements | If the effect of the change is material, the information required by paragraph 110 is disclosed in the notes |
The consequences of a change not related to a change in legislation are assessed on the basis of verified data as at the time the changed method begins to be applied (the first day of the month) (paragraph 52). The amount of the adjustment is taken into account either by changing the opening balance of retained earnings or in calculating the net profit (loss) of the reporting period (paragraph 109).
Tip: if you are planning to switch to a new method, issue the order before the end of the year and get your accounting software ready for 1 January.
See also: Accounting policy · Retained earnings · At what cost is material issued from the warehouse written off: FIFO or weighted average?
Financial reportingWe set the useful life of a piece of equipment at 10 years. After 4 years the technology became obsolete, and it turned out that it would work for only 4 more years. Do we recalculate the depreciation of past years?
No. Under paragraph 47 of NAS No. 5 ("Fixed Assets"), the useful life may be reviewed, including to take account of technological changes that shorten the useful life. This is considered a change in an accounting estimate. Under paragraph 111 of NAS No. 1, the effect of a change in an accounting estimate is taken into account in the reporting period in which the change occurred and, if it also affects later periods, in later periods. The statements of past years are not reopened.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Equipment of "Chinor print" LLC: initial cost 120,000,000 soums, no residual value, straight-line method, life 10 years — 12,000,000 soums a year. Depreciation over 4 years is 48,000,000 soums, carrying amount 72,000,000 soums. Under the new estimate the remaining life is 4 years: 72,000,000 : 4 = 18,000,000 soums.
| Indicator | Old estimate | New estimate |
|---|---|---|
| Depreciation for years 1–4 | 48,000,000 | unchanged |
| Annual depreciation from year 5 | 12,000,000 | 18,000,000 |
| When the carrying amount reaches zero | end of year 10 | end of year 8 |
For comparability, depreciation continues to be shown in the same line of the statement of financial results that was used before (paragraph 112). If the change has a significant effect on the current period or leads to material changes in later periods, its nature and amount are disclosed in the notes (paragraph 113).
Do not forget the difference: if the 10-year life was clearly wrong even on the basis of the information available at the time, this is not a change in estimate but an error, and it is corrected differently (NAS No. 1, paragraphs 114–116).
See also: Accounting price (standard price) · Useful life · How is depreciation of fixed assets calculated?
Financial reportingWhile preparing the 2026 statements, we found service revenue for services provided in 2025 that had not been recorded. Do we record it in 2026 revenue or reopen the 2025 statements?
It depends on whether this error is material (significant) or not. Under paragraph 114 of NAS No. 1, material errors are errors identified in the current reporting period that cause the financial statements of past periods not to be considered reliable.
| Error | How it is corrected | Basis (NAS No. 1) |
|---|---|---|
| Not material | The amount of the correction is included in the net profit or loss of the current reporting period | paragraph 115 |
| Material | The opening balance of retained earnings is changed; the comparative information for the previous year is corrected; the nature of the error and the correction amounts are disclosed in the notes | paragraphs 116, 117 |
Example A (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). At "Mirishkor servis" LLC a service worth 3,000,000 soums provided in 2025 was not recorded. Because annual revenue is large, management assessed this as not material. It is recorded in 2026: Dt 4010 – Ct 9340 "Prior-year profits" 3,000,000 soums (NAS No. 21, paragraph 405, line 4). Conversely, if an expense or loss relating to the previous year is found, it is recorded with Dt 9430 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 412, line 20).
Example B (hypothetical). At another company, contract revenue of 180,000,000 soums was recorded twice in 2025, while 2025 profit had been reported as 250,000,000 soums. Such an error makes the previous year's statements unreliable, so it is material. It is corrected by reducing the retained earnings balance at the beginning of 2026, and the 2025 column in the 2026 statements is shown with the corrected figures and explained in a note.
Tip: it is useful to write the criterion for assessing in advance which error is material into your accounting policy. Consider the effect of the error on tax returns separately.
See also: Retained earnings · Materiality · How do you correct a wrong journal entry: red storno, reversing entry or additional entry?
Financial reportingOur net profit is 50 million soums, but the money in our bank account has not increased much. How do I calculate cash flow from operating activities starting from profit?
There is the indirect method for this. Under paragraph 15 of NAS No. 9 ("Statement of Cash Flows"), the cash flow from operating activities is shown using the direct or the indirect method. Under paragraph 17, in the indirect method profit or loss is adjusted for three kinds of items: changes in inventories, current receivables and payables; non-cash items such as depreciation; items relating to cash flows from investing or financing activities.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures, million soums). "Yashnobod tekstil" LLC:
| Item | Amount | Why |
|---|---|---|
| Net profit | 50 | Starting point |
| Depreciation | +12 | An expense, but no cash went out |
| Gain on sale of a fixed asset | −3 | This receipt is shown in investing activities |
| Increase in receivables | −35 | Sold, but the money has not yet come in |
| Decrease in inventories | +5 | Goods bought earlier were sold, no new cash went out |
| Increase in payables | +8 | There is an expense, but it has not yet been paid |
| Net cash flow from operating activities | 37 |
Calculation: 50 + 12 − 3 − 35 + 5 + 8 = 37 million soums.
The money received from selling the fixed asset itself (for example, 10 million soums) is shown in the investing activities section, because under paragraph 11 of NAS No. 9 cash flows from the sale of fixed assets are included in investing activities.
The table answers the question precisely: the main difference between profit and cash is the 35 million soums of uncollected receivables. So first of all you should focus on settlements with buyers.
For checking: the sum of the cash flows of all three activities must equal the change in cash on the balance sheet from the beginning to the end of the year. Under paragraph 31, the amounts in the statement are disclosed in reconciliation with the corresponding items of the balance sheet.
See also: Cash flow · Operating activities · Profit but no cash: why does this happen?
Financial reportingA strong storm tore off the warehouse roof and our goods were destroyed. Is this loss shown in the statement of financial results together with other expenses?
No, it is shown separately. Under paragraph 88 of NAS No. 1, gains or losses from extraordinary events are income or expenses arising from events that are clearly distinct from the organization's ordinary activities, i.e. that do not occur frequently or regularly. Under paragraph 89, they are shown separately in the statement, and the nature and amount of each is disclosed in the notes. In the sequence in paragraph 85, this line comes after the result of general business activities and before the total result before payment of corporate profit tax.
In the accounts, the loss is accumulated in account 9720 "Losses from extraordinary events" and closed to 9910 at the end of the period (NAS No. 21, paragraph 430).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures, million soums). At "Sayxun savdo" LLC goods worth 30 million soums were destroyed by the storm:
| Journal entry | Amount | Basis (NAS No. 21) |
|---|---|---|
| Dt 9720 – Ct 2910 | 30 | paragraph 431, line 6 |
| Dt 9910 – Ct 9720 (at the end of the period) | 30 | paragraph 431, line 8 |
In the statement (simplified view):
| Line | Amount |
|---|---|
| Net sales revenue | 900 |
| Cost of goods sold | (700) |
| Gross profit from sales | 200 |
| Operating expenses and other operating income (net) | (120) |
| Financial result from core business activities | 80 |
| Other income and expenses from financing activities (net) | (10) |
| Financial result from general business activities | 70 |
| Loss from extraordinary events | (30) |
| Total result before payment of corporate profit tax | 40 |
Why this matters: a founder or a bank reading the statements immediately sees that the company's ordinary activities produce a result of 70 million soums, while 30 million soums is a one-off event. If the loss were lumped in with other expenses, the company would look as if it were performing worse than usual.
Note: regularly recurring losses (for example, normal spoilage in storage) do not meet this criterion and are not shown as extraordinary.
See also: Extraordinary gain (loss) · Final financial result · Financial statements
FinanceWe have two offers for deliveries: lease a truck for a fixed monthly amount, or pay a carrier firm per trip. How do I work out which is cheaper?
The answer depends on how many trips you make a month. In one option a large part of the cost is fixed (you pay even if there are no trips), in the other everything is variable (you pay only for trips). The volume at which the total cost of the two options is equal is called the indifference point. Below this volume the variable-payment option is cheaper; above it, the fixed-payment option is cheaper.
Formula: indifference point = difference in fixed costs : difference in variable costs per unit.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Sharq mebel" shop delivers furniture to customers:
| Option | Fixed cost (per month) | Cost per trip |
|---|---|---|
| A: truck lease | 18,000,000 (rent) | 150,000 (fuel and the driver's per-trip pay) |
| B: carrier firm | 0 | 450,000 |
Indifference point: 18,000,000 : (450,000 − 150,000) = 18,000,000 : 300,000 = 60 trips a month.
| Trips per month | Option A | Option B | Cheaper |
|---|---|---|---|
| 40 | 18,000,000 + 40 × 150,000 = 24,000,000 | 40 × 450,000 = 18,000,000 | B, by 6,000,000 |
| 60 | 18,000,000 + 60 × 150,000 = 27,000,000 | 60 × 450,000 = 27,000,000 | equal |
| 80 | 18,000,000 + 80 × 150,000 = 30,000,000 | 80 × 450,000 = 36,000,000 | A, by 6,000,000 |
If the shop makes an average of 70 trips a month: A = 18,000,000 + 10,500,000 = 28,500,000 soums, B = 31,500,000 soums, i.e. A is 3,000,000 soums a month cheaper.
Do not be misled by the average. If trade is seasonal, calculate month by month. For example, even if there are 90 trips in 6 months of the year and 30 trips in the other 6 months, the average comes out at 60 trips. But with option A the rent is paid in quiet months too: over the year A = 6 × (18,000,000 + 90 × 150,000) + 6 × (18,000,000 + 30 × 150,000) = 6 × 31,500,000 + 6 × 22,500,000 = 324,000,000 soums. B = 6 × 40,500,000 + 6 × 13,500,000 = 324,000,000 soums. The result is equal, but in quiet months option A weighs more heavily on cash flow.
What to consider besides the numbers: the fixed-payment option is riskier when volume falls, because the rent is paid anyway. The variable-payment option is flexible, but if the carrier is busy, delivery may be delayed. Also compare the term of the lease agreement and the conditions for terminating it.
See also: Break-even point · Operating lease · Finance section
FinanceWe have one laser cutting machine; it can work 200 hours a month, which is not enough for both products. Which product is it more profitable to produce first?
Not the product that gives more profit per unit, but the product that gives more contribution margin per hour of the limited resource. If machine time is in short supply, it is exactly this time that "earns" the money.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Usta mebel" workshop:
| Indicator | Cabinet door | Shelf |
|---|---|---|
| Contribution margin per unit | 90,000 | 40,000 |
| Machine time per unit | 3 hours | 1 hour |
| Contribution margin per hour | 30,000 | 40,000 |
| Monthly demand | 50 pieces | 120 pieces |
Looking per unit, the cabinet door is more profitable. Looking per hour, the shelf is more profitable. Let us compare two plans:
| Plan | Production | Machine time | Total contribution margin |
|---|---|---|---|
| A: cabinet doors first | 50 doors + 50 shelves | 150 + 50 = 200 hours | 4,500,000 + 2,000,000 = 6,500,000 |
| B: shelves first | 120 shelves + 26 doors | 120 + 78 = 198 hours | 4,800,000 + 2,340,000 = 7,140,000 |
Plan B gives 7,140,000 − 6,500,000 = 640,000 soums more a month. Fixed costs are the same under both plans, so profit is higher by the same amount.
Practical tip: this rule works only when a single resource is limited. If machine time is extended with an extra shift or a second machine, redo the calculation. Also bear in mind that turning down a regular customer's door order completely may lead to losing that customer.
See also: Break-even point · Cost (cost of production) · Finance section
FinanceThe workshop's monthly electricity and repair costs change with the volume of work, but not fully. How do I separate how much of them is fixed and how much is variable?
The simplest way is the high-low method. Take the two months with the highest and the lowest volume of work. If you divide the difference in costs by the difference in volumes, you get the variable cost per unit of volume. The rest is fixed cost.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Temirchi" workshop:
| Month | Machine hours | Cost, million soums |
|---|---|---|
| January | 600 | 32.5 |
| February | 400 | 26.0 |
| March | 750 | 36.8 |
| April | 900 | 41.0 |
| May | 680 | 34.1 |
| June | 520 | 29.9 |
The highest point is April (900 hours, 41.0 million), the lowest is February (400 hours, 26.0 million).
- Variable cost per hour: (41,000,000 − 26,000,000) : (900 − 400) = 15,000,000 : 500 = 30,000 soums.
- Monthly fixed cost: 41,000,000 − 900 × 30,000 = 41,000,000 − 27,000,000 = 14,000,000 soums.
- Check for February: 14,000,000 + 400 × 30,000 = 26,000,000 soums.
Formula: cost = 14,000,000 + 30,000 × hours. If 700 hours are planned for July: 14,000,000 + 21,000,000 = 35,000,000 soums.
Limitations: the method relies on only two months. If one of those months is unusual (a major emergency repair), the result is distorted — set such a month aside and take the next highest or lowest month. Look at how far the other months deviate from the formula: in this example the difference does not exceed 0.5 million soums in any month.
Why this split is needed: it is precisely the fixed and variable parts that you need to find the break-even point, the effect of a price change, or to compare two options with different cost structures.
See also: Break-even point · Economies of scale: why does the cost per unit fall when more is produced, and when does it stop? · Finance section
FinanceOur shop sells 2,400 bags of cement a year, and we buy 200 bags every month. Is it cheaper to order small amounts often, or large amounts rarely?
Here two costs move in opposite directions:
| Cost | What it consists of | If the batch gets larger |
|---|---|---|
| Ordering cost | For each order: transport, loading and unloading, paperwork | The number of orders falls, the cost falls |
| Holding cost | Warehouse, insurance, risk of spoilage, money tied up in goods | The average stock rises, the cost rises |
If goods sell evenly, the average stock in the warehouse equals half of one batch. So the total annual cost = (annual requirement : batch) × cost of one order + (batch : 2) × cost of holding one unit for one year. The batch at which the total cost is lowest is called the economic order quantity, and it is found with the Wilson formula: √(2 × annual requirement × cost of one order : cost of holding one unit for one year).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Qurilish bozori" shop: annual requirement 2,400 bags; one order (truck and unloading) 750,000 soums; holding one bag for one year 10,000 soums.
| Batch, bags | Orders per year | Ordering cost | Average stock | Holding cost | Total |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 200 (current) | 12 | 9,000,000 | 100 | 1,000,000 | 10,000,000 |
| 400 | 6 | 4,500,000 | 200 | 2,000,000 | 6,500,000 |
| 600 | 4 | 3,000,000 | 300 | 3,000,000 | 6,000,000 |
| 800 | 3 | 2,250,000 | 400 | 4,000,000 | 6,250,000 |
| 1,200 | 2 | 1,500,000 | 600 | 6,000,000 | 7,500,000 |
By the formula: √(2 × 2,400 × 750,000 : 10,000) = √360,000 = 600 bags. So ordering 4 times a year, 600 bags every 3 months, is the cheapest. Saving: 10,000,000 − 6,000,000 = 4,000,000 soums a year.
A check: at the optimal point the ordering cost equals the holding cost (3,000,000 = 3,000,000). In the table the total cost changes slowly around the optimal point (800 bags instead of 600 — a difference of only 250,000 soums), so the batch can be rounded a little to fit the truck's capacity.
Limitations: the formula assumes that demand is even and costs are constant. Warehouse capacity, the shelf life of the goods, the supplier's discount for a large batch and extra stock for unexpected demand are taken into account separately. Do not forget to include in the holding cost the price of the money tied up in goods (the income that money could earn elsewhere).
See also: Inventories · How many days does it take working capital to turn back into cash? Calculating the turnover ratio and the turnover period · Finance section
FinanceA large buyer is asking to extend the payment term from 30 to 60 days. When there is not enough money in our bank account we use an overdraft. How much will this credit cost us?
The longer the credit term, the longer your money stays with the buyer, and you have to cover that gap with borrowing. Its cost can be calculated simply: average receivables × interest rate on borrowing.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The wholesale firm "Qo'qon don" sells this buyer goods worth 100,000,000 soums a month. The overdraft interest is assumed, hypothetically, to be 2% a month (simple interest). Gross profit is 15% of sales.
| Payment term | Average receivables | Monthly financing cost (2%) | Annual |
|---|---|---|---|
| 30 days | 100,000,000 | 2,000,000 | 24,000,000 |
| 60 days | 200,000,000 | 4,000,000 | 48,000,000 |
| Difference | 100,000,000 | 2,000,000 | 24,000,000 |
Average debt = monthly sales × payment term (in months): for 30 days 100,000,000 × 1, for 60 days 100,000,000 × 2.
Result: extending the term costs an additional 2,000,000 soums a month. This is about 13% of the monthly gross profit earned from the buyer (100,000,000 × 15% = 15,000,000 soums).
When the condition can be accepted: if the buyer increases purchases in return, the additional gross profit must be at least 2,000,000 soums. That is, at least 2,000,000 : 15% ≈ 13,333,333 soums of additional sales a month are needed (about 13.3% growth). A more precise calculation should add that the additional sales themselves will also be on credit — this raises the required growth a little further.
This calculation does not yet include the risk of the debt not being repaid: the longer the term, the greater this risk. So give the extended term only to buyers with good payment discipline and write liability for late payment into the contract.
See also: Receivables turnover · Time value of money · If a supplier offers a discount for early payment, does it pay to pay even if you have to borrow?
InsuranceOur large warehouse is insured not by one but by two insurance companies jointly: one took a 60% share, the other 40%. If there is a loss, who pays how much?
Such an arrangement is called co-insurance (joint insurance). The risk on one item is split among several insurers in shares agreed in advance: each receives the premium and pays the indemnity according to its share. The contract may name one of them as the leader, who handles the paperwork.
The difference from reinsurance: in reinsurance you deal with one insurer, which itself transfers part of the risk to another company, and this is not visible to you. In co-insurance, each insurer's share is written in your contract.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The sum insured of the warehouse of "Qo'rg'ontepa logistika" LLC is 2 billion soums, the annual premium 24 million soums. Company "A" took a 60% share, company "B" 40%. A fire caused a loss of 350 million soums; there is no deductible.
| Indicator | "A" (60%) | "B" (40%) | Total |
|---|---|---|---|
| Share of the sum insured | 1,200,000,000 | 800,000,000 | 2,000,000,000 |
| Annual premium | 14,400,000 | 9,600,000 | 24,000,000 |
| Indemnity payable | 210,000,000 | 140,000,000 | 350,000,000 |
In the accounts the amounts owed to the two companies must not get mixed up: analytical accounting for 6510 "Insurance payments" is kept by insurer and by individual contract (NAS No. 21, paragraph 279). When the premium is charged to expenses, Dt the relevant expense account – Ct 6510 (paragraph 280, line 2), and when paid from the bank, Dt 6510 – Ct 5110 (paragraph 280, line 3), recorded separately for each company.
Tip: before signing, clarify one thing in the contract — if one of the insurers delays its share, is the other liable in its place or not.
See also: Reinsurance · Insurer · Sum insured · Insurance section
InsuranceWe are bringing porcelain dishes from a factory in the region and insured the cargo so that any breakage on the way would be covered. Is this insurance cost a period expense, or is it added to the cost of the dishes?
It is added to the cost. Paragraph 15 of NAS No. 4 lists the transportation and procurement costs that are included in cost, and among them are "costs of insuring risks during the transportation of inventories". That is, insurance connected with delivering goods to their location is, just like freight, part of the cost of inventory.
Insurance of stock in the warehouse is a different matter: it is not directly connected with the purchase, so it is not included in cost and is an expense of that period (NAS No. 4, paragraph 17).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Chinni dunyo" shop bought 4,000 dishes:
| Cost | Amount, soums |
|---|---|
| Price payable to the supplier (excluding VAT) | 48,000,000 |
| Freight | 3,200,000 |
| Cargo insurance during transportation | 400,000 |
| Total cost | 51,600,000 |
| Cost of one dish | 12,900 |
Without the insurance, one dish would have come to 12,800 soums. A difference of 100 soums looks small, but since the mark-up is applied to this cost, it also affects pricing.
There are two methods of accounting for transportation and procurement costs (NAS No. 4, paragraph 22): adding them directly to the cost of each batch, or accumulating them separately and then allocating them to inventories. Write into your accounting policy which one is applied. The receipt of goods is recorded with Dt 2910 – Ct 6010 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 154, line 2). The standard's tables give no separate model line for adding the insurance cost to the cost of goods, so set this entry in your accounting policy too.
See also: Cost (cost of production) · Inventories · NAS No. 4 · Insurance section
InsuranceThe insurer says the annual premium is 12 million soums if we pay it in one go, or 4 payments of 3.15 million soums if we pay quarterly. How much more expensive is paying in instalments really?
At first glance the difference is simple: 4 × 3,150,000 = 12,600,000 soums, i.e. 600,000 soums (5%) more. But when you pay in instalments, part of the money stays in your hands for several months, so it should be compared with the cost of credit.
The logic is as follows (calculation prepared by the author). The first quarterly payment of 3.15 million soums is paid at the start under both options. The insurer, as it were, leaves you the remaining 8.85 million soums "on loan", and in return you pay 3 × 3.15 = 9.45 million soums over the next three quarters.
| Indicator | Result |
|---|---|
| Amount not paid immediately | 8,850,000 soums |
| Amount repaid later | 9,450,000 soums |
| Difference ("interest") | 600,000 soums |
| Internal rate per quarter | about 3.35% |
| Effective annual rate (compound) | about 14.1% |
The internal rate is found as follows: when each quarterly payment is discounted to present value at this rate, their sum must equal 8.85 million soums.
Conclusion: if your spare money earns more than 14.1% a year on a deposit, or if you would have to take a loan more expensive than this to find the money, paying in instalments is beneficial. Otherwise paying in one go is cheaper.
In the accounts there is no difference: each payment is recorded as an advance to the insurer with Dt 4510 – Ct 5110 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 195, line 1), and once the insurance payment is charged, the advance is closed with Dt 6510 – Ct 4510 (paragraph 195, line 2). The 600,000 soums is also part of the premium amount in the contract, so it remains part of the insurance expense.
See also: Insurance premium · Time value of money · Insurance section
InsuranceThe insurer made an offer: if we raise the unconditional deductible from 1 million to 5 million soums, the annual premium will fall from 9 million to 6.5 million soums. Is this beneficial for us?
The answer depends on your own loss history. You save exactly 2.5 million soums on the premium every year, but in return you bear a larger part of the loss in each insured event yourself. These two need to be compared.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Sirdaryo agroservis" LLC has had three events in the last 5 years:
| Loss | Covered with a 1 million deductible | Covered with a 5 million deductible | Additional amount left to us |
|---|---|---|---|
| 2,500,000 | 1,500,000 | 0 | 1,500,000 |
| 7,000,000 | 6,000,000 | 2,000,000 | 4,000,000 |
| 3,000,000 | 2,000,000 | 0 | 2,000,000 |
| Total over 5 years | 7,500,000 |
Average additional loss per year: 7,500,000 : 5 = 1,500,000 soums. The premium saved is 2,500,000 soums a year. So if this history repeats, the new option gives a benefit of about 1,000,000 soums a year.
But an average calculation is not enough. If there are two large events in a bad year, an additional 2 × 4 = 8 million soums will have to be paid at once. Therefore:
- if the company has a cash reserve able to pay such an amount, a large deductible is preferable;
- if cash flow is tight, a small deductible gives peace of mind even though it is more expensive;
- in an activity with many small losses, a large deductible may not pay off.
In the accounts, the lower premium reduces expenses: the premium charged is recorded as before with Dt the relevant expense account – Ct 6510 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 280, line 2), only the amount is smaller.
See also: Deductible (franchise) · Insurance premium · Insurance section
InsuranceThe workshop equipment was insured for one year at the beginning of January. At the beginning of July we bought a new machine tool and want to add it to the same policy. How is the additional premium calculated and where is it recorded?
The machine is not added to the policy automatically: an additional agreement must be signed with the insurer and the sum insured increased. Otherwise, if a loss occurs, the new machine may not be covered because it is not in the policy.
The additional premium is often calculated in proportion to the remaining term of the policy, but the exact method is written in the additional agreement, so read it.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Ohangaron metall" LLC bought a machine worth 300 million soums. The annual rate in the policy is 0.8% of the sum insured, and 6 months remain until the policy expires.
| Indicator | Calculation | Result, soums |
|---|---|---|
| Premium for a full year | 300,000,000 × 0.8% | 2,400,000 |
| Pro rata for the remaining 6 months | 2,400,000 × 6 : 12 | 1,200,000 |
| Portion charged to expenses each month | 1,200,000 : 6 | 200,000 |
Since the machine works in primary production, its insurance cost is recorded with Dt 2010 "Primary production" – Ct 6510 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 120, line 15). When the additional premium is paid from the bank, Dt 6510 – Ct 5110 (paragraph 280, line 3). If the premium is paid in advance for six months, spread the expense at 200,000 soums a month; do not record it all at once in July.
Tip: if fixed assets keep increasing during the year, check the sum insured at the start of every quarter — the date in the additional agreement determines when the new equipment entered the policy.
See also: Insurance rate · Insurance policy · How is property insurance recorded in the accounts: from the annual premium to the insurance payout · Insurance section
BankingOur loan agreement states the interest as "policy rate + 4 percentage points". If the policy rate changes, how much will our monthly interest payment change?
This is a floating (variable) rate. The loan interest consists of two parts: a changing base indicator (here, the Central Bank's policy rate) and a fixed margin added by the bank. If the base indicator changes, the loan interest rate changes by the same amount from the date stated in the agreement.
Example (prepared by the author; the policy rate values are hypothetical, not the actual rate). The loan balance of "Bekobod oyna" LLC is 240 million soums, the margin is 4 percentage points, and monthly interest is calculated as 1/12 of the annual rate.
| Policy rate (hypothetical) | Loan rate | Monthly interest, soums |
|---|---|---|
| 14% | 18% | 240,000,000 × 18% : 12 = 3,600,000 |
| 15% | 19% | 3,800,000 |
| 16% | 20% | 4,000,000 |
Each 1 percentage point change on this balance changes the monthly interest by 200,000 soums and the annual interest by 2.4 million soums.
In the accounts, interest is recorded every month at the new rate with Dt 9610 "Interest expenses" – Ct 6920 "Accrued interest" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 427, line 1), and when paid, Dt 6920 – Ct 5110 (paragraph 309, line 5). Calculate the interest for the month in which the rate changed in two parts, from the day it changed.
Tip: when drawing up a cash flow plan, also calculate the scenario in which the rate rises by 1–2 percentage points — this stress test shows in advance how much reserve is needed for the monthly payment.
See also: Policy rate (key rate) · Interest rate · Accrued interest · Banking section
BankingThe bank opened a credit line of 500 million soums; so far we have drawn 200 million. It turns out a fee is charged on the unused part as well. How much do we pay in a month, and how is it recorded?
With a credit line, the bank reserves for you the ability to draw money at any time within the limit. That is why many agreements have two kinds of payment: interest on the amount drawn, and a fee on the limit that has not been drawn but is reserved.
Example (prepared by the author; the interest and fee rates are hypothetical). "Zomin yog'och" LLC: limit 500 million soums, drawn 200 million soums, loan interest 24% a year, fee on the unused limit 1% a year.
| Payment | Calculation | Per month, soums |
|---|---|---|
| Interest on the drawn part | 200,000,000 × 24% : 12 | 4,000,000 |
| Fee on the unused limit | 300,000,000 × 1% : 12 | 250,000 |
| Total | 4,250,000 |
The real cost of the money drawn: 4,250,000 × 12 : 200,000,000 = 25.5% a year, i.e. higher than the 24% in the agreement. Had the company drawn 400 million soums, the fee would have come to 100,000,000 × 1% : 12 ≈ 83,333 soums and the real cost would have been about 24.25%. So opening a limit much larger than needed is an unnecessary expense.
In the accounts the two payments are recorded separately:
- when the loan is received, Dt 5110 – Ct 6810 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 296, line 1);
- when interest is accrued, Dt 9610 – Ct 6920 (paragraph 427, line 1);
- the fee is not interest but a charge for a bank service: payments for bank services are accounted for in 9430 "Other operating expenses" (paragraph 410), model entry Dt 9430 – Ct 6990 (paragraph 412, line 12).
Tip: when choosing a credit line, calculate the real annual cost as above, adding not only the interest but also the fee.
See also: Credit line · How much does a one-off fee increase the real cost of a loan? · Banking section
BankingTo get a loan, we pledged our warehouse to the bank. Does the warehouse leave the balance sheet, and how do we show this in the accounts?
It does not. A pledge does not hand the property over to the bank: the warehouse remains the company's, and you continue to use it. So it stays in account 0120 "Buildings, structures and transmission equipment" as before, and depreciation continues to be charged. A pledge only gives the bank the right to satisfy its claim out of this property if the loan is not repaid.
But this right must be visible in the accounts. Off-balance sheet account 009 "Security for obligations and payments – issued" summarizes the existence and movement of guarantees issued to secure the performance of obligations and payments, and analytical accounting is kept by each security (NAS No. 21, paragraph 446). A pledge is also a way of securing an obligation, so it is logical to monitor it in this account; write this procedure into your accounting policy.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Yangiyer savdo" LLC:
| Indicator | Amount, soums | Where it appears |
|---|---|---|
| Carrying amount of the warehouse | 620,000,000 | On the balance sheet, 0120 (net of depreciation) |
| Value in the pledge agreement | 800,000,000 | Off-balance sheet, recorded in 009 |
| Loan received | 500,000,000 | On the balance sheet, 6810 or 7810 |
In off-balance sheet accounts, accounting is kept under a simple system, i.e. without double entry (NAS No. 21, paragraph 437): the amount is recorded in 009. Under paragraph 446, the amount of the security is written off as the debts are repaid, so if the loan is repaid in instalments, set in your accounting policy how the amount in 009 is reduced with each payment.
Tip: also write about pledged assets in the notes to the financial statements — a person reading the statements cannot tell from the balance sheet alone that the warehouse is pledged.
See also: Collateral (pledge) · Security for obligations and payments · Off-balance sheet accounts · Banking section
BankingThe bank calculates loan interest on the daily balance, taking the year as 365 days. Because of this, February's interest came out lower than January's. Isn't this a mistake?
It is not a mistake. When interest is calculated day by day, the formula is: balance × annual rate × number of days : days in the year. February has fewer days, so the interest is lower too. Which formula applies (by days, or 1/12 of the annual rate each month) is written in the loan agreement.
Example (prepared by the author; the rate is hypothetical). The loan balance of "Chirchiq qadoq" LLC is 150 million soums, at 20% a year, with the year taken as 365 days:
| Month | Days | Calculation | Interest, soums |
|---|---|---|---|
| January | 31 | 150,000,000 × 20% × 31 : 365 | 2,547,945 |
| February | 28 | 150,000,000 × 20% × 28 : 365 | 2,301,370 |
| March | 31 | 150,000,000 × 20% × 31 : 365 | 2,547,945 |
| Quarter total | 90 | 7,397,260 |
If the interest were calculated as 1/12 each month, it would be 2,500,000 soums every month, 7,500,000 soums for the quarter.
The advantage of the daily method is felt when the balance changes in the middle of the month. For example, if 50 million soums is repaid on 15 January: 1–14 January on 150 million soums (1,150,685 soums) and 15–31 January on 100 million soums (931,507 soums), a total of 2,082,192 soums. The bank calculates by exactly these days.
In the accounts, at the end of each month the amount matching the bank's calculation is recorded with Dt 9610 – Ct 6920 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 427, line 1). At month-end, reconcile your own calculation with the bank's interest calculation: if there is a difference, the cause is often the repayment date or the number of days.
See also: Interest rate · Accrued interest · Short-term bank loan · Banking section
BankingWe had to withdraw a 12-month deposit in the 7th month. The bank recalculated the interest at a lower rate and paid less. But we had been accruing interest every month at the full rate. What do we do with the interest recorded in excess?
Many deposit agreements state that if the deposit is withdrawn early, the interest is recalculated at a lower rate. The company, however, had been accruing interest as income every month at the main rate in the agreement. As a result, the accounts contain interest that the bank will not pay, and it must be corrected.
Example (prepared by the author; the rates are hypothetical). "Termiz ulgurji" LLC placed 100 million soums on a deposit at 20% a year, with interest paid at the end of the term. Under the agreement, if it is withdrawn early, the interest is recalculated at 5% a year. The deposit stayed for 6 months.
| Indicator | Calculation | Amount, soums |
|---|---|---|
| Interest accrued over 6 months | 100,000,000 × 20% × 6 : 12 | 10,000,000 |
| Interest recalculated by the bank | 100,000,000 × 5% × 6 : 12 | 2,500,000 |
| Accrued in excess | 10,000,000 − 2,500,000 | 7,500,000 |
Journal entries:
- interest accrued every month: Dt 4830 "Interest receivable" – Ct 9530 "Interest income" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 216, line 5, "a");
- the excess 7,500,000 soums is corrected with a red storno: Dt 4830 – Ct 9530 minus 7,500,000;
- interest paid by the bank: Dt 5110 – Ct 4830, 2,500,000 (paragraph 216, line 6).
After the correction no balance remains in 4830. The principal amount of the deposit, once withdrawn, returns from 5890 "Other current investments" to the settlement account with a reverse entry (NAS No. 21, paragraph 243).
Note: if the excess interest relates to a past year whose statements have already been submitted, the correction procedure may be different; agree it with the auditor.
Tip: if there is a chance of withdrawing a deposit early, compare the partial withdrawal conditions in the agreement in advance — being able to take only the part you need rather than the whole amount preserves the interest.
See also: Deposit · If spare cash is placed on a bank deposit, how is it recorded in the accounts? · Banking section
StatisticsWe know our revenue for the last 6 months. We need to draw up a purchasing plan for next month. How can I estimate revenue in a simple way?
If revenue is growing steadily, there are two simple methods: the average absolute increase and the average growth rate. The first assumes an increase of roughly the same amount each month, the second an increase of the same percentage.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Revenue of the "Guliston qurilish mollari" shop, million soums:
| Month | January | February | March | April | May | June |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Revenue | 40 | 43 | 45 | 49 | 50 | 55 |
| Increase over the previous month | — | +3 | +2 | +4 | +1 | +5 |
Method 1. Average absolute increase = (last − first) : (number of periods − 1) = (55 − 40) : 5 = 3 million soums. July estimate: 55 + 3 = 58 million soums.
Method 2. Average growth rate = 5th root of (55 : 40) ≈ 1.066, i.e. about 6.6% a month. July estimate: 55 × 1.066 ≈ 58.6 million soums.
The two results are close, so the purchasing plan can be drawn up for sales of 58–59 million soums.
Limitations:
- these methods are suitable only for estimating one or two months ahead;
- if revenue depends on the season (for example, building materials sell less in winter), an estimate made without taking seasonality into account will be wrong;
- if the first or last month is unusual, the result is distorted, because the formula relies only on these two points.
It is convenient to take revenue data from the monthly credit turnover of account 9020 "Revenue from sale of goods".
See also: Time series · Growth rate · Statistics section
StatisticsWe are analysing the amounts of receipts at our café. How do I find the range in which a "typical" receipt falls, without one or two very large receipts distorting the result?
Quartiles are convenient for this. The values are arranged in ascending order and divided into four equal parts: Q1 (the first quartile) — a quarter of the values are smaller than it; Q2 — the median; Q3 — three quarters of the values are smaller than it. The range from Q1 to Q3 contains the middle half of the receipts, and a single large receipt has almost no effect on it.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Bahor kafe" had 12 receipts in one day, thousand soums: 18, 22, 25, 27, 30, 32, 35, 38, 41, 45, 60, 140.
| Indicator | Calculation | Result, thousand soums |
|---|---|---|
| Median (Q2) | (32 + 35) : 2 | 33.5 |
| Q1 (median of the lower half) | (25 + 27) : 2 | 26 |
| Q3 (median of the upper half) | (41 + 45) : 2 | 43 |
| Interquartile range (Q3 − Q1) | 43 − 26 | 17 |
| Upper limit | 43 + 1.5 × 17 | 68.5 |
| Arithmetic mean | 513 : 12 | 42.75 |
Conclusion: a typical receipt is in the range of 26–43 thousand soums. The 140-thousand-soum receipt is well above the upper limit (68.5), i.e. it is an outlier: probably a banquet or a large order. It has pushed the arithmetic mean up to 42.75, whereas half of the receipts are smaller than 33.5.
The "Q3 + 1.5 × range" rule is a widespread method for finding outliers. Also remember that there are several methods of calculating quartiles: spreadsheet programs may give a slightly different result, so stick to one method within one analysis.
Practical benefit: you can set the price of a combo meal to fit the typical range and analyse large orders separately.
See also: Quartile · Outlier · Arithmetic mean · Statistics section
StatisticsIt seems that in the months when we spent more on advertising, revenue was also higher. How do I measure in numbers how strong this relationship is?
How much two indicators change together is shown by the Pearson correlation coefficient (r). It ranges from −1 to +1: close to +1 — when one rises, the other rises steadily too; close to 0 — there is no linear relationship; close to −1 — when one rises, the other falls.
Formula: r = Σ(dx × dy) : √(Σdx² × Σdy²), where dx and dy are the deviations of each value from its own mean.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Navbahor mebel" over 5 months, million soums:
| Month | Advertising (x) | Revenue (y) | dx | dy | dx × dy | dx² | dy² |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 1 | 30 | −2 | −6 | 12 | 4 | 36 |
| 2 | 2 | 34 | −1 | −2 | 2 | 1 | 4 |
| 3 | 3 | 33 | 0 | −3 | 0 | 0 | 9 |
| 4 | 4 | 40 | 1 | 4 | 4 | 1 | 16 |
| 5 | 5 | 43 | 2 | 7 | 14 | 4 | 49 |
| Total / mean | mean 3 | mean 36 | 32 | 10 | 114 |
r = 32 : √(10 × 114) = 32 : 33.76 ≈ 0.95. This is a very strong positive relationship. r² ≈ 0.90, i.e. about 90% of the variation in revenue is explained through the linear relationship with advertising (in the statistical sense, not as a cause). The slope is 32 : 10 = 3.2: in months when advertising was 1 million soums higher, revenue was on average 3.2 million soums higher.
Be careful:
- a strong correlation does not prove cause and effect: if advertising was increased during the season, it may have been the season that raised revenue;
- 5 observations are very few; check the conclusion with at least a year of data.
It is easy to get the amount of advertising expense from the accounts: advertising and marketing services received from outside are recorded with Dt 9410 "Selling expenses" – Ct 6010 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 412, line 2).
See also: Correlation · Regression · Statistics section
StatisticsWe are comparing two sales managers. With retail and wholesale customers separately, Anvar showed better results, but in the overall percentage Botir is ahead. How can this be?
This is called Simpson's paradox: even if one side is ahead in each of the groups, when the groups are combined the result may come out the other way round. The reason is that the groups are of different sizes: if someone got many customers from an easy group, his overall percentage comes out high.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The indicator is what percentage of the customers approached made a purchase.
| Customers | Anvar | Botir |
|---|---|---|
| Retail | 80 / 100 = 80% | 180 / 250 = 72% |
| Wholesale | 20 / 100 = 20% | 1 / 10 = 10% |
| Total | 100 / 200 = 50% | 181 / 260 ≈ 69.6% |
Anvar is better in both groups. But Botir's customers are mostly retail (250), where the purchase rate is high anyway. Half of Anvar's customers, on the other hand, are from the wholesale group, which is hard to sell to. The overall percentage reflects this difference in composition, not skill.
For a correct comparison:
- look at the results by group separately;
- or calculate by applying the same customer mix to both managers: for example, with 100 from each group, Anvar (80 + 20) : 200 = 50%, Botir (72 + 10) : 200 = 41%.
Conclusion: when rewarding managers, do not look only at the overall percentage — also take into account which customers were assigned to whom.
See also: Weighted average · Sample · Statistics section
StatisticsFebruary revenue came out 7.7% lower than January's, and the manager got worried. But February has 3 fewer days. How do I compare months correctly?
Because months differ in length, comparing monthly totals directly can lead to the wrong conclusion. First bring the indicator to a per-day basis (for a business that works every day) or a per-working-day basis (for a business closed on days off), then compare.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Samarqand non uyi" works every day:
| Indicator | January | February | Change |
|---|---|---|---|
| Monthly revenue, million soums | 186.0 | 171.6 | −7.7% |
| Days worked | 31 | 28 | |
| Revenue per day, million soums | 6.00 | 6.13 | +2.1% |
Calculation: 171.6 : 186 = 0.923 (the monthly total is 7.7% lower); 171.6 : 28 = 6.129 and 6.129 : 6 = 1.021 (daily revenue is 2.1% higher). So trade has not actually worsened, but has improved slightly.
Take two more things into account:
- days off and holidays: if there are closed days, divide by the number of days worked, not calendar days;
- the season: comparing February not with January but with February of the previous year also removes the effect of the season.
In the report, give both indicators side by side: the monthly total is needed for comparison with the plan, and the daily average for assessing the pace of work.
See also: Arithmetic mean · Index · Statistics section
EconomicsOur workshop produces 1,000 chairs a month; the cost of one chair is 400 thousand soums. A new buyer wants to take 200 chairs at 330 thousand soums. Can we agree even though it is below cost?
If there is spare capacity, probably yes. The decision is made not by the average cost but by the marginal cost: how much additional cost is incurred for exactly these extra 200 chairs. The average cost includes a share of fixed costs such as rent and management salaries, which do not change with an additional order.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). At the "Chust mebel" workshop the cost of 400 thousand soums consists of two parts: variable cost (wood, fabric, piece-rate wages) of 280 thousand soums and a share of fixed cost of 120 thousand soums (120 million soums a month in total). The workshop can produce 1,200 chairs a month.
| Indicator | 1,000 chairs | 1,200 chairs | Difference |
|---|---|---|---|
| Fixed cost, million soums | 120 | 120 | 0 |
| Variable cost, million soums | 280 | 336 | +56 |
| Total cost, million soums | 400 | 456 | +56 |
| Average cost of one chair, thousand soums | 400 | 380 |
Additional revenue: 200 × 330 = 66 million soums. Additional cost: 56 million soums. Profit rises by 10 million soums. Each additional chair adds 330 − 280 = 50 thousand soums.
Before agreeing, check:
- whether the capacity is really spare: if an extra shift or overtime pay is needed, the marginal cost will exceed 280 thousand soums;
- if regular customers learn about the low price, they may also ask for a discount;
- such a price should not become permanent: in the long run the price must also cover fixed costs.
See also: Costing (cost calculation) · Economies of scale: why does the cost per unit fall when more is produced, and when does it stop? · Economics section
EconomicsOur bakery has one tandoor. Each time a new baker is added, more bread is produced, but each time less than before. Why is this, and how many bakers is it best to employ?
This is the law of diminishing marginal returns. If one factor stays fixed (here, the tandoor), then as more of another factor (workers) is added to it, the contribution of each additional unit begins to fall from a certain point: the workers wait in line at the tandoor and get in each other's way.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Qo'qon tandir non" bakery:
| Number of bakers | Loaves per day | Loaves added by the additional baker (marginal product) |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | 200 | 200 |
| 2 | 380 | 180 |
| 3 | 520 | 140 |
| 4 | 600 | 80 |
| 5 | 630 | 30 |
Let us calculate in money how many bakers are needed. After deducting the cost of flour, yeast and firewood from the price of one loaf, 1,500 soums remains; a baker's daily wage is 150,000 soums. For an additional baker to pay for himself, he must produce at least 150,000 : 1,500 = 100 additional loaves.
- 3rd baker: 140 × 1,500 = 210,000 soums, more than the wage — profitable.
- 4th baker: 80 × 1,500 = 120,000 soums, less than the wage — a loss of 30,000 soums a day.
So 3 bakers is optimal for one tandoor. If demand grows and more bread is needed, you should think not about a fourth baker but about a second tandoor: when the fixed factor is expanded, additional workers again give high output.
See also: Economies of scale: why does the cost per unit fall when more is produced, and when does it stop? · Supply · Economics section
EconomicsIf the soum falls 10% against the dollar, will the shop price of our imported goods also rise by exactly 10%?
Usually it rises by less. The exchange rate affects only the part of the price paid in dollars. Domestic costs (freight, warehouse rent, sales staff salaries) are in soums and do not change immediately when the rate changes. So the final price increase depends on the import share.
Example (prepared by the author; the rate and amounts are hypothetical, not the actual rate). "Andijon aksessuar" sells phone cases at 2 dollars each:
| Indicator | Rate 12,500 | Rate 13,750 (+10%) | Change |
|---|---|---|---|
| Import part, soums | 25,000 | 27,500 | +10% |
| Domestic costs and mark-up, soums | 15,000 | 15,000 | 0 |
| Price of one piece, soums | 40,000 | 42,500 | +6.25% |
Since the import share is 62.5%, the price rose by 10 × 62.5% = 6.25%. If domestic costs also become more expensive over time, the price may rise further.
In the accounts, the effect of the exchange rate shows up in two places:
- the cost of imported goods received into the warehouse stays at the Central Bank rate on the date of receipt (NAS No. 22, paragraph 7) and is not revalued afterwards, because goods are a non-monetary item (paragraph 10);
- if you owe the supplier in dollars, that is a monetary item: it is revalued at the end of each month (paragraph 8), and the exchange difference goes to the financial result (paragraph 11). For example, if a debt of 10,000 dollars rises from 125 million soums to 137.5 million soums, the loss of 12.5 million soums is recorded with Dt 9620 – Ct the relevant foreign-currency liability account (NAS No. 21, paragraph 427, line 3).
See also: Devaluation · Exchange difference · Monetary items · Economics section
EconomicsOur neighbourhood has 1,200 people of working age. A student, a housewife, a graduate looking for work — which of them counts as unemployed, and how is the unemployment rate found?
In economics, the working-age population is divided into three groups:
- the employed — those working in paid employment or in their own business;
- the unemployed — those who have no job, are actively looking for work and are ready to start work;
- the economically inactive population — those who do not work and are not looking for work (a student not seeking work, a housewife, a pensioner).
The employed and the unemployed together make up the labour force. The unemployment rate is calculated not relative to the whole population but relative to the labour force.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures):
| Group | People |
|---|---|
| Employed | 690 |
| Looking for work, ready to work (including the graduate) | 60 |
| Inactive (students not looking for work, housewives and others) | 450 |
| Total working-age population | 1,200 |
Labour force: 690 + 60 = 750 people. Unemployment rate: 60 : 750 = 8%. Employment rate (relative to the working-age population): 690 : 1,200 = 57.5%.
A subtle point: if someone gives up hope of finding a job and stops looking, he moves from the unemployed to the inactive. For example, if 15 of the 60 people stop looking, the unemployment rate falls to 45 : 735 ≈ 6.1%, even though not a single new job has been created. So monitor the unemployment rate together with the employment rate.
The benefit for an entrepreneur: knowing how many unemployed and inactive people there are in an area helps to estimate the chances of finding workers for a new branch.
See also: Unemployment · Gross domestic product (GDP) · Economics section
EconomicsWe are leasing out our shop premises for 3 years. If we make the rent fixed, inflation will eat it up. How is raising it every year in line with price growth calculated?
This is called indexation: each year the rent is multiplied by the consumer price index published by official statistics. This preserves the purchasing power of the rent, i.e. its real value. The alternative is raising it every year by a fixed percentage: this is known in advance, but if inflation is higher than expected, the lessor loses out.
Example (prepared by the author; the indices are hypothetical, not actual statistics). "Mirzo savdo" LLC started the monthly rent at 10 million soums. Let us assume the index was 1.09 at the end of year 1 and 1.07 at the end of year 2.
| Year | With indexation, per month | With a fixed +5%, per month |
|---|---|---|
| Year 1 | 10,000,000 | 10,000,000 |
| Year 2 | 10,000,000 × 1.09 = 10,900,000 | 10,500,000 |
| Year 3 | 10,900,000 × 1.07 = 11,663,000 | 11,025,000 |
Total over 3 years: with indexation (10,000,000 + 10,900,000 + 11,663,000) × 12 = 390,756,000 soums; with a fixed 5% (10,000,000 + 10,500,000 + 11,025,000) × 12 = 378,300,000 soums. The difference is 12,456,000 soums — in years of high inflation, indexation protected the lessor.
State clearly in the agreement: which index, for which period and from which date it applies.
In the accounts, every month the lessor records Dt 4820 – Ct 9350 "Operating lease income" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 216, line 2), and the lessee reflects its expense with Dt expense account – Ct 6910 "Operating lease payable" (paragraph 309, line 1). From the month in which the indexation takes effect, journal entries are made at the new amount.
See also: Consumer price index · Inflation · Operating lease · Economics section
Import and exportOur foreign supplier said it would send the certificate of origin later. Can the goods be released from customs without the certificate, and how much will it cost us?
They can be released, but it may cost more. Under Article 366 of the Customs Code, failure to submit a certificate is not grounds for refusing to release the goods. However, if there is no certificate or there is doubt about its authenticity, "a double rate of customs duty" is applied to the goods (except for the case in Article 365 of the Code, i.e. goods from a country whose goods may not be imported).
When a certificate is mandatory (Customs Code, Article 364):
- for goods produced in countries to which Uzbekistan grants tariff preferences;
- for goods whose import from a particular country is restricted by quotas or other instruments for regulating foreign economic activity;
- if the documents contain no information about origin, or customs has grounds to believe that incorrect information is being declared;
- if such a requirement is provided for by legislation and international treaties.
Example (prepared by the author; the duty rate and amounts are hypothetical, not the actual tariff). The customs value of goods of "Nurafshon plast" LLC is 400 million soums, hypothetical duty rate 10%:
| Situation | Rate | Duty, soums |
|---|---|---|
| With a certificate | 10% | 40,000,000 |
| Without a certificate (double) | 20% | 80,000,000 |
| Difference | 40,000,000 |
If the certificate is submitted later within the period set by the Code, the preference under the free trade or most-favoured-nation regime may be applied or restored, and the overpaid amount is refunded in the manner set out in Chapter 49 of the Code (Article 366). The CCD has separate codes for such preferences: "Е" for the free trade regime and "Ж" for the most-favoured-nation regime (CCD filling Instruction, Appendix 10).
In the accounts, the duty paid is included in the cost of the goods (NAS No. 4, paragraph 15), so the cost of a batch released without a certificate also comes out higher. How to reflect an amount refunded later is not set out separately in the standard: set the procedure in your accounting policy for cases where the goods are still in the warehouse or have already been sold.
See also: Customs duty · Cargo customs declaration · How is the cost of imported goods built up: contract, freight, duty and exchange difference · Import and export section
Import and exportTeapots made in China were sorted by an intermediary in Turkey, repacked in its own boxes and sent on. According to the documents the cargo came from Turkey. Are the goods considered to have been produced in Turkey?
No. Under Article 358 of the Customs Code, the country of origin of goods is the place where they were wholly produced or sufficiently processed. Where they were shipped from does not decide this question.
There are two criteria for sufficient processing (Article 360), and one of them is applied: as a result of processing, the code of the goods in the Commodity Nomenclature of Foreign Economic Activity changes at the level of any of the first four digits, or the ad valorem share rule (the share of materials or of value added reaches a set level).
Under the same article, the following are not considered sufficient processing:
- operations to ensure the preservation of goods during storage or transportation;
- operations to prepare goods for sale and transportation (splitting a lot, assembling consignments, sorting, repacking and the like);
- simple assembly operations;
- mixing components without giving characteristics that differ significantly from the original composition;
- performing two or more of the four types of operations above at the same time;
- slaughter of livestock.
Both the intermediary's sorting and its repacking are on this list. So the teapots remain produced in China. The new box does not change the situation either: packaging is considered to have been produced in the same country as the goods, except where the packaging must be declared separately (Article 362).
| Stage | Country | Country code in the CCD (Appendix 5) |
|---|---|---|
| Teapots produced | China | CN |
| Sorting and repacking | Turkey | TR |
| Country of origin | China | CN |
(The example was prepared by the author; the country codes are from the CCD filling Instruction, Appendix 5.)
Practical conclusion: the certificate of origin must be requested for Chinese goods. Under Article 363 of the Code, the certificate is issued in the prescribed manner by the competent authority in the exporting or re-exporting country, so ask the intermediary in advance which document it can provide.
See also: Sample cargo customs declaration: how to read the boxes of an import declaration? · Re-export · Customs duty · Import and export section
Import and exportA foreign partner sent us a free 20 kg sample of paint for testing. How is this shown in the CCD, and do we record it as a receipt in the accounts?
In the CCD, the nature of the transaction is shown with a code from the classifier in Appendix 9 to the Instruction. It has a group "Gratuitous (free of charge) supplies", which consists of 5 codes:
| Code | Nature of the transaction |
|---|---|
| 81 | Supply as gratuitous (free of charge) aid |
| 82 | Supply at the expense of contributions to the technical assistance fund of the UN, IAEA, WHO and other international organizations |
| 84 | Supply as a gift |
| 85 | Supply free of charge as a sample and for testing |
| 86 | Supply as a grant of foreign states |
A free sample for testing corresponds to code 85 (CCD filling Instruction, Appendix 9). Even though there is no payment, the customs value is determined by one of the methods in the Code in order to calculate customs payments (Customs Code, Articles 301 and 302).
In the accounts, the sample must be recorded as a receipt. Under paragraph 27 of NAS No. 4, the cost of inventory received free of charge (under a gift agreement) is determined from its current value on the date it is accepted for accounting; if the costs listed in paragraph 15 (customs duties and fees, transportation and others) were incurred to obtain it, the cost increases by that amount.
Example (prepared by the author; the amounts are hypothetical). "Toshkent bo'yoq" LLC:
| Indicator | Amount, soums |
|---|---|
| Current value of the sample | 6,000,000 |
| Customs duty and fee (excluding VAT, hypothetical) | 700,000 |
| Delivery from the post office | 300,000 |
| Cost of the sample | 7,000,000 |
Journal entry: as material Dt 1010 – Ct 8530 "Property received free of charge", 6,000,000 soums (NAS No. 21, paragraph 104, line 5); if received for resale, Dt 2910 – Ct 8530 (paragraph 154, line 6). The standard has no separate model line for adding customs payments and transportation costs to cost; set it in your accounting policy. If import VAT is credited, it is not included in cost (paragraph 15).
Note: the taxation of property received free of charge is governed by tax legislation (NAS No. 21, paragraph 357); check this issue separately.
See also: Property received free of charge · Customs value · Cargo customs declaration · Import and export section
Import and exportWe sent the CCD to customs, and then saw that the quantity of goods from the invoice had been entered wrongly: 1,020 instead of 1,200 pieces. Can the declaration be changed?
It can, but the procedure depends on what stage you are at. Under Articles 265 and 266 of the Customs Code:
| Stage | What can be done | How |
|---|---|---|
| The declaration has not yet been accepted | Change, supplement, withdraw | By the declarant himself (Article 265) |
| Accepted, the goods have not yet been released | Change, supplement, re-process, withdraw, cancel | At the declarant's request or at the demand of customs (Article 265); withdrawal — if customs finds the reason justified (Article 266) |
| Clearance completed, the goods placed under the procedure | Change, supplement, re-process, cancel | Within the period set by the Code, at the demand of customs or on the application of an authorized person (Article 266) |
Three more rules:
- a change must not widen or narrow the scope of the declaration (Article 265);
- a customs officer is not entitled to change information in the declaration on his own initiative or at your request, except for the exceptions specified in the Code (Article 265);
- changes to an electronic CCD are made by completing a correction form (Article 266).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical). "Farg'ona elektro" LLC imported sockets: 1,200 pieces on the invoice, 1,020 pieces in the CCD by mistake. This difference affects the warehouse receipt, the customs value and the calculation of payments, so it is best to make the correction as early as possible, before the declaration is accepted.
For the accounts: if customs payments change as a result of the correction, the difference affects the cost of the goods, because customs duties and fees are included in cost (NAS No. 4, paragraph 15). The receipt documents, however, must show the quantity that actually arrived at the warehouse (1,200 pieces). If the goods were sold before the correction, set in your accounting policy how the difference is reflected.
See also: Cargo customs declaration · Declarant · Customs clearance · Import and export section
Import and exportBefore releasing the goods, customs asked us to secure the payment of customs payments. What methods are there, and which is convenient for a company?
Under Article 339 of the Customs Code, the payer chooses the method of security himself. There are five methods:
| Method | Essence | Key condition in the Code |
|---|---|---|
| Paying money into the customs authority's personal treasury account (deposit) | The money sits temporarily in the customs account | No interest is charged on the deposit for the time it is held; if the obligation is not fulfilled, the debt is taken from this amount (Article 340) |
| Pledge of goods | Property serves as security | Requirements in Articles 342–343 |
| Bank guarantee | A bank entitled to carry out banking operations in Uzbekistan issues a guarantee | The guarantee amount must not be less than the amount of payments and interest; if the obligation is not fulfilled, the amount is collected from the bank unconditionally (Article 344) |
| Insurance of the obligation to pay customs payments | A civil liability insurance policy | The security amount must not be less than the payments and interest; the amount is collected from the insurer unconditionally (Article 345) |
| Suretyship | Another legal entity or individual undertakes a written obligation | The surety pays the security amount into the treasury account; the surety and the payer are jointly and severally liable (Article 346) |
How to choose (example prepared by the author, hypothetical amounts). "Buxoro tekstil" LLC was asked for security of 90 million soums:
- deposit: 90 million soums is taken out of circulation and earns no interest — the simplest route if there is spare money;
- bank guarantee: the money stays in circulation, but the bank charges a fee for the guarantee; the bank service fee is accounted for in 9430 "Other operating expenses" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 410);
- pledge: money does not leave circulation and there is no bank fee, but the pledge agreement must be concluded in writing and notarized (Article 343), the pledged item is valued at the pledgor's expense (Article 342), and the pledged goods may be disposed of only in accordance with the pledge agreement (Article 343).
In the accounts, off-balance sheet account 009 "Security for obligations and payments – issued" is intended for guarantees issued to secure the performance of obligations and payments, and analytical accounting is kept by each security (NAS No. 21, paragraph 446). It is logical to monitor a pledge given to customs in this account as well; set this in your accounting policy. The pledged goods remain in their own account (for example, 2910). The standard has no separate model line for money transferred to a deposit; set it in your accounting policy as a refundable amount.
See also: Bank guarantee · Collateral (pledge) · 37 customs payment codes: which go into the cost of goods and which become an expense? · Import and export section
BankingI wrote a complaint to my bank. Within what period must the bank consider it, and what happens if it does not reply or breaks the rules?
The procedure for commercial banks to accept, register and consider appeals from individuals and legal entities and to reply to them is set by Central Bank Regulation No. 3030. Under it, a bank must accept oral, written and electronic appeals, must not refuse to consider them, and must do so free of charge. It must be possible to file an appeal through the bank's official website, mobile app, branches and call centre.
Deadlines:
| Stage | Deadline |
|---|---|
| Registering a written or electronic appeal in the electronic system | On the day it arrives; if it arrives after working hours, on the next working day |
| Informing the customer of the registration number and date (in writing, electronically or by SMS) | Within 3 working days |
| Considering the appeal and replying in writing or electronically | No later than 15 days |
| If additional study, checks or documents are needed | Up to one month |
| If the customer asks for a personal meeting with management, informing them of the date and time | No later than 7 days |
What the reply must look like: the bank gives a clear, reasoned answer to every issue raised, citing the legal provision where necessary. If the customer disagrees with the reply, the bank must explain the right to complain to the Central Bank or to a court. A complaint about a bank employee may not be passed to that same employee for consideration.
Inside the bank: a separate unit for handling appeals, independent of the operational business units, must be set up, an electronic control system must be kept, and systemic shortcomings found through appeals must be eliminated.
If the rules are broken (Central Bank Regulation No. 3492):
| Violation | Fine |
|---|---|
| Legal requirements broken when considering an appeal (clause 2.7) | 3 million soum per case |
| If there are more than 100 such violations (clause 2.7) | 0.01 percent of the bank's total capital, but not less than 300 million soum |
| No procedure for considering appeals, no appeals unit, no conditions for accepting appeals, or monitoring and control requirements not met (clause 2.8) | 100 million soum per case |
| No measures taken to eliminate systemic shortcomings that lead to violations of customers' rights (clause 2.9) | 0.01 percent of the bank's total capital, but not less than 300 million soum |
Important: these fines are not compensation paid to the customer. The Central Bank imposes them on the bank that broke the rules.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical situation). Javohir from Samarkand was charged twice for one purchase on his card. He wrote an appeal through the bank's mobile app and attached screenshots. A practical sequence:
- Note the date and time you sent the appeal and take a screenshot.
- If no registration number arrives within 3 working days, call the call centre and ask for it.
- If there is no reply after 15 days, ask the bank whether the appeal was taken for additional study: in that case the deadline may be up to one month. If there is still no reply after a month, the procedure has been breached.
- When the reply comes, check that each of your questions got a clear answer. If you disagree, apply to the Central Bank or a court, attaching the bank's reply and the correspondence.
Tip for a company accountant: keep a copy of every appeal about a bank error and the reply together with the bank statement. Until the money is returned, keep this amount under separate control.
See also: What fines banks pay for violating customers' rights: the full list under Central Bank Regulation No. 3492 · Banking section
TaxPeople say that after Decree PF-175 "the burden of proof lies with the state body". Does that mean our own documents no longer matter much in an audit?
Quite the opposite: they remain just as important. Presidential Decree PF-175 of 27 August 2026 sets four rules on this matter:
- until the state body proves otherwise, the entrepreneur is deemed to have acted in accordance with the law;
- it is the state body, not the entrepreneur, that proves a violation was committed;
- irremovable contradictions, ambiguities and inconsistencies in legislation are interpreted in favour of the entrepreneur;
- if the state body's evidence is insufficient, this is also interpreted in favour of the entrepreneur.
These rules determine who has to prove things first, but they do not release the entrepreneur from keeping documents. If the state body puts forward some piece of evidence, what answers it is your contract, your invoice and your payment document. When the documents are in order, it becomes easier to show that the state body's evidence is insufficient.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Gulshan qandolat" LLC (general tax regime) bought flour worth 18,000,000 soums excluding VAT from "Don mahsulot" LLC. VAT is 18,000,000 × 12% = 2,160,000 soums, a total of 20,160,000 soums. The inspector expressed doubt that the purchase actually took place. You can prepare in advance which document answers each question (the author's recommendation):
| Inspector's question | Document that answers it |
|---|---|
| Was a deal concluded? | Written contract |
| Was the flour received? | Waybill and warehouse receipt document |
| What were the price and VAT? | Electronic invoice: 18,000,000 + 2,160,000 soums |
| Was the money paid? | Payment order and bank statement: 20,160,000 soums |
| What was the flour used for? | Document releasing the flour to production |
The accounting entries also rest on these documents (NAS No. 21, paragraph 257, rows 3 and 6; paragraph 226, row 15): when the flour is received, Dt 1010 "Raw materials and supplies" – Ct 6010 18,000,000 soums; when the VAT is credited, Dt 4410 – Ct 6010 2,160,000 soums; when payment is made, Dt 6010 – Ct 5110 20,160,000 soums.
Practical tip: for every large purchase, gather the contract, invoice, receipt and payment documents in one folder (paper or electronic). Then, if a question comes up during an audit, you can show the answer within a few minutes, and this gives grounds for the dispute to be resolved in your favour.
See also: Decree PF-175: the "Second Chance" amnesty, a 15% profit tax for services at bazaars and interpretation in favour of entrepreneurs · Desk tax audit · Field tax audit
TaxOur founder wants to rent a room he owns to our company at a low rent. Do we need to worry about the minimum rent amount?
Decree PF-175 (27 August 2026) abolished the application of the minimum rent payment to real estate that a founder of a legal entity who is an individual leases or grants for free use to his own company. So if the founder rents his room to the company, the agreed rent will not cause a problem merely because it is below the minimum amount.
When does the rule apply? Three conditions must be met together:
- the property must be real estate (a building, room or warehouse);
- the owner of the property must be a founder of the company and an individual;
- the property must be leased or granted for free use to this particular founder's company.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). Sevara opa, a founder of "Durdona tikuv" LLC, rented a 40 sq. metre room she owns to the company for 1,500,000 soums a month. The room is used for management, so each month when the rent is accrued: Dt 9420 "Administrative expenses" – Ct 6910 "Operating lease payable" 1,500,000 soums; when paid: Dt 6910 – Ct 5110 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 298; paragraph 412, row 7; paragraph 226, row 25). If Sevara opa had granted the room free of charge, no rent expense would be recorded.
Note: this relief is not permission to work without documents. Conclude the lease or free-use agreement in writing and register it in the "e-ijara" system: under Article 223 of the Tax Code, goods stored in a building used under an unregistered agreement may be treated as concealment of the tax base.
See also: Decree PF-175: the "Second Chance" amnesty, a 15% profit tax for services at bazaars and interpretation in favour of entrepreneurs · Founder (participant) · Operating lease
TaxOur supplier has switched to the simplified 6% VAT regime. We are on the general regime. Can we credit the VAT on the goods we buy from it?
Yes. Under Decree PF-100 (26 May 2026, as amended by Decree PF-175), a buyer who purchases goods or services from an entrepreneur on the simplified 6% VAT regime has the right to credit the VAT. The restriction applies to the seller itself: it does not credit input VAT on the goods it purchases.
For the buyer, the only difference is in the amount: the invoice shows VAT at the 6% rate rather than 12%, so the amount that can be credited is correspondingly smaller.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Sayqal mebel" LLC (general regime) bought boards worth 10,000,000 soums excluding VAT from the "Yog'och olami" shop, which is on the 6% regime.
| Indicator | Amount |
|---|---|
| Value of goods (excluding VAT) | 10,000,000 soums |
| VAT 6% | 600,000 soums |
| Total payable | 10,600,000 soums |
Journal entries: Dt 1010 "Raw materials and supplies" – Ct 6010 10,000,000; Dt 4410 "Advance payments of taxes and levies to the budget" – Ct 6010 600,000. Had the same boards been bought from a supplier on the general regime, the VAT would have been 10,000,000 × 12% = 1,200,000 soums.
Practical tip: when comparing prices, look at the price excluding VAT, not at the final amount including VAT. For example, when comparing 10,600,000 soums offered by a seller on the 6% regime with 11,200,000 soums (10,000,000 + 1,200,000) from a seller at the 12% rate, the value excluding VAT is the same in both cases — the difference is only in the amount of VAT that can be credited.
See also: New tax relief for small businesses: a simplified 6% VAT regime and other changes (Decree PF-100) · Input VAT · Simplified VAT regime
TaxWe pay turnover tax. What is the threshold for switching to the general tax regime in soums, and how is it calculated?
Under Decree PF-100, from 1 June 2026 the threshold for switching to the general tax regime is set at 12,000 times the base calculation amount (BCA). The threshold is not fixed in soums; it is tied to the BCA. So if the BCA changes, the threshold expressed in soums changes too.
Under Decree PF-115, from 1 September 2026 the BCA is 440,000 soums. Calculation: 440,000 × 12,000 = 5,280,000,000 soums, i.e. 5.28 billion soums.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Mehrigiyo market" compares its income with the threshold every month:
| Date | Cumulative income | Remaining to threshold |
|---|---|---|
| End of September | 4,260,000,000 soums | 1,020,000,000 soums |
| End of October | 4,620,000,000 soums | 660,000,000 soums |
In one month income grew by 360,000,000 soums. If this pace continues, the remaining 660,000,000 soums will be used up in about 1.8 months (660,000,000 : 360,000,000). This is a warning for the shop: preparation for the general regime should start now.
What does preparation involve? Collecting invoices from suppliers in an orderly way so that input VAT can be credited, setting up accounting software that keeps VAT and corporate profit tax records, and reviewing prices to include VAT.
Note: which period's income is compared with the threshold and from which date the switch takes effect are set by the Tax Code, so check the exact date in the current version.
See also: From 1 September the minimum wage is 1,360,000 and the BCA 440,000 soums: recalculated thresholds and fines for accountants · Turnover tax · Turnover tax or corporate profit tax: what is the difference?
TaxWe want to opt out of the simplified 6% VAT regime and return to the general regime. From when do we return, and what happens to the VAT included in the price of goods in the warehouse?
Under Decree PF-100, both switching to the simplified regime and opting out of it take effect from the first day of the month following the month in which the notification was sent. That is, regardless of which day of the month the notification is sent, the new regime starts on the 1st of the following month.
About goods in the warehouse: on returning to the general regime, the taxpayer may, in the established manner, credit the VAT included in the carrying amount of the balances of inventories and long-term assets on its balance sheet at the date of the switch. Under the 6% regime this VAT was not credited and went into cost; now an opportunity to recover it arises.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Lazzat oshxonasi" sent a notification of opting out on 20 November. The general regime starts on 1 December. As at 1 December, the warehouse holds products bought from suppliers on the general regime:
| Indicator | Amount |
|---|---|
| Carrying amount of the products (including VAT) | 16,800,000 soums |
| Of which VAT shown in invoices (15,000,000 × 12%) | 1,800,000 soums |
| VAT to be considered for credit | 1,800,000 soums |
For products bought at the market without VAT, there is no VAT to credit, because their price did not include VAT.
Practical tip: before sending the notification, carry out an inventory count as at the switch date and link the balances to the suppliers' invoices: if you can show which goods arrived with which document and with how much VAT, crediting will be easy.
See also: New tax relief for small businesses: a simplified 6% VAT regime and other changes (Decree PF-100) · Who benefits from the simplified 6% VAT regime? A calculation for two businesses · Inventory count (stocktaking)
AccountingDuring the month we bought the same goods at different prices. At what price do we write off what was sold: the price of the first arrivals or the average price?
Under paragraph 62 of NAS No. 4, the value of the inventory balance and of inventories being disposed of is determined by one of three methods: at the identified cost of the relevant unit, at weighted average cost (AVECO), or at the cost of the inventories purchased first (FIFO). For each group of inventories only one method is applied throughout the year, and it is chosen based on the consistency of the accounting policy (paragraph 63); the value of the balance at the end of the period is also determined according to the chosen method (paragraph 67).
Under FIFO, the cost of goods sold first takes the price of the earliest batch, while the balance at the end of the month remains at the prices of the latest batches (paragraph 66). Under AVECO, total cost is divided by total quantity (paragraph 65).
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). At the beginning of the month the "Shirin diyor" shop has 100 boxes of biscuits at 20,000 soums each (2,000,000 soums). In the middle of the month another 200 boxes arrived at 23,000 soums (4,600,000 soums). During the month 250 boxes were sold.
| Indicator | FIFO | AVECO |
|---|---|---|
| Cost of the 250 boxes sold | 100 × 20,000 + 150 × 23,000 = 5,450,000 soums | 6,600,000 : 300 = 22,000; 250 × 22,000 = 5,500,000 soums |
| Balance of 50 boxes at month-end | 50 × 23,000 = 1,150,000 soums | 50 × 22,000 = 1,100,000 soums |
Under both methods a total of 6,600,000 soums is allocated; it is just split differently between goods sold and the balance. Journal entry: Dt 9120 "Cost of goods sold" – Ct 2910 "Goods in the warehouse" (5,450,000 under FIFO, 5,500,000 soums under AVECO).
When prices are rising, FIFO shows a lower cost of sales and a higher balance. Whichever method is chosen, do not change it in the middle of the year.
See also: At what cost is material issued from the warehouse written off: FIFO or weighted average? · FIFO method · Weighted average cost method (AVECO)
AccountingIn our shop goods are recorded at selling price. How do we determine the cost of goods sold at the end of the month?
When goods in retail trade are kept at selling price, the markup is accumulated separately in contra account 2980 "Trade markup" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 152). Under paragraph 61 of NAS No. 4, the cost of goods sold is found by subtracting from their selling value the trade markup attributable to those goods.
Markup attributable to goods sold = sales turnover × average trade markup percentage.
Average percentage = (markup balance at the beginning of the period + markup on goods received during the period) : (selling value of the goods balance at the beginning of the period + selling value of goods received during the period).
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures; VAT ignored for simplicity). The "Bodomzor" shop:
| Indicator | Selling value | Of which markup |
|---|---|---|
| Balance at the beginning of the month | 10,000,000 soums | 2,000,000 soums |
| Goods received during the month | 30,000,000 soums | 6,000,000 soums |
| Total | 40,000,000 soums | 8,000,000 soums |
Average percentage: 8,000,000 : 40,000,000 = 20%. During the month goods worth 25,000,000 soums were sold. The markup attributable to them: 25,000,000 × 20% = 5,000,000 soums. Cost: 25,000,000 − 5,000,000 = 20,000,000 soums.
Journal entries (NAS No. 21, paragraph 154): when goods arrive, Dt 2920 – Ct 6010 24,000,000 (purchase value) and Dt 2920 – Ct 2980 6,000,000 (markup); disposal of goods sold, Dt 9120 – Ct 2920 25,000,000; markup relating to goods sold, Dt 2980 – Ct 9120 5,000,000. As a result, 20,000,000 soums remain in 9120.
Check: at the end of the month goods worth 15,000,000 soums (selling value) remained; their markup is 3,000,000 and their cost 12,000,000 soums. Opening cost 8,000,000 + purchases 24,000,000 = 32,000,000 = sold 20,000,000 + balance 12,000,000.
See also: Trade markup · Cost of products (goods, work, services) sold · Accounting section
AccountingWe owe a foreign supplier in dollars, and we have paid another one an advance in dollars. At the end of the month the exchange rate changed. Do we remeasure both?
No, only the payable. Under paragraph 8 of NAS No. 22, monetary items in foreign currency are revalued every month at the Central Bank rate on the last date of the reporting month. A payable to be settled in currency is a monetary item (paragraph 9). But advances given without a right of return are excluded from monetary items: they are non-monetary items and are not remeasured when the rate changes (paragraphs 9 and 10).
The exchange difference is income or expense from financial activities (paragraph 11): a positive difference is recorded in account 9540 "Foreign exchange gains", a negative difference in account 9620 "Foreign exchange losses" (NAS No. 21, paragraphs 417 and 424).
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical rates). "Ipak yo'li elektronika" LLC:
| Item | At the recognition date | At month-end | Exchange difference |
|---|---|---|---|
| Payable to supplier A $5,000 | rate 12,000: 60,000,000 soums | rate 12,100: 60,500,000 soums | 500,000 soums loss |
| Advance to supplier B $2,000 | rate 11,900: 23,800,000 soums | not remeasured | none |
Journal entry: Dt 9620 – Ct 6010 500,000 soums (the payable increased in soums). The advance remains in account 4310 at 23,800,000 soums. When goods arrive from B, the part equal to the advance is recognised at the rate on the date the advance was paid (paragraph 12): Dt 2910 – Ct 6010 23,800,000, then the advance is offset: Dt 6010 – Ct 4310 23,800,000.
Tip: mark each currency balance as "monetary" or "non-monetary". Then, in the month-end revaluation, you will not remeasure advances by mistake.
See also: When the exchange rate changes, where is the exchange difference recorded in the accounts? · Exchange difference · Monetary items
AccountingWe revalued our land plot: one year its value went up, and the next year it fell even below the original. How do we record this?
Under NAS No. 5, after recognition a fixed asset is carried at its original or revalued amount, and the chosen method is stated in the accounting policy (paragraph 12). If the revaluation method is chosen, it is applied to all groups of fixed assets (paragraph 29). The amount of an increase in value is recorded in the account "Adjustments from revaluation of long-term assets" within reserve capital (paragraph 30).
Under paragraph 354 of NAS No. 21, an increase is recorded on the credit of 8510. If the value later decreases, the part within the increase previously accumulated for the same item is recorded on the debit of 8510, and any decrease exceeding it is recognised as an expense in account 9430 "Other operating expenses".
A land plot is a convenient example: it is not depreciated (NAS No. 5, paragraph 38), so depreciation does not get mixed into the calculation.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). The land plot of "Yashil vodiy agro" LLC is carried at 300,000,000 soums.
| Stage | New value | Change | Journal entry |
|---|---|---|---|
| End of year 1 | 360,000,000 | +60,000,000 | Dt 0110 – Ct 8510 60,000,000 |
| End of year 2 | 280,000,000 | −80,000,000 | Dt 8510 – Ct 0110 60,000,000; Dt 9430 – Ct 0110 20,000,000 |
In the second year the decrease is 80,000,000 soums. Of this, 60,000,000 soums is closed from 8510 against the earlier increase, and the remaining 20,000,000 soums (80,000,000 − 60,000,000) becomes an expense of that year. As a result, the balance in 8510 for this item falls to zero, and the land is carried at 280,000,000 soums.
Tip: keep the analytical records for 8510 separately for each item; otherwise there is a risk of covering a decrease in one item with an increase in another.
See also: Revaluation of long-term assets · Fixed asset (property, plant and equipment) · NAS No. 5
AccountingUnder a state programme we received a subsidy to buy new equipment. Do we show this money as income all at once in the month it arrived?
No. Under NAS No. 10, government assistance is recognised as income systematically over the periods in which the expenses it compensates are recognised (paragraph 9). Assistance related to a depreciable asset is usually transferred to income over the periods in which depreciation is charged on that asset and in proportion to the depreciation charged (paragraph 12).
There are two ways to present asset-related assistance (paragraph 16):
- the assistance is presented as earmarked receipts and is regularly transferred to income over the useful life of the asset;
- the assistance reduces the carrying amount of the asset and affects the financial result through lower depreciation.
The chosen method is set in the accounting policy and disclosed in the notes (paragraph 20). One more condition: government assistance is not recognised until there is reasonable assurance that the company will comply with the conditions and that the assistance will be received (paragraph 7).
Under NAS No. 21 (paragraph 374, rows 1 and 2), when notice of the subsidy is received, Dt 4890 "Other receivables" – Ct 8820 "Subsidies" is recorded, and when the money arrives, Dt 5110 – Ct 4890.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Oqtepa sut" LLC bought pasteurisation equipment for 150,000,000 soums, with a useful life of 5 years and straight-line depreciation. A subsidy of 60,000,000 soums was received for the equipment.
| Indicator | Method 1: earmarked receipts | Method 2: reducing the carrying amount |
|---|---|---|
| Carrying amount of the equipment | 150,000,000 soums | 150,000,000 − 60,000,000 = 90,000,000 soums |
| Annual depreciation | 150,000,000 : 5 = 30,000,000 soums | 90,000,000 : 5 = 18,000,000 soums |
| Subsidy transferred to income during the year | 60,000,000 × 30,000,000 : 150,000,000 = 12,000,000 soums | not shown separately |
| Net effect on the annual result | 30,000,000 − 12,000,000 = 18,000,000 soums expense | 18,000,000 soums expense |
Under both methods the effect on annual profit is the same: 18,000,000 soums. The difference is in how the statements look: under the first method the balance sheet shows the equipment at full value and a separate balance of earmarked receipts; under the second, the equipment appears at the reduced value. At the end of the first year under method 1, 60,000,000 − 12,000,000 = 48,000,000 soums remain in 8820.
If the conditions are not met, the assistance is repaid, and this does not adjust prior periods: asset-related assistance is reflected by reducing the balance of earmarked receipts or by increasing the carrying amount of the asset (paragraph 19).
Practical tip: track the subsidy conditions (type of asset, location, period for purchasing or holding it) in a separate list. Selling the equipment early or moving it elsewhere may lead to having to repay the assistance.
See also: Subsidy · Earmarked receipts · NAS No. 10
AuditOur director ordered that certain documents not be given to the auditor. How does this affect the report?
When management restricts the auditor's work, this is called a limitation on the scope of the audit. Under the logic of ISA 705, the auditor first asks management to remove the limitation. If management does not agree, the auditor informs those charged with governance (for example, the supervisory board) and tries to obtain the evidence by alternative means.
If the alternative means also fail, there is no sufficient appropriate evidence. The report is then chosen depending on how large the effect could be:
| Effect of the part for which no evidence was obtained | Result |
|---|---|
| Could be material, but not pervasive | Qualified opinion |
| Could be both material and pervasive | Disclaimer of opinion (or, where possible, the auditor withdraws from the engagement) |
Note the difference: in an adverse opinion the auditor has gathered evidence and seen the misstatement; in a disclaimer of opinion, he does not have sufficient evidence to reach a conclusion at all.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). In the audit of "Oltin kalit qurilish", the director did not provide the settlement documents with one contractor; the payable to this contractor is 45,000,000 soums, and materiality is 30,000,000 soums. The effect could be material but is confined to one item: a qualified opinion. In another case, if the director did not provide any bank statements or main contracts, cash, receivables, payables and revenue would all remain unchecked: this could lead to a disclaimer of opinion.
Practical conclusion: hiding documents costs the company dearly. When a user of the statements (a bank, investor, founder) sees that no opinion was expressed in the report, they cannot make decisions relying on the statements. If you think a document should not be provided, it is better to discuss it openly with the auditor in advance.
See also: Disclaimer of opinion · Modified opinion · Audit evidence
AuditThe auditor's report has a paragraph called "Other Matter". Is it the same as the "Emphasis of Matter" paragraph?
No. Both are additional paragraphs set out in ISA 706, and neither changes the auditor's opinion, but they draw attention to different things.
| Feature | "Emphasis of Matter" | "Other Matter" |
|---|---|---|
| What it refers to | A matter appropriately presented in the statements or disclosed in the notes | A matter not presented in the statements |
| Why it is needed | The matter is of fundamental importance to users' understanding of the statements | The matter is relevant to understanding the audit, the auditor's responsibilities or the report |
| Condition | The auditor has obtained sufficient evidence that the statements are not materially misstated in respect of this matter | Legislation does not prohibit providing such information |
Example (compiled by the author). This year "Charxpalak mebel" changed auditors. Last year's statements were audited by another auditor. In the "Other Matter" paragraph of his report, the new auditor writes that the comparative figures were audited by another auditor and what opinion that auditor expressed. This information is not in the statements themselves, but it helps the user understand the limits of the audit.
If a fire broke out in the same company's warehouse and the company disclosed the loss in detail in the notes, the auditor may add an "Emphasis of Matter" paragraph to draw the reader's attention to that very note.
Remember: something in the statements — emphasis of matter; something not in the statements but worth knowing about the audit — other matter.
See also: Emphasis of matter · Auditor's report · Audit section
AuditThe auditor finished the fieldwork at the end of February but signed the report with a date in mid-March. Why?
Under the logic of ISA 700, the auditor's report is not dated earlier than the date on which the auditor obtained sufficient appropriate evidence on which to base his opinion. This evidence includes two things:
- that all the forms making up the statements, including the notes, have been fully prepared;
- that the authorised persons (management) have confirmed that they take responsibility for the statements.
In other words, the day the auditor's work at the office ends is not yet the report date. Until management finalises and approves the statements, the statements on which the auditor is expressing an opinion are not yet ready.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical dates).
| Date | Event |
|---|---|
| 27 February | The audit team finished its work at the company |
| 6 March | The accounting department made the adjustments proposed by the auditor and finalised the notes |
| 12 March | The director approved the statements and signed the written representation |
| 12 March | Date of the auditor's report (it cannot be earlier than this) |
Why does the date matter? The report date shows up to which day the auditor has taken events into account. For example, if a major customer of "Sharq nur savdo" goes bankrupt on 3 March, this happened before 12 March, so the auditor must examine it and see that it is properly reflected in the statements.
Practical tip: do not delay giving the auditor the final statements and notes. The longer the report date is pushed back, the longer the period the auditor has to monitor.
See also: Auditor's report · Written representations from management · What stages does an audit go through?
AuditThe auditor checked 40 invoices and found misstatements in 2 of them. When we said "that's a small amount", he said the misstatement for the whole year could be larger. How so?
An auditor often checks a sample rather than every document. The logic of drawing conclusions from a sample is that a misstatement found in the sample may exist in a similar proportion in the whole population. So the auditor evaluates not the misstatement found as such, but its amount projected (extrapolated) to the whole population.
One simple method: find the misstatement's share of the sample amount and multiply it by the population amount.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). The sales invoices of "Zilol suv" LLC for the year total 900,000,000 soums. The auditor selected 40 of them worth 80,000,000 soums and found overstated revenue totalling 1,200,000 soums in 2 of them.
| Indicator | Calculation |
|---|---|
| Misstatement rate | 1,200,000 : 80,000,000 = 1.5% |
| Projection to the population | 900,000,000 × 1.5% = 13,500,000 soums |
| Performance materiality (hypothetical) | 10,000,000 soums |
The misstatement found is only 1.2 million soums, but the projection is 13.5 million soums, which exceeds materiality. In such a case the auditor usually extends the testing, identifies the cause of the misstatement (for example, whether it relates to one manager or one month), or asks management to check the whole population and make corrections.
Important point: if the misstatement is not random but has a single cause (for example, only in December documents), the auditor may confine the analysis to that part. That is why being able to explain the cause quickly when a misstatement is found serves the company's interests.
If an uncorrected misstatement remains material, the auditor may modify the opinion (issue a qualified or adverse opinion).
See also: Audit sampling · Materiality · Does the auditor check every document or take a sample?
Financial reportingWe put part of our spare cash on a two-month deposit and part on a six-month deposit. Will both appear as "cash" in the statement of cash flows?
No, the two are treated differently. NAS No. 9 (paragraph 3) defines cash equivalents as "short-term (3 months or less), highly liquid investments" that are readily convertible into a known amount of cash and subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.
Therefore:
- the two-month deposit is a cash equivalent and appears together with cash in the statement;
- the six-month deposit does not fall within this limit; it is an investment.
An important conclusion follows. Under paragraph 8, movements between cash and cash equivalents are not cash flows; they are part of cash management. Money placed on the six-month deposit, however, is shown as an outflow from investing activities, because it is the purchase of an investment that is not a cash equivalent (the definition of investing activities in paragraph 3).
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). At the beginning of December "Zarafshon qandolat" had 120 million soums in its account. In December it placed 30 million soums on a two-month deposit and 50 million soums on a six-month deposit.
| Lines | Amount |
|---|---|
| Balance in the bank account | 40 million soums |
| Two-month deposit (cash equivalent) | 30 million soums |
| Cash and cash equivalents at year-end | 70 million soums |
| Investing activities: money placed on the six-month deposit | −50 million soums |
The 30 million soum transfer does not appear in the statement as any flow at all: the money merely changed form.
Tip: at year-end, sort your deposit agreements by term; then the closing balance in the statement of cash flows can easily be reconciled with the balance sheet (paragraph 31 requires this).
See also: Cash equivalents · Investing activities · Cash flow
Financial reportingWe sold an old truck and bought a new one, adding extra money. Can we show only the difference in the statement of cash flows?
No. Under NAS No. 9 (paragraph 18), gross cash receipts and gross cash payments from investing and financing activities are shown separately; net presentation (difference only) is permitted only in the cases listed in paragraph 19, and replacing a vehicle is not among them.
Both transactions belong to investing activities: paragraph 13 lists both payments to acquire fixed assets and receipts from their sale as investing flows, and paragraph 11 specifically stresses that cash flows from the sale of a fixed asset are included in investing activities.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Marg'ilon yuk tashish" sold its old truck for 40 million soums, and the money was received in its bank account. The truck's carrying amount was 30 million soums. Then 150 million soums was paid for a new truck.
| Investing activities | Amount |
|---|---|
| Receipts from the sale of a fixed asset | 40 million soums |
| Payment to acquire a fixed asset | −150 million soums |
| Net cash flow from investing activities | −110 million soums |
There is one more subtle point. The sale produced a gain of 40 − 30 = 10 million soums, which appears in the statement of financial results (9310 "Gain on disposal of fixed assets"). If operating cash flow is prepared using the indirect method, these 10 million soums are deducted from net profit: under paragraphs 15 and 17, an adjustment is made for income related to investing cash flows. Otherwise this amount would appear twice in the statement.
Exception: payments and receipts for assets acquired to be leased out and then sold belong to operating activities (paragraph 11).
See also: Investing activities · Fixed asset (property, plant and equipment) · Operating activities
Financial reportingWe took equipment on lease and have not paid a single soum yet. Does it appear as an investing outflow in the statement of cash flows?
No. Under NAS No. 9 (paragraph 30), investing and financing transactions that do not require the use of cash or cash equivalents are excluded from the statement of cash flows. The first example of a non-cash transaction given in that paragraph is the acquisition of assets under a finance lease.
But the transaction is not hidden: under paragraph 30 it is disclosed, with all relevant information, elsewhere in the financial statements (in practice, in the notes).
Subsequent lease payments, however, are real cash outflows. Paragraph 14 lists cash payments under a finance lease among the main flows of financing activities. The company chooses once, under paragraphs 23–24, which activity to include the interest portion of the payment in, and consistently keeps that approach every year.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). In November "Shahrisabz plastik" took moulding equipment worth 240 million soums on lease. In December the first payment of 20 million soums was transferred.
| Where it appears | Amount |
|---|---|
| Investing activities: purchase of equipment | not shown (non-cash transaction) |
| Financing activities: lease payment | −20 million soums |
| Note: equipment acquired under a lease | 240 million soums, with its terms |
So a bank or founder reading the statements finds the answer to "where did the equipment come from?" in the notes, while the cash flows show only the money that actually left.
See also: Finance lease · Financing activities · Cash flow
Financial reportingAt year-end one court case is ongoing: we are a claimant, and there is also a claim against us. The outcome is unknown. How do we show these in the annual statements?
This is a "contingency" under NAS No. 16: under paragraph 4, a situation whose final outcome (gain or loss) will be confirmed only by the occurrence of one or more uncertain future events. The standard treats gains and losses differently, that is, prudently.
If we are the claimant (an expected gain). Under paragraph 9, a contingent gain is not shown as income in the statements. Exception: a situation where the gain is highly probable. Then it is not considered a contingent gain and is recognised in the statements.
If there is a claim against us (an expected loss). Under paragraph 11, the amount of the loss is treated as a liability in the statements if:
- at the balance sheet date it is probable that future events will reduce the value of assets;
- it is possible to determine the value (estimate) of the future loss.
Even if the loss is not recognised in the statements, its nature and estimate are disclosed in the notes; the only exception is where the probability of loss is remote (paragraphs 12 and 17). What the note says (paragraph 18): the nature of the contingency; the uncertain events that may affect the future outcome; an estimate of the financial effect, or evidence that it cannot be estimated. The estimate is made by the head of the organisation (paragraph 8).
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Qo'qon qadoq" has sued a supplier to recover 60 million soums for poor-quality raw materials; the outcome is uncertain. At the same time, a customer has sued it for 25 million soums for a late delivery; the lawyer considers the probability of losing high and the amount in the statement of claim certain.
| Claim | In the statements |
|---|---|
| 60 million soums we are claiming | not shown as income (paragraph 9) |
| 25 million soums claimed from us | as a liability, since both conditions are met (paragraph 11), and in the notes (paragraph 12) |
Tip: get the lawyer's opinion in writing. The head's estimate rests on exactly this document, and it is the first thing the auditor will ask for.
See also: If a significant event happens after the year is closed, should the statements be adjusted or is a note enough? · Balance sheet
Financial reportingDuring the year there were no movements on our foreign currency account, but because the exchange rate changed, the balance in soums increased. Where is this difference recorded in the statement of cash flows?
An exchange difference is not a cash flow: nobody transferred money to you. NAS No. 9 (paragraph 22) says so: unrealised gains and losses arising from changes in exchange rates are not cash flows.
But the opening and closing balances in the statement must agree. Therefore, under paragraph 22, the effect of exchange rate changes on cash held in foreign currency is shown in the statement of cash flows on a separate line: outside the operating, investing and financing flows.
In the accounts, a positive exchange difference on a monetary item is recorded in account 9540 "Foreign exchange gains" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 417): Dt 5210 – Ct 9540. This income increases net profit but brings in no cash. For that reason, under the indirect method it is adjusted as a non-cash item, being an unrealised exchange difference (NAS No. 9, paragraph 17).
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical rates). "Buxoro gilam" held 10,000 US dollars in its foreign currency account throughout the year. At the beginning of the year the hypothetical rate was 12,000 soums, at year-end 12,500 soums.
| Line | Amount |
|---|---|
| Opening balance (10,000 × 12,000) | 120,000,000 soums |
| Operating, investing, financing flows | 0 |
| Effect of exchange rate changes | +5,000,000 soums |
| Closing balance (10,000 × 12,500) | 125,000,000 soums |
When the rate falls it works the same way, except that the effect is negative and the loss is recorded in account 9620 "Foreign exchange losses".
See also: When the exchange rate changes, where is the exchange difference recorded in the accounts? · Exchange difference · Cash flow
FinanceOne bank offers "24% a year, interest added monthly", another "25% a year, interest at year-end". Which is better for the depositor?
To compare them, you need to bring both to the same measure, the effective annual rate. If interest is added to the principal each month, the next month's interest is calculated on this increased amount, so the actual growth by year-end turns out higher than the announced rate.
Formula: effective rate = (1 + annual rate / 12)^12 − 1.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical rates). A depositor wants to deposit 10,000,000 soums.
| Offer | Calculation | At year-end |
|---|---|---|
| A: 24%, added monthly (2% a month) | 10,000,000 × 1.02^12 = 10,000,000 × 1.26824 | 12,682,418 soums |
| B: 25%, once at year-end | 10,000,000 × 1.25 | 12,500,000 soums |
The effective rate of offer A is about 26.82%, i.e. higher both than the announced 24% and than the 25% in offer B. Offer A is better for the depositor: the difference is 182,418 soums.
When borrowing, the logic is reversed: the more often interest is capitalised, the more expensive it is for the borrower.
Tip: when comparing offers, always ask two questions: how often is interest added, and what happens if you withdraw early?
See also: Compound interest · Time value of money · Finance section
FinanceCan I quickly estimate, without a calculator, in how many years my money will double?
Yes, financiers use the "rule of 72" for this: divide 72 by the annual compound interest rate (in percent), and you get the approximate doubling time.
Doubling time ≈ 72 / annual rate.
Let's check (calculation compiled by the author):
| Annual rate | Rule of 72 | Exact calculation (10 million soums) |
|---|---|---|
| 8% | 72 / 8 = 9 years | 10,000,000 × 1.08^9 ≈ 19,990,046 soums |
| 12% | 72 / 12 = 6 years | 10,000,000 × 1.12^6 ≈ 19,738,227 soums |
As you can see, the rule gives a very close result, but it is an approximation, not an exact formula.
The rule can also be used in reverse. If a business plan says "we will double the capital in 4 years", that means growth of about 72 / 4 = 18% a year. Exact check: 1.18^4 ≈ 1.94, i.e. slightly short of doubling.
It also applies to inflation: if prices rise by X% every year, the purchasing power of money halves in roughly 72 / X years.
Tip: if someone says "your money will double in 3 years", you immediately see that an annual return of 72 / 3 = 24% is being promised. Be sure to ask what such a promise is based on and what the risks are.
See also: Compound interest · Inflation · Finance section
FinanceIf sales rise by 10%, does our profit also rise by 10%? Why does profit sometimes grow or fall much faster?
No, profit usually changes faster than sales. The reason is fixed costs (rent, administrative staff salaries): they stay put even when sales change. This effect is called operating leverage.
Degree of operating leverage = contribution margin / operating profit, where contribution margin = revenue − variable costs.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). Monthly figures of the "Chorsu non" bakery, million soums:
| Indicator | Now | Sales +10% | Sales −10% |
|---|---|---|---|
| Revenue | 100 | 110 | 90 |
| Variable costs (raw materials and fuel, assumed to be 60% of revenue) | 60 | 66 | 54 |
| Contribution margin | 40 | 44 | 36 |
| Fixed costs | 30 | 30 | 30 |
| Operating profit | 10 | 14 | 6 |
Degree of leverage = 40 / 10 = 4. So a 1% change in sales changes profit by about 4%: when sales rose 10%, profit went from 10 to 14 (+40%); when sales fell 10%, from 10 to 6 (−40%).
Practical conclusion: a business with high fixed costs gets rich quickly in good months and slips into a loss quickly in bad ones. Before adding a new fixed cost (for example, additional rent), calculate the degree of leverage and check how close you are to the break-even point.
See also: Break-even point · Profitability · Finance section
FinancePart of our money belongs to the founders, part is a bank loan. At a minimum, how much must a new project return for us to say it "pays for itself"?
For this, the weighted average cost of capital (English abbreviation WACC) is calculated. Each source has a "price": for the bank it is the loan interest, for the founders it is the return they expect on their own money. The average cost is found by multiplying the price of each source by its share in total capital and adding them up.
WACC = (equity share × return expected by founders) + (debt share × loan interest).
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical rates, tax effect ignored for simplicity). "Termiz sement" has capital of 500 million soums:
| Source | Amount | Share | Price | Contribution |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Founders' capital | 300 million soums | 60% | 20% | 12% |
| Bank loan | 200 million soums | 40% | 15% | 6% |
| Total | 500 million soums | 100% | 18% |
So if a project returns less than 18% a year, it does not cover the "price" of capital. For example, a project returning 16% is enough to pay the bank's interest, but cannot provide the return the founders expect.
This indicator is also used as the discount rate in calculating net present value (NPV): the project's future cash flows are brought to present value at exactly this rate.
Tip: do not guess the return the founders expect; agree on it openly with them and record it in the minutes of decisions.
See also: Net present value (NPV) · Discounting · Finance section
FinanceIf we take a loan and expand the business, will the founders' return on their own money increase, or the opposite?
Either can happen. This is the financial leverage effect: if the return generated by assets is higher than the loan interest, debt increases the return on equity; if it is lower, debt reduces it. Debt works like a "magnifying glass": it enlarges both the good and the bad.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures, tax ignored for simplicity). The founders of "Kattaqo'rg'on tekstil" contributed capital of 200 million soums. Two options: A — own money only; B — an additional loan of 100 million soums (hypothetical 15% interest).
Case 1: assets return 20% a year.
| Indicator | A | B |
|---|---|---|
| Assets | 200 million | 300 million |
| Profit before interest and tax (20%) | 40 million | 60 million |
| Loan interest | 0 | 15 million |
| Profit left for founders | 40 million | 45 million |
| Return on equity (on 200 million) | 20% | 22.5% |
Case 2: the market slows and assets return 10% a year.
| Indicator | A | B |
|---|---|---|
| Profit before interest and tax (10%) | 20 million | 30 million |
| Loan interest | 0 | 15 million |
| Profit left for founders | 20 million | 15 million |
| Return on equity | 10% | 7.5% |
Conclusion: when the return on assets (20%) is higher than the loan interest (15%), the loan is beneficial; when it is lower (10%), it is harmful. And interest is paid regardless of how the market goes.
Tip: before taking a loan, also calculate a "bad year" scenario as above.
See also: Financial leverage · Profitability · Finance section
InsuranceWe suffered a loss for the second time this year. The insurer says "the sum insured decreased after the first payout". Can that happen?
It can; it depends on the type of sum insured in the contract.
- Aggregate sum insured: an overall limit for the term of the contract. Each indemnity paid is deducted from the limit, and for the next event payment is made only within the remainder.
- Non-aggregate sum insured: the limit applies to each event separately and does not decrease after payouts.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures, no deductible assumed for simplicity). The sum insured of the "Nurota sovutgich" warehouse is 50 million soums. Two events occurred during the year: a loss of 20 million soums in March and 35 million soums in September.
| Event | Paid under aggregate sum | Remaining limit | Paid under non-aggregate sum |
|---|---|---|---|
| March: 20 million loss | 20 million | 30 million | 20 million |
| September: 35 million loss | 30 million | 0 | 35 million |
| Total indemnity | 50 million | 55 million |
Under the aggregate contract, 5 million soums of the September loss remained uncovered, and until the contract expired the property was effectively unprotected.
Tip: read in advance how the type of sum is written in the contract. If it is aggregate, ask the insurer whether the limit can be reinstated after a large payout and on what terms.
See also: Sum insured · Insurance payout · Insurance section
InsuranceOur vehicle is worth 150 million soums. If we insure it for 200 million soums "just in case", will we get more money in the event of a loss?
No. The essence of property insurance is to compensate the loss suffered, not to enrich the insured. Therefore the indemnity is limited to the actual loss on the property: if the vehicle is worth 150 million soums, the loss will not exceed 150 million soums even if it is completely destroyed. The premium paid for the excess 50 million soums of sum insured is effectively wasted. The exact fate of the contract and the premium for the excess part is determined by legislation and the terms of the contract.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical rate of 2%). A truck of "Jizzax logistika":
| Option | Sum insured | Annual premium (2%) | Loss on total destruction |
|---|---|---|---|
| Over-insurance | 200 million soums | 4,000,000 soums | 150 million soums |
| At actual value | 150 million soums | 3,000,000 soums | 150 million soums |
Difference: 1,000,000 soums a year paid for nothing.
There is also the opposite mistake: if the property rises in value but the sum stays the same, the property ends up insured for less than its value, and the indemnity for partial losses may be reduced.
Tip: review the sum insured every year when renewing the contract, based on the current value of the property. Support the value with a valuer's report or prices of similar property.
See also: In property insurance, is the payout made at the new price or is wear and tear deducted? · Sum insured · Insurance rate
InsuranceThe insurer said "the loss ratio in this type of insurance is high, we are raising the rate". How is the loss ratio calculated?
The loss ratio shows what part of the premiums collected by the insurer went to indemnities:
Loss ratio = indemnities / earned premiums × 100%.
Earned premium means the premium attributable to the part of the period during which insurance cover was actually provided. If business expenses (agent fees, staff, office) are added to it, a combined ratio is obtained: if it is below 100%, the insurer makes a profit on that type of insurance itself; if it is above, it makes a loss.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). One-year results of an insurer for truck insurance:
| Indicator | Amount | Relative to premiums |
|---|---|---|
| Earned premiums | 800 million soums | 100% |
| Indemnities paid and expected to be paid | 480 million soums | 60% (loss ratio) |
| Business expenses | 240 million soums | 30% |
| Result from this type of insurance | 80 million soums | 10% |
The combined ratio is 60% + 30% = 90%, i.e. 10 soums remain out of every 100 soums of premium. If next year indemnities rise to 600 million soums, the ratio will be (600 + 240) / 800 = 105%, and the insurer will make a loss. Hence the wish to raise the rate.
The benefit for the client: you understand the reason for the rate increase and can put forward your own arguments in negotiations. For example, if no indemnity has been claimed under your contract for several years, or if you have taken risk-reducing measures (security, GPS), point these out.
See also: Insurance rate · Insurer · Insurance section
InsuranceWe took out a one-year policy on 1 October and paid the premium in full. As at 31 December, what part of this money counts as "used"?
A one-year premium is paid for cover throughout the whole year. So it is "earned" gradually as time passes:
- earned portion: relates to the period for which cover has already been provided;
- unearned portion: relates to the period that has not yet come; for the insurer it is an obligation not yet fulfilled.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Samarqand mebel" insures its administrative building from 1 October 2026 to 30 September 2027 and pays a premium of 9,600,000 soums. Per month: 9,600,000 / 12 = 800,000 soums.
| As at 31 December | Months | Amount |
|---|---|---|
| Earned portion (October–December) | 3 | 2,400,000 soums |
| Unearned portion (January–September) | 9 | 7,200,000 soums |
On the policyholder's side (yours), the same split shows up in the accounts. NAS No. 21 (paragraph 156, subparagraph "b") includes the advance payment of annual property insurance among deferred expenses, and paragraph 157 requires them to be transferred to expenses over the set period. Since the building is administrative, in 2026 2,400,000 soums is charged to account 9420 "Administrative expenses" (each month Dt 9420 – Ct 3190, 800,000 soums each; paragraph 161, row 7), while the remaining 7,200,000 soums stays on the balance sheet at year-end as the balance of 3190 "Other prepaid expenses" and becomes an expense of 2027.
Thus, it is not the whole 9.6 million soums but only 2.4 million soums that affects 2026 profit.
Tip: find out in advance what part of the premium is refunded if the contract is terminated early: this procedure is set in the contract.
See also: Insurance premium · Insurance policy · 3190 Other prepaid expenses
InsuranceThe probability of a fire in our workshop is very small. Isn't it cheaper to go uninsured than to pay a premium every year?
On average, yes, insurance is not "cheap". But insurance is taken out not for the average year, but for the worst year.
Step one: expected loss = probability of the event × amount of the loss. The insurer adds its own expenses and profit to the expected loss in the premium, so the premium is usually higher than the expected loss.
Step two: assess how hard a single event would hit the business.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Urganch duradgor" workshop:
| Indicator | Value |
|---|---|
| Probability of fire (per year, hypothetical estimate) | 1% |
| Loss in a fire (building, machines, raw materials) | 300 million soums |
| Expected loss: 300 million × 1% | 3 million soums/year |
| Annual premium | 4.5 million soums |
| Workshop's annual net profit | 60 million soums |
On average the workshop pays 4.5 − 3 = 1.5 million soums a year "extra". But a single fire wipes out 300 / 60 = 5 years of profit. To cover such a loss out of its own funds, it would need 300 million soums in reserve.
Rule: it makes sense to insure a risk with a small probability but consequences that would stop the business. Small, frequent losses (for example, broken windows) the company can bear itself; in such cases a contract with a deductible helps reduce the premium.
Tip: do not make up the probability yourself; rely at least on your own history, your neighbours' experience and the state of fire safety.
See also: Deductible (franchise) · Insurance premium · Insurance section
BankingThe bank offered two options for a deposit: interest is transferred to the current account each month, or it is added to the deposit amount. How big is the difference?
The first option is called simple interest: each month interest is calculated only on the initial amount, because the interest received leaves the deposit. The second option is compound interest (capitalisation): the interest added each month itself earns interest the following month, i.e. "interest on interest" is calculated.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Ko'kterak savdo" LLC placed 10,000,000 soums on deposit for 3 months; the interest under the contract is assumed to be 2% a month.
| Month | Simple interest | Compound interest | Deposit balance under compound interest |
|---|---|---|---|
| Month 1 | 200,000 | 200,000 | 10,200,000 |
| Month 2 | 200,000 | 204,000 | 10,404,000 |
| Month 3 | 200,000 | 208,080 | 10,612,080 |
| Total | 600,000 | 612,080 |
Difference: 612,080 − 600,000 = 12,080 soums. The larger the term and the amount, the faster the difference grows.
In the accounts, the interest accrued each month is recorded as income: Dt 4830 "Interest receivable" — Ct 9530 "Interest income" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 216, row 5). Under the first option, when the interest arrives in the current account: Dt 5110 — Ct 4830 (paragraph 216, row 6). Under the second option, the interest does not arrive in the current account but is added to the deposit amount, increasing its balance. Deposits themselves are kept in account 5890 "Other current investments" (paragraph 243), so in the analytical records make sure the deposit balance matches the amount in the bank statement.
Tip: before choosing, calculate both options month by month as in this table, and also think about when you will need the money — if the interest is added to the deposit, you may not be able to use it until the term ends.
See also: Compound interest · If spare cash is placed on a bank deposit, how is it recorded in the accounts? · Banking section
BankingAt month-end the balance in 5110 differs from the balance in the bank statement. How do I find and correct the difference?
Entries on 5110 "Settlement account" are made on the basis of the bank statement and the documents attached to it. So if every transaction has been recorded, the two balances should be equal. If there is a difference, compare each line of the statement one by one with the accounting entries: lines that are in the statement but not in the accounts are the cause of the difference.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). At "Oltinsoy mebel" LLC at month-end the 5110 balance is 18,400,000 soums, while the bank statement shows 21,150,000 soums. The comparison revealed two lines:
| Transaction in the statement but not recorded in the accounts | Journal entry | Amount |
|---|---|---|
| Payment received from a customer for goods | Dt 5110 — Ct 4010 | +3,000,000 |
| Tax payment transferred to the budget (the payment document reached the accounting department late) | Dt 6410 — Ct 5110 | −250,000 |
Check: 18,400,000 + 3,000,000 − 250,000 = 21,150,000 soums. Now the balances are equal.
Both entries match the examples in NAS No. 21 (paragraph 226, rows 3 and 18). If the comparison reveals that the bank itself made an error, it is handled differently: the erroneous amount is reflected in connection with account 4860 "Claims receivable" or 6960 "Claims payable" (paragraph 225).
Tip: reconcile every week rather than waiting for month-end — checking a few lines is easy, and errors are found early.
See also: Bank statement · Settlement (current) account · Banking section
BankingWe are buying dollars through the bank to purchase equipment from abroad. The soums were debited from the current account today, and the dollars will arrive tomorrow. In which account is this money held in between?
This money is no longer in 5110, but it is not yet in the foreign currency account either. In the sample journal entries of NAS No. 21, the transfer of money to buy foreign currency is shown as Dt 5530 "Other special accounts" — Ct 5110 "Settlement account" (paragraph 226, row 5). Once the dollars arrive in the foreign currency account, they are reflected on the debit of 5210 "Foreign currency accounts in the country" (paragraph 228), which ends the intermediate state. The standard does not give a separate sample entry for this transition, so set it out in your accounting policy.
Example (compiled by the author; amounts and rates are hypothetical, not actual rates). "Navro'z plast" LLC:
| Date | Transaction | Journal entry | Amount, soums |
|---|---|---|---|
| 10 November | Soums transferred to buy currency | Dt 5530 — Ct 5110 | 64,000,000 |
| 11 November | 5,000 dollars arrived in the foreign currency account | To the debit of 5210 (paragraph 228) | 64,000,000 |
| 30 November | On revaluation, the soum value of the dollar balance became 64,250,000 | Dt 5210 — Ct 9540 (paragraph 421, row 4) | 250,000 |
The reason for the last line: money in a foreign currency account is a monetary item and, under NAS No. 22, is revalued at the end of every month. If the value increases, the difference is recorded in 9540 "Foreign exchange gains"; if it decreases, Dt 9620 "Foreign exchange losses" — Ct 5210.
Note: in the example, the soums paid and the soum value of the dollars received are assumed to be equal for simplicity. If in practice they differ, consider separately how to reflect this difference based on your accounting policy and NAS No. 22.
See also: Foreign currency account · Exchange difference · Banking section
BankingWe borrowed money for 6 months not from a bank but from a partner firm. Do we also record this in 6810 "Short-term bank loans"?
No. NAS No. 21 separates two accounts: 6810 "Short-term bank loans" — for short-term bank loans received by the organisation, and 6820 "Short-term borrowings" — for borrowings received from lenders other than banks for a term of no more than 12 months. A partner firm is not a bank, so your case is 6820.
The journal entries are structured just as for a bank loan, only the account is different: when the borrowing is received, Dt 5110 — Ct 6820; when it is repaid, Dt 6820 — Ct 5110. If the contract provides for interest, when it is accrued, Dt 9610 "Interest expenses" — Ct 6920 "Accrued interest"; when paid, Dt 6920 — Ct 5110.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Sayhun qurilish" LLC borrowed 30,000,000 soums from its partner; under the contract, interest is 300,000 soums a month.
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount |
|---|---|---|
| Borrowing received | Dt 5110 — Ct 6820 | 30,000,000 |
| Interest for month 1 accrued | Dt 9610 — Ct 6920 | 300,000 |
| Interest paid | Dt 6920 — Ct 5110 | 300,000 |
| Part of the borrowing repaid | Dt 6820 — Ct 5110 | 12,000,000 |
Balance of 6820: 30,000,000 − 12,000,000 = 18,000,000 soums.
Tip: keep the analytical records for 6820 separately for each lender and repayment date — if there are several borrowings, it is clear which one is due when.
See also: Short-term bank loan · Accrued interest · Banking section
BankingWe have some spare cash. If we repay part of the loan early, how much will the interest fall, and what is recorded in the accounts?
If under the contract interest is charged on the outstanding loan balance, then as the balance decreases, the interest in the following months also decreases. Whether early repayment is permitted and whether an extra fee is charged for it is stated in the loan agreement, so check the agreement first.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). "Bog'bon agro" LLC has a loan with an outstanding balance of 60,000,000 soums; interest is charged on the balance at 2% a month, and 6 months remain until maturity. Let us assume the company repaid 20,000,000 soums early and the bank charges no extra fee.
| Indicator | Before repayment | After repayment |
|---|---|---|
| Loan balance | 60,000,000 | 40,000,000 |
| Monthly interest (2%) | 1,200,000 | 800,000 |
Monthly saving: 1,200,000 − 800,000 = 400,000 soums. Over the remaining 6 months (if the balance does not otherwise change): 400,000 × 6 = 2,400,000 soums.
Journal entries:
| Transaction | Journal entry | Amount |
|---|---|---|
| Part of the loan repaid | Dt 6810 — Ct 5110 | 20,000,000 |
| Next month's interest accrued | Dt 9610 — Ct 6920 | 800,000 |
| Interest paid | Dt 6920 — Ct 5110 | 800,000 |
Tip: before repaying early, make sure that money remains for at least one or two months of essential expenses (wages, suppliers). The interest saved is cheaper than being forced to take a new loan later because of a cash gap.
See also: Interest expense · How are a short-term bank loan and its interest recorded? · Banking section
StatisticsI know the balance of goods in the warehouse (2910) on the 1st of each month. How do I correctly calculate the average inventory for the quarter?
A balance is a state at a single moment (a point-in-time indicator). For such a series, not the simple arithmetic mean but the chronological mean is used: half of the first and last balances and the full intermediate balances are taken, and the sum is divided by the number of intervals (the number of dates minus one). The reason: each month lies between two dates, while the end dates "serve" only one month each.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). Balance of 2910 "Goods in the warehouse" for the "Yulduzcha" shop:
| Date | Balance, million soums |
|---|---|
| 1 July | 40 |
| 1 August | 46 |
| 1 September | 50 |
| 1 October | 44 |
Chronological mean: (40 : 2 + 46 + 50 + 44 : 2) : 3 = (20 + 46 + 50 + 22) : 3 = 138 : 3 = 46 million soums.
If we simply add the four balances and divide by 4, we get (40 + 46 + 50 + 44) : 4 = 45 million soums — this gives excess weight to the beginning and end of the quarter.
Tip: average inventory goes into the denominator of indicators such as inventory turnover. So calculate it the same way each time; otherwise comparing different quarters will be misleading.
See also: Arithmetic mean · Inventories · Statistics section
StatisticsFor each purchase of flour we allocate the same amount — 12 million soums — but the price differs each time. Can I find the average price of a sack of flour by adding up the three prices and dividing by 3?
No, in this case the simple arithmetic mean overstates the average price. Because the amount is the same each time, more sacks are bought when the price is low and fewer when it is high. For such a series the harmonic mean is used: the number of values is divided by the sum of their reciprocals.
Harmonic mean = n : (1/x₁ + 1/x₂ + … + 1/xₙ).
In practice this gives the same result as "total money spent : total quantity obtained".
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Tandir non" bakery bought flour three times during the month, for 12,000,000 soums each time.
| Purchase | Price of a 50 kg sack | Sacks obtained |
|---|---|---|
| Purchase 1 | 240,000 soums | 12,000,000 : 240,000 = 50 |
| Purchase 2 | 300,000 soums | 12,000,000 : 300,000 = 40 |
| Purchase 3 | 400,000 soums | 12,000,000 : 400,000 = 30 |
| Total | 120 sacks, 36,000,000 soums |
Correct average price: 36,000,000 : 120 = 300,000 soums. Check with the harmonic formula: 3 : (1/240,000 + 1/300,000 + 1/400,000) = 3 : (12/1,200,000) = 300,000 soums.
Simple arithmetic mean: (240,000 + 300,000 + 400,000) : 3 = 313,333 soums. This is 13,333 soums too high, because it gives the same "weight" to the 50 sacks bought at the low price and the 30 sacks bought at the high price.
Which mean to choose depends on what data you have:
- if the quantity bought at each price is known — the arithmetic mean weighted by quantity;
- if the amount spent at each price is known — the harmonic mean (if the amounts are not equal, the weighted harmonic mean: total amount : sum of each amount divided by its price).
Link with accounting: if there was no opening balance of flour at the beginning of the month, under the AVECO method the cost of one sack also comes out at exactly 300,000 soums, because under paragraph 65 of NAS No. 4 the weighted average cost is determined from total cost and total quantity.
See also: Arithmetic mean · Weighted average · Statistics section
StatisticsOne of our shops is large and the other small. Is it right to say that the shop with more revenue is performing better?
No, comparing objects of different sizes by absolute amounts is misleading. For this, a relative intensity indicator is used: one indicator is divided by another, related indicator — for example, revenue by sales floor area or by number of staff. You take the revenue amount for the month from the credit turnover of the income account.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). November:
| Indicator | "Markaz" shop | "Mahalla" shop |
|---|---|---|
| Revenue | 90,000,000 | 54,000,000 |
| Sales floor area | 120 m² | 45 m² |
| Number of sales staff | 6 | 3 |
| Revenue per 1 m² | 750,000 | 1,200,000 |
| Revenue per 1 salesperson | 15,000,000 | 18,000,000 |
Calculation: 90,000,000 : 120 = 750,000; 54,000,000 : 45 = 1,200,000; 90,000,000 : 6 = 15,000,000; 54,000,000 : 3 = 18,000,000.
The large shop has more revenue, but each square metre and each salesperson earns more money in the small shop. This may point to idle space or slow-moving goods in the large shop — the reason needs to be analysed separately.
See also: Sale (realization) · Statistics section
StatisticsOur café's revenue has grown. How do I tell whether this was because there were more customers or because each customer spent more?
Revenue can be viewed as the product of two factors: revenue = number of receipts × average receipt. You separate the effect of each factor using the chain substitution method: first the quantitative factor (number of receipts) changes while the qualitative factor (average receipt) stays at the old level; then the qualitative factor is also replaced with the new one.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Qaldirg'och" café:
| Indicator | October | November |
|---|---|---|
| Number of receipts | 2,000 | 2,200 |
| Average receipt | 60,000 | 65,000 |
| Revenue | 120,000,000 | 143,000,000 |
Total growth: 143,000,000 − 120,000,000 = 23,000,000 soums.
- Effect of the number of receipts: (2,200 − 2,000) × 60,000 = 12,000,000 soums;
- effect of the average receipt: 2,200 × (65,000 − 60,000) = 11,000,000 soums.
Check: 12,000,000 + 11,000,000 = 23,000,000 soums.
Conclusion: almost half of the growth came from new customers, the rest from larger orders. If the average receipt grew only because prices rose, check this separately too — the number of customers may fall in the following months.
See also: Index · Statistics section
StatisticsOur two branches grew by the same 10%. But one added much more money to the till. Which indicator shows this difference?
This is shown by the absolute value of one percent of growth: the absolute growth is divided by the growth rate (in percent). The result is always equal to one hundredth of the previous period's level. That is, the same percentage growth on a larger base means more soums.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures):
| Indicator | "Shimol" branch | "Janub" branch |
|---|---|---|
| Last month's revenue, million soums | 80 | 30 |
| This month's revenue, million soums | 88 | 33 |
| Absolute growth, million soums | 8 | 3 |
| Growth rate | 10% | 10% |
| Absolute value of 1% growth, million soums | 0.8 | 0.3 |
Calculation: 8 : 10 = 0.8 million; 3 : 10 = 0.3 million. Check: 80 : 100 = 0.8; 30 : 100 = 0.3.
Practical benefit: a 20% growth plan for the small branch brings in even less additional money than 10% at "Shimol" (30 × 20% = 6 million, 80 × 10% = 8 million). That is why targets should be set not only in percent but also in soums.
See also: Arithmetic mean · Statistics section
EconomicsThe café owner both bakes samsa and handles the accounting paperwork faster than his assistant. Is there still any benefit in dividing the work?
Yes. In economics this is explained by the difference between absolute and comparative advantage. A person who does both jobs faster has an absolute advantage. But when dividing work, a different question is decisive: who gives up less when spending time on which job? A person has a comparative advantage in the job where this opportunity cost is small, and it pays for each person to do exactly that job.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). Output per hour at the "Ko'k gumbaz" café:
| Who | Samsa, pieces | Accounting documents, pieces | Opportunity cost of 1 document |
|---|---|---|---|
| Owner | 60 | 4 | 60 : 4 = 15 samsa |
| Assistant | 40 | 1 | 40 : 1 = 40 samsa |
The owner is faster at both jobs, but at documents he is 4 times faster than the assistant, while at samsa he is only 1.5 times faster. One document costs the owner 15 samsa and the assistant 40 samsa. So it is cheaper for the owner to do the documents.
Each works 8 hours a day, and the café needs 8 documents a day. Three different allocations:
| Option | Owner | Assistant | Total samsa |
|---|---|---|---|
| A: the assistant does the documents | 8 hours of samsa: 480 | 8 hours of documents: 8 | 480 |
| B: documents are split equally | 1 hour of documents (4), 7 hours of samsa: 420 | 4 hours of documents (4), 4 hours of samsa: 160 | 580 |
| C: the owner does the documents | 2 hours of documents (8), 6 hours of samsa: 360 | 8 hours of samsa: 320 | 680 |
In all three options 8 documents get done, but option C produces 680 − 480 = 200 more samsa than option A. Even though the assistant is slower than the owner, his "loss" is smallest at samsa.
Practical conclusion: divide work not by asking "who does it faster?" but by asking "how much would this person's hour produce in another job?". By the same logic, a manager does not try to do everything himself but devotes time to the work where his advantage is greatest.
See also: Cost (cost of production) · Economics section
EconomicsIf the price of some product is capped below the market level, why does it disappear from the shelves?
In a market, the price settles at the point where demand and supply are equal. If a price ceiling is set below this point, buyers want to buy more at the cheap price, while sellers bring less. Demand exceeds supply — this gap is called a shortage.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical market). Egg trading in one day at a market on the outskirts of a city:
| Price per piece | Demand, pieces | Supply, pieces | Situation |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1,500 soums | 8,000 | 8,000 | Equilibrium |
| 1,200 soums (capped price) | 10,000 | 6,000 | Shortage of 4,000 pieces |
Calculation: 10,000 − 6,000 = 4,000 pieces are lacking. Even though the price became cheaper, buyers who need 4,000 eggs cannot get any eggs at all.
In such a situation, queues usually get longer, the product runs out early, and sometimes "informal" trade appears at prices above the official one. That is why, when assessing a price cap, economists look not only at the price but also at how many people the product actually reaches.
See also: Demand · Supply · Economics section
EconomicsIn our sewing workshop both the staff and the output increased. How do I know whether our workers have become more efficient?
This is shown by labour productivity: output produced is divided by the labour spent on it (number of staff or hours worked). Growth in output does not in itself mean productivity has increased — it may grow simply because there are more people.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). The "Ipakchi" sewing workshop:
| Indicator | September | October |
|---|---|---|
| Number of seamstresses | 12 | 15 |
| Shirts sewn, pieces | 2,880 | 3,300 |
| Per seamstress, pieces | 240 | 220 |
Calculation: 2,880 : 12 = 240; 3,300 : 15 = 220. Output increased 3,300 : 2,880 = 1.1458 times, i.e. by about 14.6%, but the work per seamstress changed 220 : 240 = 0.9167 times, i.e. fell by about 8.3%.
The reason may be that new staff are still learning, a shortage of machines, or interruptions in how work is organised. For a more accurate picture, also calculate productivity per hour worked: in a month with many days off and sick days, a calculation based on headcount understates productivity.
See also: Cost (cost of production) · Economics section
EconomicsWe received interest on our deposit at year-end, but prices also went up. How much richer did we actually get?
The interest received is nominal income. To find the actual, i.e. real, income, the year-end amount needs to be "cleaned" of price growth: the final amount is divided by the price index and compared with the initial amount.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). Dilshod deposited 10,000,000 soums and received 11,340,000 soums at year-end. The food basket he always buys rose in price this year from 1,000,000 soums to 1,050,000 soums (price index 1.05).
| Indicator | Calculation | Result |
|---|---|---|
| Nominal income | 11,340,000 − 10,000,000 | 1,340,000 soums (13.4%) |
| Final amount at today's prices | 11,340,000 : 1.05 | 10,800,000 soums |
| Real income | 10,800,000 − 10,000,000 | 800,000 soums (8%) |
Check with the basket: at the beginning of the year the money bought 10,000,000 : 1,000,000 = 10 baskets, at year-end 11,340,000 : 1,050,000 = 10.8 baskets. That is, purchasing power rose by 8%.
The commonly used subtraction "13.4 − 5 = 8.4%" is an approximate method; it slightly overstates real growth; the exact result comes from division.
A note for companies: in the accounts, deposit interest is reflected in 9530 "Interest income" at the nominal amount accrued by the bank. Real income is calculated separately for analysis.
See also: Inflation · Consumer price index · Economics section
EconomicsAfter the family's income rose, they began buying more meat and less cheap pasta. How does economics explain this?
When income changes, demand for different goods changes differently. Goods whose demand rises as income rises are called normal goods, and those whose demand falls are called inferior goods: people bought them because they were cheap, and once they can afford it, they switch to a more expensive substitute.
To measure this, the income elasticity of demand is calculated: the percentage change in quantity demanded is divided by the percentage change in income. A positive result means a normal good, a negative result an inferior good.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). The family's monthly income rose from 8,000,000 soums to 10,000,000 soums: (10 − 8) : 8 = +25%.
| Good | Before, kg | After, kg | Change in demand | Elasticity | Type |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Meat | 4 | 5 | +25% | +25 : 25 = +1.0 | Normal |
| Cheap pasta | 6 | 4.5 | −25% | −25 : 25 = −1.0 | Inferior |
Practical conclusion for a shop: if incomes in the neighbourhood are rising, it pays to reduce stocks of inferior goods and widen the range of normal goods. Conversely, in hard times you should plan in advance for growing demand for cheap goods.
See also: Demand · Economics section
AccountingWhat must be paid to an employee, and when, when an employment contract is terminated?
When an employment contract is terminated, the employer makes a full settlement with the employee. The settlement includes:
- wages the employee has not yet received;
- compensation for all main and additional leave the employee has not used;
- other payments, if they are provided for by labor legislation, other legal acts on labor or the employment contract.
When is it paid? All amounts due to the employee are paid on the day the employment contract is terminated. If the employee did not work on that day, the amounts must be paid no later than three days after the employee requests the settlement.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). Nodira, a salesperson at "Oqsaroy mebel" LLC, leaves on 14 November. The accountant prepared the settlement sheet in advance:
| Type of payment | Amount |
|---|---|
| Wages for 1–14 November | 2,100,000 soums |
| Compensation for 12 days of unused main leave | 1,450,000 soums |
| Other payment provided for in the employment contract | none |
| Total accrued | 3,550,000 soums |
Tax is withheld from this amount in line with the law, and the rest is transferred to Nodira on the same day, 14 November. Had Nodira not come to work on 14 November, the settlement would have been paid within three days of her request.
Tip: as the leaving date approaches, check the leave balance, deductions and extra contract payments in advance — then nothing urgent is left for the last day and the payment is not delayed.
See also: Wages (salary) · Accounting section
Import and exportCan goods or vehicles be moved in a customs control zone without the customs authority's permission?
No. A customs control zone is a specially designated part of the customs territory set up to ensure compliance with customs legislation. In this zone, goods, vehicles and people move according to the established procedure, and customs officers monitor compliance with the regime.
The following actions without the customs authority's permission give rise to liability:
- moving goods and vehicles across the boundary of the zone;
- moving goods and vehicles within the zone;
- other actions that violate the established regime.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical situation). A driver of "Karvon logistika" LLC is waiting in a customs control zone for clearance of a truck carrying imported cargo. The queue is long, so he decides to drive the truck to a nearby parking lot and bring it back the next day. Doing this without the customs authority's permission violates the zone's regime. The right way: wait for clearance to finish or obtain the customs authority's permission to move the truck.
Tip for accountants: a company that imports and exports should give its drivers and forwarders written instructions on the rules in the customs control zone. This helps prevent the regime from being broken by accident.
See also: Fine · A "Отчет" (Report) section on the customs portals · Taxes section
TaxWhat is the investment deduction and at what rate is it applied?
The investment deduction is a deduction under corporate profit tax provided for in Article 308 of the Tax Code. It can be applied as a depreciation expense in the year in which buildings and structures and new technological equipment are purchased and put into service.
There are two rates:
1) 20 percent — of the cost of new technological equipment, of expenses on modernizing production and technical and (or) technological re-equipment, and of the funds directed to purchasing locally produced software within investment projects for creating information systems;
2) 10 percent — of the funds directed to expanding production in the form of new construction and to reconstructing buildings and structures used for production needs.
"New" technological equipment means equipment no more than 3 years old from its year of manufacture.
The statement on the investment deduction is reported in Appendix 3 to the corporate profit tax return.
Example (compiled by the author, hypothetical figures). In 2026 "Chinor qandolat" LLC bought a new packaging line manufactured in 2025 for 600 million soums and put it into service the same year. It also spent 1 billion soums on reconstructing its production building.
- Equipment: 600 million × 20% = 120 million soums.
- Building: 1,000 million × 10% = 100 million soums.
- Total investment deduction: 220 million soums.
Had the company bought equipment manufactured in 2021 in 2026, it would not count as "new", since more than 3 years had passed since its year of manufacture, and the 20 percent deduction would not apply.
Tip: keep the document confirming the equipment's year of manufacture (technical passport, certificate or shipping documents) and the commissioning certificate — these are the documents that show the deduction is justified.
See also: Corporate profit tax · Depreciation / amortization · Fixed asset (property, plant and equipment)
AccountingWhy is paying wages "in an envelope" risky, and what is the fine?
Wages "in an envelope" means handing over part (or all) of the money that should be officially accrued and paid to an employee under the employment contract in cash, without documents. Such money does not appear in the accounting records or in tax reporting. This breaks the law and harms the employee's social rights.
Liability. Article 175^4 of the Code of Administrative Liability establishes administrative liability for paying wages in prohibited forms: officials are fined from 10 to 15 times the base calculation amount (BCA). In other words, the fine applies to the official personally, such as the company's director.
What does the employee lose? Unofficial money is not part of their documented income. So the social guarantees that depend on it, such as income-related payments, and the income they can prove with documents look smaller.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). The director of "Yashil vodiy savdo" LLC writes 2 million soum into salesperson Sardor's contract and pays him another 3 million soum in cash every month without documents. If an inspection finds this, the director may be fined 10 to 15 times the BCA. The right way: state the full wage in the employment contract, accrue it and pay the withheld taxes on time.
Advice: formalise employment relations and pay wages in full in an official form — this protects both the employee and the director.
See also: Wages (salary) · Fine · Accounting section
EconomicsIs my company a small business? What categories are business entities divided into?
The answer depends on two questions: what is your total income for the calendar year, and who are the founders (participants) of your company — individuals or legal entities. Under Presidential Decree PF-21 of 10 February 2023, business entities are divided into three categories: small, medium and large. The small category itself consists of three types.
Short table (category — who belongs — total income for the calendar year):
- Small business entity: individual entrepreneur — an entrepreneur registered as an individual — no income threshold is set for this type.
- Small business entity: micro-firm — an entity whose founders (participants) are individuals — up to 1 billion soums.
- Small business entity: small enterprise — an entity whose founders (participants) are legal entities — from 1 billion to 10 billion soums.
- Medium business entity — the definition does not mention the type of founders — from 10 billion to 100 billion soums.
- Large business entity — the definition does not mention the type of founders — 100 billion soums or more.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). Three entrepreneurs work in one neighbourhood. The first is seamstress Nodira, registered as an individual entrepreneur. The Decree's list names individual entrepreneurs among small business entities.
The second is "Shirin Kulcha" LLC, opened by two brothers (individuals); its total income last year was 800 million soums. The founders are individuals and income did not exceed 1 billion soums, so it is a micro-firm, i.e. a small business entity.
The third is "Oydin Qadoq" LLC, whose sole founder is another company (a legal entity); its annual total income is 4 billion soums. Income falls within the 1 to 10 billion soum range and the founder is a legal entity, so it is a small enterprise — also a small business entity.
Practical tip: when determining the category, look not at one month's revenue but at total income for the whole calendar year, and check in your founding documents who the participants are. If income exceeds 10 billion soums in later years, the company will fit the definition of a medium business entity.
See also: Small business entity · Micro-firm · Small enterprise · Medium business entity
TaxHow is VAT calculated when a car or housing bought from an individual for resale is sold?
In this case VAT is calculated not on the full sale price but only on the margin (the difference). Under Tax Code Article 248, part 11, when cars and residential real estate bought from individuals for resale are sold, the tax base is the positive difference between the sale price and the purchase cost. Important: this difference includes the tax, i.e. the VAT sits "inside" the difference.
So the formula is: VAT = (sale price − purchase cost) × 12/112. Here 12 is the VAT rate (12%) and 112 is 100 + 12, because the amount includes VAT.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Tez Avto Savdo" LLC bought a used car from a citizen, Jasur, for resale for 185,000,000 soums and a month later sold it for 212,500,000 soums.
Correct calculation: difference 212,500,000 − 185,000,000 = 27,500,000 soums. VAT = 27,500,000 × 12/112 = 2,946,428.57 soums. The rest of the difference, 24,553,571.43 soums, is the company's margin net of VAT.
Common mistake: applying 12/112 to the full sale price. That gives 212,500,000 × 12/112 = 22,767,857.14 soums — about 7.7 times the correct amount, i.e. the tax would eat up about 83% of the entire margin (27,500,000 soums). A second mistake: applying 12% instead of 12/112 to the difference (27,500,000 × 12% = 3,300,000 soums) — also wrong, because the tax base includes VAT.
Note: this rule applies only to cars and housing bought from individuals for resale. If the company bought a car for its own use and it is recorded as a fixed asset, the rule does not apply when it is later sold. So decide at the time of purchase where the item is recorded (as goods or as a fixed asset).
See also: VAT · Goods (in accounting) · Fixed asset (property, plant and equipment)
TaxWhat happens if I do not register my lease agreement in «e-ijara»?
The main risk concerns not the rent but the goods stored in those premises. Under the current procedure, inventory balances kept in real estate leased or used free of charge under agreements not registered in the «e-ijara» system are not included in the inventory count. For tax purposes they are deemed absent from your warehouse, and this is treated as concealment of the tax base.
Why is this serious? Under Tax Code Article 223, the absence from the warehouse or point of sale of goods that are recorded as unsold is recognised as concealment (understatement) of the tax base and results in a fine of 20 percent of the concealed base. In practice the tax authority treats such goods as sold, charges 12% VAT on them and applies the 20% fine on top.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures). "Nurli Plitka" LLC leased a warehouse on the edge of town under a verbal arrangement and a simple paper agreement, but did not register it in «e-ijara». According to its accounts, unsold tiles worth 150,000,000 soums are stored there.
Hypothetical calculation: if the goods are treated as sold, VAT is 150,000,000 × 12% = 18,000,000 soums. If the concealed base is taken as 150,000,000 soums, the fine is 150,000,000 × 20% = 30,000,000 soums. Total extra burden: 48,000,000 soums — for goods on which the company has not yet earned anything. These figures are for illustration only: in practice the concealed base and the VAT base are determined by the tax authority and may differ from this example.
Practical tip: register every lease or free-use agreement for premises where goods are stored in «e-ijara» before you start using them. When a term is extended or a new agreement is signed, check it too. Keep the registration confirmation together with a copy of the agreement: it may be needed during an audit.
See also: VAT · Inventory count (stocktaking) · Goods (in accounting)
AccountingAn employee is often late for work. Can a fine be imposed on them, and what should the accountant know about it?
Yes, but only within the limits the law allows. Under Article 22 of the Labour Code, every employee must observe the internal labour regulations and labour discipline. General advice: it is sensible to state the start time clearly in the internal labour regulations, so that it is easy to show which rule the lateness breaches.
When discipline is breached, the employer is entitled to apply one of the disciplinary measures listed in Article 312 of the Labour Code. There are three: 1) a reprimand; 2) a fine of no more than 30% of the average monthly wage; 3) termination of the employment contract. So a fine is not the only type of penalty, and it has an upper limit.
If the lateness keeps happening, Article 161 may come into play: an employee's systematic breach of their work duties may be grounds for terminating the employment contract. "Systematic" means that within one year from the day a disciplinary penalty was applied, the employee committed another disciplinary offence. In other words, the one-year period runs from the day the disciplinary penalty was applied, so it is best to record the penalty in a written document with an exact date.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): Javlon, a storekeeper at "Oqtosh qadoqlash", has an average monthly wage of 5,000,000 soum. In March he was late several times and was given a reprimand. In July he was late again. This happened within a year of the reprimand, so it fits the definition of a systematic breach. If the employer now chooses a fine, the maximum is 5,000,000 × 30% = 1,500,000 soum. A fine of 2,000,000 soum would exceed the limit. Also, because the breach is systematic, the employer may consider terminating the employment contract under Article 161.
General advice for the accountant: calculate and check that the fine does not exceed 30% of the employee's average monthly wage; if you do not have the employer's written document (order) on the penalty, the cautious approach is to withhold nothing. Check the procedure for applying a penalty and the method for calculating the average monthly wage in the Labour Code itself; the journal entry for the withholding is not given in this answer.
See also: Wages (salary) · What journal entries are made when payroll is calculated? · Accounting section
TaxWhich social sector activities qualify for the 0% corporate profit tax rate?
Under Article 59 of the Tax Code, social sector activities are:
1) medical services: diagnosis, prevention, treatment, dentistry (cosmetology is not on this list); 2) educational services, including holding tests and exams; 3) scientific activity (only for accredited entities); 4) services in physical culture and sport, training sessions, competitions, and renting out sports facilities and sports equipment; 5) social protection: for children, the elderly and persons with disabilities.
Being on the list is not enough on its own. The main condition is the "90% rule": income from this activity (together with property received free of charge) must be at least 90% of total annual income. If the share is lower, social sector status is not granted.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): the "Sog'lom tish" clinic has total annual income of 1,000,000,000 soum.
Case 1: 920,000,000 soum from treatment and dental services, 80,000,000 soum from cosmetology and renting out a spare room. Share: 920 / 1,000 = 92%. This is above 90%, so social sector status is kept.
Case 2: 850,000,000 soum from medical services, 150,000,000 soum from cosmetology. Share 85%. Cosmetology does not count as a medical service, so the 90% rule is not met and status is not granted.
Practical tip: calculate the share of the main activity every quarter during the year. If the share gets close to 90%, work out in advance how a new line of business (for example, cosmetology) would affect the annual share before launching it.
See also: Corporate profit tax · Tax benefit (tax relief) · What is a tax incentive and how is it used?
TaxWhat should you do if the cash register (online CCM) stops working?
This situation is governed by Resolution No. 943 of the Cabinet of Ministers of 23 November 2019. First of all, remember: responsibility for ensuring a constant internet connection lies with the entrepreneur. So it is wise to plan ahead for a possible connection loss and have a backup connection ready.
Step-by-step procedure:
Step 1. If there is a fault, notify the technical service centre for the cash register (TXKM); it is best not to delay this.
Step 2. Within 1 hour the technical service centre notifies the tax authority through a special information system. This is the centre's duty; you should record the time you contacted it.
Step 3. Until the fault is fixed or a backup device is provided, give buyers a special receipt registered with the state tax service authorities. Its form is set out in Annex 4 to the regulation.
Step 4. Within 1 working day after the cash register is repaired, enter the sales data from the special receipt book into the online cash register (online CCM) or virtual cash register system.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): at 11:00 on Tuesday the cash register at the "Mehrigiyo" pharmacy shut down. The cashier immediately called the technical service centre and wrote the time in a log. Until the device was fixed, 14 buyers were given special receipts. The device was set up again on Wednesday, so the sales data from the 14 receipts must be entered into the system within 1 working day after the cash register is set up.
Practical tip: prepare the registered receipt book in advance, not after a breakdown, and keep it next to the till.
See also: Cash desk · Taxes section
TaxHow can you get rid of late-payment interest (penya) on tax arrears: what is "Second Chance"?
"Second Chance" (Ikkinchi imkoniyat) is an economic amnesty announced by Presidential Decree PF-175 of 27 August 2026. It is aimed at small and medium-sized businesses and runs until 31 December 2026.
The condition on penya: if tax arrears that arose before the Decree was adopted are paid in full by 31 December 2026, the penya charged on those arrears is written off. Because the condition is "payment in full", this result cannot be relied on if only part of the debt is cleared.
On fines: the unpaid remainder of administrative fines imposed before 1 January 2026 for failing to file tax returns on time is also written off.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): the "Barakali non" bakery has old tax arrears of 7,000,000 soum, with penya of 900,000 soum charged on them. If the bakery pays the 7,000,000 soum in full by the end of December, the 900,000 soum of penya is written off. If it pays only 5,000,000 soum, the full-payment condition is not met.
What to do: 1) find out the amount of the debt and the penya from your settlement status with the tax authority; 2) plan when and from which funds to clear the debt; 3) do not leave the payment until the last days, because money needs time to arrive; 4) after paying, check that the debt has dropped to zero.
See also: Late payment interest (penalty interest) · Tax arrears · Decree PF-175: the "Second Chance" amnesty and other reliefs
AccountingWe gave an employee money for business expenses, and according to the receipts he spent more. How do we document the difference?
Money issued to an accountable person sits in the advance accounts of group 4200. For example, an amount issued for general business needs is recorded in account 4230 "Advances for general business expenses": Dt 4230 – Ct 5010 (NAS No. 21, table in paragraph 185, row 4). When the employee submits the expense report, the expense is transferred to the relevant account; for an administrative expense: Dt 9420 – Ct 4230 (same table, row 13).
If the amount spent exceeds the amount issued, the company now owes the employee. Under NAS No. 21 (paragraph 306), this debt is shown on the credit of account 6970 "Payables to accountable persons": the overspending on administrative needs is recorded as Dt 9420 – Ct 6970 (table in paragraph 309, row 15). When the difference is paid to the employee, the debt decreases: since 6970 is a liability account, the decrease goes to its debit and the cash goes to the credit of the cash account. The standard's table does not list this payment as a separate row; it follows from the nature of the account. Analytical records for 6970 are kept separately for each employee.
Example: Sherzod, the storekeeper at "Nurafshon mebel", was given 1 500 000 soum for small office purchases. He brought receipts for 1 720 000 soum. Journal entries: Dt 9420 – Ct 4230 1 500 000; Dt 9420 – Ct 6970 220 000; when the difference is paid from the cash desk, the debt in 6970 is closed: Dt 6970 – Ct 5010 220 000.
See also: 6970 Payables to accountable persons · Accountable person · How should an advance report be submitted correctly?
AccountingWe pay employees an advance against their salary in the middle of the month. How is this advance closed at month-end?
A mid-month advance is money paid for salary that has not yet been accrued. That is why it is recorded not directly in 6710 but in account 4210 "Salary advances": Dt 4210 – Ct 5010 (NAS No. 21, table in paragraph 185).
At month-end the salary is accrued (for example, for management staff Dt 9420 – Ct 6710), and then the advance paid is withheld from that salary: Dt 6710 – Ct 4210. Paragraph 181 says exactly this: monthly advances are written off at month-end from the credit of 4210 to the debit of 6710. After that, no balance should remain in 4210.
Example: Dilnoza, an accountant at "Yashil vodiy", was paid an advance of 2 000 000 soum on the 15th. At month-end she was accrued a salary of 5 000 000 soum (for simplicity we leave out deductions). Journal entries: Dt 4210 – Ct 5010 2 000 000; Dt 9420 – Ct 6710 5 000 000; Dt 6710 – Ct 4210 2 000 000. The remaining amount to be paid out is 3 000 000 soum.
See also: 4210 Salary advances · What journal entries are made when payroll is calculated? · Advance paid
AccountingWhen the cash was counted, there was a shortage, and the cashier admitted fault. What is recorded in the accounts?
If the person at fault is known, the shortage is not a company expense but the employee's debt. NAS No. 21 has a ready-made entry for a cash shortage identified during an inventory count: Dt 4730 "Employees' debt for compensation of material damage" – Ct 5010 (table in paragraph 206, row 10).
The debt is closed in one of two ways: the employee returns the money to the cash desk (Dt 5010 – Ct 4730), or the amount is withheld from his or her salary (Dt 6710 – Ct 4730). Both ways are set out in paragraph 202. A case where the person at fault is not identified is recorded differently; do not mix it up with this one.
Example: a shortage of 350 000 soum was found in the cash desk of "Chinor dorixona". Feruza, the cashier, immediately returned 150 000 soum and agreed to have the rest withheld from her salary. Journal entries: Dt 4730 – Ct 5010 350 000; Dt 5010 – Ct 4730 150 000; Dt 6710 – Ct 4730 200 000. As a result, the balance in 4730 drops to zero.
See also: 4730 Employees' debt for compensation of material damage · Shortage · What should be done if an inventory count reveals a shortage?
AccountingWe paid for a software service subscription for the coming year in one go. Can we record the whole amount as this month's expense?
No. An expense is recognised in the period to which it relates (NAS No. 21, paragraph 118). A prepaid service is first recorded in account 3120 "Prepaid service fees" (paragraph 159): Dt 3120 – Ct 5110. The table in paragraph 161 of the standard gives exactly this entry for a subscription for the coming year.
Then each month the relevant share is transferred to expenses (paragraph 157): for an office service, Dt 9420 – Ct 3120. This way each month's profit carries the same burden, and the month in which the payment was made does not appear as a "loss".
Example: in December "Mohir print" paid 12 000 000 soum for a subscription covering the 12 months of the next year. In December: Dt 3120 – Ct 5110 12 000 000. From January, each month: Dt 9420 – Ct 3120 1 000 000. At the end of June, 3120 holds a balance of 6 000 000 soum: this is the subscription that has not yet been "used".
See also: 3120 Prepaid service fees · Period expenses · NAS No. 21
AccountingThe warehouse count found more goods than the documents show. What do we do with the surplus?
Surplus goods are an asset of the company, and failing to record them distorts the balance sheet. Under NAS No. 21, surplus goods identified during an inventory count are taken on charge as Dt 2910 "Goods in the warehouse" – Ct 9390 "Other operating income" (table in paragraph 154, row 7).
Before taking them on charge, it pays to look for the cause: a surplus often arises from re-sorting, a wrong item code or a delivery note issued for other goods by mistake. In that case one item shows a surplus and another a shortage, and each must be analysed separately.
Example: the "Ziynat gul" shop found a surplus of 40 vases, which the inventory committee valued at 1 200 000 soum. Journal entry: Dt 2910 – Ct 9390 1 200 000. When the vases are later sold, their cost is written off in the usual way with Dt 9120 – Ct 2910.
See also: Surplus (in an inventory count) · 9390 Other operating income · Inventory count (stocktaking)
AccountingWe rent an office and pay rent every month. Which accounts are used for this?
Under an operating lease, the debt to the lessor is kept in account 6910 "Operating lease payable" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 298). Each month, when rent is accrued, an expense account is debited: if the office is used for administrative needs, Dt 9420 – Ct 6910. On payment: Dt 6910 – Ct 5110.
If rent is paid several months in advance, the part relating to future months is recorded not as an expense but in account 3110 "Prepaid operating lease rent" (paragraph 158) and transferred to expenses month by month. Analytical records for 6910 are kept separately for each lease agreement.
Example: the "Ilm ziyo" training centre pays rent of 4 000 000 soum a month. March: Dt 9420 – Ct 6910 4 000 000; payment: Dt 6910 – Ct 5110 4 000 000. If in April the centre pays three months' rent in advance, the 8 000 000 soum for the following two months waits in 3110.
See also: 6910 Operating lease payable · 3110 Prepaid operating lease rent · Accounts payable
AccountingA customer has not paid its debt for a long time. How do we create an allowance for doubtful debts, and what do we do next?
The allowance is kept in account 4910 "Allowance for doubtful debts". This is a contra-asset account: it reduces the accounts receivable in 4010 as presented on the balance sheet. When the allowance is created: Dt 9430 "Other operating expenses" – Ct 4910 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 217).
After that, three things can happen. If the debt is recognised as uncollectible, it is written off against the allowance: Dt 4910 – Ct 4010. If the customer pays after all, the money closes 4010 as usual, and the part of the allowance not used by the end of the year following the year in which it was created is added to that year's profit: Dt 4910 – Ct 9390 (paragraphs 218–219). Analytical records are kept for each debtor.
Example: the "Barhayot" shop owes "Tong savdo" 6 000 000 soum. At year-end an allowance is created: Dt 9430 – Ct 4910 6 000 000. The following year the shop pays 2 000 000 soum (Dt 5110 – Ct 4010), the remaining 4 000 000 is recognised as uncollectible (Dt 4910 – Ct 4010), and the unused allowance of 2 000 000 is returned to profit at the end of that year with Dt 4910 – Ct 9390.
See also: 4910 Allowance for doubtful debts · Accounts receivable · Contra-asset account
AccountingWe are a small workshop: we make products from raw materials and sell them. What journal entries are made from the moment raw materials are in the warehouse until the product is sold?
It is easy to split the chain into four links. 1) Raw materials are released to production: Dt 2010 "Primary production" – Ct 1010 "Raw materials and supplies". 2) Wages and other direct costs are also accumulated on the debit of 2010. 3) The finished product enters the warehouse: Dt 2810 "Finished goods in the warehouse" – Ct 2010. 4) On sale, the cost is written off: Dt 9110 – Ct 2810, and revenue is recorded as Dt 4010 – Ct 9010. These are all relationships from the tables of NAS No. 21.
The benefit of this chain: the balance left in 2010 at month-end is work in progress, and the balance in 2810 is product not yet sold. Both appear separately on the balance sheet.
Example: in a month the "Shirin non" bakery used flour and sugar worth 9 000 000 soum, and the bakers were accrued wages of 6 000 000 soum. In total, bread worth 15 000 000 soum entered the warehouse (Dt 2810 – Ct 2010). 80 percent of it, that is, 12 000 000 soum worth, was sold: Dt 9110 – Ct 2810 12 000 000. Bread worth 3 000 000 soum remained in the warehouse.
See also: 2010 Primary production · 2810 Finished goods in the warehouse · Cost (cost of production)
AccountingAn old machine tool is completely worn out; we will not sell it but will scrap it. Its spare parts will be taken into the warehouse. How is this recorded?
Scrapping is also a disposal of a fixed asset, so everything goes through 9210 "Disposal of fixed assets". Initial cost: Dt 9210 – Ct 0130. Accumulated depreciation: Dt 0230 – Ct 9210. Usable parts obtained from scrapping: Dt 1090 "Other materials" – Ct 9210 (tables of NAS No. 21).
At the end, the difference left in 9210 is the result. A debit balance is a loss: Dt 9430 – Ct 9210. A credit balance is a gain: Dt 9210 – Ct 9310 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 392). Scrapping costs (for example, wages accrued for dismantling) are also accumulated on the debit of 9210.
Example: the machine tool of the "Temir qanot" workshop was bought for 50 000 000 soum, and its depreciation is 46 000 000 soum. After dismantling, spare parts worth 1 500 000 soum were taken into the warehouse. In 9210: debit 50 000 000, credit 46 000 000 + 1 500 000. The remaining 2 500 000 soum is a loss: Dt 9430 – Ct 9210.
See also: 9210 Disposal of fixed assets · Carrying amount (net book value) · How is depreciation of fixed assets calculated?
AccountingThe founders' meeting decided to allocate part of the profit to reserve capital. What journal entry is made?
Reserve capital is kept in account 8520 "Reserve capital (fund)". It is formed in accordance with the founding documents and legislation (NAS No. 21, paragraph 356). An allocation from profit is recorded with the entry from the table in paragraph 365: Dt 8710 "Retained earnings (uncovered loss) of the reporting period" – Ct 8520.
This entry is not a cash movement: the company's money in the bank does not decrease; the amount simply moves from one item to another within equity. For this reason, having reserve capital does not mean having separate "reserve money".
Example: "Bek qurilish" LLC earned a net profit of 80 000 000 soum at year-end. By decision of the meeting, 8 000 000 soum was allocated to the reserve: Dt 8710 – Ct 8520 8 000 000. The total of the "Equity" section of the balance sheet does not change; only its internal composition changes.
See also: 8520 Reserve capital (fund) · Retained earnings · Net profit
TaxThe receipt shows only the final price including VAT. How do I extract the VAT amount from it?
The general VAT rate is 12 percent. So if the price without VAT is taken as 100, the price with VAT is 112. Therefore, to find VAT from the final price, multiply it by 12 and divide by 112. To find the price without VAT, divide the final price by 1.12.
A common mistake is to take 12 percent directly from the final price. This overstates VAT, because the 12 percent is calculated on the price without VAT, not on the final price.
Example: "Lazzat taomlari" bought kitchen equipment for 5 600 000 soum (including VAT). VAT = 5 600 000 × 12 / 112 = 600 000 soum. Price without VAT = 5 600 000 / 1.12 = 5 000 000 soum. Check: 5 000 000 × 12% = 600 000. If calculated the wrong way, 5 600 000 × 12%, the result is 672 000 soum, that is, 72 000 soum too much.
See also: VAT · Tax rate · How does VAT work? The bread chain example
TaxWe sold goods on credit. Are revenue and VAT recorded in one journal entry or separately?
Separately. Under NAS No. 21, the amount without VAT is recorded in the revenue account: Dt 4010 – Ct 9020 "Revenue from sale of goods" (the table in paragraph 383 says "excluding VAT and excise taxes"). VAT is recorded separately as a liability to the budget: Dt 4010 – Ct 6410. The customer's total debt in 4010 equals the sum of the two amounts.
At the same time, the cost of the goods sold is written off: Dt 9120 – Ct 2910. If VAT is added to 9020, revenue is artificially inflated and the figures in the income statement are distorted.
Example: "Oydin texnika" sold refrigerators worth 20 000 000 soum (excluding VAT) on credit; their cost is 15 000 000 soum. VAT 12% = 2 400 000. Journal entries: Dt 4010 – Ct 9020 20 000 000; Dt 4010 – Ct 6410 2 400 000; Dt 9120 – Ct 2910 15 000 000. The customer must pay 22 400 000 soum.
See also: What journal entries are made when goods are sold? · 9020 Revenue from sale of goods · Sale (realization)
TaxThere is VAT both when we buy goods and when we sell them. How does the amount payable to the budget come out in the accounts?
Input VAT is first accumulated in account 4410: Dt 4410 – Ct 6010 (NAS No. 21, paragraph 190: account 4410 also records the VAT shown in settlement documents for purchased inventories). Output VAT sits on the credit of 6410: Dt 4010 – Ct 6410.
When input VAT is credited, it is offset against 6410: Dt 6410 – Ct 4410. After that, the credit balance for VAT in 6410 is the amount payable to the budget, and the payment is recorded as Dt 6410 – Ct 5110. Analytical records for 6410 are kept separately by type of tax (paragraph 274), so do not lump the VAT balance together with other taxes.
Example: during a tax period "Mevali bog'" bought goods worth 8 000 000 soum (excluding VAT); the input VAT was 960 000 soum. In the same period output VAT was 2 400 000 soum. After Dt 6410 – Ct 4410 960 000, 1 440 000 soum remains in 6410; once it is paid, Dt 6410 – Ct 5110 1 440 000.
See also: 4410 Advance payments of taxes and levies to the budget (by type) · Why does an invoice matter and what does it contain? · VAT payer
TaxA customer returned part of the goods it had bought. What do we do with the VAT we charged earlier?
The VAT on the returned part is also reduced. Under NAS No. 21 (paragraph 381), the VAT charged earlier is recorded on the debit of 6410 and the credit of the receivable or cash account: Dt 6410 – Ct 4010. Revenue itself is reduced through the contra-liability account 9040 "Returns of goods (products) sold": Dt 9040 – Ct 4010.
Since the goods are back in the warehouse, their cost is also restored: Dt 2910 – Ct 9120. This way sales, VAT and cost are all reversed by the same volume, and the statements do not show "inflated" revenue.
Example: "Ipak yo'li textile" had sold fabric worth 10 000 000 soum (excluding VAT); the customer returned a part worth 2 000 000 soum, whose cost is 1 500 000 soum. Journal entries: Dt 9040 – Ct 4010 2 000 000; Dt 6410 – Ct 4010 240 000; Dt 2910 – Ct 9120 1 500 000.
See also: 9040 Returns of goods (products) sold · 6410 Payables to the budget (by type) · VAT
TaxWe sold an old truck and charged VAT. Is this VAT recorded in 9020?
No. The sale of a fixed asset is not a sale of goods; it goes through 9210 "Disposal of fixed assets". The customer's debt: Dt 4010 – Ct 9210 (NAS No. 21). The VAT charged on the sale: Dt 9210 – Ct 6410 (row 17 of the table for group 9200).
Thus the full amount receivable from the customer goes to the credit of 9210, the initial cost of the truck and the VAT go to the debit, and the depreciation is returned to the credit. The remaining difference is the gain or loss on the sale.
Example: "Saxovat logistika" sold the truck for 44 800 000 soum (including VAT). VAT = 44 800 000 × 12 / 112 = 4 800 000. The truck's initial cost is 90 000 000, its depreciation 55 000 000. In 9210: credit 44 800 000 + 55 000 000 = 99 800 000; debit 90 000 000 + 4 800 000 = 94 800 000. The difference of 5 000 000 soum is a gain: Dt 9210 – Ct 9310.
See also: 9210 Disposal of fixed assets · Fixed asset (property, plant and equipment) · Carrying amount (net book value)
TaxAs an employer we withhold income tax from employees' salaries. How is this recorded in the accounts?
Here the employer is a tax agent: the tax is withheld from the employee's income, and the company remits it to the budget. NAS No. 21 has a ready-made entry: "Withholding of personal income tax from individuals' wages" Dt 6710 – Ct 6410. When it is remitted to the budget: Dt 6410 – Ct 5110.
Note: this tax is not an expense of the company, so it is not recorded in 9420 or 9430. The expense is the salary itself (for example, Dt 9420 – Ct 6710), while the tax is withheld from within that amount and the employee receives less money in hand.
Example (the amounts are hypothetical; the amount of tax to be withheld is determined under the current tax legislation): Sanjar, the accountant at "Durdona kafe", was accrued a salary of 6 000 000 soum, and suppose 700 000 soum was withheld from it as income tax. Journal entries: Dt 9420 – Ct 6710 6 000 000 (salary of a management employee); Dt 6710 – Ct 6410 700 000; payment to the employee Dt 6710 – Ct 5110 5 300 000; to the budget Dt 6410 – Ct 5110 700 000.
See also: Personal income tax · Tax agent · What is an employer responsible for as a tax agent?
TaxSome taxes and levies depend neither on sales nor on profit. Where are they recorded in the accounts?
The table for group 6400 of NAS No. 21 (paragraph 275, row 1) shows that payables to the budget for deductions, taxes and levies relating to period expenses are recorded as Dt 9430 – Ct 6410. On payment: Dt 6410 – Ct 5110.
This must be distinguished from VAT and corporate profit tax. VAT is collected from the customer and is not an expense (Dt 4010 – Ct 6410). Corporate profit tax is kept in a separate account, 9810 (Dt 9810 – Ct 6410). A tax relating to period expenses, by contrast, reduces profit as an ordinary operating expense.
Example (hypothetical amount): for the quarter "Navro'z mebel" accrued a liability of 900 000 soum for a levy relating to period expenses. Journal entry: Dt 9430 – Ct 6410 900 000; payment: Dt 6410 – Ct 5110 900 000. In the analytical records for 6410, this amount sits on a separate line from VAT and other taxes.
See also: 9430 Other operating expenses · Indirect tax · Direct tax
TaxWe did not have enough money to pay tax, and the bank transferred a loan directly to the budget. How do we record this?
Even though the money did not go into the company's settlement account, the debt to the budget was settled, and in its place a debt to the bank arose. NAS No. 21 has a separate row for this case: "Payment of debts to the budget from loans and borrowings received" Dt 6410 – Ct 6810 (for a short-term loan).
If the loan first goes into the settlement account and the tax is then paid from it, there are two entries: Dt 5110 – Ct 6810 and Dt 6410 – Ct 5110. The result is the same; only the cash movement is visible in the bank statement. Interest on the loan is accrued separately as an expense (Dt 9610 – Ct 6920).
Example: "Qo'qon charm" had a tax debt of 30 000 000 soum. The bank transferred this amount directly to the budget as a loan: Dt 6410 – Ct 6810 30 000 000. Now the balance for this tax in 6410 is zero, and 6810 shows a debt of 30 000 000 soum to the bank.
See also: 6810 Short-term bank loans · How are a short-term bank loan and its interest recorded? · Accrued interest
TaxOur shop has opted for the simplified 6 percent VAT regime under Decree PF-100. What now happens to the VAT included in the price of goods we buy?
Under Decree PF-100 (26 May 2026, as amended by Decree PF-175), entrepreneurs in trade, catering and services may, from 1 June 2026 to 1 January 2030, voluntarily pay VAT under the simplified 6 percent regime. Under this regime corporate profit tax is 0 percent, and input VAT is not credited.
If input VAT is not credited, it is not accumulated separately in 4410. Under paragraph 15 of NAS No. 4, taxes related to the purchase of inventories are included in the cost of inventories if they are not recoverable (not accepted for credit). That is, the goods are taken on charge at the full amount payable to the supplier: Dt 2910 – Ct 6010. On sale, VAT is charged at the 6 percent rate and recorded as Dt 4010 (or 5010) – Ct 6410.
Example (hypothetical figures; for simplicity, the 6 percent VAT is assumed to be added on top of the sale price excluding VAT, while the calculation base is determined under the tax legislation): "Gulbahor market" bought goods for 11 200 000 soum (of which VAT 1 200 000): Dt 2910 – Ct 6010 11 200 000. It sold them for 14 000 000 soum (excluding VAT): Dt 4010 – Ct 9020 14 000 000; VAT 6% = 840 000: Dt 4010 – Ct 6410 840 000. Since the cost is 11 200 000, the gross profit is 2 800 000 soum. If the same shop were under the general regime, the cost would be 10 000 000, so calculate both options before choosing.
See also: New tax relief for small businesses: a simplified 6% VAT regime and other changes (Decree PF-100) · Who benefits from the simplified 6% VAT regime? A calculation for two businesses · NAS No. 4
TaxWe have a single overall balance in account 6410. Can we keep all taxes on one line?
No. The very name of account 6410 says "by type", and paragraph 274 of NAS No. 21 states that analytical records for 6410 are kept separately for each type of tax. Likewise, the advances in 4410 are also broken down by type of tax.
A single overall balance is dangerous: an overpayment of one tax "hides" a debt for another tax. As a result, the balance sheet seems to show no debt, while in fact an unpaid amount for a particular tax is outstanding.
Example: the overall 6410 balance of "Sarbon sayohat" was zero. When broken down analytically, it showed a VAT debt of 3 000 000 soum and an overpayment (debit balance) of corporate profit tax of 3 000 000 soum. That is why it is recommended to open a separate sub-account or analytical card for each type of tax in the accounting software.
See also: 6410 Payables to the budget (by type) · Overpaid tax · Balance (of an account)
AuditAn auditor said, "I work according to international standards on auditing." What status do these standards have in Uzbekistan, and where can I find their text?
Under Article 9 of the Law "On Auditing Activity" (25 February 2021, O'RQ-677), international standards on auditing are the standards of auditing activity. They must be posted on the official website of the authorised body. The procedure for recognising and applying them is set by Cabinet of Ministers Resolution No. 171 of 11 April 2022.
In practice, the page of the Ministry of Economy and Finance on gov.uz (gov.uz/oz/imv/sections/view/111620) contains standards No. 700 and No. 705, which relate to the auditor's report, as well as model auditor's reports. You can ask the auditor to clarify which standard the report is based on.
Example: the director of "Zamin agro" saw the phrase "modified opinion" in the auditor's report and wanted to know what it meant. The accountant found standard No. 705 and the model reports on the ministry's page and went through them together with the director.
See also: Auditor's report · What types of auditor's report are there? · Audit
AuditWe gave the auditor copies of invoices, yet he still asked the bank and our customers for separate confirmations. Are our documents not enough?
For an auditor, not all evidence carries the same weight. The general rule: evidence obtained directly from an independent source outside the company is more reliable than a document the company prepared itself; an original document is more reliable than a copy; and what the auditor has observed or recalculated personally is more reliable than an oral explanation.
That is why the auditor may confirm the bank balance not only from the bank statement but with the bank itself, and accounts receivable with the customers. An oral answer from the director or the accountant alone (an inquiry) is usually not sufficient evidence on its own; it is corroborated by other procedures.
Example: the balance sheet of "Pista bog'" shows accounts receivable of 40 000 000 soum from "Kamalak savdo". A copy of the reconciliation statement prepared by the company shows the same amount. The auditor, however, sends a letter directly to "Kamalak savdo" asking it to confirm the balance: if the reply matches, this is the strongest evidence.
See also: Audit evidence · External confirmation · Why does the auditor send confirmation letters to your debtors?
AuditThe auditor asked for all waybills from 25 December to 10 January. Why exactly these days?
This is a test of the correct separation of periods (cut-off). At year-end the risk of a transaction being recorded in the wrong year is highest: if goods shipped in January are added to December revenue, the previous year's income is overstated; if a December purchase is shifted to January, expenses and liabilities look smaller.
The auditor selects documents from both sides of the year boundary and, for each one, compares the actual date of shipment or receipt with the date of the accounting entry. If the dates do not match, it is an error, and depending on materiality a correction is proposed.
Example: on 30 December "Andijon g'isht" issued an invoice for bricks worth 120 000 000 soum, but according to the waybill and the warehouse document the truck left on 3 January. The auditor establishes that this amount is January income and that December revenue was overstated by 120 000 000 soum.
See also: Accounting policy · What stages does an audit go through? · Materiality
AuditAn audit firm told us, "We will keep your books for you as well." Isn't that convenient?
It looks convenient, but the audit loses its meaning. The value of an audit lies in the auditor's independence: the auditor looks at the statements with an outsider's eye. If the statements were prepared by the same firm, the auditor is in effect checking its own work and has no interest in finding its own mistakes. This is called the "self-review" threat.
That is why, in the auditing profession, providing both bookkeeping and audit services to the same client is regarded as a serious threat to independence. Before agreeing to such an arrangement, ask the audit organisation in writing how this issue is resolved under the current standards and rules of auditing activity. For users of the statements (banks, investors, founders), the auditor's independence is also the basis of trust in the report.
Example: "Mustahkam beton" submitted an auditor's report for a bank loan. If the bank learns that the firm that issued the report also keeps the company's books, its trust in the report falls and it may demand an additional review. It is better to entrust bookkeeping and the audit to different firms.
See also: External audit · What is the difference between external and internal audit? · Audit
AuditBefore starting work, the auditor asked to agree the terms of the engagement in writing. Does this differ from an ordinary contract?
This is the written agreement of the terms of the audit engagement: an answer in advance to the question of who is responsible for what. It sets out beforehand what the audit will cover and what each party is responsible for.
The most important point: management is responsible for preparing the financial statements and for internal control, while the auditor only expresses an opinion on the statements. If this is not written down in advance, a misunderstanding arises later along the lines of "the auditor did not find the error, so the auditor is to blame".
Example: the director of "Oltin vodiy" expected the auditor to carry out the inventory count as part of the audit. Because the terms of the engagement stated that the count would be carried out by the company's committee and that the auditor would attend it as an observer, the parties reached agreement before work began.
See also: What documents should be prepared for the auditor? · Mandatory audit · Internal control
AuditThe year was closed, and before the audit was finished our major customer went bankrupt. Does this affect last year's statements?
NAS No. 16 defines events after the balance sheet date as events, favourable and unfavourable to the company, that occur between the balance sheet date and the date on which the statements are authorised for publication (paragraph 4). They are divided into two types (paragraph 5): events that existed at the balance sheet date and occur in the future, and events that did not exist at the balance sheet date and occur in the future.
A customer's bankruptcy often shows that its financial position was already poor at the balance sheet date; if so, it is assessed as belonging to the first type and affects the measurement of accounts receivable. During this period the auditor asks about new information and reviews meeting minutes and transactions at the start of the new year.
Example: the 31 December balance sheet of "Sharq oyna" shows a receivable of 70 000 000 soum from "Yorqin uy". In February "Yorqin uy" was declared bankrupt, and it emerged that its payments had stopped back in November. The auditor points out that the receivable may be overstated on the balance sheet and asks for the allowance for doubtful debts to be reconsidered.
See also: NAS No. 16 · Accounts receivable · Audit evidence
AuditThe auditor first asked "who approves payments", and then checked individual amounts. Are these two different kinds of testing?
Yes. The first is a test of controls: the auditor checks that a control in the company (for example, the director signing every payment) actually operated throughout the year. The second is a substantive procedure: it checks that the amount itself is correct, supported by a document and recorded in the right account.
The two are linked. If controls work well, the auditor can test fewer amounts. If controls do not work or do not exist at all, the extent of substantive procedures increases. However, substantive procedures for material amounts are performed anyway, however good the controls are.
Example: at "Bog'bon agro" every payment order goes out with two signatures, the director's and the chief accountant's. The auditor checked that both signatures were present on 25 randomly selected payments (test of controls). Then the auditor compared the 10 largest payments with the contracts and acceptance certificates (substantive procedure).
See also: Internal control · Audit sampling · How is internal control built in a small company? 5 simple rules
AuditWe changed auditors this year. The new auditor is also asking about the balances at the end of last year. Haven't they already been audited?
The opening balances of the current year are the closing balances of the previous year. If they are wrong, the current year's result is also distorted: for example, if the opening warehouse balance is overstated, the current year's cost of sales also comes out overstated. That is why the new auditor must obtain assurance that these balances do not materially misstate the current year's statements.
To do this, the auditor reads last year's report and statements, may, with the client's permission, review the previous auditor's working papers, and tests the opening balances through current-year transactions (for example, by checking that the opening accounts receivable were collected in January–February).
Example: the opening balance of 4010 at "Toshkent qog'oz" was 90 000 000 soum. The new auditor saw that 85 000 000 soum of this amount was received in the bank in the first quarter, and requested confirmation from the customer for the remaining 5 000 000 soum.
See also: Which balances should the accountant check before the auditor arrives? · Balance (of an account) · Audit evidence
AuditWe calculated the allowance for doubtful debts approximately. The auditor is asking, "Where did this estimate come from?" What should we show?
Amounts such as allowances, useful lives and warranty costs are not exact calculations but management estimates. Such estimates carry a high risk of error or deliberate "adjustment", so the auditor tests them with particular attention.
The auditor checks what method and data management used to arrive at the estimate, recalculates it independently if necessary and compares the result, looks at events after the balance sheet date (for example, whether a debt was paid at the start of the year), and also reviews how accurate last year's estimates turned out to be. You will need a written description of the method, an ageing schedule of receivables and a note on each major debtor.
Example: "Ko'kcha savdo" created an allowance of 12 000 000 soum. The auditor broke down the receivables by age: debts overdue by more than 180 days amounted to 30 000 000 soum, and for one of them the customer had ceased operations. Also taking into account that almost all of the allowance created last year had been used, the auditor discussed with management that the allowance was insufficient.
See also: 4910 Allowance for doubtful debts · Audit risk · Accounting policy
AuditThe auditor seems not to believe our explanations. Is this disrespectful?
No, this is professional scepticism: the auditor approaches every piece of evidence with a questioning mind and pays attention to contradictory information and to the reliability of documents. The auditor does not assume that management is dishonest, but neither does the auditor conclude, on the basis of past experience, that "everything here is probably fine".
Professional scepticism is heightened especially for unusual transactions, large year-end entries and management estimates. This is also in the client's interest: the more thorough the audit, the greater the trust that banks and investors place in the report.
Example: the chief accountant of "Ravon transport" said that services worth 200 000 000 soum had been provided to a new customer on 31 December. The auditor did not look only at the invoice but also asked for the service acceptance certificate, the contract and whether payment had been received from the customer. In January it emerged that this transaction had been cancelled.
See also: Internal control · Audit evidence · Audit risk
FinanceOur current assets exceed our current liabilities, yet we are struggling to make payments. Why?
Not all current assets turn into cash equally quickly. Inventory in the warehouse must first be sold, and then the money must be collected. That is why, in addition to the current ratio, analysts also calculate the quick ratio: (current assets − inventories) / current liabilities.
This ratio answers the question: "If nothing is sold from the warehouse from today on, how far can we cover our short-term debts?" If the current ratio is good but the quick ratio is low, the money is "frozen" in inventory.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): at "Barakali qurilish mollari" current assets are 300 mln soum, of which inventories are 180 mln, accounts receivable 70 mln and cash 50 mln; current liabilities are 200 mln. Current ratio = 300 / 200 = 1.5. Quick ratio = (300 − 180) / 200 = 0.6. That is, without inventory, there are only 60 tiyin for every 1 soum of short-term debt: the problem is slow-moving goods in the warehouse.
See also: Liquidity · How is net working capital calculated and what does it show? · Working capital (current assets)
FinanceWe want to open a small workshop. How many products must we sell a month to at least avoid a loss?
This is shown by the break-even point. First we split costs into two groups: fixed (rent, management salaries, not dependent on sales) and variable (raw materials, packaging, incurred per unit). Subtracting the variable cost from the unit price gives the contribution margin: the amount each unit contributes towards covering fixed costs.
Break-even point (units) = monthly fixed costs / contribution margin per unit. Every unit sold above this number brings net profit (ignoring taxes).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Charm ustaxona" sells a wallet for 25 000 soum, and the leather and thread for one wallet cost 15 000 soum. The contribution margin is 10 000 soum. Monthly rent and salaries are 18 000 000 soum. Break-even point = 18 000 000 / 10 000 = 1 800 units, that is, sales of 45 000 000 soum. If 2 000 units are sold, the profit is 200 × 10 000 = 2 000 000 soum.
See also: Cost (cost of production) · Profitability · Finance section
FinanceThe bank talks about "return on assets", while the founder talks about "return on equity". Are they the same thing?
No. Return on assets (ROA) = net profit / average assets. It shows how efficiently the company uses all the resources at its disposal, regardless of who financed them. Return on equity (ROE) = net profit / average equity. It shows how much profit each soum invested by the owners brings.
The difference between the two ratios comes from debt. The more debt there is, the higher ROE can be compared with ROA. But this is not necessarily good news: a high ROE may also be the result of a lot of debt, that is, high risk.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Nur farm" has net profit of 24 mln soum, average assets of 300 mln and average equity of 120 mln (the remaining 180 mln is debt). ROA = 24 / 300 = 8%. ROE = 24 / 120 = 20%. For the founder 20% is attractive, while the bank looks at the fact that the assets yield a profit of only 8% and that 60% of the assets are financed by debt.
See also: Profitability · Horizontal and vertical analysis of the balance sheet: how can you see the change behind the figures? · Net profit
FinanceGoods seem to sit in our warehouse for a long time. How do I calculate how many days it takes for inventory to turn over?
Two ratios are needed. Inventory turnover (times) = annual cost of goods sold / average inventory. Turnover period (days) = number of days in the year / number of turns. Cost is used rather than revenue, because inventory is also carried at cost.
Average inventory can be taken as the average of the opening and closing balances for the year, but in a seasonal business the average of the monthly balances is more accurate. The result should be compared with last year and with similar shops: a single number on its own does not say whether things are "good" or "bad".
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): the annual cost of goods sold at "Asl kiyim" is 360 mln soum, inventory at the start of the year is 50 mln and at year-end 70 mln. Average inventory is 60 mln. Turnover = 360 / 60 = 6 times. Taking the year as 360 days, goods stay in the warehouse for 60 days on average. If a competitor's figure is 40 days, "Asl kiyim" is constantly financing 20 days' worth of excess goods.
See also: Inventories · Inventory count (stocktaking) · Working capital (current assets)
FinanceHow do I find out how much time passes from the moment we pay a supplier until we receive money from the customer?
This is the cash conversion (financial) cycle. The formula is simple: inventory turnover period + receivables collection period − payables payment period (all in days). The result shows how many days the company has to "wait" using its own money or a loan.
There are three ways to shorten the cycle: sell inventory faster, collect from customers faster, and agree longer payment terms with suppliers. Be careful with the last one: paying late damages the business relationship.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): at the "Sog'lom ovqat" wholesale firm, inventory turns over in 60 days, customers pay in 25 days, and the firm pays its suppliers in 35 days. Cycle = 60 + 25 − 35 = 50 days. If the cost of daily purchases is 2 mln soum, the firm must constantly "hold" about 50 × 2 = 100 mln soum in circulation.
See also: Cash flow · Profit but no cash: why does this happen? · Accounts payable
FinanceIf we buy new equipment, in how many years will the money we spend come back? How can this be calculated quickly?
The simplest method is the payback period: calculating how many years pass until the investment amount is covered by the annual net cash inflow. If the cash inflow is the same every year: payback period = investment / annual net cash inflow. If it differs, the inflows are accumulated year by year.
The method is quick and easy to understand, but it has two drawbacks: it ignores the time value of money (a soum next year is worth less than today) and it disregards the inflows after payback altogether. So it is good as a first "filter", but a discounted calculation is also needed for the final decision.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Musaffo suv" wants to buy packaging equipment for 100 mln soum. The equipment generates an additional net cash inflow of 40 mln soum every year. Payback period = 100 / 40 = 2.5 years. The second option, another piece of equipment costing 100 mln soum, generates 10 mln in the first year and then 60 mln every year: 10 + 60 = 70 (2 years), and the remaining 30 mln is covered halfway through the third year, that is, also 2.5 years. The period is the same, but the cash flows differ.
See also: Time value of money · Investing activities · Cash flow
FinanceA project returns 120 mln soum over three years, and we invest 100 mln. Is the 20 mln profit certain?
Not necessarily. Future money is not equal to money today: it could have been invested elsewhere to earn interest. That is why each future inflow is brought to its present value at the required rate of return (discounted): present value = inflow / (1 + r)^n, where n is the number of years.
Net present value (NPV) = sum of discounted inflows − initial investment. If NPV is positive, the project yields more than the required return; if it is negative, it is better to put the money into an alternative at that rate.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Yulduz bosmaxona" invests 100 mln soum, and the project returns 40 mln every year for three years. The required rate is 10%. Present values: 40 / 1.1 = 36.36; 40 / 1.21 = 33.06; 40 / 1.331 = 30.05. Total 99.47 mln. NPV = 99.47 − 100 = −0.53 mln soum. A project that showed a 20 mln "profit" when simply added up does not pay off at a required return of 10%.
See also: Time value of money · Compound interest · Interest rate
FinanceBefore granting a loan, the bank asked, "What is your interest coverage ratio?" What is it?
This ratio shows how many times the company's operating profit can cover the interest on loans. Interest coverage ratio = profit before interest and corporate profit tax / interest expense. Profit before interest and tax is used because interest is paid out of precisely this profit.
The higher the ratio, the greater the ability to pay interest even if profit falls. If it is below 1, the company cannot cover interest from its operating profit. For the bank, it is important to look at this figure over time (several years): a downward trend is a warning sign.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Ishonch avto" has profit before interest and tax of 48 mln soum and annual interest expense of 12 mln. Ratio = 48 / 12 = 4. If a new loan is taken, interest rises to 24 mln and the ratio drops to 2: if profit halves, paying the interest alone will eat up the entire profit.
See also: Accrued interest · How are a short-term bank loan and its interest recorded? · Liability
FinanceWe are taking out a loan: the bank offered annuity or differentiated payments. With which one will we pay more interest?
With an annuity, the same amount is paid every month: at first a large part of it is interest, and then the share of principal grows. With differentiated payments, the principal is repaid in equal instalments and interest is charged on the outstanding debt, so the payment is large at the start and then decreases.
At the same rate and term, total interest is usually lower with differentiated payments, because the principal decreases faster. But the burden is heavier in the first months. For a new business with uneven cash flow, the equal annuity payment may be more convenient.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Ziyo print" takes a loan of 30 mln soum for 3 months at 2% per month. Differentiated: principal of 10 mln a month, interest of 600 000, 400 000 and 200 000; payments of 10.6 mln, 10.4 mln and 10.2 mln; total interest 1 200 000 soum. Annuity: about 10 402 640 soum each month, total interest about 1 207 920 soum. Over a short term the difference is small, but on a long-term loan it grows considerably.
See also: Interest rate · Credit (bank loan) · Compound interest
FinanceIn some months there is not enough money in the settlement account. What should we do to see this in advance?
Prepare a monthly cash budget (cash flow plan). It is a simple table: for each month, the opening balance, expected receipts (customer payments, loans), planned payments (suppliers, wages, rent, taxes, loan repayments) and the closing balance. The closing balance becomes the opening balance of the next month.
The key point: receipts are entered not on the day of sale but on the day the money is actually expected to arrive. Then it becomes visible in advance that in a month with many credit sales profit is high but cash is short, and there is time to arrange a loan or agree payment terms.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Diyor qadoq" has 10 mln soum at the start of January. In January receipts are 40 mln and payments 35 mln: 15 mln at the end. In February receipts are 20 mln (credit sales are collected in March) and payments 45 mln (raw material stock): −10 mln at the end. Already in January the table showed the firm that it needed to look for at least 10 mln soum of short-term financing for February.
See also: Cash flow · Profit but no cash: why does this happen? · Overdraft
InsuranceIn January we paid a year's insurance on the office building in one go. Can we record the whole amount as a January expense?
No, this is an expense not of January but of the whole year. NAS No. 21 (paragraph 156, sub-paragraph "b") lists the advance payment of annual property insurance among deferred expenses. Under paragraph 160, other prepaid expenses not recorded in 3110 and 3120 are kept in account 3190 "Other prepaid expenses"; set once in your accounting policy which account (3120 or 3190) is used for property insurance. The amount is transferred to expenses in portions as the months pass (paragraph 157).
Entries: when the liability under the contract is recognised, Dt 3190 – Ct 6510 (paragraph 161, row 6: a deferred expense against a liability account); when the money is transferred, Dt 6510 – Ct 5110 (paragraph 226, row 19); each month the relevant share, Dt 9420 – Ct 3190 (paragraph 161, row 7: the share is transferred to expense accounts). If the building relates to production, the monthly share is charged to 2510 instead of 9420.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Nurafshon mebel" paid an annual premium of 12 000 000 soum for its office building. In January, Dt 3190 – Ct 6510 and Dt 6510 – Ct 5110 for 12 000 000 soum. At the end of each month, Dt 9420 – Ct 3190 1 000 000 soum. At the end of December, the balance in 3190 for this contract drops to zero.
See also: 3190 Other prepaid expenses · Insurance premium · Insurance section
InsuranceBoth the machines in the workshop and the office building are insured. Are both insurance expenses recorded in the same account?
No, the expense is recorded according to where the property it relates to is used. Paragraph 128 of NAS No. 21 (sub-paragraph "g") lists insurance costs for production property as part of general production overhead. In the examples in paragraph 130 this entry is: Dt 2510 – Ct 6510.
The office building, however, does not take part in production, so its insurance is a period expense. The examples in paragraph 280 state that insurance payments accrued are recorded on the debit of "expense accounts" and the credit of 6510; since, under paragraph 409, the costs of managing the organisation are kept in 9420 "Administrative expenses", for the management building this is Dt 9420 – Ct 6510.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): each month "Chinor tekstil" accrued 900 000 soum for insurance of the machines and 300 000 soum for insurance of the office. Entries: Dt 2510 – Ct 6510 900 000 and Dt 9420 – Ct 6510 300 000. The first is allocated to the cost of products; the second goes straight to the result for the period.
See also: 2510 General production overhead · 6510 Insurance payments · Period expenses
InsuranceThe plant has its own boiler house and a canteen for employees, and both are insured. Where is their insurance recorded?
NAS No. 21 specifies separate accounts for these two units. The boiler house supplies heat and steam to main production: under paragraph 124 (sub-paragraph "a"), the costs of supplying various kinds of energy, including steam, are recorded in 2310 "Auxiliary production". In the examples in paragraph 126, insurance costs in auxiliary production are: Dt 2310 – Ct 6510.
The costs of running canteens and buffets are listed by name in paragraph 133 among service facilities and are kept in 2710. In the examples in paragraph 135, insurance costs in service facilities are: Dt 2710 – Ct 6510. Thus the boiler house's insurance goes into the cost of its heat, and the canteen's into canteen expenses.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): in one month "Bekobod metall" accrued 400 000 soum for insurance of the boiler house and 150 000 soum for insurance of the canteen. Entries: Dt 2310 – Ct 6510 400 000; Dt 2710 – Ct 6510 150 000. When paid to the insurer: Dt 6510 – Ct 5110 550 000 (paragraph 226, row 19).
See also: 2310 Auxiliary production · 2710 Service facilities · Cost (cost of production)
InsuranceOur debt to the insurer was paid from a letter of credit at the bank. Which account is credited: 5110 or 5510?
The account credited is the one from which the money left. Money in a letter of credit sits in account 5510 "Letters of credit" (paragraph 231), so 5110 is not touched.
The examples in paragraph 234 of NAS No. 21 cover exactly this case: settlement of insurance debts from letter of credit funds, Dt 6510 – Ct 5510. Analytical records for 5510 are kept separately for each letter of credit, so it should also be clear from which letter of credit the payment was made.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Zarafshon logistika" had 10 000 000 soum in a letter of credit. A debt of 2 500 000 soum for cargo insurance was paid from this letter of credit: Dt 6510 – Ct 5510 2 500 000. Check against the bank statement that the letter of credit balance has fallen to 7 500 000 soum.
See also: 5510 Letters of credit · Letter of credit · 6510 Insurance payments
InsuranceAren't an insurance risk and an insured event the same thing? Both are an "unfortunate event", after all.
The difference is in time. An insurance risk is an event that has not yet happened but may happen, for example, the possibility of a fire. Insurance sells protection precisely against this possibility. An insured event, by contrast, is the actual occurrence of the event specified in the contract, and it is this that raises the question of paying compensation.
For there to be a risk, the event must be random: something that is certain to happen or is done deliberately is not insured. That is why it is important to state clearly in the contract which risks are covered and which are excluded.
Example (prepared by the author): the "Shirin tandir" bakery is insured against fire and flood risks. One night a pipe burst and the sacks of flour got wet: this is an insured event under the flood risk. Had there been a theft that night, it would not have been an insured event, because that risk was not included in the contract.
See also: Insured event · Insurer · Insurance premium
InsuranceTo save money, we insured the warehouse for half of its actual value. In the event of a partial loss, will the loss be covered in full?
It depends on the contract. Many property insurance contracts contain a proportional liability clause: if the property is insured for less than its value, compensation is reduced in the same proportion. That is, if the sum insured is half the value of the property, roughly half of any loss is covered.
Other contracts may contain a "first loss" clause: under it, the loss is covered in full up to the sum insured. Which system applies is written in the contract, so you should read that clause before reducing the premium.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): the "Sirdaryo don" warehouse is worth 400 mln soum, and the sum insured is 200 mln soum. The fire loss is 80 mln soum. Under the proportional system, compensation is 80 × 200 / 400 = 40 mln soum, and the company bears the remaining 40 mln soum itself. With a "first loss" clause, compensation would be 80 mln soum.
See also: Insurance section · Policyholder · Insurer
InsuranceThe contract mentions the insurer, the policyholder and the beneficiary. Who is who? I am getting confused.
The insurer is the organisation that provides the insurance service, receives the premium and undertakes to pay compensation when an insured event occurs. The policyholder is the person or company that concludes the contract and pays the premium.
The beneficiary is the person who receives the compensation when an insured event occurs. Often this is the policyholder itself, but another person may also be named in the contract. That is why the questions "who pays" and "who receives" must be checked separately.
Example (prepared by the author): "Bahor savdo" LLC insured a truck pledged as collateral for a bank loan. "Bahor savdo" pays the premium, so it is the policyholder. The contract states that if the truck is lost, compensation is paid to the bank that granted the loan: in this case the beneficiary is the bank.
See also: Insurer · Policyholder · Insured event
InsuranceWhat is reinsurance? Is an insurance company insured too?
Yes. Reinsurance is the transfer by an insurer of part of the risk it has accepted to another insurer (a reinsurer). In return, it gives the reinsurer the corresponding share of the premium. Nothing changes for the client: the insurer that concluded the contract with it remains liable.
The purpose of reinsurance is to prevent one large event from derailing the insurer's financial position. Thanks to it, an insurer can also accept objects for insurance that are beyond its own capacity.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): insurer "A" insured a large hotel for 10 bln soum but retained only 3 bln soum of the risk. It ceded the remaining 7 bln soum (70%) to a reinsurer. In the event of a 2 bln soum loss, "A" pays the hotel 2 bln soum and then, under the contract, recovers 70%, that is, 1.4 bln soum, from the reinsurer.
See also: Insurer · Diversification · Insurance section
InsuranceIt turns out the café next door pays a lower premium than we do. What does the price of insurance depend on?
The premium is the "price" of the risk the insurer takes on. It is usually affected by the following: how large the sum insured is; the probability of the risk (the condition of the building, safety measures); the insurance period; the number of risks covered; and whether there is a deductible and how large it is.
That is why it is natural for two similar cafés to pay different premiums. When comparing prices, look not only at the amount but also at what is covered: a cheap policy sometimes covers fewer risks.
Example (prepared by the author): "Choyxona Navro'z" and "Kafe Ra'no" are insured for the same amount. "Kafe Ra'no" has a fire alarm, its contract also has a deductible, and only the fire risk is covered. "Navro'z", on the other hand, is insured against fire, flood and theft with no deductible. It is to be expected that "Navro'z" pays a higher premium, because its protection is broader.
See also: Insurance premium · Insured event · Insurance section
BankingThe bank transferred the loan not to our settlement account but directly to the supplier. Do we record it through 5110?
No. If the money did not pass through your settlement account, there is no movement in 5110 either. The examples in paragraph 296 of NAS No. 21 show this case separately: payment of debts to suppliers from short-term loans, Dt 6010 – Ct 6810.
That is, one entry does two things: the debt to the supplier is closed, and a new debt to the bank arises. Under paragraph 292, analytical records for 6810 are kept separately for each bank, loan amount and term. When the loan is repaid: Dt 6810 – Ct 5110.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Guliston un" owed its wheat supplier 80 000 000 soum. The bank transferred the loan directly to the supplier: Dt 6010 – Ct 6810 80 000 000. This amount does not appear in 5110 in the bank statement; the loan agreement and the bank's notice serve as the basis.
See also: 6810 Short-term bank loans · Credit (in accounting) · Accounts payable
BankingThe bank debits interest once a quarter. Should we accrue interest every month, or record it when it is paid?
Interest is an expense of the period in which the money was used, so it is accrued every month without waiting for the payment date. Under paragraph 423 of NAS No. 21, interest on loans is recorded on the debit of 9610 "Interest expenses" and the credit of 6920 "Accrued interest": Dt 9610 – Ct 6920.
Under paragraph 299, the credit of 6920 records interest accrued and its debit records payment of the interest. When the bank debits the interest: Dt 6920 – Ct 5110 (examples in paragraph 226). That way each month within the quarter bears its own interest expense.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Termiz qurilish" took a loan of 60 000 000 soum; the agreement sets annual interest of 24%. Monthly interest: 60 000 000 × 24% / 12 = 1 200 000 soum. At the end of January, February and March, Dt 9610 – Ct 6920 1 200 000 each. At the end of March the bank debited 3 600 000 soum: Dt 6920 – Ct 5110 3 600 000.
See also: 6920 Accrued interest · Accrued interest · Interest rate
BankingOur three-year loan sits in 7810. We were told that something needs to be separated out of it at the end of each year. What, and how?
On the balance sheet, liabilities are split into long-term and current portions. The part of a long-term loan to be repaid within the next 12 months is transferred to 6950 "Long-term liabilities – current portion". In the examples in paragraph 336 of NAS No. 21: Dt 7810 – Ct 6950.
Payments are then settled from 6950: Dt 6950 – Ct 5110 (examples in paragraph 226). This way, anyone reading the balance sheet can see how much the company must repay within the next year, which is important in assessing liquidity.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Qo'qon keramika" took a loan of 120 000 000 soum: no payments in the first year (grace period), then 40 000 000 soum repaid each year over the next three years. At the end of the first year, the next year's 40 000 000 soum is separated out: Dt 7810 – Ct 6950 40 000 000. 80 000 000 remains in 7810. The next year's payments: Dt 6950 – Ct 5110. At the end of that year, the next 40 000 000 soum is again transferred from 7810 to 6950.
See also: 7810 Long-term bank loans · 6950 Long-term liabilities – current portion · Liquidity
BankingThe bank pays interest on the balance of our settlement account. Where does this income appear?
This is income from financial activities. In the examples in paragraph 216 of NAS No. 21, the accrual of interest receivable from customers is recorded as Dt 4830 "Interest receivable" – Ct 9530 "Interest income". When the money arrives in the bank account: Dt 5110 – Ct 4830 (examples in the same paragraph).
Under paragraph 210, account 4830 records both the accrual and the receipt of interest. If interest is accrued within a month and received the following month, a balance remains in 4830 at month-end: this is money that is "receivable but not yet received".
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): under the agreement between "Ko'kcha print" and the bank, interest of 350 000 soum was accrued for October, and the money arrived on 3 November. At the end of October: Dt 4830 – Ct 9530 350 000. On 3 November: Dt 5110 – Ct 4830 350 000. October's income appears in October.
See also: 4830 Interest receivable · 9530 Interest income · Deposit
BankingOn the evening of the 31st the takings were handed to the cash collector, and they reached the bank on the 1st. Where does this money appear on the month-end balance sheet?
It sits in account 5710 "Cash (transfers) in transit". Under paragraph 238 of NAS No. 21, this account records money that has left its place of storage but has not reached its destination, including takings handed to a cash collector.
According to the examples in paragraph 239, there are two steps: when handed to the cash collector, Dt 5710 – Ct 5010; when received by the bank, Dt 5110 – Ct 5710. At month-end this money is neither in the cash desk nor in the bank, so showing it as the balance of 5710 makes the statements correct.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): on 31 October "Oybek market" handed takings of 18 400 000 soum to the cash collector: Dt 5710 – Ct 5010. At the end of October the debit balance of 5710 is 18 400 000. The bank statement of 1 November showed the money had arrived: Dt 5110 – Ct 5710. The balance dropped to zero.
See also: 5710 Cash (transfers) in transit · Cash collection · Cash in transit
BankingEvery month the bank charges a service fee for account maintenance and payments. Which expense is this recorded as?
Under paragraph 410 of NAS No. 21, payments for bank and depository services are recorded as part of 9430 "Other operating expenses". They are not recorded in 9610, because 9610 is only for expenses in the form of interest.
The examples in paragraph 412 show payments for bank services as Dt 9430 – Ct 6990. When the bank debits the amount from the settlement account, this debt is closed: Dt 6990 – Ct 5110. This last entry is not given as a separate row in the standard's tables: it follows from the logic of settling a debt in 6990 "Other liabilities" with money in the bank. The bank statement and the bank's document on the service fee serve as the basis for the write-off.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Sharq optika" has to pay 270 000 soum for bank services in October. At month-end: Dt 9430 – Ct 6990 270 000. When the bank debits it: Dt 6990 – Ct 5110 270 000. If there is loan interest, it is recorded separately as Dt 9610 – Ct 6920 and is not mixed in.
See also: 9430 Other operating expenses · Bank statement · Bank
BankingA customer secured its payment for goods with a bank guarantee. Do we need to show this guarantee in the accounts?
Yes, but not on the balance sheet. The guarantee is not the company's property; it is a contingent right: the possibility of making a claim on the guarantor if the customer does not pay. Under paragraph 445 of NAS No. 21, guarantees received as security for the performance of obligations and payments are recorded in off-balance sheet account 008 "Security for obligations and payments – received".
If no amount is stated in the guarantee, it is determined on the basis of the terms of the contract. As the customer pays off its debt, the security amount is also written off from 008 to the same extent (paragraph 445).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Samarqand oyna" shipped goods worth 150 000 000 soum to a customer, with payment secured by a bank guarantee. When the guarantee is received, 150 000 000 is recorded in 008. When the customer pays 60 000 000 soum, 60 000 000 is written off from 008, leaving 90 000 000.
See also: 008 Security for obligations and payments – received · Off-balance sheet accounts · Accounts receivable
BankingThe bank has given us an overdraft. Payments go through even when there is no money in the settlement account. Does 5110 go negative in the books?
5110 is an asset account: it shows your own money in the bank. An overdraft is a short-term loan by which the bank allows a client to make payments in excess of the money in its settlement account. That is, the "negative" amount is in fact a debt to the bank.
NAS No. 21 does not name the overdraft separately. However, under paragraph 292, short-term loans received by an organisation are recorded in 6810 "Short-term bank loans". Since an overdraft is in substance a short-term bank loan, it is logical to keep it in 6810 as a short-term loan and to set out this procedure in the accounting policy. An amount paid to a supplier from the overdraft is then recorded like "payment of debts to suppliers from short-term loans" in the examples in paragraph 296: Dt 6010 – Ct 6810. When money comes into the account and the overdraft is closed: Dt 6810 – Ct 5110 (paragraph 226, row 22).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Nukus tekstil" had 4 000 000 soum in its account, and 10 000 000 soum was paid to a supplier. Entries: Dt 6010 – Ct 5110 4 000 000; Dt 6010 – Ct 6810 6 000 000. The next day money came in from a customer and the overdraft was closed: Dt 6810 – Ct 5110 6 000 000.
See also: Overdraft · 6810 Short-term bank loans · 5110 Settlement account
BankingThe bank offered us a choice of "annuity" or "differentiated" loan repayments. What is the difference, and which one is cheaper?
With an annuity, the same amount is paid every month: at first the interest share within it is larger, and then the principal share grows. With differentiated payments, the principal is repaid in equal parts and interest is charged on the outstanding debt, so the payment decreases month by month.
With the differentiated method, total interest comes out slightly lower because the debt decreases faster, but the payments in the first months are heavier. An annuity, on the other hand, is convenient for cash flow planning. In the accounts, in both cases interest is recorded as Dt 9610 – Ct 6920 and repayment of principal as Dt 6810 – Ct 5110.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): 12 000 000 soum, 3 months, 2% per month. Differentiated: 4 240 000, 4 160 000, 4 080 000; total 12 480 000, interest 480 000. Annuity: about 4 161 056 each month; total about 12 483 168, interest 483 168. The difference is small, but with a large amount and a long term it grows considerably.
See also: Interest rate · Time value of money · Credit (in accounting)
BankingThe bank did not give the loan in cash but opened a letter of credit for the supplier from it. How is this recorded?
In this case the loan goes not to the settlement account but straight to the letter of credit. The examples in paragraph 234 of NAS No. 21 contain exactly this entry: transfer of money to letters of credit from short-term loans, Dt 5510 – Ct 6810.
Then, when the letter of credit is used, the debt to the supplier is closed: Dt 6010 – Ct 5510 (paragraph 231; paragraph 234, row 7). When the unused part of a letter of credit is returned, it is restored to the account from which it came (paragraph 231); repayment of the loan is shown on the debit of 6810 (paragraph 292).
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): the bank opened a letter of credit for "Jizzax agro" from a loan of 50 000 000 soum: Dt 5510 – Ct 6810 50 000 000. The supplier shipped seed, and 50 000 000 was paid from the letter of credit: Dt 6010 – Ct 5510. Now the company's debt to the bank sits in 6810.
See also: 5510 Letters of credit · Letter of credit · 6810 Short-term bank loans
StatisticsAt our firm the "average salary" came out high, yet most people earn less than that. How can this be?
The arithmetic mean is sensitive to a single very large value: the director's high salary pulls the average up. In such a case the salary of a "typical" employee is better shown by the median: the number in the middle when the values are sorted.
With an even number of values, the median is the average of the two middle numbers. That is why it is useful to report both together: a large difference means there is a sharply outlying value in the distribution.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): at "Mehr dizayn" 6 people earn per month (mln soum): 3; 3.5; 4; 4.5; 5; 25. The sum is 45, the average 45 / 6 = 7.5 mln. Median (4 + 4.5) / 2 = 4.25 mln. Five out of six earn less than 7.5 mln, while the median shows their real level.
See also: Median · Arithmetic mean · Statistics section
StatisticsSales rose by 30% in the first year and fell by 10% in the second. Is it correct to say the average annual growth was 10%?
No. Percentages are calculated on a base that changes every year, so simply adding them up and dividing gives a wrong result. The average annual growth rate is found with the geometric mean: the annual ratios are multiplied together and the root of the power equal to the number of years is taken.
It is easy to check: if you apply the average rate you found to each year, you should get the actual result for the last year. A simple average fails this test.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): sales of "Durdona kitob" were 100 mln soum. Year 1: 100 × 1.3 = 130 mln. Year 2: 130 × 0.9 = 117 mln. The product of the ratios is 1.3 × 0.9 = 1.17; the root √1.17 ≈ 1.0817, that is, average annual growth ≈ 8.17%. Check: 100 × 1.0817 × 1.0817 ≈ 117 mln. With "10%", however, the result would be 121 mln, which is wrong.
See also: Growth rate · Compound interest · Statistics section
StatisticsOur weekly sales keep going up and down. How can we see the overall direction?
A moving average is used for this. Each time, the average of several consecutive periods is taken, and then the window is shifted one step forward. Random jumps are smoothed out and the underlying trend becomes visible.
The wider the window, the smoother the line, but the later it responds to change. For ordinary sales, a window of 3 or 4 periods is often used.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): sales of "Yulduz nonvoyxonasi" over 6 weeks (mln soum): 10, 14, 9, 13, 16, 12. Three-week moving average: (10 + 14 + 9) / 3 = 11; (14 + 9 + 13) / 3 = 12; (9 + 13 + 16) / 3 ≈ 12.67; (13 + 16 + 12) / 3 ≈ 13.67. Even though the weekly figures jump around, the averages rise steadily from 11 to 13.67.
See also: Arithmetic mean · Growth rate · Statistics section
StatisticsIce cream sales are high in summer and low in winter. How do I measure the "seasonal weight" of each quarter?
The seasonality index is the ratio of the figure for each period to the average of all periods, as a percentage. If it is above 100%, that period is stronger than average; if below, weaker. The average of the indices of all quarters is 100%.
This index helps in planning purchases and staffing. For a more accurate result, it is advisable to take several years of data and average each quarter across the years.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): quarterly sales of the "Muzbek" workshop (mln soum): 20, 60, 90, 30. Quarterly average: 200 / 4 = 50. Indices: 20 / 50 = 40%; 60 / 50 = 120%; 90 / 50 = 180%; 30 / 50 = 60%. Check: (40 + 120 + 180 + 60) / 4 = 100%. So in the 3rd quarter 1.8 times more stock is needed than in an average quarter.
See also: Index · Arithmetic mean · Statistics section
StatisticsI want to know the shares of food, drinks and desserts in our café's revenue. How is the structure calculated?
A structure indicator is the ratio of each part to the whole, as a percentage. The amount of each group is divided by the total and multiplied by 100. The sum of all shares must be 100%; this is the simplest check.
Comparing the structure across periods is especially useful: even if total revenue does not change, a shift in shares shows that customers' tastes are changing. A change in a share is expressed in percentage points.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): the monthly revenue of "Kafe Bodom" is 50 mln soum: food 30, drinks 12, desserts 8. Shares: 30 / 50 = 60%; 12 / 50 = 24%; 8 / 50 = 16%; total 100%. If next month the dessert share rises from 16% to 20%, this is a 4 percentage point increase: a signal to expand the menu.
See also: Statistics section · Profitability · Arithmetic mean
StatisticsOur family buys the same products every week. How can we express by how much prices have risen in a single number?
For this, a "basket" price index is calculated. Quantities are fixed as in the base period, and then the value of the basket at current prices is divided by its value at base prices. Since the quantities do not change, the index shows only the effect of prices.
It is not the price rise of a single product, but the products with a large share in the basket, that affect the index most. That is why the index cannot be replaced with a simple average of each product's price rise.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): the basket: 4 loaves of bread and 2 litres of milk. Base prices: bread 3 000, milk 10 000 soum. Current: bread 3 300, milk 12 000. Base basket: 4 × 3 000 + 2 × 10 000 = 32 000. Current basket: 4 × 3 300 + 2 × 12 000 = 37 200. Index: 37 200 / 32 000 = 1.1625, that is, prices rose by 16.25%. A simple average of the product price rises, by contrast, would be (10% + 20%) / 2 = 15%.
See also: Index · Inflation · Statistics section
StatisticsOur revenue rose by 15%, but over the same period our prices went up by 10%. What is the real growth?
Growth measured in money (nominal growth) contains two things: selling more and selling at higher prices. To find the actual (real) growth, current revenue is divided by the price index, that is, it is restated at base prices. This operation is called deflating.
Note: subtracting 10% from 15% (5%) gives an approximate result. The correct calculation is by division: 1.15 / 1.10.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): revenue of the "Sardor maishiy" shop rose from 200 mln soum to 230 mln soum, and prices rose by 10%. Revenue at base prices: 230 / 1.1 ≈ 209.09 mln. Real growth: 209.09 / 200 − 1 ≈ 4.55%. That is, the volume of goods sold increased by about 4.55%, and the rest is due to prices.
See also: Index · Inflation · Growth rate
StatisticsIn our shop, on days when umbrella sales rise, sales of hot tea also rise. Does that mean umbrellas increase tea sales?
No. Two indicators changing together (association, correlation) does not prove that one causes the other. Often there is a third factor affecting both.
In this example, the third factor is rainy, cool weather. It increases demand both for umbrellas and for hot tea. If you make a decision without knowing the cause, for example, spend money on advertising umbrellas, tea sales will not rise.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): the 10-day log of "Oqsaroy do'koni": on 5 dry days, on average 2 umbrellas and 30 cups of tea were sold; on 5 rainy days, 12 umbrellas and 70 cups of tea. The association looks strong, but if you split the days by weather, it becomes clear that both sales follow the weather.
See also: Statistics section · Arithmetic mean · Index
StatisticsIt is hard to survey all 2 000 customers. If we survey 200 people, will the result hold for all customers?
A properly designed sample gives a good estimate of the whole population. The key condition: every customer must have an equal chance of being included in the sample (random selection). Then the share in the sample comes out close to the share in the whole population.
The error often lies in the selection method: surveying only morning customers or only regular customers skews the result to one side. Increasing the sample size does not correct this error. Also remember that the result is an estimate and has a certain margin of error.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Hilol optika" randomly selected 200 people from its database of 2 000 customers and surveyed them. 120 people are satisfied with the service: 120 / 200 = 60%. Estimate for all 2 000 customers: around 2 000 × 60% = 1 200 satisfied customers.
See also: Audit sampling · Statistics section · Arithmetic mean
StatisticsThere were 12 receipts in one day, all for different amounts. How can they be grouped into a clear table?
For this, a grouped frequency table is prepared. First the smallest and largest values are identified, and then intervals of equal width are chosen. So that each value falls into only one interval, the boundary rule is stated in advance: for example, the interval "from 50 to 100" includes 50 but not 100.
For each interval, the count (frequency) and the share are recorded. The sum of the frequencies must equal the total number of observations, and the shares must add up to 100%.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): receipts at "Anor savdo" (thousand soum): 35, 48, 52, 61, 74, 79, 83, 95, 102, 118, 125, 142. Intervals: 0–50: 2 (≈16.7%); 50–100: 6 (50%); 100–150: 4 (≈33.3%). Total 12, 100%. Clearly, half of the purchases are in the range of 50–100 thousand soum.
See also: Statistics section · Median · Arithmetic mean
EconomicsWhen bread becomes more expensive, people buy less of it. Economists do not say "demand fell" but "the quantity demanded fell". Why?
Demand is the whole relationship showing how much buyers are willing to buy at each price. Quantity demanded, by contrast, is a single number at a specific price. When the price changes, we move along this relationship: the quantity demanded changes, while demand itself stays the same.
Demand itself changes under the influence of factors other than price. Economics textbooks divide them into five groups: buyers' income; prices of related goods (substitutes and complements); tastes and preferences; expectations about future prices and income; and the number of buyers. In that case more or less is bought even at the same price.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): at the neighbourhood bakery, 300 loaves a day are sold when bread costs 4 000 soum, and 250 when it costs 5 000 soum: this is a change in quantity demanded. Recently a large building was completed, new families moved in, and now 380 loaves are sold even at 4 000 soum: this is an increase in demand itself.
See also: Economics section · Inflation · Money
EconomicsTomatoes are cheap in summer and expensive in winter. How is this explained in economics?
This is the result of a change in supply. Supply is how much sellers are willing to sell at each price. In summer the harvest is plentiful and growing is cheap, so even at the same price many tomatoes come to market: supply increases and the price falls.
In winter tomatoes are grown in greenhouses or brought from far away: heating and transport costs are added, and fewer come to market. Supply decreases while demand stays at almost the same level, and as a result the price rises.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): in August, 10 tonnes of tomatoes arrive at the market every day, and sellers sell them at 3 000 soum per kilo to sell quickly. In January only 2 tonnes arrive, and buyers compete for the smaller quantity: the price per kilo goes up to 15 000 soum. The tomatoes themselves did not change; what changed was the volume of supply.
See also: Economics section · Cost (cost of production) · Inflation
EconomicsWho sets the price in the market? Even if nobody gives an order, the price settles at some level.
In a competitive market, the price settles where demand and supply meet. The equilibrium price is the price at which the quantity buyers want to buy equals the quantity sellers want to sell. If the price is higher, goods are left over and sellers cut the price; if it is lower, goods run short and the price rises.
In this way the price moves towards equilibrium on its own. If demand or supply changes, the equilibrium also moves to a new point.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): bread at a neighbourhood market. At 3 000 soum buyers take 500 loaves, and bakers bake 300: a shortage of 200. At 4 000 soum buyers take 300, and bakers bake 500: a surplus of 200. At 3 500 soum both are 400: this is the equilibrium price.
See also: Economics section · Sale (realization) · Money
EconomicsIf I raise the price of samsa by 10%, will my revenue definitely increase?
Not necessarily. Everything depends on the price elasticity of demand: by what percentage sales change when the price changes by 1%. If sales fall by a larger percentage than the price rises (elastic demand), revenue decreases when the price rises. If they fall by a smaller percentage (inelastic demand), revenue increases.
If there are many substitutes nearby, demand is usually elastic: the buyer goes to the shop next door. For everyday necessities with few substitutes, demand is less elastic.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): "Somsaxona Ikrom" sells 100 samsas a day at 5 000 soum and earns revenue of 500 000 soum. The price was raised to 5 500 soum (10%), while there is a new samsa shop across the street, and sales fell to 75 (25%). Revenue: 75 × 5 500 = 412 500 soum. Elasticity 25% / 10% = 2.5, that is, demand is elastic and raising the price caused a loss.
See also: Economics section · Profitability · Gross profit
EconomicsIf I open my own workshop, I will have a profit of 9 mln a month. Is this a good result?
To answer, you also need to calculate the opportunity cost. Opportunity cost is the benefit from the best alternative opportunity given up when choosing a particular path. Accounting profit does not show it, but it is very important in decision-making.
In one's own business, two things are often forgotten: the salary the owner could earn elsewhere, and the income that the money invested in the business could earn elsewhere. Economic profit is accounting profit minus these opportunity costs.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): Jamshid, a craftsman, expects a profit of 9 mln soum a month from the workshop. At his current job he earns 7 mln a month, and the savings he would invest in the workshop could earn about 1 mln a month elsewhere. Economic profit: 9 − 7 − 1 = 1 mln soum. That is, the workshop is positive, but it does not give as big an advantage as he thought.
See also: Economics section · Net profit · Time value of money
EconomicsWhen coffee became more expensive, our shop started selling more tea, and more sugar as well. Is this a coincidence?
No, these are two different kinds of relationship. Substitute goods replace each other: if one becomes more expensive, demand for the other increases. Coffee and tea are such a pair. Complementary goods, on the other hand, are consumed together: if one becomes more expensive, demand for the other also falls; if more of one is sold, more of the other is sold too. Tea and sugar are such a pair.
For a shop this gives a practical conclusion: when the price of one product changes, you should watch not only that product but also the products related to it, and adjust stock in advance.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): after the price of coffee rose at "Barakat do'koni", monthly sales were: coffee fell from 60 packs to 40, tea rose from 100 packs to 125, and sugar increased from 80 kilograms to 95 kilograms. The next month the seller ordered more tea and sugar and avoided the problem of empty shelves.
See also: Economics section · Inventories · Sale (realization)
EconomicsThe first samsa is very tasty, but the fourth not so much. Is there a name for this in economics?
Yes, this is the law of diminishing marginal utility. Marginal utility is the additional satisfaction obtained from each additional unit of a good. As consumption increases, each subsequent unit gives less satisfaction than the previous one.
That is why a person does not spend unlimited money on one good: when the utility of an additional unit starts to seem lower than its price, the person spends the money on something else. Sellers come up with promotions such as "the second one at half price" for the same reason.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical scores): Aziz, a hungry student, rated his satisfaction from samsas on a 10-point scale: 1st samsa 10, 2nd 7, 3rd 4, 4th 1. Total utility keeps rising (10, 17, 21, 22), but the utility of each additional samsa is falling. Aziz stopped after the third and bought tea with the rest of his money.
See also: Economics section · Money · Inflation
EconomicsThe 100 thousand soum in my wallet is still the same, but I am buying less with it. What exactly does inflation do?
Inflation is a sustained rise in the general level of prices. The nominal amount of money does not change, but its purchasing power, that is, the quantity of goods that money can buy, decreases.
When prices rise by a certain percentage, purchasing power falls not by the same percentage but by slightly less: new purchasing power = 1 / (1 + price increase). That is why, when saving, you need to take into account that if money just "sits", its real value is gradually eroded.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): when bread costs 4 000 soum, 100 000 soum buys 25 loaves. Prices rose by 25%, and bread now costs 5 000 soum: now 20 loaves. Purchasing power is 1 / 1.25 = 0.8, that is, it fell by 20%, while the price had risen by 25%.
EconomicsThere used to be one shop in our village, and its prices were high. After a second shop opened, prices fell. Why?
This is the effect of competition. When a seller is alone (a situation close to monopoly), the buyer has no other choice, and the seller can set the price well above its costs. When a second seller appears, the buyer can switch to the cheaper place, so both shops are forced to cut prices and improve service to keep their customers.
Alongside price, competition also affects quality, product range and service. In a market with many sellers, the price usually approaches cost plus an average profit.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): the only shop, "Oydin", sold 1 kilogram of rice for 18 000 soum, with a wholesale price of 14 000 soum. The new "Saodat" shop began selling it for 16 000 soum. A month later "Oydin" also went down to 16 000 and added a delivery service. The buyer won on both counts.
See also: Economics section · Gross profit · Counterparty
EconomicsWhy doesn't everyone do every job themselves? Can you explain the benefit of specialisation with a simple example?
People are skilled at different jobs to different degrees. If each person specialises in the work they do relatively well and then exchanges their output, more is produced in total. This is the main benefit of the division of labour and exchange.
In economics this is linked to the idea of comparative advantage: what matters is not who does what faster, but who loses less by giving up a particular job.
Example (prepared by the author, hypothetical figures): Akmal, a baker, can make 20 loaves of bread or 2 shirts an hour, and Bobur, a tailor, 10 loaves or 4 shirts an hour. If each splits 8 hours equally: Akmal makes 80 loaves and 8 shirts, Bobur 40 loaves and 16 shirts; in total 120 loaves and 24 shirts. If they specialise: Akmal makes 160 loaves, Bobur 32 shirts. Both totals are higher, and then they exchange with each other. The cost of what is given up: for Akmal 1 shirt = 10 loaves, for Bobur 1 shirt = 2.5 loaves; that is why it is cheaper for Bobur to sew the shirts and for Akmal to bake the bread. The power of the idea of comparative advantage is that even if one person is faster at both jobs, specialisation still pays off as long as the cost of what is given up differs.
See also: Economics section · Cost (cost of production) · Diversification
TaxCorporate profit tax has been calculated. Which accounts is it recorded in, and what happens at year-end?
Corporate profit tax that has been calculated becomes a debt to the budget. Under NAS No. 21, it is recorded on the debit of 9810 "Corporate profit tax expense" and the credit of 6410 "Payables to the budget": Dt 9810 – Ct 6410. When the money is transferred, the debt is closed: Dt 6410 – Ct 5110.
9810 is a transit account, so no balance remains in it at year-end. When the annual statements are prepared, it is closed to the final financial result account: Dt 9910 – Ct 9810. This is why net profit comes out as the after-tax amount.
Example: according to its return, "Oqtepa plast" LLC owes 9 000 000 soum of corporate profit tax. The accountant records Dt 9810 – Ct 6410, on the payment date Dt 6410 – Ct 5110, and at year-end closes 9810 to 9910. One check: after payment, the corporate profit tax sub-ledger of 6410 should show a zero balance.
See also: 9810 Corporate profit tax expense · Corporate profit tax · Transit (temporary) account
TaxWe pay tax advances during the period. When the final amount is determined, how are the advances closed?
Under NAS No. 21 (paragraph 190), advances transferred to the budget are accumulated in account 4410 "Advance payments of taxes and levies to the budget": Dt 4410 – Ct 5110. This is an asset, that is, money "paid in advance" to the budget.
In the final settlement, the tax liability sits on the credit of 6410, and the advances are offset against it: Dt 6410 – Ct 4410. If the liability exceeds the advances, the difference is paid (Dt 6410 – Ct 5110). Sub-ledgers are kept separately for each type of tax, so an advance for one tax is not mixed up with the liability for another.
Example: during the year "Sayhun avto" transferred 12 000 000 soum in advances in total, and the final settlement showed tax of 14 500 000 soum. Entries: Dt 6410 – Ct 4410 12 000 000; when the remaining 2 500 000 soum is paid, Dt 6410 – Ct 5110.
See also: 4410 Tax advance payments to the budget · 6410 Payables to the budget · How do you put together a tax calendar?
TaxThe tax authority imposed a fine on the company by decision. Where is this amount recorded in the accounts?
The fine goes neither into the cost of products nor to the buyer's account. The examples for the 9400 accounts in NAS No. 21 (paragraph 412) state it clearly: a fine charged under a decision of the tax authorities is recorded as Dt 9430 "Other operating expenses" – Ct 6410 "Payables to the budget". When paid: Dt 6410 – Ct 5110.
Simply closing the liability in 6410 with the payment without posting the expense is a mistake: 6410 would then show a debit balance, as if tax had been overpaid to the budget.
Example: "Bog'ishamol savdo" was fined 2 000 000 soum. On the day the decision is received, Dt 9430 – Ct 6410; on the payment date, Dt 6410 – Ct 5110. A copy of the decision is kept as the supporting document for the entry.
See also: 9430 Other operating expenses · Late payment interest (penalty interest) · What happens if you pay tax late?
TaxWe declared a dividend to a founder and are withholding tax from it. What journal entries are made?
A dividend is accrued out of retained earnings, and the amount payable to the founder sits on the credit of 6610 "Dividends payable": Dt 8710 – Ct 6610. The company withholds the tax at source and transfers it to the budget. Under NAS No. 21 (examples in paragraph 285), the tax withheld: Dt 6610 – Ct 6410.
After that, only the remaining amount is paid to the founder: Dt 6610 – Ct 5110, and the tax is transferred to the budget: Dt 6410 – Ct 5110. As a result, both 6610 and 6410 are closed.
Example: a dividend of D soum was declared to the founder of "Ko'kcha mebel", and the tax to be withheld under the law came to S soum. Entries: Dt 8710 – Ct 6610 (D); Dt 6610 – Ct 6410 (S); Dt 6610 – Ct 5110 (D − S). For the rate, refer to the tax legislation in force.
See also: Dividend · 6610 Dividends payable · Tax agent
TaxWhat does Decree PF-100 say about refunding negative VAT differences, and how is the refunded money recorded?
Decree PF-100 (26 May 2026) provides that a negative VAT difference of up to 10 mln soum is refunded automatically. A negative difference means a situation where creditable (input) VAT exceeds the VAT charged on sales. Read the detailed conditions of the refund procedure in the Decree itself.
In the accounts, money returned from the budget is recorded under NAS No. 21 (examples in paragraph 275) as Dt 5110 "Settlement account" – Ct 6410 "Payables to the budget". After this entry, the debit balance in the VAT sub-ledger of 6410 should be closed.
Example: "Oydin print" bought new equipment, and at the end of the reporting period it had a negative VAT difference of 7 400 000 soum. When the amount comes back to the bank, Dt 5110 – Ct 6410 7 400 000 is recorded. The general VAT rate remains 12%, as before.
See also: VAT · Overpaid tax · How does VAT work?
AccountingA partner company gave us a sewing machine free of charge. How do we record its receipt?
Under NAS No. 21 (paragraph 9), a fixed asset received free of charge is recorded on the debit of the fixed asset account and the credit of 8530 "Property received free of charge". For the sewing machine: Dt 0130 "Machinery and equipment" – Ct 8530.
At what amount? NAS No. 5 (paragraph 19) gives the answer: the initial cost of a fixed asset received under a gift agreement is its fair value at the date it is recognized, including the costs associated with receiving it. The taxation of property received free of charge is governed separately by tax legislation (NAS No. 21, paragraph 357).
Example: the "Nafis tikuv" workshop received the machine under a gift agreement, and its fair value was assessed at 18 000 000 soum. Entry: Dt 0130 – Ct 8530 18 000 000. After that, depreciation is charged on the machine using the method set in the accounting policy.
See also: 8530 Property received free of charge · Initial cost · NAS No. 5
AccountingWe sold an old compressor. How do we determine from the journal entries whether the sale produced a gain or a loss?
Everything is accumulated in account 9210 "Disposal of fixed assets" (NAS No. 21, paragraphs 392 and 394). The debit receives the initial cost; the credit receives the accumulated depreciation and the sale amount. The difference between the two sides shows the result.
Example: the initial cost of the "Shamol servis" compressor is 30 000 000 soum, its depreciation is 18 000 000 soum (carrying amount 12 000 000), and the buyer pays 15 000 000 soum. For simplicity, there is no VAT in this example. 1. Dt 9210 – Ct 0130: 30 000 000 (initial cost written off). 2. Dt 0230 – Ct 9210: 18 000 000 (depreciation closed). 3. Dt 4010 – Ct 9210: 15 000 000 (sale amount). 4. Dt 9210 – Ct 9310: 3 000 000 (gain: 15 mln − 12 mln). Now both the debit and the credit of 9210 total 33 000 000, so the account is closed.
If the sale amount is less than the carrying amount, the loss is recorded with Dt 9430 – Ct 9210. If the seller is a VAT payer, the VAT charged is recorded with Dt 9210 – Ct 6410, and the result changes accordingly.
See also: 9210 Disposal of fixed assets · Carrying amount (net book value) · How is depreciation of fixed assets calculated?
AccountingAn inventory count found a shortage of goods in the warehouse, and no one responsible was identified. What journal entry is made?
The shortage is first taken to account 5910 "Shortages and losses from damage to valuables": Dt 5910 – Ct 2910 (NAS No. 21, examples in paragraph 154). This is an intermediate stage of "unresolved loss".
Then there are two routes. If the person responsible is identified, the amount is recovered from them: Dt 4730 – Ct 5910. If it is impossible to identify who is responsible, the shortage is written off to expenses: Dt 9430 "Other operating expenses" – Ct 5910 (examples in paragraph 412).
Example: an inventory count at the "Do'stlik maishiy" shop revealed a shortage of 1 400 000 soum. The commission could not find who was responsible. Entries: Dt 5910 – Ct 2910 1 400 000, then Dt 9430 – Ct 5910 1 400 000. The inventory count report and the commission's decision serve as supporting documents.
See also: Shortage · 5910 Shortages and losses · What should be done if an inventory count reveals a shortage?
AccountingWe bought software for warehouse accounting. How do we record its receipt, and how is amortization recorded?
Software is an intangible asset and is kept in account 0430 "Software". First the purchase costs are accumulated in account 0830 "Acquisition of intangible assets" (NAS No. 21, paragraph 70). Once the initial cost is formed, the software is recognised in 0430: Dt 0430 – Ct 0830 (paragraph 47, row 1).
Amortization is calculated month by month using the method set in the accounting policy (paragraph 49). If the software is used for management purposes: Dt 9420 "Administrative expenses" – Ct 0530 "Amortization of software" (examples in paragraph 52).
Example: "Ipak yo'li logistik" bought the software for 24 000 000 soum. The accounting policy sets the straight-line method and a useful life of 4 years, with a residual value of zero. Monthly amortization: 24 000 000 ÷ 48 = 500 000 soum, entry Dt 9420 – Ct 0530.
See also: Intangible asset · 0430 Software · Useful life
AccountingA founder contributed a truck to the charter capital as payment for their share. What journal entry is made?
Once the company is registered, the founder's debt for their share arises in 4610: Dt 4610 – Ct 8330 (NAS No. 21, examples in paragraph 198). If the founder pays for the share with property instead of money, this debt decreases. The examples in the same paragraph show Dt 0110–0190 – Ct 4610 when founders contribute fixed assets; for a vehicle, this is Dt 0160 "Vehicles" – Ct 4610.
At what value is the truck recorded? Under paragraph 17 of NAS No. 5, unless the law provides otherwise, the monetary value agreed by the founders is the initial cost.
Example: Akmal aka, a founder of "Qo'rg'on agro", handed over a truck valued by the founders at 50 000 000 soum in place of his 50 000 000 soum share. Entry: Dt 0160 – Ct 4610 50 000 000. After that, his debt in 4610 is closed. The acceptance and transfer certificate and the founders' decision serve as supporting documents.
See also: Charter capital · 4610 Founders' debt for contributions · Fixed asset (property, plant and equipment)
AuditWhich document sets the procedure for recognizing and applying International Standards on Auditing in Uzbekistan?
Under Article 9 of the Law "On Auditing Activity" (25 February 2021, No. O'RQ-677), International Standards on Auditing are the standards of auditing activity. They must be posted on the official website of the authorized body.
The procedure for recognizing and applying the standards is set by Resolution No. 171 of the Cabinet of Ministers dated 11 April 2022. The page of the Ministry of Economy and Finance on gov.uz contains ISA 700 and ISA 705 as well as model auditor's reports.
Practical tip: a manager choosing an audit firm should have the contract state which standards the audit will be conducted under. For example, when the director of "Chorsu tekstil" receives the text of the report, they can compare it with the structure of the model report on the ministry's page.
See also: Audit · Auditor's report · Types of auditor's report
AuditAuditors talk about "audit risk". What components does it consist of?
Audit risk is the risk that the auditor expresses a clean opinion even though the statements contain a material misstatement. In the classic audit model it is broken down into three components:
- Inherent risk: the susceptibility of the statement item itself to error. For example, where a lot of cash circulates, the likelihood of errors and theft is high.
- Control risk: the risk that the company's internal control will not catch this error in time.
- Detection risk: the risk that the auditor's own procedures will fail to find the error.
The auditor cannot influence the first two, only assess them. The third is managed by changing the extent of testing. Example: at "Gulzor restoran", cash controls are weak (control risk is high), so the auditor tests revenue against more documents and more days, that is, lowers detection risk.
See also: Audit risk · Internal control · How is internal control built in a small company?
AuditThe auditor did not mention small errors in the report, saying they were "not material". What is materiality and how does the auditor use it?
Materiality is the threshold above which a misstatement or omission in the statements could influence users' decisions. The auditor sets this threshold using professional judgment, taking into account the size of the company and the users of the statements.
Materiality is used in two places. In planning: to choose which items to examine in more depth. At completion: to accumulate the misstatements found and assess whether their combined effect is material. Even if each small misstatement is not material on its own, together they may turn out to be material.
Example: in the audit of "Yashil vodiy", the auditor set materiality at 40 000 000 soum. The auditor found 3 misstatements: 6, 9 and 30 mln soum. Individually none exceeds the threshold, but together they total 45 mln soum. Therefore the auditor asks management to correct them.
See also: Materiality · What stages does an audit go through? · Audit evidence
AuditBefore opening any documents, the auditor compared the figures. What kind of test is this?
These are analytical procedures. The auditor looks at the relationships between financial indicators, with each other and over periods: comparing them with last year, with the budget or with the auditor's own expectation. If an unexpected difference appears, that area is examined in more depth.
The method is cheap and fast: before opening hundreds of documents, it gives a map of "where problems might be". But it does not fully replace evidence: the cause of a difference must still be confirmed with documents.
Example: at the "Mevazor" shop, gross profit was 25 percent of revenue last year and 38 percent this year, while prices hardly changed. The auditor asks: has the cost of goods sold been recorded in full? The testing reveals that the cost of one batch at the end of the month was not written off.
See also: Gross profit · Audit evidence · Does the auditor check every document?
AuditThe auditor is writing up each test on separate sheets. Why are these working papers needed?
Working papers are the "back side" of the auditor's report. They record what was tested, what sample was taken, what evidence was gathered and what conclusion was reached. Every opinion in the report relies on these papers.
They serve three purposes: the work is reviewed by a supervisor (the engagement leader); next year's audit can be planned faster; and if a question arises about the report, the auditor can prove the work done. A test that is not documented is, in practice, regarded as a test that was not performed.
Example: in the audit of "Shodlik qurilish", the assistant auditor Zarina examined 25 waybills but did not record which ones she selected. The engagement leader does not accept the work: the sample list, the differences found and the conclusion must be written up on a sheet.
See also: Audit evidence · Audit sampling · What documents should be prepared for the auditor?
Financial reportingWe sold goods in December, and the money came in January. In which year's statements does the revenue appear?
In December's. Under paragraph 16 of NAS No. 1, transactions are recorded not when money is received or paid but when they occur. This is called the accrual basis. Under paragraph 15, all financial statements except the statement of cash flows are prepared on this basis.
Therefore the revenue is recognized in December, and at year-end the buyer's debt sits on the balance sheet as accounts receivable. In the statement of cash flows, however, this receipt falls into January, that is, into the next year's figures.
Example: on 28 December "Bekobod sement savdo" shipped goods worth 60 000 000 soum, and the money arrived on 10 January. In the annual statements: the statement of financial results includes the revenue, the balance sheet shows 60 mln of receivables, and the statement of cash flows does not include this receipt.
See also: NAS No. 1 · Accounts receivable · Cash flow
Financial reportingWhat does the "going concern" principle mean, and what should a manager do about it?
Under paragraph 18 of NAS No. 1, when preparing the statements, management assesses the company's ability to continue its activities. Unless management plans to liquidate the company or cease its activities (or has no realistic alternative but to do so), the statements are prepared on a going concern basis.
If, when making the assessment, management is aware of material events or conditions that affect the continuation of activities, this fact is disclosed in the notes to the statements.
Example: the only major customer of the "Mohir tikuv" factory cancelled its contract. The manager is not planning to close, so the statements are prepared as usual. But because this event may affect the continuation of the business, the notes describe the situation and management's plans.
See also: NAS No. 1 · Auditor's report · Accounting policy
Financial reportingWhat does the prudence principle require? Doesn't it mean "recording extra expenses as a cushion"?
Under paragraph 22 of NAS No. 1, prudence means not allowing assets and income to be overstated or liabilities and expenses to be understated.
But the same paragraph also states its limit: this principle does not give the right to create hidden reserves, to deliberately understate assets or profit, or to deliberately overstate liabilities and expenses. In other words, prudence means neutrality, not "recording more expenses just in case".
Example: one of the buyers of "Lazzat qandolat" has not paid its debt for two years. Showing it as a fully collectible debt would overstate the asset. But cutting all buyers' debts by half "to be on the safe side" is also wrong: the valuation must be based on the actual situation.
See also: NAS No. 1 · Accounts receivable · Asset
Financial reportingA partner owes us, and we also owe the partner. Can we offset the two on the balance sheet and show only the difference?
No. Under paragraph 42 of NAS No. 1, assets and liabilities are not offset (netting), except in cases provided for by another NAS. Accounts receivable are shown separately under assets and accounts payable under liabilities.
There is a similar rule for income and expenses (paragraph 43): they are offset only if a NAS requires or permits it, or if the relevant amounts are not material either individually or in aggregate.
Example: "Paxtakor ip" owes "Navbahor tekstil" 80 mln soum, while "Navbahor" owes it 50 mln soum. On the balance sheet, 80 mln of receivables appear under assets and 50 mln of payables under liabilities. If the parties sign a mutual settlement certificate and actually close the debts, this then becomes a transaction and is recorded with a journal entry; only after that does the balance sheet show just the remaining 30 mln.
See also: Accounts receivable · Accounts payable · Balance sheet
Financial reportingHow do we classify a liability on the balance sheet as current or long-term?
The main criterion is timing. Under paragraph 73 of NAS No. 1, liabilities to be settled within 12 months from the reporting date are current liabilities. The portion payable after the next 12 months is shown in the long-term liabilities section.
So a single loan may be split into two parts: the portion repayable within the next 12 months is current, and the rest is long-term. NAS No. 21 has account 6950 "Long-term liabilities – current portion" for this.
Example: as at 31 December, "Sirdaryo don" owes the bank 90 mln soum, of which 30 mln is repayable next year. On the balance sheet: 30 mln current liability, 60 mln long-term liability. A 3-month debt to a supplier, by contrast, is entirely current.
See also: Liability · 6950 Long-term liabilities – current portion · Balance sheet
FinanceRevenue is growing, but profit is not. How do I calculate return on sales?
Return on sales based on net profit = net profit ÷ sales revenue × 100%. It shows how many soum of net profit remain from every 100 soum of revenue. Both figures are taken from the statement of financial results.
Example: the "Shirin non" bakery. Last year: revenue 300 mln, net profit 30 mln, return 10%. This year: revenue 400 mln, net profit 32 mln, return 8%. Revenue has grown by 1/3, profit has barely moved, and the profit left from every 100 soum has fallen from 10 soum to 8 soum.
Next step: compare expenses as a percentage of revenue (cost of sales, rent, wages). Whichever has grown faster than revenue is where the profitability is "leaking".
See also: Profitability · Net profit · Finance section
FinanceWhat is net working capital, and how do I find it from the balance sheet?
Net working capital = current assets − current liabilities. That is, how much of the resources that will turn into cash within the next 12 months remains after covering the debts payable within the next 12 months. Because under NAS No. 1 current and long-term items are shown separately on the balance sheet, both figures are on the balance sheet itself.
Example: on the balance sheet of "Toshloq savdo", current assets are 260 mln soum (inventories 140, receivables 90, cash 30) and current liabilities are 190 mln. Net working capital: 260 − 190 = 70 mln soum.
Note: a positive figure does not necessarily mean all is well. If half of the 140 mln of inventories is obsolete goods, the real resources available to pay debts are much smaller. So read the figure together with its composition.
See also: Working capital (current assets) · Liquidity · Liability
FinanceHow do I find out what share of the company is financed with its own money and what share with borrowed money?
For this, the financial independence (autonomy) ratio is used: equity ÷ total assets (balance sheet total). It shows what share of the assets has been formed from the owners' own funds. The rest is financed by liabilities, that is, by debt.
Example: the balance sheet total of "Bo'ston mebel" is 600 mln soum, equity is 330 mln and liabilities are 270 mln. Ratio: 330 ÷ 600 = 0.55. That is, of every 100 soum of property, 55 soum is own funds and 45 soum is debt.
Do not limit yourself to one year: look at the ratio's trend over several years. If it is falling every year, the company is financing its growth more and more with debt, which increases the burden of interest and repayments.
See also: Charter capital · Liabilities and equity (sources of assets) · Finance section
FinanceHow do I calculate how many days, on average, our customers take to pay us?
In two steps. First, the turnover ratio: annual revenue ÷ average accounts receivable. Average receivables = (opening + closing) ÷ 2. Then the collection period: number of days in the year ÷ turnover ratio.
Example: "Ulug'bek kafel" has annual revenue of 360 mln soum, receivables of 40 mln at the start of the year and 50 mln at the end, an average of 45 mln. Turnover: 360 ÷ 45 = 8 times. Taking the year as 360 days, the collection period is 360 ÷ 8 = 45 days. The contract, however, sets a payment term of 30 days.
So customers are on average 15 days late, and this money is being held out of the company's turnover. Practical step: group debtors by age (up to 30 days, 31–60, over 60) and start with those most overdue.
See also: Accounts receivable · Working capital (current assets) · Cash flow
FinanceOur company holds a stake in another company, which has declared a dividend to us. How is this recorded in the accounts?
When the dividend is declared, the company has a receivable. Under NAS No. 21 (paragraphs 415 and 421): Dt 4840 "Dividends receivable" – Ct 9520 "Dividend income". This is income from financial activities, not revenue from the main activity.
When the money reaches the bank, the receivable is closed: Dt 5110 – Ct 4840 (examples in paragraph 216). Because 9520 is a transit account, it is closed to the final financial result at the end of the period.
Example: a dividend of 12 000 000 soum was declared on "Zomin invest"'s stake in "Chimyon suv". In the month of declaration: Dt 4840 – Ct 9520 12 000 000; on the day the money arrives: Dt 5110 – Ct 4840 (for the amount actually received in the bank). If the amount received differs from the amount declared, ask the payer in writing for the reason.
See also: Dividend · 4840 Dividends receivable · 9520 Dividend income
InsuranceWe paid an advance to an insurance company. Which account does it sit in, and how is it closed later?
Under paragraph 193 of NAS No. 21, advances paid for insurance are recorded in account 4510 "Advance payments for insurance". When the advance is transferred: Dt 4510 – Ct 5110.
When the insurance payment is accrued, the liability is recorded on the credit of 6510 "Insurance payments" (from the debit of an expense account). In the final settlement, the advance is offset against this liability: Dt 6510 – Ct 4510 (examples in paragraph 195).
Example: in February "Qoraqum transport" transferred a 4 000 000 soum advance to the insurer: Dt 4510 – Ct 5110. In March an insurance payment of 4 000 000 soum was accrued for the administrative building: Dt 9420 – Ct 6510. Then Dt 6510 – Ct 4510. As a result, both 4510 and 6510 come down to zero.
See also: 4510 Advance payments for insurance · 6510 Insurance payments · Advance paid
InsuranceA mudflow destroyed materials in our warehouse. They were insured. How is the loss recorded?
Losses from a natural disaster are accumulated in the extraordinary events account. Under NAS No. 21 (examples in paragraph 104), materials lost in a natural disaster: Dt 9720 "Losses from extraordinary events" – Ct 1010. Contractor services for dealing with the consequences of the disaster are also charged to this account: Dt 9720 – Ct 6010 (examples in paragraph 257).
The insurance indemnity does not reduce the loss; it is recognized separately as income. In the examples in paragraph 405 of NAS No. 21, a payment received from an insurance organization under property insurance is shown on the credit of 9390 "Other operating income". In this way both the loss and the indemnity are visible in the statements.
Example: materials worth 25 000 000 soum in the "Chirchiq qurilish" warehouse were destroyed: Dt 9720 – Ct 1010. A commission report is drawn up and a claim is filed with the insurer. The indemnity amount is recorded separately once it is determined by the insurer's decision.
See also: 9720 Losses from extraordinary events · Certificate (act) · Insurance section
InsuranceA new workshop is being built, and the construction site has been insured. Is the insurance cost a period expense, or is it added to the cost of construction?
NAS No. 21 gives a specific entry for this case: the liability for insurance payments related to capital investments is recorded as Dt 0810–0890 – Ct 6510 (examples in paragraphs 75 and 280). For construction in progress this is Dt 0810 "Construction in progress" – Ct 6510.
In other words, this cost is included in the cost of construction. When the workshop is put into service, it moves to 0100 as part of the initial cost (Dt 0120 – Ct 0810) and then becomes an expense through depreciation. Insurance after the workshop starts operating is recorded in ordinary expense accounts.
Example: "Andijon charm" took out an insurance contract worth 6 000 000 soum for the construction period of its workshop: Dt 0810 – Ct 6510, and on payment Dt 6510 – Ct 5110. Once the workshop starts operating, the following year's insurance is recorded with Dt 2510 – Ct 6510.
See also: 0810 Construction in progress · 6510 Insurance payments · Initial cost
InsuranceInsurance premium, sum insured and insurance indemnity: are these the same thing?
No, they are three different things:
- Insurance premium: the fee the policyholder pays the insurer for cover. In the accounts, it is this amount that becomes an expense.
- Sum insured: the limit of the insurer's liability stated in the contract.
- Insurance indemnity: the money the insurer pays under the terms of the contract when an insured event occurs.
Example: "Farg'ona meva" insures its refrigerated warehouse for a sum insured of 500 mln soum and pays a premium of 5 mln soum a year. A fire caused a loss of 120 mln soum. The indemnity is calculated according to the amount of the loss and the terms of the contract, and it does not exceed the sum insured. Before signing a contract, be sure to read which events are covered and in which cases no indemnity is paid.
See also: Insurance section · 6510 Insurance payments · Period expenses
InsuranceWe have five contracts with three insurers. How should we keep account 6510 so that nothing gets mixed up?
NAS No. 21 says this directly: sub-ledger accounting for the 6500 accounts is kept by insurer and by individual insurance contract (paragraph 279). In other words, a single overall balance on 6510 is not enough; a separate line is needed for each insurer and each contract.
Under paragraph 277, 6510 is used for liabilities for insuring the organization's property and employees. So property insurance and employee insurance should also appear in the sub-ledger as separate contracts.
Example: at "Yangiyer avto", 6510 shows a total credit balance of 9 mln soum. In the sub-ledger: insurer A, vehicle contract 5 mln; insurer B, building contract 4 mln; nothing owed to insurer C. If a reconciliation statement is drawn up with the insurers every month, it is immediately clear under which contract a liability remains.
See also: 6510 Insurance payments · Balance (of an account) · Trial balance
BankingWe obtained a limited checkbook from the bank. Which account does the money move to, and what is recorded when the checks are used?
Under paragraph 232 of NAS No. 21, depositing money when a checkbook is issued is recorded as Dt 5520 "Checkbooks" – Ct 5110. The money still belongs to the company; it has simply been set aside in a separate "pocket".
When a payment is made by check, the amount goes out from the credit of 5520. For example, if a selling expense is paid by check: Dt 9410 – Ct 5520 (examples in paragraph 234). If the unused balance is returned at the end of the term: Dt 5110 – Ct 5520. Sub-ledger accounting is kept separately for each checkbook.
Example: "Guliston reklama" obtained a checkbook for 10 000 000 soum: Dt 5520 – Ct 5110. Advertising distribution services worth 7 200 000 soum were paid by check: Dt 9410 – Ct 5520. The remaining 2 800 000 soum was returned: Dt 5110 – Ct 5520. Now 5520 has no balance.
See also: 5520 Checkbooks · Bank statement · Banking section
BankingPart of a letter of credit was paid to the supplier and the rest came back. What journal entries are made?
Under paragraph 231 of NAS No. 21, as the money in a letter of credit is used (on the basis of the bank statement), it is written off to the debit of 6010 "Payables to suppliers and contractors": Dt 6010 – Ct 5510. The unused portion is restored to the account from which it was transferred: Dt 5110 – Ct 5510.
Sub-ledger accounting is kept separately for each letter of credit, so even if there are several, the closing of each is visible separately.
Example: "Termiz shakar" had opened a 50 000 000 soum letter of credit for equipment. The supplier shipped goods worth 46 000 000 soum and the bank paid that amount: Dt 6010 – Ct 5510. The remaining 4 000 000 soum came back to the settlement account: Dt 5110 – Ct 5510. The balance on 5510 is zero.
See also: 5510 Letters of credit · Accounts payable · Banking section
BankingWhen checking the bank statement, we found that the bank had debited money from our account by mistake. How do we record this?
The accounting department makes entries for the settlement account on the basis of the bank statement and the documents attached to it. Under paragraph 225 of NAS No. 21, amounts found during the check of the statement to have been posted by mistake to the debit or credit of the account are recorded against 4860 "Claims receivable" or 6960 "Claims payable".
If the bank debited too much, this is a receivable from the bank: Dt 4860 – Ct 5110. When the bank corrects the error and returns the money: Dt 5110 – Ct 4860. Conversely, if the bank credited extra money to the account by mistake, it sits on the credit of 6960 as a liability to be returned.
Example: the statement of "Nurafshon farm" showed an unknown debit of 1 500 000 soum; the company had not submitted any such payment. The accountant records Dt 4860 – Ct 5110 and writes to the bank. Once the money is returned, Dt 5110 – Ct 4860.
See also: Bank statement · 4860 Claims receivable · 6960 Claims payable
BankingA foreign buyer transferred dollars to our foreign currency account for exported goods. What journal entry is made?
Foreign currency is kept not in 5110, which is in national currency, but in the 5200 accounts. If it arrived in a foreign currency account at a bank in the country: Dt 5210 "Foreign currency accounts in the country" – Ct 4010 "Receivables from buyers and customers" (NAS No. 21, examples in paragraph 229). For an account at a bank abroad, 5220 is used.
Sub-ledger accounting for foreign currency funds is kept for each foreign currency account (paragraph 228). If the exchange rate changes between the day the goods are shipped and the day the money arrives, the difference is recorded separately as an exchange difference under NAS No. 22.
Example: "Samarqand quruq meva" received 10 000 US dollars from a buyer. The amount in soum is calculated at the rate on the day the money arrives, and Dt 5210 – Ct 4010 is recorded.
See also: 5210 Foreign currency accounts in the country · Exchange difference · When the exchange rate changes, where is the exchange difference recorded?
BankingThe company has soum accounts at two different banks. Do we keep both in 5110?
Yes, both are in 5110 "Settlement account", but separately in the sub-ledger. Under paragraph 225 of NAS No. 21, sub-ledger accounting for 5100 is kept for each account opened at banks to hold funds in national currency.
The practical benefit: every month you compare the balance on each bank statement with the balance on its own sub-ledger line. With a single combined balance, an error at one bank could be "hidden" by a difference at the other. When money is transferred from one bank to the other, there is an entry between the two sub-ledger lines.
Example: at "Xorazm gilam", 5110 totals 84 mln soum. In the sub-ledger: bank 1 61 mln, bank 2 23 mln. The bank 1 statement also shows 61 mln, but the bank 2 statement shows 22.6 mln. So the 400 000 soum difference needs to be looked for only at bank 2.
See also: 5110 Settlement account · Bank statement · Balance (of an account)
StatisticsWhat is the mode in statistics, and how is it useful to a shop?
The mode is the value that occurs most often in a data set. The difference from the arithmetic mean: it is not calculated but found by counting, and it is always a value that actually exists.
Example: the sizes of pairs sold in one day at the "Qadam" shoe shop: 39, 41, 42, 41, 40, 41, 43, 42, 41, 38. We count: size 41 appears 4 times, size 42 twice, and the rest once each. Mode = 41. The arithmetic mean comes out at 40.8, and there is no such size.
Practical use: when placing orders, you need the mode, not the average. The shop should stock more size 41. If two values occur equally often, the data set has two modes.
See also: Statistics section · Inventory count (stocktaking)
StatisticsA café sold three dishes at different prices and in different quantities. How do I calculate the average price correctly?
Here a simple arithmetic mean gives the wrong result, because the dishes were sold in different quantities. The correct method is the weighted average: each price is multiplied by the number sold, and the total is divided by the total quantity.
Example: the "Tandir" café: shurpa 25 000 soum × 40 portions = 1 000 000; plov 35 000 soum × 100 portions = 3 500 000; kebab 60 000 soum × 20 portions = 1 200 000. Total: 5 700 000 soum, 160 portions. Weighted average: 5 700 000 ÷ 160 = 35 625 soum.
A simple average would be (25 000 + 35 000 + 60 000) ÷ 3 = 40 000 soum and would overstate the café's revenue. The weighted average cost (AVECO) method in accounting is built on exactly the same logic.
See also: Weighted average cost method (AVECO) · Statistics section · FIFO or weighted average cost?
StatisticsTwo branches have the same average daily revenue. How do I tell which one is more stable?
An average does not show fluctuation. The simplest measure of fluctuation is the range: the largest value − the smallest value. The smaller the range, the more stable the indicator.
Example: revenue of the two "Sarbon market" branches over 5 days (mln soum): Branch 1: 9, 10, 10, 11, 10. Average 10, range 11 − 9 = 2. Branch 2: 4, 16, 7, 15, 8. Average 10, range 16 − 4 = 12. The averages are the same, but at branch 2 revenue jumps sharply.
Practical conclusion: at branch 2 it is harder to plan cashiers and stock, so the reasons (market days, promotions, cash desk discipline) need to be studied separately. The range looks only at the two extreme values, so a single unusual day can sharply increase it.
See also: Statistics section · Turnover (account activity)
StatisticsWhat is the difference between comparing monthly revenue with the previous month and comparing it with the first month?
The first is the chain growth rate, the second is the base growth rate. In the chain method, each month is divided by the month before it. In the base method, each month is divided by one chosen base month (for example, January).
Example: revenue of "Mehr optika" (mln soum): January 50, February 55, March 66. Chain: February 55 ÷ 50 = 110%, March 66 ÷ 55 = 120%. Base (January = 100%): February 110%, March 66 ÷ 50 = 132%.
The relationship: the product of the chain ratios equals the base ratio: 1.10 × 1.20 = 1.32. The chain rate shows month-to-month acceleration or slowdown, while the base rate shows the overall result since the start of the period.
See also: Statistics section · Inflation
StatisticsProfitability rose from 10% to 12%. Is it correct to say it "increased by 2 percent"?
More precisely, it increased by 2 percentage points. A percentage point is the simple difference between two percentage figures: 12% − 10% = 2 p.p. The relative change is something else: (12 − 10) ÷ 10 × 100% = 20%. That is, the indicator rose by 20 percent relative to its own level.
Mixing the two up causes serious confusion in reports: if you say "increased by 2 percent", the reader may understand 10.2%.
Example: at the "Oltin don" flour mill, the share of returned products rose from 4% to 6%. The correct wording: "the return share rose by 2 percentage points, which is a 50 percent increase in relative terms". For the manager, the second figure better shows the scale of the problem.
See also: Profitability · Interest rate · Statistics section
TaxI overpaid tax by mistake. Will I get the money back?
Yes, the overpaid amount is not lost: it remains your funds. You can have it offset against future payments or other taxes, or apply to have it refunded to your bank account.
First reconcile settlements with the tax authority to establish the overpaid amount. If you owe other taxes, the overpaid amount may first be applied to that debt. Check the deadlines for applying and for the refund in the current version of the Tax Code.
See also: Overpaid tax · Can tax overpaid to the budget be refunded?
TaxIf the receipt for an expense is lost, can it still be deducted as an expense for tax purposes?
It is risky. For an expense to be deducted for tax purposes, it must be supported by a document. Without a document, the expense may not be accepted during an audit and the tax may be recalculated.
If the receipt is lost, try asking the seller for a copy of the document, an invoice or another supporting document. If you paid by bank card, the bank statement will serve as additional evidence.
See also: Expense report (advance report) · How should an advance report be submitted correctly?
TaxIf a supplier later turns out to be a sham company, what happens to the VAT I credited?
If it is established that the transaction did not actually take place and was only formalised on paper, the tax authority may refuse to accept the VAT you credited, collect the underpaid tax and charge late payment interest (penya) on it.
So keep the documents confirming that the goods actually arrived (contract, waybill, acceptance certificate, warehouse receipt, payment through the bank). And check a new partner before signing a contract.
See also: How should a new business partner be checked? · Counterparty
TaxCan a director hand their EDS over to the accountant?
It is not recommended. Every document signed with an EDS is deemed to have been signed by the EDS owner, who is also answerable for it. If the key and password pass into other hands, it becomes difficult to control who signed what.
The right way: the accountant should have their own EDS and be granted the relevant authority through the official procedure. Check what rights can be granted to an employee in electronic systems under the current rules of that system.
See also: Electronic digital signature · What is an EDS and why does an accountant need one?
TaxIs an advance payment received from a customer immediately treated as income?
Not in the accounts. Until the goods or services are delivered, an advance received is a liability and sits in account 6310. Income is recognised when the goods are delivered.
For tax purposes, however, the date on which income and turnover arise is set separately for each tax in the Tax Code. So when you receive an advance, check the rules for VAT and other taxes in the current version.
See also: Advance received · What journal entries are made when a customer pays in advance?
AccountingWe withdrew cash from the bank account and put it into the cash desk. What journal entry is made?
The money did not leave the company; it only moved from one place to another, from the bank to the cash desk. So the entry is between two cash accounts: Debit 5010 "Cash in national currency" – Credit 5110 "Settlement account".
Example: the "Lola gullari" shop withdrew 6 000 000 soum in cash from the bank. The cashier writes a cash receipt voucher, and the bank statement shows the same amount as an outflow. The amounts in both documents must match.
In the opposite case, when the takings from the cash desk are deposited at the bank, the entry is reversed: Debit 5110 – Credit 5010.
See also: 5010 Cash in national currency · Cash receipt voucher · Why are cash receipt and cash disbursement orders needed?
AccountingWe paid a supplier in advance for goods. The goods have not arrived yet. Which account holds this money?
This is an advance paid. Until the goods arrive, it is neither an expense nor goods, but a claim on the supplier (an asset). Advances paid for inventories are recorded in account 4310: Debit 4310 – Credit 5110.
When the goods arrive, they are taken into the warehouse (Debit 2910 – Credit 6010), and then the advance paid earlier is set off against the debt to the supplier: Debit 6010 – Credit 4310.
Example: "Bahor qurilish" LLC paid a factory 20 000 000 soum in advance for paint. If the goods have not arrived by the end of the month, this amount sits on the balance sheet as a receivable and is not charged to expenses.
See also: Advance paid · 4310 Advances paid to suppliers and contractors for inventories · Accounts receivable
AccountingI made a wrong journal entry. Can I simply delete it from the software?
Better not. If an entry vanishes without a trace, nobody can check it later, especially if the period has been closed or the reports have been filed. An error is not deleted; it is fixed with a correcting entry. Three methods are used in practice:
- Red storno (red reversal). The wrong entry is posted again to the same accounts but with a negative amount, which cancels it. Then the correct entry is posted. The name comes from negative amounts being shown in red in the ledgers.
- Reversing entry. The accounts of the wrong entry are swapped: the debited account is credited and the credited account is debited. This closes the wrong entry, and then the correct one is posted.
- Additional entry. If the accounts are right but the amount is too low, one more entry for the missing difference is posted to the same accounts.
The difference between red storno and a reversing entry: storno does not inflate the account turnover, while a reversing entry increases both debit and credit turnover.
Example: accountant Dilnoza charged the cost of office paper to 9430 instead of 9420. She cancels the entry in 9430 with a red storno and then posts the amount correctly to 9420. It is best to document the reason for the correction in a short accounting memo.
If the error is material and affects the financial statements of previous years, the way it is reflected is set out separately in Chapter 10 of NAS No. 1.
See also: Journal entry · NAS No. 1 · Debit and credit: which one is an increase and which one is a decrease?
AccountingWe bought a printer for the office. Do we record it as a fixed asset or expense it as a material?
Under NAS No. 5, a fixed asset is a tangible asset used in the business over a long period (more than one year). A printer usually lasts longer than a year, so it meets this condition.
However, the standard gives the head of the company the right to set, in the accounting policy, the criteria for recording assets as fixed assets. In other words, the company itself writes down in its accounting policy which items are recorded as fixed assets. Open that document first.
Example: the accounting policy of "Sarbon logistika" contains a clear criterion. If the printer meets it, the printer is recorded as a fixed asset and depreciated over its useful life. If not, it is accounted for in another way set out in the accounting policy.
See also: Fixed asset (property, plant and equipment) · Accounting policy · How is depreciation of fixed assets calculated?
AccountingIn the trial balance, the cash account (5010) shows a credit balance. What does that mean?
It is a clear sign of an error. 5010 is an asset account: it can only have a debit balance or zero. A credit balance would mean "minus money" in the cash desk, which cannot happen in reality: you cannot pay out more cash than you have.
The cause is usually one of these: a cash receipt voucher was not entered, a payment was recorded twice, a payment was entered with a date earlier than the receipt, or an amount was posted to 5010 instead of another account.
Example: at the "Shirin non" bakery, the takings for the 3rd were not entered, and on the 4th cash was paid out for wages. As a result, the cash account showed a credit balance. Comparing the cash book and the vouchers day by day finds the error quickly.
See also: Trial balance · Balance (of an account) · What is a trial balance and how should it be read?
AuditAn audit was carried out. Does that mean the auditor guarantees there is no fraud in the company?
No. The auditor obtains "reasonable assurance" that the financial statements are free of material misstatement (including misstatement due to fraud), not an absolute guarantee. This is stated clearly in the International Standards on Auditing, in particular ISA 240, which deals with fraud.
The primary responsibility for preventing and detecting fraud lies with the company's management and those charged with governance. The auditor tests on a sample basis, and collusion or forged documents can sometimes escape even the most careful audit.
So do not leave internal control to the auditor: split duties involving money between different employees and take stock regularly.
See also: Internal control · Audit risk · How is internal control built in a small company? 5 simple rules
AuditAt the end of the audit, the auditor asks the director for a signed letter. What is this letter and why is it needed?
This is the management representation letter (written representations). In it, management acknowledges its responsibility for preparing the financial statements and confirms that the auditor has been given all the necessary information and documents. This requirement is set out in ISA 580.
The letter is one piece of audit evidence, but it does not replace other evidence. For example, even if the director writes that "the goods in the warehouse are complete", the auditor will still check the results of the stocktake.
If management refuses to provide such a letter, this is a serious matter and may affect the audit opinion.
See also: Audit evidence · Auditor's report · What stages does an audit go through?
AuditThe auditor's report has a separate "Emphasis of Matter" paragraph. Doesn't that mean the opinion has become qualified?
No. Such a paragraph does not change the auditor's opinion. The auditor simply draws attention to an important matter that is properly disclosed in the financial statements but that the reader really needs to know about. This is governed by ISA 706.
Example: there was a fire in the warehouse of "Oqsoy tekstil", and it is fully described in the notes. The auditor gives an unmodified opinion but, in a separate paragraph, asks readers to note the information about the fire in the notes.
A qualified opinion is different: in it, the auditor states that the statements contain a material misstatement or that sufficient evidence could not be obtained. You can tell the difference from the wording in the "Opinion" section.
Legal basis: under Article 9 of the Law "On Auditing Activity" (25 February 2021, No. ZRU-677), the International Standards on Auditing are the auditing standards in Uzbekistan. ISA 700 and ISA 705 on forming an opinion and reporting, together with model auditor's reports, are published on the official page of the Ministry of Economy and Finance.
See also: What types of auditor's report are there? · Auditor's report · Materiality
AuditDoes the auditor take part in the year-end stocktake?
Yes, if inventories are material to the financial statements. Under ISA 501, the auditor attends the physical inventory count in person, unless it is impracticable. The auditor does not count everything but observes how the count team works and recounts a few items selected on a test basis.
The auditor checks in two directions: whether items on the count list really are in the warehouse, and whether items in the warehouse are included in the list. Damaged or obsolete goods also get attention.
Example: at the "Yashil vodiy" trading house, the auditor picked 15 items from the list and counted them on the shelves, then took 15 items from the shelves and looked for them in the list. So agree the stocktake date with the auditor in advance.
See also: Inventory count (stocktaking) · Audit sampling · Does the auditor check every document or take a sample?
AuditThe auditor found an error in the financial statements. Will the auditor correct it?
No. The financial statements are prepared by the company, and management is responsible for them. The auditor is an independent examiner: if the auditor corrected the statements, they would be auditing their own work.
Under ISA 450, the auditor accumulates the misstatements identified, communicates them to management and requests that they be corrected. The accountant posts correcting entries and the statements are updated.
If management refuses to correct a material misstatement, the auditor takes this into account in the report: the result may be a qualified or adverse opinion.
See also: External audit · Materiality · What is the difference between external and internal audit?
Financial reportingWhich statements make up the annual financial statements?
Under NAS No. 1 (in line with the Law "On Accounting"), a complete set of annual financial statements consists of five parts: the balance sheet; the statement of financial results; the statement of equity; the statement of cash flows; the notes to the financial statements.
Each has its own job. The balance sheet shows the position at a given date, the statement of financial results shows how much profit or loss was made during the year, the statement of equity shows how the owners' interest changed, and the statement of cash flows shows where cash came from and where it went. The notes explain the details behind the figures.
If any one of them is missing, the set of statements is not complete.
See also: NAS No. 1 · Balance sheet · Cash flow
Financial reportingWhat is the difference between the balance sheet and the statement of financial results?
The balance sheet is like a photograph: it shows the position at a single date, for example how much in assets, liabilities and equity the company has as of 31 December.
The statement of financial results is like a video: it shows, for the whole period, for example January to December, how much income was earned, how much expense was incurred and how much profit or loss remained at the end.
The two are linked. Say the "Kumush qaychi" barbershop made a net profit of 40 000 000 soum for the year. This figure appears at the bottom of the statement of financial results, and on the balance sheet retained earnings increase by the same amount (if no dividends were paid and there were no other changes in equity).
See also: Balance sheet · Net profit · Retained earnings
Financial reportingThe statements show a profit, but there is no money in the bank. Which statement explains this?
The statement of cash flows. Under NAS No. 1, the other statements are prepared on the accrual basis: income is recorded on the day the goods are delivered, not the day the money arrives. The statement of cash flows is the exception: it shows only the cash that actually came in and went out.
Under NAS No. 9, cash flows are divided into three categories: operating activities (the main business: sales, purchases, wages), investing activities (buying and selling fixed assets and other investments) and financing activities (taking out and repaying loans, changes in equity).
Example: the "Mevali bog'" firm made a profit for the year, but its customers have not paid yet, while the firm itself bought a new refrigerator and repaid part of a loan. In the statement of cash flows each of these appears in its own section, and it becomes clear where the money went.
See also: Cash flow · Operating activities · Investing activities · Financing activities
Financial reportingWhat is shown in the statement of equity?
This statement shows how much the owners' funds were at the start of the year, how much at the end, and why they changed during the year. Under NAS No. 1, it presents the components of equity: charter capital, additional paid-in capital, reserve capital, retained earnings (uncovered loss), treasury shares bought back and other elements of equity.
For the changes, the standard requires showing: the issue of securities; revaluation of long-term assets; exchange differences arising when the charter capital is formed; transfers to reserve capital; retained earnings (loss) of the current year; property received free of charge; dividends paid in cash and in shares; other sources of equity.
Example: the founders increased the charter capital, the year closed with a profit, and dividends were paid. All three events appear as separate lines in the statement of equity.
See also: Charter capital · Dividend · Retained earnings
Financial reportingWhy are notes to the financial statements needed? Aren't the figures enough?
They are not. A single balance sheet line such as "accounts receivable" does not show how many debts lie behind it, how much has been provided for as doubtful, or which assets are pledged. Under NAS No. 1, the notes are a mandatory part of the set of financial statements and are prepared in free form.
The notes reveal the detail behind the figures. Exactly what must be disclosed in them is set by NAS No. 1 and by the NAS covering each topic, so when preparing the statements their requirements are checked point by point.
Example: "Tong yulduzi" LLC has a large loan on its balance sheet. If the note gives the interest rate, the repayment date and the building pledged as collateral, a bank or investor can assess the company's position much more accurately.
See also: NAS No. 1 · Accounting policy · Financing activities
TaxIs social tax withheld from an employee's salary?
No. Social tax is paid by the employer at its own expense. It is calculated on the amount of salary accrued to the employee, but it is not deducted from the money the employee takes home.
What is withheld from the employee's salary is personal income tax (PIT). The employer, acting as a tax agent, withholds it and remits it to the budget.
See also: Social tax · Payroll journal entries
TaxWhat document is needed to credit VAT on purchased goods?
You need a properly issued invoice (in Uzbekistan, an electronic VAT invoice). It must show the TIN (taxpayer identification number) of the seller and the buyer, the name of the goods, the amount and the VAT amount.
If there is no document, or it contains an error, the VAT paid may not be credited.
See also: Why does an invoice matter? · VAT
TaxWhat is the difference between late-payment interest (penya) and a fine?
Late-payment interest (penalty interest, "penya") is charged for each day a tax payment is late and keeps accruing until the debt is paid.
A fine, by contrast, is a financial sanction for a tax violation, for example, for failing to file a return on time. The amounts of both are set by the Tax Code.
See also: Late-payment interest (penya) · What happens if you pay tax late?
TaxIf an employer fails to withhold tax from an employee's salary, who is liable?
Liability falls on the tax agent, that is, the employer. Correctly calculating the tax, withholding it and remitting it to the budget on time are its obligations.
Late-payment interest may be charged on the overdue amount, and other measures provided for by law may be applied.
See also: Obligations of a tax agent · Tax agent
TaxAre expenses deducted under the turnover tax?
As a general rule, no. Turnover tax is calculated on revenue, not on profit, so expenses do not reduce the tax base.
Certain receipts that are excluded from the tax base are listed separately in the Tax Code.
See also: Turnover tax vs corporate profit tax · Tax base
TaxWhat happens if a desk audit finds a discrepancy?
The tax authority asks the taxpayer to provide an explanation or to correct the error and file an amended return.
It is important to respond to the request on time: this often prevents a subsequent, more in-depth audit.
See also: Desk audit vs field tax audit · Desk audit
TaxIf an error is found in a tax return, can it be corrected?
Yes. When an error is found, an amended (corrected) tax return is filed.
If the error resulted in underpaid tax, you will need to pay the difference and the late-payment interest charged on it. The sooner you correct the error yourself, the milder the consequences.
See also: Tax return
TaxWhat is needed to use a tax incentive?
The incentive must be expressly established by law, and the company must meet all of its conditions: type of activity, region, time period and others.
Document that the conditions are met and correctly disclose the incentive in your tax return. If a condition is breached, the incentive may be cancelled and the tax recalculated.
See also: How does a tax incentive work? · Tax incentive
TaxIs the tax period the same for all taxes?
No. The tax period is set separately for each tax in the Tax Code: for some it is a month, for others a quarter or a year.
That is why it is convenient to track the filing and payment deadlines for each tax in a separate tax calendar.
See also: Tax period
TaxWhat is the difference between indirect and direct taxes?
A direct tax is levied directly on income or property, and its burden falls on the taxpayer itself: for example, corporate profit tax or personal income tax (PIT).
An indirect tax is added to the price of goods; the seller remits it to the budget, but ultimately the consumer pays it: for example, VAT and excise tax.
See also: Indirect tax · Direct tax
The answers are general explanations. Check exact rates, deadlines and penalties in the current versions of the legislation of the Republic of Uzbekistan.